Ram Concept

RAM Concept
Release 3.1 October 2008
RAM International 2744 Loker Avenue West Carlsbad, CA 92010 Telephone: (760) 431-3610 Toll Free: (800) 726-7789 Fax: (760) 431-5214
DAA037480-1/0001
DISCLAIMER
The software and related documentation, including this documentation, are protected by both United States copyright law and international treaty provisions. Any unauthorized copying or reproduction is strictly prohibited and subject to civil and criminal penalties. Please refer to the License Agreement for authorization to make a backup copy of the software. You may not sell this software or documentation or give copies of them away to anyone else. Except as expressly warranted in the License Agreement, RAM International disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the software, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying hardware. All results should be verified to the user's satisfaction. The contents of these written materials may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors and may be revised without prior notice.
Copyright attribution: 2008, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved. Trademark attribution: RAM Concept and RAM Structural System are either registered or unregistered trademarks or service marks of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or one of its direct or indirect wholly-owned subsidiaries. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
DAA037480-1/0001
RAM Concept
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 Comparing with traditional methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RAM Concept options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Structural systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Learning RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 New features in Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .5
2 Looking at the Workspace

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
About the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Creating and opening files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Saving a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 About templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Expanding tool buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Rearranging toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the right mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Undoing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Understanding Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Modeling with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.2 Managing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 Using Plans and Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Using plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating new plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Viewing perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating new perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Controlling views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting up the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Drawing and Editing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5.1 Precision drawing with snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 5.2 Drawing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 5.3 Entering coordinate points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 5.4 Using relative coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5.5 Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5.6 Deselecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5.7 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5.8 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 5.9 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 5.10 Manipulating the model as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 5.11 Editing object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 5.12 Setting default properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 5.13 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

6.1 Customizing tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7 Choosing Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.1 About units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 7.2 Selecting units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 7.3 Specifying report as zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
RAM Concept
8 Choosing Sign Convention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.1 Selecting sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 8.2 About plot sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9 Specifying Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Viewing the available materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Adding and deleting materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 About post-tensioning systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
10 Specifying Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 About default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Viewing the loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Loading properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 About loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Available loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Changing Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Changing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Adding and deleting loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 About load pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
11 Specifying Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 About default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Viewing the load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Rebuilding load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adding and deleting load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Load combination properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 About group load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 About alternate envelope factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Summary of load combination types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 Using rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Rule set design properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Types of active rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Adding and deleting rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
13 Using a CAD Drawing
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 What can be imported from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Controlling which concrete members are imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 About load importation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Importing a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Reimporting a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
15 Data Transfer from STAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

15.1 STAAD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 15.2 RAM Concept Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
16 Defining the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7 ii Using the Mesh Input Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 About columns and walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Column properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Drawing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Wall properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Drawing walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 RAM Concept
16.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 16.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 16.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 16.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 16.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 16.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 16.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 16.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 16.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 16.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 16.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 16.19 About floor areas and members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 16.20 Slab area properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 16.21 Drawing slab areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 16.22 About beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 16.23 Beam properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 16.24 Drawing beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 16.25 Slab opening properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 16.26 Drawing slab openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 16.27 Checking the structure definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
17 Generating the Mesh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
17.1 Generating the mesh automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 17.2 Selectively refining the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
18 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

18.1 Using the Element layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 18.2 About column elements and wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 18.3 Column element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 18.4 Drawing column elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 18.5 Wall element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 18.6 Drawing wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 18.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 18.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 18.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 18.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 18.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 18.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 18.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 18.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.19 About floor areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.20 Slab element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 18.21 Drawing the slab elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 18.22 A few final words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
19 Drawing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8 19.9 About self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 About superposition of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Point load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Drawing point loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Line load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Drawing line loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Area load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Drawing area loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Copying loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RAM Concept
iii
20 Creating Pattern Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 20.2 Drawing load patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 20.3 Load pattern filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
21 Defining Design Strips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21.1 Definition of a design strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 21.2 Design strip terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 21.3 Understanding how a design strip works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 21.4 The design strip process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 21.5 Span segment properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 21.6 Creating span segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 21.7 Creating span segment strips (design strips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 21.8 Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 21.9 Cross Section Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 21.10 Improving the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 21.11 Additional design strip information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 21.12 Irregular column layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 21.13 Miscellaneous tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 21.14 A final word on design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
22 Defining Design Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

22.1 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 Using design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Design section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Drawing design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 About ignore depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 A final word on design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23 Defining Punching Shear Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 About punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Punching shear check properties and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 A final word on punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
24 Drawing Reinforcement Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

24.1 Reinforcement bar definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 24.2 Reinforcement properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 24.3 About drawing reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 24.4 Drawing concentrated reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 24.5 Drawing distributed reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 24.6 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 24.7 Other reinforcement plan tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 24.8 Layout and Detailing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 24.9 Reinforcement Text Formatting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 24.10 About SSR callouts and SSR rails: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
25 Defining Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7 25.8 25.9 Using the latitude and longitude tendon layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Tendon properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 About drawing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Drawing single tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Drawing multiple tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Editing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 About jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Jack properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Drawing the jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
26 Using Live Load Reduction
26.1 About Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 26.2 Live Load Reduction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
iv
RAM Concept
26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7
Setting the Live Load Reduction Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Live Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Implementation of Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
27 Calculating Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 Calculating the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 About analysis errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Recalculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Reviewing the calc log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Decreasing calculation time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
28 Viewing the Results

28.1 28.2 28.3 28.4 28.5
Type of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Viewing frequently used results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Viewing other results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Section distribution plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Miscellaneous results information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
29 Plotting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

29.1 29.2 29.3 29.4 29.5 29.6 29.7 Setting the plotted results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Section Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Section Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Punching Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
30 Using the Auditor

30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7
How the Auditor can assist the design process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 About the three design steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 About the information displayed by the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Using the Punching Check Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
31 Using the Estimate

31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4
Viewing the estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 What the estimate calculates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Editing the unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 About unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
32 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 32.5 32.6 32.7 32.8 Basic printing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 General printing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Select and Configure Printer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Determining the fit of plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Previewing the print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Printing optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Changing the report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
33 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

33.1 Exporting a plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 33.2 Exporting a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
34 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

34.1 About the export of reactions RAM Concept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
34.2 About the export of geometry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
35 Using Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

35.1 Starting Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 35.2 Specifying general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 35.3 Entering span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 35.4 Entering support data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 35.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 35.6 Entering the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 35.7 Specifying the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 35.8 Specifying reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 35.9 Completing Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 35.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 35.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
36 General Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

36.1 36.2 36.3 36.4 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
37 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

37.1 Capabilities and Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 37.2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 37.3 Plans and perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 37.4 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 37.5 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 37.6 Sign Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 37.7 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 37.8 Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 37.9 Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 37.10 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 37.11 Design Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 37.12 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 37.13 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
38 Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

38.1 38.2 38.3 38.4 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
39 Simple RC Slab Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

39.1 39.2 39.3 39.4 39.5 39.6 Defining the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Drawing the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Defining the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Drawing reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
40 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

40.1 40.2 40.3 40.4 40.5 40.6 40.7 Import the CAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Regenerate the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
vi
RAM Concept
41 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43

42.1 42.2 42.3 42.4 42.5 42.6 42.7
Import the CAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Regenerate the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

44 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

45 Mat Foundation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

45.1 45.2 45.3 45.4 45.5 45.6 Import the CAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Regenerate the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
46 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

46.1 Start Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 46.2 Set the general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 46.3 Enter the span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 46.4 Create the supports below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 46.5 Add drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 46.6 Specify the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 46.7 Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 46.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 46.9 Complete the Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 46.10 Proceed with RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 46.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 46.12 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
47 Analysis Notes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
47.1 Review of plate behavior
RAM Concept
vii
47.2 47.3 47.4 47.5 47.6 47.7 47.8 47.9
Finite element analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Orthotropic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Deep beam considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wall behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Post-tensioning loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Self-equilibrium analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Design strip and design section forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Result categories in RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
48 Section Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

48.1 General Design Approach
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
49 Live Load Reduction Notes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
49.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 49.2 Tributary Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 49.3 Influence Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 49.4 ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 49.5 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 49.6 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 49.7 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 49.8 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 49.9 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 49.10 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 49.11 Mat Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 49.12 Special Member Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
50 Reinforcement Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

50.1 50.2 50.3 50.4 50.5 50.6 Span detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Development lengths / anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 How RAM Concept lays out program reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 How Concept details user and program reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 How Concept treats transverse reinforcement and individual transverse bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Example 1: reinforcement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
51 ACI 318-99 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

51.1 51.2 51.3 51.4 51.5 51.6 ACI 318-99 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ACI 318-99 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ACI 318-99 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ACI 318-99 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 ACI 318-99 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
52 ACI 318-02 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

53 ACI 318-05 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

54 AS 3600-2001 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

54.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
viii
RAM Concept
54.2 54.3 54.4 54.5 54.6
AS 3600-2001 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 AS 3600-2001 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
55 BS 8110: 1997 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

55.1 55.2 55.3 55.4 55.5 55.6 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
56 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

56.1 56.2 56.3 56.4 56.5 56.6 56.7 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 IS 456 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 IS 456 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 IS 456 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 IS 456 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 IS 1343 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
57 BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design

57.1 57.2 57.3 57.4 57.5 57.6
EC2 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 EC2 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 EC2 Material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 EC2 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 EC2 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
58 Estimating deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

58.1 About RAM Concepts deflection calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 58.2 About detailed deflection predictions using ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 58.3 Using RAM Concept to predict deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 58.4 Simplified deflection predictions using contour plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 58.5 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for permanent live loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 58.6 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for transient live loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 58.7 Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 58.8 Using strip based deflection plots for slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 58.9 Summary of RAM Concepts deflection capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 58.10 Effect of user-defined reinforcement on deflection calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
59 Punching Shear Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

59.1 Punching shear overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 59.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 59.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 59.4 Column connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 59.5 ACI 318 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 59.6 AS 3600-2001 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 59.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 59.8 Sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 59.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 59.10 Miscellaneous information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 59.11 Some final words of advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
RAM Concept
ix
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1 Introduction
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses the finite element method for elevated concrete floor systems, or mat foundations. The floors or mats can be post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete (RC), or hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). Concept is extremely powerful and allows you to design an entire floor in one model, or design individual strips or beams. In this context, the term design means that: The user defines the following: structural geometry, loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning layout (if applicable). Concept calculates (for any number of load combinations): the required amount of reinforcement for flexure and one-way shear according to relevant code requirements; the stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for punching shear, stresses for flexure, and deflections. A model consists of anything from a single simply supported beam or slab to an entire floor. All models are three-dimensional (even those developed with Strip Wizard). Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to replicate the intent of concrete code rules, and with the Strip Wizard interface.
1.2 RAM Concept options

RAM Concept is available in several configurations. Start with either, or both, of the following reinforced concrete modes: RAM Concept for Mats (RC) Analysis and design of reinforced concrete mat foundations (rafts) of any size and shape. RAM Concept for Elevated Slabs (RC) Analysis and design of reinforced concrete floor systems of any size and shape. Increase RAM Concepts analysis and design capabilities by adding the Post-tension option to either, or both, of the above: RAM Concept PT option (post-tensioned option for slabs or mats) Analysis and design of post-tensioned floors or mats in conjunction with reinforced concrete.
1.3 Strip Wizard

Strip Wizard uses text input to generate a model. This allows the designer to perform quick preliminary design in 2-D, or final design of straightforward structures. Strips generated by Strip Wizard are three-dimensional, but boundary conditions are automatically introduced which effectively model 2-D behavior. All models use the finite element method. You can use Strip Wizard to design a beam or one-way slab without many mouse clicks. It can provide an initial design of tendons and profiles, negating the need for the designer to start with a guess.
Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.
1.1 Comparing with traditional methods

Historically, the vast majority of concrete floors have been analyzed by approximating a region of a slab as a frame (or design strip), and then analyzing the frame/strip using variations of conventional frame or moment distribution analysis techniques. There are two limitations to this approach. First, in irregular structures, the approximation of the real structure into a frame model could be grossly inaccurate and designing with the analysis results might not even satisfy equilibrium requirements in the real structure. The second limitation is that even in regular structures with regular loadings, the frame analysis approximates the slab/column interaction and provides no information regarding the distribution of forces across the design strip. RAM Concept enables you to design post-tensioned and reinforced concrete slabs by using a finite element model of the entire slab. Concept can predict the elastic behavior of a slab much more accurately than frame models. In addition, the finite element method guarantees that the analysis satisfies all equilibrium requirements, regardless of a structures irregularities.
1.4 Structural systems

You can use RAM Concept for models that contain any combination of the following: one-way slab systems two-way slab systems beams girders wide shallow beams (that behave similarly to slabs) ribs (joists)
RAM Concept
Chapter 1 waffles (two-way rib systems) mats (rafts) openings There may be steps and changes in thickness and elevations for all of these items. Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for the following: deep beams using the strut and tie method I-shaped sections ramps concrete sections with internal voids or cells In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number of steps. The authors do not recommend that you do this for evaluating post-tensioning behavior, as it is not particularly relevant. One of the following PT Tutorial Chapters: 40, 41, 42 or 44.
Note: Even if you do not have access to the PT version, it is advisable to do one of these tutorials as a thicker RC slab.
For Mat (Raft Users): Chapter 45, Mat Foundation Tutorial. The tutorials introduce you to the philosophy of the program. They quickly give you experience in some basic modeling and many of the tools. The descriptions are not exhaustive, and you should reference the actual tool description in the appropriate chapter for further information. This should prove useful for real projects. It is recommended that you redo the tutorials for Version 2. The completed tutorial files are available from the program directory, so you dont have to start from scratch. For example, you could open the ACI 318-02 PT Tutorial, delete the design strips, and then start with the design strips input.
1.5.2 Critical Chapters
1.5 Learning RAM Concept

The RAM Concept design process could be considered to comprise 5 stages: Defining the concrete form (**) Drawing loads (*) Defining design strips (*****) Defining tendons (if used) (***) Interpreting results (****) The (**) rating is meant to indicate relative degree of difficulty, or relative time you would expect to spend on the stage. You should not use Concept for final design without a sufficient grounding in concrete design, or adequate understanding of the program. The manual contains a large amount of information.Ideally, you should read it all, but this may not be practical. We recommend that you do the tutorials and read critical chapters.
We consider that you should at least read the following chapters, together with the tips in this chapter before starting your first design. Chapter 1, Introduction. Chapter 2, Looking at the Workspace. Chapter 3, Understanding Layers. Chapter 4, Using Plans and Perspectives Chapter 5, Drawing and Editing Objects
Note: Chapter 5 describes snapping. Nearly all meshing

problems are due to the users failure to use snapping properly. Chapter 16, Defining the Structure Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips. Chapter 36, General Tips Chapter 37, Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 38, Errors and Warnings Chapter 58, Estimating deflections.
1.5.1 Tutorials
We recommend that you start by doing the tutorials: Chapter 39, Simple RC Slab Tutorial.
Note: Not all deflection results consider creep and cracking. It is very important that you understand which ones do and which do not.
The appropriate code chapter. See the section below: Know your building code.
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1.5.3 Know your building code

RAM Concept does not replace the code. It implements some, but not all, of the code. Using the program does not absolve you of knowing your building code. You should review the appropriate code chapter: Chapter 53, ACI 318-05 Design Chapter 54, AS 3600-2001 Design Chapter 55, BS 8110: 1997 Design, or Chapter 56, IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design These chapters discuss the following code specific issues: default loadings default load combinations live load reduction assumptions on material behavior rule selection rule implementation In particular, you should review what rules are used and how the authors interpret and implement the rules.
Rules not considered
You can also modify the program-designed bar groups, and re-analyze the structure considering your changes. The Reinforcement layer also facilitates creating a production quality reinforcement drawing. See Chapter 24, Drawing Reinforcement Bars and Chapter 50, Reinforcement Notes for detailed information on the Reinforcement layer.
Span detailing
Many more code rules for detailing the reinforcement in spans are implemented than in previous versions. User span detailing rules can also be created.
Development (Anchorage) Length Calculations
Concept now considers development (anchorage) lengths for both the program-designed reinforcement and the userdesigned reinforcement.
Group Load Combinations
The new group load combination encapsulates a large number of individual load combinations, each with a different lateral loading. For example, for a model with 3 wind loadings (Wa, Wb and Wc), a group load combination of 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 W would be equivalent to the envelope of the following regular load combinations: 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wa 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wb 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wc
Specifically, Concept does not consider the following: ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05: Rule 13.5.3 AS3600-2001 Rules 9.1.2 (detailing bars for 25% of the negative moment) and 9.1.3 BS8110: 1997 Rule 3.7.3.1
1.6 New features in Version 3

RAM Concept 3.0 has many new features. It also has some features that work differently than in previous versions. It is highly recommended that, before using Concept 3.0, you review the new features section below. It is important that, before using Concept 3.0 with an old (pre-version 3.0) file, you review the Upgrading Old Files section.
The group load combinations are particularly useful when there are a large number of lateral loadings.
Slab Plot Enveloping (Including Soil Bearing)
Concept now envelopes all slab plotting quantities. This is most useful with deflection plots and soil bearing plots. For example, in mat foundation (raft) models there is now a Rule Set design that includes soil bearing plans that show the maximum and minimum soil bearing pressures for all of the service load combinations.
ACI 318-05
1.6.1 About the new features

New Reinforcement Layer
Concept now includes this code.

Wood Armer design
The Reinforcement layer allows you to supplement (or replace) program designed reinforcement by drawing actual bar groups on plans using various tools.
Concept now (optionally) considers slab twisting moments (Mxy) in design.
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
Improved 3D Graphics
Concepts perspectives now show more detail (including reinforcement and SSR) and include new options, such as transparency.
Improved 2D Graphics Speed
questions that are not answered in this manual, please contact us.
For customer support, please contact:
Concepts plans now display instantaneously when zooming, panning or changing the text scale.
Minor New Features
Improved import of DWG files. Perimeter line load tool Minor Ram Structural System integration improvements Improved calculation performance Color coding of failures Enhanced Frequently Asked Questions chapter
North, Central and South America RAM International A Bentley Solutions Centre 2744 Loker Avenue West Carlsbad, CA 92008 USA Tel: 1-800-726-7789 Fax: 1-760-431-5214 email: support@bentley.com Europe RAM International (Europe) Limited A Bentley Solutions Centre 4 Woodside Place, Glasgow, G3 7QF UK Tel: +44 (0) 141 353 5168 Fax: +44 (0) 141 353 5112 email: support@bentley.com India Bentley Systems India Private Limited Third Floor, Tower A, DLF IT Park, No. 8, Major Arterial Road, Rajarhat, Kolkata - 700156 Tel: +91 33 4006 2021 Fax: +91 33 4006 2027 email: support@bentley.com Australia, Asia, Middle East Bentley Systems Adelaide, Australia Tel: +61 (8) 8362 9013 Fax: +61 (8) 8362 8519 email: support@bentley.com
1.6.2 Upgrading Old Files

Most of the improvements in Concept 3.0 are fully compatible with Concept 2.x files.
Recommendations for Old Files
We do not recommend that you upgrade old files that contain models that have been fully designed or are nearing final design. We recommend that you upgrade files that contain partially designed slabs.
1.7 Technical support

Bentley Systems want you to get the maximum benefit from your purchase of RAM Concept. If you have any
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2 Looking at the Workspace

This chapter provides a basic orientation to the RAM Concept interface.
To start a new file:
1 Start RAM Concept and choose File > New. 2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click
OK.
2.1 About the workspace

When you create a new file, RAM Concept generates layers, plans and perspectives for you to begin design. As you open windows in the workspace, RAM Concept activates the relevant toolbars.
Workspace with a plan open:
To start a new file from a template:
1 Start RAM Concept, and choose File > New. 2 Click Copy File in the New File dialog. 3 Select the file or template you want to copy.
2.2.2 Opening an existing file

Use File > Open to open an existing RAM Concept file. For quick access, Concept keeps track of the last ten files you opened and lists them at the bottom of the File menu.
To open a file:
1 Choose File > Open. 2 Select the RAM Concept file you want to open.
Note: See Upgrading Old Files on page 4 for discussion

on using files from an earlier version.
Figure 2-1 A.Standard toolbar for general operations. B. Menu Bar contains the set of menus for the program. Includes the File, Edit, Criteria, Layers, Tools, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help menus. C. Action Tools for manipulating the current view. D. Snap toolbar for setting coordinate snaps for the active plan. E. General Tools for editing the active plan window. F. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active plan window. G. Report Contents Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report sections. H. The active window. I. Status Bar for program status information. J. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the current cursor location in plan coordinates.
2.3 Saving a file

Save your files often. When you save, you ensure that the file is stored on your computer even in the event of a power failure or system crash.
To save and name a file for the first time:
1 Choose File > Save As (since the file has not yet been
saved, you could also choose File > Save).

2 Select the folder in which to save the file.
2.2 Creating and opening files

When you start RAM Concept, you can create a new file or open an existing file. You can also create a new file based on a template.
3 Type a name for your file and click Save. Concept adds the filename extension .cpt if not provided.
To save any open file:
1 Choose File > Save (if you have not yet saved the file,
and the Save As dialog box appears, follow the previous steps for saving for the first time).
To save a file as a template:
2.2.1 Starting a new file

When creating a new file, you make basic decisions about your model in the New File dialog, which appears when you choose File > New. You specify the type of slab, code and units to use. You can copy an existing Concept file or template by clicking Copy File on the New File dialog.
1 Choose File > Save Template. 2 Click Continue on the warning message box. 3 Type a name for the template and click Save. Concept adds the filename extension .cpttmp (if not provided) and saves the file without the objects.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2.3.1 Saving a copy of a file with a new name or location

Use the Save As command to create a copy of a file and change its name or location. The original file and the copy are completely separate and any work you do on one file does not affect the other.
2.5 Expanding tool buttons

Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other similar tools available for this button. Press down on the left mouse button for one second over the tool button to reveal a popup menu. Select a tool from the menu. The selected tool becomes the new tool for that button.
Expanding tool button with pop-up:
2.3.2 Reverting to a backup copy

For version control, Concept creates a copy of your last save every time you save your file to allow you to go back to an older version if necessary. Concept creates the file with the filename extension .cpt.bak1. If you need to revert to an older version of a file, use the backup copy created by Concept.
2.3.3 Restoring an auto-save file

As a safety net, Concept automatically saves a copy of your working file in the same folder as the original and with the filename extension .autosave. Concept updates the autosave file approximately every 2 minutes if you have made changes to your original file. Once you save your file, Concept deletes the auto-save file since your saved version is up to date. We recommend that you save often to prevent loss of work. If a computer malfunction or loss of power occurs while you are using Concept, when you restart Concept it detects the last auto-save file and open it automatically. If you open a second copy of Concept while one is running, the second copy may detect the auto-save file of the first and open it. In this case, just close the auto-save file and continue.
Figure 2-2 Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the Selection tool reveals a pop-up menu.
2.6 Rearranging toolbars 2.4 About templates

A template file contains everything a normal file includes (such as specification settings, plans, etc.) but has no objects. You can create a template from any RAM Concept file by choosing File > Save Template. Concept saves a copy of your file without any objects and with the .cpttmp filename extension. For details on how to save a template, see To save a file as a template: on page 5. Copy an existing template file by choosing File > New and clicking Copy File to create a new file based on the template. For more information on starting a new file from a template, see Starting a new file on page 5. You can move the toolbars in RAM Concept to suit your particular work habits. To move a tool bar, click on the handle of the toolbar and drag the toolbar to its new location. The toolbar handle is two lines on the right edge of horizontal toolbars or at the top edge of vertical toolbars. The toolbars snap to the edges of the application window or can remain floating in the workspace.
2.7 Using the right mouse button

RAM Concept provides some of the commands available from the menus or toolbars in a special context-sensitive pop-up menu that appears when you click the right mouse button. The contents of the menu vary depending on where you click, what window is active, and whether there is a current selection.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2.8 Undoing changes

RAM Concept provides multiple levels of undo to correct mistakes or reverse actions you have taken. Concept limits the amount of memory used to record undo information. Concept is therefore able to undo more small operations (deleting 10 objects) than large operations (deleting 1000 objects). Choose Edit > Undo to reverse the last action
taken. To redo a command that has been undone, choose Edit > Redo.
Note: The Undo command cannot reverse the Generate Mesh and Calc All commands. All changes you have made are committed once you perform one of these operations.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
RAM Concept
Chapter 3
3 Understanding Layers
In RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, slab areas, springs, loads, tendons, design strips, etc.) make up the structural model. Since there are so many objects involved in modeling a structure, Concept uses layers to organize these objects. A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in Concept resides on one and only one layer. You can handle all of the objects on a single layer as a group or individually.
Drawing Import Layer
This layer contains all the imported CAD drawing information. Concept automatically stores any imported drawings on this layer.
Mesh Input Layer
This layer contains the objects that define the geometry of the structure. Concept uses these objects to generate corresponding finite element objects on the Element Layer. Layer-Specific Objects: Column, Wall, Slab Area, Slab Opening, Beam, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring, Line Spring, Area Spring.
Element Layer
3.1 Modeling with objects

Since objects make up the structural model, they are more than a combination of points and lines. Each object is an individual entity with properties. Column object properties, for example, include concrete mix, height, width, depth, and more. You draw some objects on plans, and RAM Concept creates some objects automatically when you generate the finite element mesh or run an analysis calculation. If you have wall, column, and slab area objects on the Mesh Input layer, Concept creates corresponding wall element, column element, and slab element objects on the Element layer when you generate the finite element mesh. If you want to create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that layer. When you draw columns on the Standard Plan of the Mesh Input layer, you are creating objects on the Mesh Input layer. These objects belong to the layer and not the plan. They are editable by any plan on the Mesh Input layer, but not by plans on any other layer. Each object is an individual entity so you can manipulate it both separately and together with other objects on the same layer.
This layer contains the finite element objects. These objects can be generated by Concept based on the information on the Mesh Input Layer, or can be created by hand. Layer-Specific Objects: Column Element, Wall Element, Slab Element, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring, Line Spring, Area Spring.
Loading Layers (Self-dead, Balance, Hyperstatic, Temporary Construction (at Stressing), Other Dead, Live (Reducible), Live (Unreducible), Live (Storage), Live (Roof) and User-defined)
These layers contain all the information that defines the loads on the structure. In Concept, a loading is a set of loads applied as a group, such as the live loads. The loading layers also contain the loading analysis results. Concept provides the self-dead, balance, and hyperstatic loading layers by default and you cannot delete them. You can define an unlimited number of loadings and Concept creates a corresponding layer for each. Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area Loads.
3.2 Managing layers

RAM Concept performs most of the layer management automatically. Almost all of the layers you need to design a structure are already in place when you start a new file. Concept adds appropriate layers when you create new Loadings, Load Combinations, and Rule Set Designs.
Note: You cannot edit the load objects on the Self-Dead Loading Layer, Balance Loading Layer, and Hyperstatic Loading Layer.
Pattern Layer
This layer contains the load patterns for the structure. Layer-Specific Objects: Load Patterns.
Design Strip Layer
Note: You can create and edit a separate group of Line

Objects, Dimension Objects, and Text Note Objects on every layer.
This layer contains the design strips, design sections and punching checks for the structure. Layer-Specific Objects: Span Segments, Span Boundaries, Strip Boundaries, Design Sections, Punching Checks.
RAM Concept
Chapter 3
Tendon Layers (Latitude and Longitude)
These layers contain the layout of post-tensioning tendons and jacks for the structure. Although there are two tendon layers, Latitude and Longitude, there is no requirement to use both layers. You can draw tendons on the tendon layers in whatever manner you wish. Layer-Specific Objects: Tendon, Jack.
Load Combination Layers (All Dead, Dead and Balance, Initial Service, Service, Sustained Service, Factored, LT Uncracked Deflection and User-defined)
words, the dot means there exists at least one object that belongs to that layer.This is different to any visible objects on one of the layers plans, which may or may not belong to that layer.
Note: There may be a lag time (such as 10 seconds) for this to happen after the first item on the layer is draw. Note: This feature is added in response to the frustration of having to search every layer in support files to see if they contained any items. Note: Dots do not typically appear on Load Combination layers as these layers have no items drawn on them. This does NOT mean the load combo is not used in the design.
These layers contain the load combination analysis results.
Note: The load combinations listed are for ACI318. AS3600 and BS8110 use some different terminology.
Rule Set Design Layers (Code Minimum, User Minimum, Initial Service, Service, Sustained Service, Strength, Ductility)
These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design results.
Note: The rule set designs listed are for ACI318, AS3600 and BS8110 use some different terminology.
Design Status Layer
This layer contains the summary of all the design results. The summary information is automatically created by Concept when you Calc All. You cannot create, edit, or delete the objects on this layer but you can view them.
3.2.1 Determining which plans contain objects

Some layer icons next to a layer name in the contents window have a dot on the top sheet. This indicates that there is at least one object resident on that layer. In other
Figure 3-1 Layer icons indicating that there are objects on the following layers: Mesh Input, Element, Other Dead Loading and Live (Unreducible) Loading
10
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
4 Using Plans and Perspectives

Plan windows are used to create, view, and edit objects in two dimensions while perspective windows provide a three dimensional view of those objects. appear larger than far objects of the same size. The Parallel Projection ( ) and Perspective Projection ( ) toggles control which way the image is rendered. One, and only one, of these toggles is always set.
4.1 Using plans

A plan is a view of the geometric model and results. You can view any object on any plan. You can only create and edit an object on a plan belonging to the objects layer. For example, an other dead load can only be edited on a plan belonging to the Other Dead Loading layer. Objects are drawn and edited with tools located in LayerSpecific toolbars, and the Tools menu. The available tools are dependent on which plan is the active window in the workspace. Once you draw an object on a plan, the object belongs to that plans layer.
4.3.2 Selecting the modeling

The Wire Frame Modeling ( ) and Solid Modeling ( ) toggles control how the image is rendered. The wire frame is made of only the edges of the visible objects whereas the solid model shows the visible objects surfaces. The solid model is more realistic, however the wire frame image is often useful since it allows you to see through the model. One, and only one, of these toggles is always set.
4.3.3 Rotating the model

Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) and the
Note: For information on drawing and editing objects, see

the following chapter.
Rotate about z-axis tool ( ) to rotate the model about the screens x-, y-, and z-axes.
To rotate the model:
4.2 Creating new plans

Create new plans when you need additional ones to those provided by default.
To create a new plan:
1 Select the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) or the
Rotate about z-axis tool (
).
2 Click once on the perspective window to begin and move
the cursor until you position the model as desired.

3 Click on the perspective again to set the view.
1 Choose Layers > New Plan. 2 Enter a name for the plan. (Concept automatically prepends the layer name and appends the word Plan). 3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.4 Creating new perspectives

Create new perspectives when you need additional ones to those provided by default.
4.3 Viewing perspectives

Perspectives provide a three dimensional view of the model. You can view the model from any angle by rotating the perspective about the x-, y-, and z-axes. The model can be viewed in parallel projection or perspective projection and can be modeled as a solid or wire structure.
To create a new perspective:
1 Choose Layers > New Perspective. 2 Enter a name for the perspective. (RAM Concept automatically prepends the layer name and appends the word Perspective). 3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.3.1 Setting the projection

You can render the model in either parallel or perspective projection. In parallel projection, lines that are parallel in the original model are also drawn parallel in the three dimensional image. In perspective projection, near objects
4.5 Controlling views

You can manipulate the plan and perspective windows to show the desired view or information. Zooming and
RAM Concept
11
Chapter 4 panning allow you to change what portion of the model you are viewing. RAM Concept usually regenerates the view automatically. It is sometimes necessary, however, to use the Redraw command ( screen. ) to update the image on the
4.5.3 Regenerating
Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs that invalidates the current view. When you generate the mesh, analyze the model or change the settings, the open windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM Concept automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view is not up to date, click Redraw ( in the active window. ) to regenerate the view
Plans and perspectives represent unique views of the model. You control which object types are visible and their colors, font, and line type for each plan and perspective.
4.5.1 Zooming to magnify or diminish

Use zooming to magnify or diminish the plan or perspective view. If you have a mouse with a wheel button, roll the wheel to zoom in and out at the cursor location. Zoom In ( ) and Zoom Rectangle ( ) magnify the
4.5.4 Setting the visible objects

Use the Visible Objects dialog box to set which objects types are visible on a plan or perspective. Plans and perspectives can show objects from any layer, but you can only edit objects on a plan from the objects layer.
view. Zoom Out ( ) diminishes the view. You can set the view to encompass the entire model by using Zoom Extent ( ). To get back the previous zoom ratio use Zoom ).
Previous (
To magnify or diminish the view with the mouse wheel button:
1 Place the cursor on a location over the active plan or
perspective window. This is the zoom center point.

2 Roll the mouse wheel button away from you to zoom in,
and toward you to zoom out.

To magnify a specific area in the view:
1 Select the Zoom Rectangle tool ( 2 Fence the area you want to magnify.
).
Figure 4-1 Visible Objects dialog box (Mesh Input tab) To show or hide objects on a plan or perspective:
4.5.2 Panning to reposition

Panning allows you to reposition the view in the plan or perspective window. If you have a mouse with a wheel button, press down on the wheel over the view and pan. You can use the Pan tool ( ) to move the view as well. In addition, plans have scroll bars along the bottom and right side of the window that you can use to reposition the view.
To reposition the view with the mouse wheel button:
1 Make the plan or perspective the active window. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3 Click on the tab for the objects layer.
The plan or perspectives layer is the one initially selected.

4 Check boxes to show objects and uncheck to hide
objects, then click OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.
4.5.5 Changing colors, font, and line type
Each plan and perspective has an associated appearance scheme that dictates the colors, font, and line type used for the objects shown. When a plan or perspective is the active window, you can select and modify its appearance scheme using the Appearance dialog. If you change the settings of an appearance scheme, it affects all the plans and perspectives that use that scheme. You can create as many
1 Press down on the mouse wheel button over the active
plan or perspective window.

2 Pan the view into position and release the wheel button.
To reposition the view with a tool:
1 Select the Pan tool (
).
2 Click once on the plan to begin panning, click again when
the view is in the desired position.
12
RAM Concept
Chapter 4 appearance schemes as you need to customize the look of your plans and perspectives. When you create a new plan or perspective, the window initially uses the default scheme. You can select the color of every drawn object type for each appearance scheme. You can also set the background, grid and highlight colors. If an object type has no color selected ( ), RAM Concept uses the color setting for the objects layer. For example, you can set the Tendon object color to no selection, and then set the Latitude Tendon layer to red and Longitude Tendon layer color to blue. RAM Concept uses the foreground color in the case that you have selected neither the object type color nor the layer default color.
To change the colors in an appearance scheme:
1 Choose View > Appearance (
).
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
the active window, the selection is already the scheme set for that window).
3 Select the item from the drop-down list (if changing
plotting colors skip this step).

Figure 4-2 Appearance dialog To set the appearance scheme for a plan or perspective:
4 Click on the color selection box for the item and choose
a color. Lines of drawn objects can be set to solid, dashed, or dotted. Reference lines have Line Type and Line Width properties that are independent of the appearance scheme setting.
1 Make the plan or perspective the active window. 2 Choose View > Appearance (
).
3 Select the scheme from the list of schemes on the left side
of the Appearance dialog and click OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Appearance command.
To create a new appearance scheme:
4.5.6 Changing font size

You can change the font size in two ways. In the appearance schemes, you can select the font size for all text other then text notes. With the font buttons, you can temporarily change the font size.
To temporarily change the font size:
).
2 Click New below the list of schemes in the Appearance
dialog.
3 Type a name for the new scheme and select the base
1 Click Enlarge Fonts (
) or Shrink Fonts (
).
scheme. The settings from the base scheme initialize the new scheme.
To delete an appearance scheme:
Note: The temporary font size change only affects the active window and RAM Concept discards the change when the window is closed.
4.5.7 Changing font scale
You can select the font scale so that the font size either changes or stays unchanged as you zoom in and out on a plan.
To set the font scale:
).
2 Select the scheme you want to delete from the list of
schemes in the Appearance dialog.

3 Click Delete below the list of schemes to delete the
highlighted scheme.
To set a new default scheme:
).
).
2 Select the scheme you want to make the new default
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
scheme from the list of schemes in the Appearance dialog.

3 Click Set As Default below the list of schemes to make
the active window, the selection is already the scheme set for that window).
the highlighted scheme the new default scheme. RAM Concept uses this scheme to initialize newly created plans and perspectives. RAM Concept 13
Chapter 4
3 Enter the font scale and click OK.
To make the grid visible for a plan:
Note: A font scale of zero causes the font to stay a constant

size regardless of the plan scale. A non-zero value scales the font to be the same relative size as you zoom in and out.
1 Make the plan the active window. 2 Choose View > Grid. 3 Check Show Grid and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid to be visible on all plans then check Set for all Plans. 4.6 Setting up the grid
A grid can be set up to help you draw objects accurately by providing snap points at a designated spacing. The Plan Grid Setup dialog allows you to make the grid visible and to change the spacing, origin, and rotation angle of the grid. You can change the grid setting for the active plan window or all plan windows at once.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Grid.
To change the grid settings for a plan:
1 Make the plan the active window. 2 Choose View > Grid. 3 Enter values in the Plan Grid Setup dialog box and click
OK.
Note: If you want the grid settings to apply to all plan windows then check Set for all Plans.
Figure 4-3 Plan grid dialog box
14
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
5 Drawing and Editing Objects

Drawing objects is the cornerstone of using RAM Concept. There are many tools available to make this as straightforward as possible. To create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that layer. You draw and edit objects on plans using the tools from the Layer-Specific toolbar. In general, the snap extension setting causes the other snap calculations to behave as if the line segments displayed extended to be infinitely long lines. The specific changes to the other snap settings are: Intersection: intersections between infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable points. Point: no effect. End Point: no effect.
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps

RAM Concept provides drawing tools and settings to help you work precisely. Snap tools allow you to snap the cursor to precise points on objects or locations on the screen. Using snaps is a quick way to specify an exact location on an object without drawing construction lines or knowing the exact coordinate. Whenever you move your cursor over an object, RAM Concept identifies snap points based on what snaps are active. To turn on a snap, click on its button. Click on the button again to turn off the snap. Snap to Intersection ( ) snaps to the intersection of any two lines including polygon vertices. Snap to Point ( ) snaps to any defined point such as the center of a column, end point of a line, or vertex of a polygon. Snap to End Point ( ) snaps to the end points of lines (including vertices of polygons). Snap to Mid Point ( ) snaps to the mid points of lines.
Mid Point: no effect. Nearest: nearby infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable. Orthogonal: no effect. Perpendicular: perpendicular point on infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable. Center: no effect. Grid: no effect.
5.2 Drawing objects

To draw objects on a plan, first select a drawing tool by clicking on it or choosing it from the Tools menu. The selected tool will be the active drawing tool for the plan until you select a new tool. Follow the command prompts for points to enter (see Figure 2-1 on page 5). For example, with a Mesh Input layer plan open, and the Column tool selected, the command prompt will read Enter column center point:. If you are drawing with a tool and wish to cancel what you have drawn, click the right mouse button, or press the Esc key. If you need to reposition or magnify the view while you are drawing and do not want to cancel the work you are doing, use the mouse wheel button to pan or zoom. See Controlling views on page 11 for more information on how to use the mouse wheel button.
Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) snaps to the point on a drawn object nearest to the cursor. Snap Orthogonal ( ) snaps orthogonally in the direction of the grids local x- or y-axis. This need not be parallel with the global x- and y-axes. Snap to Perpendicular ( from the last click to a line. Snap to Center ( columns. Snap to Grid ( ) snaps perpendicularly
) snaps the center of polygons and
5.3 Entering coordinate points

Each point on a plan is a location represented by coordinates. Many tools require you to locate one or more points on a plan. With a tool selected, you can enter points by clicking at a location on the plan, entering the coordinates in the command line, entering the relative coordinates in the command line, or by using snaps.
) snaps to the grid.
Snap Extension ( ) does not create a snapping mode by itself, but it affects the behavior of some of the other snap settings. RAM Concept
15
Chapter 5
To enter coordinates: To deselect an object or group of objects from a selection:
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the x- and y-
1 Choose the Selection tool (
) or the Utility tool (
).
coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. 10, 5).
5.4 Using relative coordinates

Relative coordinates locate a point on a plan by referencing it to the last point entered. They can be very useful for moving and copying objects a set distance.
To enter relative coordinates:
2 Hold down the Shift key as you fence the objects in the selection you want to deselect. This deselects the selected objects within and crossing the rectangular area, and selects any objects in the rectangular area not previously selected.
To deselect only a single object from a selection:
).
2 Hold down the Shift key as you double click on the object
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the letter r
in the selection you wish to deselect. When you are deselecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle as a double click.
followed by the x- and y-coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. r10, 5).
5.7 Filtering selected objects 5.5 Selecting objects

Before you can edit objects on a plan, you must select them. Use the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ) to select objects on a plan. You select visible objects by fencing the area in which they are located. For example, if you have a slab opening (on the Mesh Input layer) in the middle of a slab, fencing the opening selects both the opening and the slab area because the rectangle crosses the slab area and surrounds the opening. If you want to select just the opening, double click on it. You can select any single object by double clicking on it. To add objects to the current selection, hold the Shift key down as you select.
To select an object or group of objects:
You can deselect objects from the current selection set by choosing the Selection Filter tool ( ). This tool will invoke a dialog that lists all of the currently selected objects grouped by object type. All of the objects of a particular type can be removed from the selection set by unselecting the objects in the list.
5.8 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects

To cut or copy objects, first select the objects then choose the appropriate command from the Edit menu. RAM Concept places objects that you cut or copy on the Windows clipboard. The coordinate locations of objects pasted from the clipboard are the same as the coordinate location from where you copied or cut them. RAM Concept makes the pasted objects the current selection, so you can reposition them after you paste.
To cut objects:
).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle. This selects
objects within and crossing the rectangular selection area. (Hold down the Shift key on the first click to add objects to the current selection.)
To select only a single object:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to cut.
).
2 Choose Edit > Cut (or right-click and choose Cut from
2 Double click on the object you wish to select (Hold down
the popup menu that appears).

To copy objects:
the Shift key as you click to add the object to the current selection). When you are selecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle as a double click.
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to copy. 2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
from the popup menu that appears).
5.6 Deselecting objects

You can deselect objects from the current selection by holding the Shift key while you select objects to remove from the selection. 16
To paste objects from the clipboard:
1 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from
the popup menu that appears). You can also copy and move, rotate, stretch or mirror an object in one step by pressing the Shift key while you use RAM Concept
Chapter 5 the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( )
or Mirror tool ( ). See Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects on page 17 for more information.
5.10 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch

The Utility tool ( ) is a multi-purpose tool used for selecting, moving, and stretching objects. See Selecting objects on page 16 for information on how to select objects with the Utility tool. Once you have selected an object or group of objects, you can move or stretch a grip point by snapping to it on the selection.
To move an object by one of its grips:
5.9 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects

An object or group of objects must be selected before using the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( )
1 Choose the Utility tool (
).
or Mirror tool ( ) (See Selecting objects). If you hold down the Shift key on the first click of a move, rotate, or mirror, the operation will be performed on a copy of the selection rather then the selection itself.
To move a selection:
2 Select an object or group of objects. 3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the top half
of the snap area until you see the move cross cursor ( ) then click. (Hold down the Shift key as you click to move a copy of the selection.)
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group
1 Select the object or group of objects to move. 2 Choose the Move tool (
).
of objects, to move.
To stretch an object by one of its grips:
3 Enter the point from which to move (hold down the Shift
key as you click to move a copy of the selection).

1 Choose the Utility tool (
).
of objects, to move.
To stretch the selection:
2 Select an object or group of objects. 3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the bottom
1 Select the object or group of objects to stretch. 2 Choose the Stretch tool (
half of the snap area until you see the stretch cursor ( then click. of objects, to stretch.
).
3 Snap to the point you want to stretch on the selection
(limited to highlighted control points).

of objects, to stretch.
To rotate a selection:
5.11 Manipulating the model as a whole

The Move Model tool ( Rotate Model tool ( ), Mirror Model tool ( ), and
1 Select the object or group of objects to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate tool (
).
) work just like the Move tool
3 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
as you click to rotate a copy of the selection).

4 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to rotate. 5 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an
( ), Mirror tool ( ), and Rotate tool ( ) except they affect the whole model (all layers). You can also scale the entire model with the Scale Model tool (
To move the entire model:
).
end angle.
To mirror the selection:
1 Choose the Move Model tool ( 2 Enter the start point. 3 Enter the move point.
To rotate the entire model:
).
1 Select the object or group of objects to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror tool (
).
3 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
1 Choose the Rotate Model tool (
).
would like to mirror the selected object(s). (Hold down the Shift key as you click to mirror a copy of the selection.)
2 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
as you click to rotate a copy of the model).
RAM Concept
17
Chapter 5
3 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to
To set the default properties for an object drawing tool:
rotate.
4 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an
1 Double click on the drawing tool or with the tool
selected, choose Tools > Current Tool Properties.

2 Specify default property values in the Properties dialog
end angle.
To mirror the entire model:
and click OK. ). When you now use the tool, it will draw objects with the specified default properties.
1 Choose the Mirror Model tool (
2 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
would like to mirror the model (hold down the Shift key as you click to mirror a copy of the model).
To scale the entire model:
Note: Changing the default properties of an object drawing tool does not change the properties of such objects already drawn.
1 Choose the Scale Model tool ( 2 Enter a scale center point.
).
3 In the Scale Model dialog box, enter the relative scale
factors and click OK.
5.14 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes

The Line tool ( ), Dimension tool ( ), and Text tool
5.12 Editing object properties

The properties of an object define its individual characteristics. For example, the properties of a Line object include the Line Type and Line Width. Some objects properties can be edited together as a group. Specifically, you can always modify objects of the same type together, and you can often modify objects of different types but with similar properties together. For example, you can edit the Concrete Mix and Height properties of Column and Wall objects together.
To change the properties of an object or group of objects:
( ) are all used to add information to plans. These objects are not part of the structural model and RAM Concept does not consider them when generating the mesh or calculating results. As for all objects, the lines, dimensions and text objects belong to the layer on which they are drawn.
To draw a line:
1 Choose the Line tool (
).
2 Click at the line start point (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
3 Click at the line end point (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
To draw a dimension line:
1 Select the object or group of objects. 2 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
choose Selection Properties.

3 Specify the property values in the Properties dialog and
1 Choose the Dimension tool ( 2 Click at the start point. 3 Click at the end point.
).
click OK.
4 Click at the offset point where the dimension line will be
located.
5.13 Setting default properties

It is useful to set the default properties of object drawing tools so that when you use the tool the drawn object has the desired properties. This is valuable when many objects will have the same properties.
To draw text:
1 Choose the Text tool (
).
2 Click at a point (or enter the coordinates in the command
line).
3 Right click and choose Selection Properties. 4 Enter the text and its properties.
18
RAM Concept
Chapter 6
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables

A text table shows all the objects of a particular type on a specific layer. Tables provide a customizable textual view of each objects properties. You can access text tables from the Tables folder of any layer.
To open a text table:
6.1.1 Choosing which rows and columns to show

Customize the table columns and rows by clicking on the Customize button above the table. In the Customize dialog box, you can select which rows and columns are visible in the table. Check the columns you want to see and uncheck the columns you want hidden.
To make a table column visible or hidden:
1 Go to the Tables folder of the object types layer. 2 Open the appropriate text table from the folder.
For example, the text table for Walls Below on the Mesh Input layer can be opened by choosing Layers > Mesh Input > Tables > Walls Below.
1 Click on the Customize button above the table. 2 In the Customize dialog box, to make a column visible,
check the checkbox. To hide the column, uncheck the checkbox.

3 Click OK.
6.1.2 Sizing table columns

You can resize columns by changing the width of the column header.
To resize the width of the column:
1 Place your cursor on the line between two columns on the
table header and press down on the left mouse button.

2 Drag the table header to its new width and release the left
Figure 6-1 Mesh Input: Walls Below Table
mouse button. The table will print as seen on screen so the column widths you set will appear the same way on paper.
6.1 Customizing tables

6.1.3 Sorting table rows
You can choose which columns and rows are visible in the table, and the column widths. You can also sort the rows based on a particular columns values in ascending or descending order. To sort the table rows according to the values in a column, click on the column header once for ascending order. Click on the column header again to sort in the descending order.
RAM Concept
19
Chapter 6
20
RAM Concept
Chapter 7
7 Choosing Units
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems: US, SI and MKS. Some designers refer to the US units system as US customary units, and others call it Imperial. SI and MKS are metric unit systems, with MKS using mass rather than weight. It is up to you which system you use but local practice should dictate your choice. The choice of actual units is more subjective. For example, after choosing the US system, one designer might use the default area load units of pounds per square feet, and another might change the selection to kips per square feet.
2 Do one of the following:
Select each unit by accessing the appropriate drop down box. Select a unit system by clicking on US, SI, or MKS at the top of the window.
Note: There is often a long list of choices for the units. Scroll down the drop down menu to view the options.
7.1 About units

Internally, RAM Concept performs all calculations with the SI unit system. It converts all property values into an equivalent SI unit prior to calculation. Once complete, it converts the values back into the selected units for reporting. It is possible to mix unit systems (e.g. pounds and meters) but this is not advisable.
7.2 Selecting units

A new file has default units that you can change at any time.
7.2.1 Selecting the default units

The default units depend on how you created the file. When you use a template or an existing file, the default units are those of the source. When you create a file using the New command, you only have a choice of default units for ACI 318 (US or SI). For all other codes, the default units are SI.
Figure 7-1 Units Window
7.3 Specifying report as zero

RAM Concept allows you to filter out trivial results with the Report as Zero option. For example, column reactions have components for Fr, Fs, Fz, Mr and Ms. Some of these values, such as Fr and Fs, may be very small and hence not important. Filtering small values from plan plots can make the results easier to read.
7.2.2 Changing the units

You can change either the unit system or individual units.
To change the units:
1 Choose Criteria > Units.
Note: Using this feature could result in human error, as you might later assume zeroed values are exactly equal to zero.
You specify Report as Zero in the Units window.
RAM Concept
21
Chapter 7
To specify Report as Zero:
2 Enter one or more Report as Zero values.
1 Choose Criteria > Units.
Note: You can also turn off plotted values such as Fr and Fs with the plot menu. See Setting the plotted results on page 139.
22
RAM Concept
Chapter 8
8 Choosing Sign Convention

RAM Concept allows you to choose the sign convention for loads, analysis and reactions. RAM Concept uses the Cartesian coordinate system with the following sign convention for axes: Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes). Fz In the negative z-direction (see coordinate axes). Mx (moment about the X-axis) Per right-hand-rule. My (moment about the Y-axis) Per right-hand-rule. Mz (moment about the Z-axis) Per right-hand-rule. You cannot change the sign of the coordinates axes. Sign convention dictates how you input parameters and how RAM Concept displays results. For example, the sign convention of an applied load dictates whether the input value is positive or negative. Note that changing a sign setting does not change the real value of any previously specified data. For example if a +10 kips downward load was specified when RAM Concept had a downward-positive load sign convention and then the load sign convention was changed to upwardpositive, the load value would now be reported as -10 kip, but the load would still be a 10 kip downward load. Similarly, a change in sign convention does not affect the true value of results. When you add loads after a change in sign convention, you must observe the new sign convention. Positive analysis
Figure 8-2 Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending, Element Axial, Vertical Deflection. Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular Deflection.
Vertical element shear Positive z-shear on the positive x- and y-faces. Element bending Tension bottom face. Element axial Tension. Vertical deflection In negative z-direction (down). Horizontal shear Positive y-shear on Positive x-face (equivalent to Positive x-shear on Positive y-face). Twist Positive x-axis moment on positive x-face (equivalent to negative y-axis moment on positive y-face). Lateral deflection Positive in x- and y-axes directions. Angular deflection Per right-hand-rule about x- and yaxes. Positive reactions
8.1 Selecting sign convention

A new file has a default sign convention that you can change at any time.
8.1.1 Default sign convention

The default sign convention depends on how you created the file. If you use a template or an existing file then the default sign convention is that of the source. When you create a file (not from a template), the sign convention is as follows: Positive loads
Figure 8-3 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes). Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes). Fz In the positive z-direction (see coordinate axes).
Figure 8-1 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My.
Mx (moment about the x-axis) Per right-hand-rule. My (moment about the y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).
RAM Concept
23
Chapter 8 Mz (moment about the z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
8.2 About plot sign convention

With the exception of vertical deflection, line plots show positive results plotted above the axis line. This ensures that plots do not appear upside down. For axis lines that are parallel to the y-axis (and hence have no above the axis line direction), line plots show positive results to the left of the axis line.
Note: The only difference in defaults between Positive Loads and Positive Reactions is Fz. This is because point loads are usually down if positive, and vertical reactions are usually up if positive.
8.1.2 Changing the sign convention
You can change the sign convention for any loads or results, but only one at a time.
To change the sign convention:
Note: Line plots show positive vertical deflection below the axis line.
Perspectives are plotted with positive results in the global z-direction (what is considered positive is dependent upon the sign convention of the Value Plotted). For example, a perspective of deflection shows positive deflection up. You cannot change the sign of the coordinates axes.
1 Choose Criteria > Signs. 2 Change each positive sign by clicking the appropriate
graphic. The direction changes.
Figure 8-4 Signs Window
24
RAM Concept
Chapter 9
9 Specifying Material Properties

RAM Concept uses materials as part of the input and the results. You specify concrete mixes and post-tensioning systems as part of the input and Concept reports reinforcement bar requirements as part of the results. You can use the materials provided or create your own. For example, you might want to redesign the floor with the actual tested strength of the concrete poured on site. In this case, you would create a new concrete mix defined with that strength. You can delete any of the materials that you find are unnecessary.
9.2 Material properties

The following is a list of Material properties:
9.2.1 Concrete Mix

Mix Name The label used to identify a concrete mix. The mix name is not necessarily the concrete strength. Each column, wall, slab and beam has a concrete mix property. Density The concrete mass density (used to calculate selfweight and sometimes the modulus of elasticity). fci The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix at the time of applying prestress (also known as initial strength). fc The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix.
9.1 Viewing the available materials

The Materials window shows the names and properties of concrete mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars.
To view the materials:
Note: fci and fc are used for all codes except BS8110.
fcui The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix at the time of applying prestress (also known as initial strength). fcu The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix.
1 Choose Criteria > Materials.
Note: fcui and fcu are only used for BS8110.

Poissons Ratio The negative of the ratio of lateral strains to axial strains for an axially loaded material. This is usually 0.2 for concrete. Ec Calc The method used to calculate Youngs Modulus (for both initial characteristic strength and characteristic strength). This can be according to one of the code rules listed or a specified value. User Eci The user defined Youngs Modulus used for initial cross section analysis. User Ec The user defined Youngs Modulus used for global analysis, service cross section analysis and strength design.
9.2.2 PT Systems
System Name The label used to identify a PT system. It usually describes the system, such as strand size and bonding. Type Whether the system has unbonded or bonded strand.
Figure 9-1 The Materials window.
Aps The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is usually comprised of seven wires then the area is more complicated than d2/4. 25
RAM Concept
Chapter 9 Eps The Youngs Modulus of the strand at zero strain. fse The assumed effective stress in the strand after all losses. Using jacks overrides this assumption. See About jacks on page 121 for further information. fpy The yield stress of the strand. fpu The ultimate stress of the strand. Duct Width The width or diameter of bonded tendon duct. Max Strands Per Duct The maximum number of strands in a bonded tendon (use 1 for unbonded tendons). Minimum Radius The minimum vertical radius that allows satisfactory placement of tendons in the field. You should consult with a local PT supplier. A value of zero disables radius checking for this PT system. Jacking Stress / Anchor Friction / Wobble Friction / Angular Friction / Seating Distance / Long-Term Losses Friction loss calculations use these properties. They have no effect unless tendon jacks are used. See Jack properties on page 121 of Chapter 25, Defining Tendons for further information. Fy The yield stress of the SSR reinforcement. Stud Spacing Rounding Increment Specifies an increment to which all stud designs are rounded down. For example, specifying a larger number forces a larger number of designs to have the same spacing, creating the potential for grouping of designs at different columns. Min Studs Per Rail Specifies the minimum number of studs that Concept designs on any rail. This can be useful in a number of situations. For example, if one face of a column has a small overhang for which the designer does not want SSR reinforcement, this minimum stud number can be increased to prevent the design of rails on that face.
9.3 Adding and deleting materials

You can add materials to define properties of concrete mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars. You can delete materials as long as at least one material of each type remains.
To add materials:
1 Choose Criteria > Materials. 2 Click Add Concrete Mix, or Add PT System, or Add
9.2.3 Reinforcing Bars

Bar Name The label used to identify a reinforcing bar. It usually refers to the bars diameter. As Cross sectional area of the bar. Es The Youngs Modulus of the bar. Fy The yield stress of the bar.
Reinforcing Bar, or Add SSR System.

3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new material and click OK.
A new row appears at the bottom of the appropriate table.

4 Enter the property value for each cell in the new row.
To delete materials:
1 Choose Criteria > Materials. 2 Click Delete Concrete Mix, Delete PT System, or Delete
9.2.4 SSR Systems

SSR System Name The label used to identify a SSR (stud shear reinforcement) system. It usually describes the system, such as stud size. Stud Area Cross sectional area of the stud stem that is used in strength calculations Head Area The area of the stud head, generally about 10 times the stem area. Concept uses this to calculate the head diameter for clear spacing calculations. Min Head Spacing The minimum clear spacing between stud heads along the length of a rail. The design will not succeed if this value is too large. Specified Stud Spacing The desired stud spacing for the SSR design. If set to none, Concept automatically designs the stud spacing. 26
Reinforcing Bar, or Delete SSR System. A dialog box appears with a list of the available materials.
3 Choose the material to delete and click OK.
9.4 About post-tensioning systems

There are two types of systems considered in RAM Concept. Unbonded systems: greased strand encased in plastic sheathing. Bonded systems: bare strand within grouted ducts.
RAM Concept
Chapter 9 Strands are typically comprised of seven wires spirally wound. There are two dominant strand sizes used in building construction: 0.5 inch diameter (12.7 mm) 0.6 inch diameter (15.2 mm) For further discussion on post-tensioning systems, see Chapter 25, Defining Tendons.
RAM Concept
27
Chapter 9
28
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10 Specifying Loadings
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a group. You define loading properties in the loadings window. You draw the actual loads on the loading plans. Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind). Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type, as described in About loading types below). RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and you define the factors that control this process in the loading window. Live (Storage) Loading Live (Roof) Loading Different sets of live loads. See About loading types on page 30 for further description. Service Wind North Loading The set of wind loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only). Service Wind East Loading The set of wind loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only). Ultimate Seismic North Loading The set of seismic loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only). Ultimate Seismic East Loading The set of seismic loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
10.1 About default loadings

RAM Concept provides default loadings for self-weight, post-tensioning and gravity loads. For mat files, Concept provides additional default loadings for wind and seismic. Self-Dead Loading This is the self-weight of the concrete. All other dead loading is superimposed. Balance Loading Post-tensioning tendons and anchors apply internal loads to the concrete structure. We call this set of loads the Balance Loading because you normally design the post-tensioning to balance or offset the other loadings applied to the slab. Hyperstatic Loading The hyperstatic loading is a theoretical loading that considers the restraining effect of the supports on the structure as it tries to deform due to the application of post-tensioning. Many people use the term secondary in place of hyperstatic. The loading is not necessarily secondary in nature. Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements, springs, supports, design sections, design strip segments and punching checks) as described in Post-tensioning loadings on page 334. Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading This set of superimposed loads applies before stressing of post-tensioning tendons. This loading is rarely used, and you need not consider it for RC structures. Other Dead Loading This set of superimposed dead loads applies to PT structures after stressing of posttensioning tendons. It is simply the superimposed dead loads for RC structures. Live (Reducible) Loading Live (Unreducible) Loading
10.2 Viewing the loadings

The Loading window lists the different loadings and their type and pattern factors.
To view the Loadings:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings. 2 If there are many loadings, scroll down to view them all.
Figure 10-1 Loadings Window
10.3 Loading properties

Loadings have the following properties: Loading Name The label used to identify the loading. Loading Type See About loading types on page 30 for more information. Analysis The type of analysis, which can be Normal, Hyperstatic or Lateral SE.
RAM Concept
29
Chapter 10 A Hyperstatic analysis is used for only the Hyperstatic Loading described in About default loadings on page 29. For information on Lateral SE, see Self-equilibrium analysis on page 335 of Chapter 47, Analysis Notes. On-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are located within the loading pattern when performing pattern-loading calculations. See About load pattern on page 32 for more information. Off-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are not located within the loading pattern when performing pattern-loading calculations. Live (Reducible) Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are reducible. See Chapter 49, Live Load Reduction Notes for detailed information regarding how each live load reduction code handles loadings of this type. Live (Unreducible) Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are not reducible (typically assembly loadings - see About snow, parking and assembly loads on page 31). Live (Storage) Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are reducible using special storage loading reduction rules. For live load reduction to most codes, it is appropriate to use this loading type for parking loads (see About snow, parking and assembly loads on page 31). Live (Roof) Loadings of this type contain typical roof live loads - except snow - that are reducible. RAM Concept never reduces these loads (the RAM Structural System may reduce these loads). Other Loadings of this type contain loads of an unspecified nature. RAM Concept never considers these loadings except in manually created or edited load combinations (or load combinations created in previous files). All loading from FLOOR versions 2.3 and before, and RAM Concept versions 1.3 and before (except self-dead, balance and hyperstatic) are given this type; it is often useful to change the loading types of these loadings from earlier program versions. Service Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads at service force levels. Service Wind Loading N is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Wind Loading N (if it exists). Ultimate Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Wind Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Wind Loading N (if it exists). Service Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at service force levels. Service Seismic Loading N is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Seismic Loading N (if it exists). Ultimate Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Seismic Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Seismic Loading N (if it exists). Most of these loading types are also available in a transfer variation. See About Transfer Loading Types on page 31 for more information.
Note: Concept ignores the pattern factors if both factors are the same value. Setting both factors to 2.0 is identical to setting both factors to 1.0
10.4 About loading types

Every loading in RAM Concept has a loading type. Concept uses loading type to generate the appropriate load combinations from the defined set of loadings, and to apply appropriate live load reductions. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35 for information on how Concept generates load combinations.
10.5 Available loading types

The available loading types are: Self-Weight The structures concrete self-weight loads are always generated with this loading type. There is always one and only one loading of this type. Balance As described in About default loadings on page 29. There is always one and only one loading of this type. Hyperstatic As described in About default loadings on page 29. There is always one and only one loading of this type. Stressing Dead Loadings of this type contain superimposed loads applied before stressing of posttensioning tendons. This loading type is rarely used and is generally not considered for other loading conditions. You need not consider it for RC structures. Dead Loadings of this type contain permanent dead loads other than those from the self-weight type.
Note: All loading types except self-weight, balance and hyperstatic may be used for more than one loading.
30
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10.5.1 About snow, parking and assembly loads

Snow, parking and assembly loadings deserve special consideration Snow loads Snow loads should generally be drawn on a Live (Unreducible) Loading layer. Parking and assembly loads It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw parking garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer and assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer. Refer to the live load reduction section listed below for detailed information regarding how a specific code handles loadings of this type: ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors on page 379 ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors on page 395 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors on page 433 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors on page 448
10.6 Changing Loading Types

The type of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance and Hyperstatic) may be changed in the Loadings window.
To change a loading type:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings. 2 Click the loading type of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.

3 Select the new loading type.
10.7 Changing Analysis

The analysis of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance and Hyperstatic) may be changed in the Loadings window.
To change an analysis:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings. 2 Click the analysis of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.
10.5.2 About Transfer Loading Types

Almost all of the loading types previously discussed are available with a transfer variation. The transfer variations represent loads transferred from the structure above onto the level under consideration (via columns or walls). A few loading types are not available with a transfer variation, or have a somewhat different meaning with a transfer variation. These are: Self-Weight There is no transfer variation of this loading type. Balance The transfer variation of this loading type is for loads generated by the tendons in the structure above the level under consideration. Unlike the non-transfer balance type: multiple loadings of this type may exist; the loadings do not contain loads generated from the tendons; and the loadings of this type are user-editable. Loadings of this type are considered in the calculation of hyperstatic effects. Hyperstatic There is no transfer variation of this loading type. Stressing Dead There is no transfer variation of this loading type.
3 Select the new analysis.
10.8 Adding and deleting loadings

At times, you may wish to add loadings such as seismic or snow. Conversely, you may choose to delete loadings such as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading.
To add a loading:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings. 2 Click Add Loading. 3 Enter a name for the new Loading in the Add Loading dialog box and click OK.
The new loading appears in a row at the bottom of the table.

4 Enter the Loading Type and Analysis for the new loading. 5 Enter the On-Pattern Factor and Off-Pattern Factor for
the new loading.

To delete a loading:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings. 2 Click Delete Loading.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current loadings.

3 Choose the loading to delete and click OK.
RAM Concept
31
Chapter 10
10.9 About load pattern

In structural engineering, pattern loading refers to a load arrangement that ignores or reduces loads on selected spans for the purpose of maximizing moments, shears or reactions. In 2D analysis, it is not difficult to create an algorithm that determines the important patterns, but this is extremely difficult for a 3D program, especially for irregular column layouts and panels. To handle pattern loading, RAM Concept uses the concept of load patterns.
Note: Some refer to pattern loading as skip loading.

10.9.1 How load patterns work
A load pattern creates a (invisible) pattern loading that contains only filtered loads for each standard loading. The On-Pattern and Off-Pattern factors control the filtering. The inclusion and exclusion of loads within the pattern area defines the pattern loading. Concept multiplies loads inside the pattern area by the on-pattern factor and multiplies loads outside the pattern area by the off-pattern factor. The actual pattern area is dependent upon the finite element mesh. See Chapter 20, Creating Pattern Loading, for further explanation.
On-Pattern areas (shaded) for 6-panel slab: Figure 10-3 Load Pattern for maximum negative moment (about Y-Y) at first interior column.
For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the onpattern factor is 0.8 and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then two pattern loadings are created with a load of 80 psf on the hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder of the slab. Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with the full loading - to determine the design force envelopes for design strip segments, design sections and punching checks.
10.9.2 When to use load pattern

Whether you use pattern loading is a matter of which code you are using and your engineering judgment. Some codes allow you to ignore pattern loading for certain types of structures and magnitudes of live loading. Common sense should lead you to logical load patterns that produce very close to the maximum moments, shears and reactions. In most circumstances, you only pattern the live loading. There could be circumstances where you pattern other loadings.
Figure 10-2 Load Pattern for maximum positive moment (about Y-Y) in end span
For patterned loads, the on-pattern factor often has a value of 0.75 and the off-pattern factor often has a value of zero. For non-patterned loads, both factors should be 1.0. In special circumstances, the on-pattern factor can exceed a value of 1.0. When in doubt, all on-pattern and off-pattern factors should be 1.0. This results in no pattern loading. See Chapter 20, Creating Pattern Loading, for further discussion.
10.9.3 How load pattern can approximate moving loads

You can approximate moving loads by using load patterns.
32
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
To approximate moving loads:
4 Draw the load once in each pattern.
1 Specify an on-pattern factor of 10 and an off-pattern
factor of zero.
2 Specify load factors (in the load combinations window)
for the moving loading of one-tenth their actual values.

3 Define the movement using the load patterns.
Note: Concept still analyses a load combination with all the loads present that is included in the envelope. This is the reason for scaling the on-pattern, off-pattern and load factors - it diminishes the effect of the all the loads load combination.
RAM Concept
33
Chapter 10
34
RAM Concept
Chapter 11
11 Specifying Load Combinations

A load combination is a factored linear combination of loadings. Strictly speaking, we should call it loading combination, but we have adopted the commonly used terminology.
11.1 About default load combinations

Codes generally specify which loadings you need to consider in the design of a structure and how you should combine these loadings. RAM Concepts default load combinations depend on how you created the file. When you use a template or an existing file then the default load combinations are those of the source. When you create a file using the New command the default load combinations depend on the code selected. These load combinations are usually appropriate for the selected code, but there may be times when you need to modify the load factors and add loadings. The default load combinations for each code are described in detail in the relevant chapter: Chapter 51, ACI 318-99 Design Chapter 52, ACI 318-02 Design Chapter 53, ACI 318-05 Design Chapter 54, AS 3600-2001 Design Chapter 55, BS 8110: 1997 Design Chapter 56, IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design.
Figure 11-1 Load Combination Window
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations

At times, you may wish to rebuild an existing load combination that includes a new or revised loading. For example, if a loadings type changes, it affects the load factors and live load reduction process. You can account for these changes by using the rebuild command. RAM Concept will not automatically update load factors when a loading's loading type changes. RAM Concept only sets the load factors when rebuilding load combinations.
To rebuild load combinations:
11.2 Viewing the load combinations

The Load Combinations window lists the different load combinations and their design criteria and load factors.
To view the Load Combinations:
1 Choose Criteria > Rebuild Load Combos
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations. 2 If there are many load combinations, scroll down to view
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify if the load combinations are for an elevated slab or mat foundation.
2 Select elevated slab or mat foundation 3 Select Rebuild
them all.
RAM Concept
35
Chapter 11
11.4 Adding and deleting load combinations

At times, you may wish to add load combinations such as seismic plus dead or snow plus dead. Conversely, you might choose to delete load combinations such as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) LC.
To add a load combination:
Analysis Type The choices are: Linear: this is the standard type. Zero-Tension: these load combinations do NOT have alternate load factors and never consider pattern loading. Active Rule Sets These control which rule sets are used for design calculations. Up to four active rule sets can be associated with each load combination. See Chapter 12, Selecting Design Rules for further explanation. Load Factor The factor applied to a particular loading in the load combination. Alternate Envelope Factor You should only use these if you fully understand the principle involved. Do not set these factors to zero without understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding load factors. See About alternate envelope factors on page 37.
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations. 2 Click Add Load Combination. 3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new
load combination and click OK. Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans that you want RAM Concept to create (Slab Stress, Slab Deflection and Slab Force). These plans appear in the new load combinations folder.
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new load combination appears at the bottom of the window.

5 Select the active rule sets. 6 Enter the load factors and the alternative load factors for
11.6 About group load combinations

A group load combination has load factors for every nonlateral loading and for one single lateral loading type. Effectively, a group load combination's results are the envelope of all the results from N invisible single load combinations, where N is the number of loadings for the given lateral loading type. A linear group load combination has a standard and alternate load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a standard and alternate load factor for the selected lateral loading type. It never has zero tension iterations. A zero-tension group load combination has a single load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a single load factor for the selected lateral loading type. It has zero-tension iterations as necessary for invisible (internal) component load combo, and will be the envelope of all of the component load combos combined. It never considers pattern loading. Figure 11-2 is intended to explain the ramifications of load combination type selection.
each loading in the load combination.

To delete a loading:
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations. 2 Click Delete Load Combination.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current load combinations.

3 Choose the load combination to delete and click OK.
11.5 Load combination properties

Load Combination Name The label used to identify the load combination. Combo Type The choices are: Single: this is the standard type. Lateral Group: this is used for a floor that is part of the lateral force resisting system [especially mat foundations (rafts)].
Note: The primary purpose of Load Combination types is to reduce the number of lateral load combinations. A secondary purpose is to provide easy enveloping for results such as soil bearing pressure.
36
RAM Concept
Chapter 11 combination, RAM Concept provides a much simpler solution - Alternate Envelope Factors (AEF).
Load Combination TYPE
Point Load
Area Load
Single
Lateral Group
Figure 11-3 This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads (shown). The live loading reduces the positive span moment. By using an AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you create a load combination with a reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
- All loadings are listed - Each loading has load factors - Linear Load Combinations have an Alternate Envelope Factor - Zero-Tension Load Combinations do NOT have Alternate Envelope Factors
Conceptually, Concept considers alternate envelope factors by analyzing the load combination 2L times (where L is the number of loadings) - once for every permutation of load factors and alternate envelope factors for all of the loadings. Concept then envelopes the design strip forces, design section forces and punching shear reactions for all of the load combination analyses. Concept uses these force envelopes later for design purposes. You can also plot the force envelopes or view them in tables. Concept fully considers any pattern loading effects while considering the load factors. Note that the general analysis forces that are not used as design forces by Concept - such as standard slab bending moments and deflections - are only stored for the load combination considering the standard load factors. As stated above, you should only use alternate envelope factors if you fully understand the principle involved. Do not set them to zero without understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding load factors.
- All non-lateral loadings are listed - One, and only one, key loading type can be used (per load combination). - All N loadings within the Key Loading Type are used to generate N load combinations.
Figure 11-2 Ramifications of Load Combination Type
Refer to Summary of load combination types on page 38 for more information.
11.7.1 Example of Alternate Load Factors
11.7 About alternate envelope factors

There can be situations where the application of a loading has an unconservative effect on the results. For example a retaining wall loading that applies compression to a floor. a cantilever live loading that reduces the internal span moment. In such circumstances, it is desirable to analyze the structure both with and without the full loading. While you could do this by creating an additional load
Figure 11-4 shows the suggested way to use the factors for a strength design of the ACI318-05 Factored LC.
Figure 11-4 Factored LC load factors and alternate envelope factors.
RAM Concept
37
Chapter 11
11.8 Summary of load combination types

The effects of using different load combination types and analysis types are summarized in Table 11-1. Linear Single Standard and Alternate load factors for every loading No zero-tension iterations Considers pattern loading Group Standard and Alternate load factors for every non-lateral loading Standard and Alternate load factors for the selected lateral loading type No zero-tension iterations Considers pattern loading No results for point springs, line springs, point supports, line supports, walls. No Standard results for any quantity See Figure 11-2 for more information.
Table 11-1 Load Combination Summary
Example 11-1 ACI 318-05 Elevated floor file with lateral loadings added To simplify the example, four loadings have been deleted from the standard file.
Zero-tension Standard load factor for every loading Zero-tension iterations as necessary Ignores pattern loading Standard load factor for every non-lateral loading Standard load factor for the selected lateral loading type Zero-tension iterations as necessary Ignores pattern loading No results for point springs, line springs, point supports, line supports, walls. No Standard results for any quantity See Figure 11-2 for more information.
Figure 11-5 Loading table for ACI 318-05 Elevated Floor - six wind loadings have been added (and one stressing dead and three live loadings have been deleted)
After adding and deleting some loadings, the load combinations have been rebuilt. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35. The Rebuild operation adds the load combination Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W, as shown in Figure 11-6.
Figure 11-6 Rebuilt load combination: Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W
Concept now expands this load combination and calculates the following load combinations:
1 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live
(reducible) + 1.6 North Wind + 1.6 North Wind (transfer)

(reducible) - 1.6 North Wind - 1.6 North Wind (transfer)

(reducible) + 1.6 East Wind

(reducible) - 1.6 East Wind

(reducible) + 1.6 Trade Wind + 1.6 Sirocco Wind + 1.6 Zephyr Wind
(reducible) - 1.6 Trade Wind - 1.6 Sirocco Wind - 1.6 Zephyr Wind
38
RAM Concept
Chapter 12
12 Selecting Design Rules

You design concrete floors manually by calculating the resultants (moments, shears and axial forces) of a load combination and applying the appropriate code rules and formula. You select code rules based upon the type of member (reinforced slab, post-tensioned beam, etc.) and the type of load combinations. For example, codes intend some load combinations are for strength design and others for serviceability design. RAM Concept uses a similar method. It sorts code rules into sets of rules and applies them to the resultant envelopes of load combinations. Thus, a rule set design is one or more code rules applied to the resultant envelope of one or more load combinations. For example, the set of code formula for bending and shear strength is the strength rule set. Concept applies this rule set to the envelope of all factored (or ultimate) load combinations. The strength rule set does not apply to service load combinations. You design most floors or members for more than one rule set. For example, a post-tensioned floor is usually checked for initial service stresses, service stresses and strength, all with different load combinations.
6 A design summary envelopes the reinforcement require-
ments and section status for all rule set design section envelopes.
Example:
The following example describes how RAM Concept selects the ACI 318-02 design rules for a post-tensioned beam with live and wind loadings.
12.1 Using rule set designs

RAM Concept uses the concept of a design strip to link finite element analysis with concrete code rules (see Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips). Each design strips properties include design system (beam / one-way slab / two-way slab) and the considered as post-tensioned option. Design strips contain design cross sections. You assign each load combination active rule set designs in the load combinations window.
How RAM Concept utilizes rule set designs:
Figure 12-1 Example of load combinations and rule sets
RAM Concepts process is as follows: The two load combinations generate envelopes for resultants. The five active rule set designs (service design, code minimum design, user minimum design, strength design and ductility design) each create envelopes from the load combinations. Each rule set design envelope creates a rule set design section envelope. The design strip properties of Structural system: beam and consider as post-tensioned determines the following rules from ACI 318-02 are applicable: Strength Design: rules 18.7.2 (flexural strength) and 11.4 and 11.5 (shear strength) are used with the beam clauses. Minimum Design: rule 18.9.2. Service Design: rules 18.3.3 and 18.4.2 (b).
1 Load combinations generate envelopes for resultants
(moments, shears, axial forces and torsions).

2 All load combination envelopes with the same rule set
design are in turn enveloped. This is a rule set design envelope.

3 For each rule set design envelope, design strips generate
rule set design force envelopes.

4 Each design strip determines which code rules are appro-
priate for each rule set design. Design strip properties impact which particular rules are used.
5 Design and checking rules are applied to the rule set
design section envelopes.
RAM Concept
39
Chapter 12 These rules are applied to the rule set design section envelopes. The reinforcement requirements and section status for all rule set design section envelopes are in turn enveloped for a design summary.
Ductility Design
Rules intended to produce ductile behavior.

Soil Bearing
This is used in mat foundation (raft) files to facilitate the enveloping of soil bearing pressure. It does not use any active rules.
12.2 Rule set design properties

The following is a list of rule set design properties: Name This relates to the rule set design. It most cases it is the same as the active rules, but there can be exceptions (see adding rule set designs - below). Active Rules This describes the set of rules applied by this rule set.
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs

Adding a duplicate rule set design allows you to separate the results for different load combinations with the same active rules. For example, if a strength design is required for three different load combinations (1. Dead and Live; 2. Dead, Reduced Live and Snow; 3. Seismic) then you could keep the results separate by creating two new rule set designs with names such as Snow and Seismic which both use the code strength rules. This way you can view the strength reinforcement requirements separately. You can delete non-applicable rule set designs to simplify the file. For example, in ACI 318-02, initial service design, and sustained service design are not required for floors without post-tensioning. Another example is DL + 0.25LL Design is not required if the UBC is not used.
To add a rule set design:
12.3 Types of active rules

The available ACI 318-02 active rules are:
Code Minimum Design
Rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, detailing, etc.) based upon geometry rather than stress or moment level. Does not include shear reinforcement.
User Minimum Design
1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules. 2 Click Add Rule Set Design. 3 Type a name for the new Rule Set Design in the Add Rule
Reinforcement based on user defined reinforcement ratio. See the design strip property description on page 85 of Section 21.5.
Initial Service Design
Set Design dialog box and click OK. A dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans that you want created (Top and Bottom Reinforcement, Shear Reinforcement and Punching).
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
Checks of PT floor stresses just after application of prestress (when dead load is minimal).
Service Design
Checks of PT floor stresses due to service loads. Rules for reinforcement bar based upon bar stress levels.
The new rule set design appears at the bottom of the window.
5 Select the active rules.
To delete a rule set:
Sustained Service Design
1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules. 2 Click Delete Rule Set Design.
Checks of PT floor compression stresses due to sustained loads.

Strength Design
A dialog box appears with a list of the current rule set designs.
3 Choose the rule set design to delete and click OK.
Rules to ensure section has sufficient strength in bending and shear for factored (or ultimate) moments, and minimum shear reinforcement.
40
RAM Concept
Chapter 13
13 Using a CAD Drawing

You can define the models geometry quickly if there is a CAD file (with .dwg or .dxf filename extension) available to use as a background. You trace the CAD drawing with object tools to facilitate the finite element mesh generation. You can also use the CAD drawing to locate other objects such as loads. Snap tools make tracing the imported CAD drawing easier.
3 Select the appropriate units and click OK.
Note: It is possible to import a CAD drawing with one set

of units into a model with another set of units.
13.1.2 Checking the imported information

When you import the drawing file, it will be visible on the Standard Plan of the Drawing Import Layer. You should verify that the plan scale is correct.
To check that the imported drawing is at the correct scale:
Note: RAM Concept itself does not recognize the meaning

of actual drawing lines. It is not necessary, however, to use a CAD file. If the floor is straightforward, or there is no drawing available, you should skip this chapter. For strip-like models that do not warrant the use of a CAD file, it may be better to use Strip Wizard.
1 Choose Layers > Drawing Import > Standard Plan. 2 Click Zoom Extent (
) to ensure that you are viewing
the entire CAD plan.

3 Select the Dimension tool (
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing

To use a background drawing you import the drawing and then verify that it is at the correct scale.
) and draw a dimension line between two snapable points that are a known distance apart. The distance between the two points will appear as a dimension. If this dimension is not as expected then the imported file may be in the wrong scale. Consider importing the drawing with different units to fix this problem.
13.1.1 Importing a CAD file

You can import a drawing at any time. An imported drawing overwrites any previously imported drawing. RAM Concept can work with either a .dwg or a .dxf file. It is typically best to use a .dwg file.
To import a CAD file:
13.1.3 Making the drawing visible on other plans

You can make the imported drawing visible on any plan through the Visible Objects dialog box. Usually you want to make it visible on the Mesh Input Standard Plan (for defining the floor geometry), and perhaps on some loading plans (for locations of line and point loads). You may choose to turn off some CAD layers if they clutter the drawing. If you happened to bring in an architectural drawing, it is probably a good idea to turn off the furniture. See Controlling views on page 11 for more information on making objects visible or hidden.
1 Choose File > Import Drawing. 2 Select the CAD drawing file you want to import.
The File Units dialog box will appear with a list of units. The units relate to the CAD file, not the Concept file.
RAM Concept
41
Chapter 13
42
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System

Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural System is referred to as RSS.
RAM Concept can import concrete structure information and loads from the RAM Structural System (Version 9.01 or higher) into a RAM Concept file. RAM Concept can also export support member forces back to RSS.
Story 1st 2nd
Import Type Elevated A B Mat Foundation C D
Table 14-1 Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type, and the slab area imported.
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM Structural System

RAM Concept allows the selective import of concrete members (slabs, beams, openings, columns and walls), applied loads and member loads from one story of a RAM Structural System database. Member loads can be from gravity and / or lateral analyses.
14.2.1 Definition of the import perimeter

The selected slab areas define the import perimeter. Only RAM Structural System support members within the import perimeter will be imported. For example, in Figure 14-1, if the 1st story elevated slab is imported with the columns above setting, the two furthermost right columns between the 1st story and 2nd story will not be imported as they are not within the slab perimeter of the 1st story elevated slab.
The following structural members can be imported:
14.2 Controlling which concrete members are imported

A story defined in the RAM Structural System can have two types of floors: elevated or mat foundation. The floor type designation determines which concrete members in the story are imported. Figure 14-1 and Table 14-1 show the relationship between the selected story, the import slab type and the slab area imported. Note that mats are below the designated story. For example, the 2nd story mat is the mat that supports the second story elevated floor.
1 Slabs
All slabs of the selected slab type.

2 Beams
All concrete beams from the selected story.

3 Openings and Penetrations
All openings and penetrations within the import perimeter.

4 Columns
Any column (below and / or above) whose center point lies inside the import perimeter.
5 Walls
Any wall (below and / or above) whose center line is contained by or crosses any part of the import perimeter.
6 Grids
All orthogonal and radial grids.
Note: All structural members are imported into RAM Concepts Mesh Import layer. Grids are imported into the Drawing Import layer.
Figure 14-1 The slab areas shown above (A,B,C,D) will be imported based upon the selections shown below.
RAM Concept
43
Chapter 14
14.3 About load importation

RAM Concept imports applied loads and analyzed member forces from the selected member group. Certain components of member loads are ignored when importing. The components that are ignored depend on the slab type, whether the member is supported, and whether the member forces are from gravity and lateral loads. The following table summarizes the force components that are imported onto a mat foundation and an elevated slab. Forces Imported Slab Type Loading Type Mat Mat Elevated Elevated Transfer Gravity Transfer Lateral Transfer Gravity Transfer Lateral Member Supported
not applicable not applicable none Fz, Mx, My
Table 14-3 shows how RSS load cases are mapped to Concept loading layers. RSS Load Case RAM Concept Loading Layer
Dead Live Live Reducible Live Unreducible Live Storage Live Roof Dead Load Ignored (imported as 3 individual live loadings) Live Reducible Live Unreducible Live Storage Live Load Roof
Member Unsupported
Fz, Mx, My Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My Fz Fz, Mx, My
Construction Dead Construction Dead Load Construction Live Mass Dead Ignored Ignored
Table 14-3 Mapping of RSS load cases
2 Transfer gravity loads
Table 14-2 Relationship between the slab type, member loading type, member support, and imported force components for a slab.
Concept imports transferred gravity loads from RSS members above the import slabs. The loads include member self-weight with the transferred gravity loads. The loads are imported as point loads into separate Concept loading layers. A new Concept transfer gravity loading layer is created for each RSS Load Case, as in Table 14-3, but with the string (transfer) appended to the name. For example, transfer loads from the RSS Dead load case are imported into the Concept Dead Load (transfer) loading layer. The Concept (transfer) loading layers are not created if the Transfer Gravity Loads are not imported.
3 Lateral Member Loads
For the purposes of Table 14-2, Concept considers any column, brace or wall to be supported if it rests upon a column or wall. Wall forces are resolved into a point load at each end of the wall. Walls above a slab may have different supported designations at each end (as one end may rest on a column or wall and the other may rest on a beam); in that case the import of each end force considers its end support condition separately.
The following loads can be imported:
1 Direct gravity loads
Point, line and area gravity loads applied directly to the imported slabs.
Lateral member forces (such as wind and seismic) from members above and below the imported slab are imported as point loads. The member loads are imported into a new loading layer for each analyzed load case in RSS. Concept creates the name for the new loading layer from the user's label and the RSS load type. For example, the name could be mySeismic(EQ_UBC97_X_+E_F).
Note: Mat foundation loads imported from the RAM Structural System will always be reduced during the import. For this reason you should always choose the live load reduction code of None in these files.
44
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14.4 Importing a database

You can import from the RAM Structural System at any time. An import overwrites some or all previously imported data, and may overwrite information you have directly input to RAM Concept. Refer to Reimporting a database for more information.
Note: Concept may not be able to import data correctly if

the RSS file does not pass the Data Check operation in the RAM Modeler module. It is strongly recommended that your RSS file have no errors before attempting to import it into Concept.
To import from the RAM Structural System:
1 Choose File > Import RAM Structural System.
If there is no open RAM Concept file the Open RAM Structural System Database dialog box will appear. Browse and select a RSS database (.rss) file and click OK. When a valid RSS database file is selected, the RAM Structural System dialog box in Figure 14-2 appears. The RSS filename selected appears after File: at the top of the window. You may click on the Browse button at the top of the window to select a different file with the file browser.
Note: If you select a file with a version prior to 9.0, an error will be displayed and you will be returned to the file browser. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the import operation. Note: If you are running RSS version 9, select RSS database files with the .ram extension.
2 Select the story and slab type. 3 Select the structural members from the check boxes under Structure.
Figure 14-2 RSS import dialog box
The dialog box makes Columns Below Slab, Walls Below Slab, Beams and Openings and Penetrations unavailable for a Mat Foundation.
4 Select the loadings from the check boxes under Loading.
The dialog box makes Direct Gravity Loads unavailable for a Mat Foundation.
5 Click OK to import the file, or Cancel to cancel the
import operation. After an RSS file is imported, a RAM Import Status dialog box, similar to that shown in Figure 14-3, appears with a summary and any warnings.
RAM Concept
45
Chapter 14 the loadings that Concept offers to remove. If you want to export the reactions from these pre-existing loads to RSS, you need to copy the loads from the original loadings to the corresponding RSS loadings that are being imported (after which you should manually delete the non-RSS loadings).
Note: If you have used the Export Geometry to RAM Structural System feature (section 34.2) prior to importing, then you always see this warning. The recommended workflow is to either draw the loads in RSS or draw the loads in Concept after importing from RSS; with either of these workflows, you can safely allow the loadings proposed for removal to be deleted.
Figure 14-3 Example of an import summary with warnings
The RSS geometry definitions and loads are now imported into RAM Concept. You can now generate the finite element mesh. See Chapter 17, Generating the Mesh.
Note: If you are reimporting there could be additional

dialog boxes that appear with more warnings.
Figure 14-4 Choices for dealing with new loadings
Note: Importing lateral analysis loads from RSS models

that contain a large number of lateral load cases will cause Concept to create a large number of load combinations which will result in sluggish performance.
RAM Concept will also prompt you to determine if you require rebuilding of the load combinations and design rules, as shown in Figure 14-5. You have three choices: Rebuild: load combinations and design rules in the RAM Concept file are rebuilt
14.5 Reimporting a database

If the information in the RAM Structural System database changes, the RAM Concept model will not be automatically updated. You can, however, reimport the changed information. Changes to structural members and loads made in RAM Concept can be lost when importing an RSS file, so care should be taken to avoid losing information.
Dont Rebuild: the new load cases are added to the RAM Concept file, but not included in the load combinations. Cancel: RAM Concept returns you to the file browser.
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts

If the Concept file has existing loadings that do not match the RSS loadings to be imported, a dialog box like that in Figure 14-4 asks if you want to keep or delete the existing loadings. If you have already specified (drawn) loads in the loadings that Concept has proposed to delete, then you should keep 46
Figure 14-5 Choices for dealing with new loadings
Note: When reimporting a particular member type, e.g. beams, all entities of that category are removed from the RAM Concept file before importing. For example, if beams are imported, all beams in the RAM Concept file are
RAM Concept
Chapter 14 removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM Concept will be lost. If beams are not selected for import, then beams in the RAM Concept file will not be affected when the file is reimported. A RSS Import Status dialog box will appear with a summary and any warnings.
5 Click OK.
Note: If any loading categories are selected, then ALL loads in reimported loading layers are removed. Any loads you have added manually on a loading layer being reimported will be lost.You have the option whether to regenerate load combinations or not.
RAM Concept always asks you to confirm a reimport operation, because it may lead to loss of information. It warns you if the data to be reimported would be significantly different from the previously imported data, or if significant information will be lost. For example, RAM Concept warns you when reimporting a mat foundation after previously importing an elevated slab, or vice versa.
To reimport from the RAM Structural System:
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions

14.6.1 Limitations
Not all information stored in a RAM Structural System database can be transferred into RAM Concept. RAM Concept models RAM Structural System data using either the ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05, AS 3600:2001, Eurocode 2: 2004, or BS 8110: 1997 building code. A RAM Structural System database that has live load reduction set to BS 6399, China GB, or Hong Kong will be imported using the BS 8110: 1997 building code; a live load reduction setting of Eurocode will be imported using the Eurocode 2: 2004 standard; a live load reduction setting of AS/NZS 1170-1 will be imported using the AS 3600:2001 building code; otherwise the building code set in RAM Concrete is used to set the RAM Concept code. The building code can be changed, if necessary after the importation is complete. RAM Concept does not model beam fixity. RAM Concept models a column end as fixed if the RAM Structural System column is fixed along either its major or minor axis. RAM Concept only models walls of constant height. RAM Concept will create a wall with the average height of the RAM Structural System wall. The lateral loads applied to the structure in RAM Frame Analysis are not imported. Concept ignores holes in walls modeled in RSS version 10.
1 Choose File > Import RSS.
A file dialog box will open with the name of the last RSS file you imported into this RAM Concept file.
2 Select the RSS file and click OK.
The file can be a different RSS file which may have a significant (and possibly negative) effect on the RAM Concept model. The RAM Structural System Import dialog box will appear with a list of options. The default options will be the story and slab type from the last import.
3 Select the story, slab type, structure and loading and click
OK. A New Loadings confirmation box may appear that describes loadings in the RSS file that are not in the current RAM Concept file. Click Replace, Add or Cancel. A confirmation box appears that warns about differences from previously imported data.
14.6.2 Defaults
RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties that are not defined in the RAM Structural System.
Beams
Surface elevation is 0.0.

Columns Figure 14-6 Examples of warnings for an import operation with different levels and structure type
Compressible is true. Roller is false, except above mat foundations. Columns above mat foundations are pinned at the top regardless of the setting in the RAM database.
4 Click Replace or Cancel.
RAM Concept
47
Chapter 14
Walls
Neither the top nor the bottom is fixed. Modeled as a Shear Wall. Modeled as compressible. The RAM Structural System cracked section factor is ignored.
RSS Load Case Type Sub-Type RAM Concept RAM Concept Loading Loading Force Level (Limit State)
Service * Service Ultimate * Service Ultimate
Wind
14.6.3 Assumptions
All loads are applied to the surface of the slab. Wall member forces are applied as two point loads at the endpoints of the wall that are statically equivalent to the wall forces and moments. Refer to Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 for mapping of RAM load cases and types to RAM Concepts loadings and force levels.
User defined Wind story forces all others Wind User defined Seismic story forces UBC 94 all others Eigen solution all others Seismic Seismic Ignored Ignored Seismic Ignored Ignored
Wind Seismic Seismic Seismic Dynamic Dynamic User defined story forces Center of rigidity Virtual Work
Ultimate *
RSS Load Type
RAM Concept Loading

Wind Seismic Seismic Ignored
RAM Concept Loading Force Level (Limit State)

Service * Ultimate * Ultimate *
Wind Seismic Other Virtual
Table 14-5 RAM Frame Load Cases
Note: * denotes assumed
Table 14-4 RAM Modeler Force Level Assumptions
Note: * denotes assumed
48
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15 Data Transfer from STAAD

The STAAD analysis and design program can transfer structure geometry and loading information to RAM Concept. STAAD starting Concept, the dialog box shown in Figure 15-1 opens.
15.1 STAAD Interface

In STAAD, you can select slabs elements, wall elements, column elements and beams for export into RAM Concept. You can also select STAAD load cases for export and associate them with Concept loading types. The STAAD interface allows you to either run Concept immediately with the exported data or to save the data to a GCFF file for later import into Concept. If the STAAD file changes (perhaps loads or column sizes change), you can update the Concept file by re-exporting the STAAD information. Please see the STAAD manuals for more information on the STAAD interface.
15.2 RAM Concept Interface

Figure 15-1 File options dialog box
15.2.1 Data Transfer Paths

RAM Concept can import STAAD information in four ways:
7 Concept is started by STAAD to create a new file. 8 Concept is started by STAAD to update a previously created
The options at the top of the dialog window are the same as for creating any new Concept file and are not discussed further here. The checkboxes at the bottom of the window allow you to import one or more of the following classes of information: slabs (including beams), walls, columns and loads.
file.
9 The Concept File menu item New From STAAD GCFF file is
chosen to create a new file.

10The Concept File menu item Update from STAAD GCFF file
15.2.3 Update file options in RAM Concept

When updating a Concept file with new STAAD information - either via the Update From STAAD GCFF file menu item or by STAAD starting Concept, the dialog box shown in Figure 15-2 opens.
is chosen to update an already opened Concept file.
15.2.2 New file options in RAM Concept

When creating a new file from STAAD information - either via the New from STAAD GCFF file menu item or by
RAM Concept
49
Chapter 15 behave slightly differently due to the operation being an update. For example if Columns is selected, all existing columns will be removed and new columns defined by the STAAD information. If Columns is not selected, no changes will be made to the columns in the Concept file.
Figure 15-2 Update file options dialog box
The options in the window are the same as those discussed in New file options in RAM Concept on page 49, but
50
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16 Defining the Structure

The easiest and recommended way to define the concrete structure is to use RAM Concepts automatic meshing facility (otherwise known as the Mesher). This approach requires that you define supports, slabs (of varying thickness), beams and openings with objects that Mesher uses to generate the finite element model. You do this on the Mesh Input Layers Standard Plan.
16.3.1 General column properties
16.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer

There is no set order in which you must define objects. Some people choose to draw supports first, whereas others draw the slab outline first. You can edit whatever drawn objects later. If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on the Mesh Input Plan before drawing the structure.
16.2 About columns and walls

RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you define columns and walls below and above the slab. Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support, only horizontal support and bending resistance.
Figure 16-1 Column properties: general
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification). Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of column. Support Set Defines the column as below or above the floor. Width Measured along the columns r-axis. Set to zero for round columns. Depth / Diameter Measured along the columns s-axis. Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. It determines the columns r-axis (and is usually zero). Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For example, you may expect an edge column to crack and rotate more than an internal column and so you might consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to increase a columns stiffness, but this is an unlikely scenario. Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in column.
16.3 Column properties

RAM Concept column properties are separated into two categories: general and live load reduction.
RAM Concept
51
Chapter 16 Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned. Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and yaxes) at far end; otherwise pinned. Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the zdirection according to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce results that are more accurate. fixity settings are somewhat different, and there is no Bending Stiffness Factor. The following is a list of RAM Concept wall properties: Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification). Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of wall. Support Set Defines the wall as below or above the floor.
16.3.2 Live load reduction column properties

See Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters on page 124.
Thickness Shear wall Locks the wall to the slab horizontally and thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can slide over the wall. Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between wall and slab about the walls r-axis; otherwise pinned. Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the walls r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned. Compressible Allows for the wall to elongate in the zdirection according to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce results that are more accurate.
16.4 Drawing columns

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one is above and one is below.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
Note: See Setting default properties on page 18 for

relevant information.
To draw a column:
16.6 Drawing walls

). The wall tool is very similar to the column tool except that it uses a line rather than a point. A wall can pass through a column, or intersect another wall.
1 Choose the Column tool ( 2 Click at the column center.
To copy columns from below to above:
1 Select the columns and choose Edit > Copy. 2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column objects
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
in the same location as the original column objects. The pasted columns are the active selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from below to
Note: The Wall tool ( ), Right Wall tool (
) & Left Wall tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a wall:
above in the Column Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation

then there are duplicated columns that do not allow the model to run properly. If you have copied a large number, it is tedious to delete the second column at each location (one by one).
1 Choose the Wall tool (
).
2 Click at the wall end center points.

To copy walls from below to above:
1 Select the walls and choose Edit > Copy. 2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall objects in
16.5 Wall properties

Wall properties are similar to column properties though instead of width, depth and angle there is thickness. The
the same location as the original wall objects. The pasted walls are the active selection.
above in the Wall Properties dialog box.
52
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16.7 About point and line supports

The result of defining a point support is a single support at a finite element node. The result of defining a line support is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite element edges. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered element in determining the support elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point supports or line supports at slab steps. All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth). Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal support is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps something other than a concrete wall provides the bracing). Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in zdirection for point supports and Translation in z-direction fixed for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch / membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab translation along or across the support could result in arch / membrane action.
Rotation about s-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the local s-axis.
16.9 Drawing point supports

Each point support is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point supports cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Support tool (
) and Line Support tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a point support:
1 Choose the Point Support tool ( 2 Click at the point support location.
).
16.10 Line support properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line support properties: Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the line support and the soffit. Translation along support fixed (OFF for line of symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving along the support axis. Translation across support fixed (ON for line of symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving across the support axis. Translation in z-direction fixed (OFF for line of symmetry) Prevents the slab from deflecting up or down at the support axis. Rotation about support axis fixed (ON for line of symmetry) Prevents rotation of the slab about the supports longitudinal axis. Rotation about perp.-to-support fixed (OFF for line of sym) Prevents rotation of the slab about the supports transverse axis.
16.8 Point support properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point support properties: Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the point support and the soffit. Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Allows you to set the local axes. Fixed in r-direction Prevents movement along the local r-axis. Fixed in s-direction Prevents movement along the local s-axis. Fixed in z-direction Prevents movement along the global z-axis. Rotation about r-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the local r-axis.
16.11 Drawing line supports

You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to model
RAM Concept
53
Chapter 16 only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor. R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local r-axis. S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local s-axis. Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis. R-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis. S-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis.
) and Line Support tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To drawing a line support:
1 Choose the Line Support tool ( 2 Click at the support end points.
).
16.12 About springs

The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a finite element node. The result of defining a line spring is one or more line springs that are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered element in determining the spring elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate springs at slab steps. All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab when using lateral springs and supports. Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps soil friction provides the bracing). Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force constant. R- and s-force constants could result in membrane action.
16.14 Drawing point springs

Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Spring tool (
), Line Spring tool ( ), Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a point spring:
1 Choose the Point Spring tool ( 2 Click at the spring location.
).
16.15 Line spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line spring properties: Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the line spring and the soffit. Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows spring orientation. R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local r-axis at each end.
16.13 Point spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point spring properties: Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the point spring and the soffit. Spring Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows spring orientation.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local s-axis at each end. Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis at each end. R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis at each end.
54
RAM Concept
Chapter 16 S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis at each end. S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform

you need to enter only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows linear variation of the force constant (or moment constant).
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform

you need to enter only one value.
Note: The force constant (or moment constant) can linearly vary in any direction. Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) varies you
need to enter three values, separated by commas (corners 1, 2 and 3). This allows linear variation of the force constant (or moment constant) in two directions. See Figure 16-2.
16.16 Drawing line springs

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool except that it uses a line rather than a point.
), Line Spring tool ( ), Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw a line spring:
Note: If you use the Quad-Area Spring tool to specify a varying force constant (or moment constant), Concept calculates the unique value of the fourth corner (three points define a plane).
1 Choose the Line Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
16.17 Area spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept area spring properties: Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the area spring and the soffit. Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows spring orientation. R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the r-axis. S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the s-axis. Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis. R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis.
Figure 16-2 Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units at the first three corners. For quad areas, Concept calculates the fourth corner value.
16.18 Drawing area springs

You use the Quad-Area Spring tool ( spring area corners. ) to locate the
), Line Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
To draw an area spring:
1 Choose the Area Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the vertices of the area spring (or enter the
coordinates in the command line).
RAM Concept
55
Chapter 16
3 Close the polygon by typing c in the command line or
clicking at the first vertex.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.
16.19 About floor areas and members

Objects representing slabs, beams and openings define floor areas and members. Often these objects overlap.
16.19.1 The priority method

At any floor location, only one thickness (depth) is used, and the object with the highest priority defines that thickness. The thicknesses of overlapping objects do not add to define the thickness. For example, you would expect the overall thickness of a drop panel located at a column to take priority over the slab thickness. By assigning a Priority to each object, the automatic mesh generator understands how to generate the finite elements. The lowest Priority is 1. This is so that you can keep adding beams, thickenings and slab areas with higher priorities. There is no limit to the highest priority (other than your computer and text overflow).
Figure 16-4 The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from Figure 16-3.
16.20 Slab area properties

Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and behavior. The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area properties:
Note: Overlapping objects for slabs, beams and openings

must have different priorities. Priority numbers need not be sequential.
Note: Supports do not have priorities.
Figure 16-5 Slab area properties - general
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification).

Figure 16-3 Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input Standard Plan
Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness. Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value RAM Concept
56
Chapter 16 (such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using different surface elevations for different areas. Priority Generally, the typical slab thickness has a Priority of 1. No-torsion 2-way slab The slab behaves like a twoway slab, except that it has only minimal torsional stiffness (Mrs). Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In general, we do not recommend using this option. Refer to Orthotropic behavior on page 328 for further information on the use of Behavior properties.
16.21 Drawing slab areas

Use the Slab Area tool ( ) to define the slab area by clicking on each consecutive point (vertex). To close the polygon, click on the first polygon point or type c and press Return.
To draw a slab area:
1 Choose the Slab Area tool (
).
2 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.

Figure 16-6 Slab area properties - behavior
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
type c and press Return).
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a two way slab with identical properties in all directions (isotropic), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the slab is not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counterclockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis which is used along with the other slab area properties to define the behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90 degrees counter-clockwise from the r-axis. Behavior This defines the slab areas behavior type. It has four possible designations: Two-way slab The slab is isotropic and behaves in the same manner in all directions. One-way slab The slab has normal bending stiffness along the r-axis and about the s-axis (Ms). The slab has only minimal bending stiffness in the perpendicular direction (Mr). The slab also has reduced torsional stiffness (Mrs). The in-plane stiffnesses are not affected by this setting.
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight

edges.
16.22 About beams

In RAM Concept, you model beams as thickened slabs with the beam tool. You can assign properties that differentiate beam behavior from slab behavior.
16.23 Beam properties

Beam properties fall into two categories: general and behavior.
RAM Concept
57
Chapter 16 The following is an explanation of RAM Concept beam properties: The beam behavior properties are very similar to the slab area properties. The beam R-Axis is automatically set to the beam longitudinal axis. Behavior This defines the beams behavior type. It has four possible values: Standard The beam is isotropic and behaves in the same manner in all directions. No-torsion The beam behaves like a two-way slab, except that it has only minimal torsional stiffness (Mrs). Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In general, we do not recommend using this option.
16.24 Drawing beams

Figure 16-7 Beam properties - general
You draw a beam by clicking the start and end points of its centerline using the Beam tool ( ). Each beam has six control points. The four additional points are automatically located so that the beam-ends are perpendicular to the sides. You can stretch the corner grip points to define mitered corners.
To draw a beam:
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification). Thickness is the same as beam depth. Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value (such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using different surface elevations for different areas. Width The beam width automatically appears to scale. Priority Generally, beams have higher priorities than slabs.
1 Choose the Beam tool (
).
2 Click at the each end of the beam centerline.

To define mitered corners on a beam:
1 Select the beam and choose the Stretch tool (
).
2 Snap to the beam corner grips and stretch them into
position.
16.25 Slab opening properties

There is only one slab opening property: Priority Generally, openings have the highest priorities in the floor.
16.26 Drawing slab openings

The Slab Opening tool ( slab.
Figure 16-8 Beam properties - behavior To draw a slab opening:
) defines an opening in the
1 Choose the Slab Opening tool (
). RAM Concept
58
Chapter 16
2 Click at each slab-opening vertex consecutively. 3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
16.27 Checking the structure definition

After you have fully defined the structures geometry, you should check for obvious errors. RAM Concept flags illegal modeling when generating the mesh. A list of possible errors appears in Chapter 17, Generating the Mesh. Once you have drawn all the support and floor objects on the Mesh Input Plan, you must generate the actual finite element mesh. The structure does not exist until you generate the mesh.
Note: You approximate curves with a series of straight

edges.
RAM Concept
59
Chapter 16
60
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17 Generating the Mesh

There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in RAM Concept: Using the automatic meshing facility that uses the mesh input objects described in Chapter 16, Defining the Structure. Using the manual meshing tools. The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the recommended method for nearly all models. The second method allows more control over mesh intensity. The mesh size can be more widely varied in different areas of the floor, but editing is more difficult. Instructions for the second (manual) method are in Chapter 18, Manually Drawing the Finite Elements. The dialog box shown in Figure 17-1 will appear.
Figure 17-1 Generate mesh dialog box
2 Specify the Element Size in the Generate Mesh dialog
box.
17.1 Generating the mesh automatically

Finite elements do not exist (and hence there is no structure) until the mesh has been generated. You need to have defined the mesh input objects (using the procedure described in the preceding chapter) before generating the mesh. It is preferable to generate the mesh as soon as possible, although it is possible to draw additional objects on other layers (such as loads) before generation.
3 Click Generate.
The time taken to generate the mesh depends upon the size of the floor and the specified mesh element size. For most models, the mesh generates in less than 15 seconds.
Note: Every time you generate a mesh, RAM Concept deletes any existing mesh and generates a new one.
17.1.2 Limitations of the automatic meshing
The main automatic meshing limitation is that the minimum element size is 50 mm (0.164 feet). Concept can usually overcome this limitation by adjusting the mesh input objects to generate a mesh. Concept moves mesh input line objects (for example, walls, line supports) to accommodate point objects (for example, columns, point supports). Concept automatically adjusts the mesh input objects if: Two control points are closer than the minimum element size. A control point is closer to a line than the minimum element size.
17.1.1 Deciding what mesh element size to use

When generating the mesh you need to decide what element size to use. The maximum is 32.8 feet (10 meters). To speed the analysis, it is useful to choose a coarse mesh for preliminary design and a fine mesh for final design. A coarse mesh might have an element size of span length / 6. A fine mesh might have an element size of span length / 12. If in doubt, you should investigate the effects of different mesh element sizes.
To generate the mesh automatically:
1 Click Generate Mesh (
).
Note: Concept generates warnings during the meshing if it was necessary to make adjustments. You can stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue, you should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satisfactory. Note: Concept generates a warning if two slab areas (or beams or openings) with the same priority overlap. You can stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue you
RAM Concept
61
Chapter 17 should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satisfactory as the choice of which slab area (or beam) governs the elements is effectively random.
Note: Concept moves two columns to the same point that you draw closer than the minimum element size.
A mesh generates but the model does not run properly if: A column or point support is outside of the slab areas. A wall or line support is partially outside the slab areas. An area spring is completely outside the slab areas. Two columns or walls of the same support set are duplicated (intersecting walls are allowed).
To avoid mesh warnings: Figure 17-2 Mesh before Design Strips
Do any one of the following:

1 Adjust objects on the Mesh Input plan so that the minimum element size dimension (or more) separates them. 2 Edit priorities so that slab areas, beams and openings
with the same priorities do not overlap.
17.1.3 Viewing the finite element mesh

You can view the finite element mesh on any plan, but the Standard Plan of the Element layer is the preferred plan to use.
To view the finite element mesh: Figure 17-3 Mesh after drawing Design Strips and Regenerating.
1 Open Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
The mesh generated at this stage appears to be somewhat random. This is normal and in fact, for sensible mesh sizes it produces highly satisfactory design results. At times, however, such a mesh (adversely) affects the contour plots.
17.2 Selectively refining the mesh

Although there is no setting that makes the mesh finer in some areas than others, you can employ a trick to achieve this.
17.1.4 Improving the mesh

You can significantly improve the mesh once design strips are drawn. The following diagrams show the differences.
17.2.1 Using point and line supports to refine the mesh

You can draw dummy point or line supports to ensure that the mesh is finer in particular areas. You must ensure that all fixity boxes are unchecked, as shown in Figure 17-4 and Figure 17-5. A refined mesh example is shown in Figure 17-6.
62
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
Figure 17-4 Point support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked.
Figure 17-5 Line support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked
Figure 17-6 Two slabs, identical in every way except for the implementation of line supports to refine the mesh.
RAM Concept
63
Chapter 17
64
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
18 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements

Note: In most cases, you do not need to draw the finite element mesh manually. If you have used the automatic method, there is no need to read this chapter
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in RAM Concept: Using the automatic meshing facility, described in Chapter 17, Generating the Mesh, that uses the mesh input objects, described in Chapter 16, Defining the Structure. Using the manual meshing tools described in this chapter. The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the recommended method for nearly all models. The second method allows more control over mesh intensity: the mesh size can be more widely varied in different areas of the floor. The method is, however, more prone to user error and editing is more difficult. Do not use the manual method to supplement a mesh made with the automatic meshing facility. This is because manual elements would be lost if you used the mesh generation facility. For example, if you added a column element above in the element layer it would be lost when you regenerated. Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification). Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of column. Support Set Defines the column as below or above the floor. Width Measured along the columns r-axis. Set to zero for round columns. Depth / Diameter Measured along the columns s-axis. Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. It determines the columns r-axis (and is usually zero). Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For example, you may expect an edge column to crack and rotate more than an internal column and so you might consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to increase a columns stiffness, but this is an unlikely scenario. Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in column. Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
18.1 Using the Element layer

There is no set order in which you must define objects. Most people choose to draw supports first. If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on the Element Standard Plan before drawing the structure.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and yaxes) at far end; otherwise pinned. Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the zdirection according to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce results that are more accurate.
18.2 About column elements and wall elements

RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you define columns and walls below and above the slab. Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support, only horizontal support and bending resistance.
18.4 Drawing column elements

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one is above and one is below.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw

column elements at slab element nodes.
To draw a column element:
18.3 Column element properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept column element properties:
1 Choose the Column Element tool ( 2 Click at the column center.

To copy columns from below to above:
).
1 Select the column elements and choose Edit > Copy.
RAM Concept
65
Chapter 18
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column elements in the same location as the original column elements. The pasted column elements are the active selection. 3 Change the Support Set property from below to
A wall element can pass through a column element, or intersect another wall element.

wall elements along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of the wall elements must be at slab element nodes. Wall elements cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw wall elements on slab elements:
above in the Column Element Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation then there are duplicated column elements that do not allow the model to run properly. If you have copied a large number, it is tedious to delete the second column element at each location (one by one).
1 Choose the Wall Element tool ( 2 Click at the wall end center points.
).
To draw wall elements where there are no slab elements:
1 Choose the Wall Element tool (
).
18.5 Wall element properties

Wall element properties are similar to column element properties though instead of width, depth and angle there is thickness. The fixity settings are somewhat different, and there is no Bending Stiffness Factor. The following is a list of RAM Concept wall element properties: Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification). Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of wall element. Support Set Defines the wall element as below or above the floor. Thickness Shear wall Locks the wall element to the slab horizontally and thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can slide over the wall. Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between the wall element and the slab about the wall elements r-axis; otherwise pinned Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall elements r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned. Compressible Allows for wall element to elongate in the z-direction according to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce results that are more accurate.
2 Click at the wall end center points. 3 Specify the number of elements in the Wall Element Tool
dialog box and click OK.

To copy walls from below to above:
1 Select the wall elements and choose Edit > Copy. 2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall elements
in the same location as the original wall element objects. The pasted wall elements are the active selection.
above in the Wall Element Properties dialog box.
18.7 About point and line supports

The result of defining a point support is a single support at a finite element node. The result of defining a line support is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered element in determining the support elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point supports or line supports at slab steps. All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth). Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal support is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps something other than a concrete wall provides the bracing). Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in zdirection for point supports and Translation in z-direction RAM Concept
18.6 Drawing wall elements

The wall element tool is very similar to the column tool except that it uses a line rather than a point.
66
Chapter 18 fixed for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch / membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab translation along or across the support could result in arch / membrane action.
To drawing a line support on slab elements:
1 Choose the Line Support tool ( 2 Click at the support end points.
).
18.12 About springs 18.8 Point support properties

See Point support properties on page 53 for more information on point support properties. The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a finite element node. The result of defining a line spring is one or more line springs that are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered element in determining the spring elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate springs at slab steps. All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab when using lateral springs and supports. Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps soil friction provides the bracing). Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force constant. R- and s-force constants could result in membrane action.
18.9 Drawing point supports

You draw point supports by clicking at their location with the Point Support tool ( ( ).
) and Line Support tool ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.

point supports at slab element nodes.
To draw a point support:
1 Choose the Point Support tool ( 2 Click at the point support location.
).
18.10 Line support properties

See Line support properties on page 53 for more information on line support properties.
18.11 Drawing line supports

You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to model only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
18.13 Point spring properties

See Point spring properties on page 54 for more information on point spring properties.

(
) and Line Support tool ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.

line supports along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of the line supports must be at slab element nodes. Line supports cannot traverse a slab finite element.
RAM Concept
67
Chapter 18
18.14 Drawing point springs

Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
18.18 Drawing area springs

You use the Tri-Area Spring tool ( Spring tool ( ) or the Quad-Area
), Line Spring tool ( ), Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.
) and locate the spring area corners.

point springs at slab element nodes.
To draw a point spring:
To draw a Tri-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Tri-Area Spring tool (
).
1 Choose the Point Spring tool ( 2 Click at the spring location.
).
2 Click at the three corner point locations of the area
spring.
To draw a Quad-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Quad-Area Spring tool (
).
18.15 Line spring properties

See Line spring properties on page 54 for more information on line spring properties.
2 Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.
18.16 Drawing line springs

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool except that it uses a line rather than a point.
18.19 About floor areas

You define floor slabs and beams manually with the slab meshing tools. Drawing elements manually requires more thought on the drawing process. Poor decisions could require a significant amount of editing and duplication of work. Drawing elements manually also requires careful application of the tools to ensure that the side of each element is the same length as the adjacent element. In other words, each element node must be at the corner of any element that touches it. Elements cannot overlap. You model beam elements as thickened slab elements with the same slab element tools. You model openings as empty spaces in the mesh.

line springs along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of the line springs must be at slab element nodes. Line springs cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw a line spring:
1 Choose the Line Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
18.20 Slab element properties 18.17 Area spring properties

See Area spring properties on page 55 for more information on area spring properties. Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and behavior. The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area properties: Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification). Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness. 68 RAM Concept
Chapter 18 Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value (such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using different surface elevations for different areas. operation using the Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) or
the Poly Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ). This would often mean drawing slab panels (with columns in the corners) in one operation.
Note: The Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool (

Slab Mesh Elements tool ( Element layer toolbar. edges.
To draw a rectangular slab mesh area:
) and Poly ) share the same button on the
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight
1 Choose the Rect Slab Mesh Elements (
) tool.
2 Click at two opposite corners of the rectangle. 3 Specify the element size in the Rect Mesh Tool dialog
box and click OK.

To draw a polygon slab mesh area:
1 Choose the Poly Slab Mesh Elements (
) tool.
2 Click at each slab panel vertex consecutively.

Figure 18-1 Slab element properties - behavior

4 Specify the element size in the Poly Mesh Tool dialog
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a two way slab with identical properties in all directions (isotropic), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the slab is not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counterclockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis which is used along with the other slab area properties to define the behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90 degrees counter-clockwise from the r-axis. KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs, KVrs Relative stiffnesses (compared to isotropic slab stiffness). Refer to Orthotropic behavior on page 328 for further information on the use of Behavior properties.
box and click OK.

To draw a single mesh element:
1 Choose one of the single element tools (
).
2 Click at each of the three (or four) slab panel vertices
consecutively.
18.22 A few final words

Do not click Generate Mesh ( ) after drawing the mesh elements manually. It deletes all the elements that you have drawn.
18.21 Drawing the slab elements

You can draw slab elements one or more at a time. Usually you would attempt to draw as many as practical in one
RAM Concept
69
Chapter 18
70
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
19 Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area loads and moments on any loading plan. These loads can be in the directions of the global x-, y- and z-axes and the moments can be about the global x- and y-axes. Each load belongs to a loading layer, such as Live Loading. You define each loading in the loadings window, and draw the loads on plans. There is no limitation to the number of loads defined. Loads are independent of the finite element mesh and have no effect on the automatic mesh generation. This is satisfactory for most loads. For very heavy point or line loads (such as on a mat or transfer slab), however, the loads should correlate with the finite element mesh nodes. You can do this by drawing pinned columns and walls above the floor, and drawing the loads at these locations with the help of snaps. Alternatively, you can refine the mesh locally with the use of dummy slab objects. Refer to Selectively refining the mesh on page 62 for further information. Horizontal loads may cause applied moments depending upon the elevation above the slab surface of the loads. If a load is located at a slab surface step, RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered slab element in determining the load elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point or line loads at steps. Importing a CAD drawing may assist you in drawing loads.
19.3 Point load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point load properties: Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the point load and the slab surface. Fx Point force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force). Fy Point force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal force). Fz Point force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical force). Mx Point moment about the global x-axis. My Point moment about the global y-axis.
Note: Although point loads need not be located at a finite

element node, you should consider locating very large loads at nodes. Point loads must be located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs. See

Chapter 8, Choosing Sign Convention.
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the load at the slab centroid.
19.1 About self-weight 19.4 Drawing point loads

RAM Concept automatically calculates the floors selfweight for the Self-Dead Loading. Each point load is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
To draw a point load:
19.2 About superposition of loads

Point loads cannot be at the same location on the same loading layer. Line loads can intersect or overlap, but cannot have the exact same length and location on the same loading layer. Area Loads can overlap, but cannot have the exact same shape and location on the same loading layer. Overlapping loads are additive.
1 Choose the Point Load tool (
).
2 Click at the load location (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
19.5 Line load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line load properties: Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the line load and the slab surface. Fx Line force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
RAM Concept
71
Chapter 19 Fy Line force in the direction of global y-axis at each end (horizontal force). Fz Line force in the direction of global z-axis at each end (vertical force). Mx Line moment about the global x-axis at each end. My Line moment about the global y-axis at each end.
19.6 Drawing line loads

There are two line load tools.
19.6.1 Standard line load

The line load tool is very similar to the point load tool except that it uses two points rather than one point.
To draw a line load:
Note: If the line force (or moment) is uniform you need to

enter only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment). See Figure 19-1.
1 Choose the Line Load tool (
).
2 Click at the load end points (or enter the coordinates in
the command line).
Note: Although line loads need not be located at a finite element node, you should consider locating very large loads at element edges. Line loads must be completely located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule. Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs. Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments
unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the load at the slab centroid.
19.6.2 Perimeter line load

The perimeter line load tool facilitates the drawing of multiple line load objects around the perimeter, with or without an offset.
To draw a perimeter line load:
1 Choose the Perimeter Line Load tool ( 2 Click anywhere on the slab.
).
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter the Inset Distance, and click Apply.
19.7 Area load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept area load properties: Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the area load and the slab surface. Fx Area force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force). Fy Area force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal force).
Figure 19-1 Line load properties varying from 10 to 20 units.
Fz Area force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical force). Mx Area moment about the global x-axis.
72
RAM Concept
Chapter 19 My Area moment about the global y-axis.
19.8 Drawing area loads

You use the Area Load tool ( vertices. ) to locate the area load
Note: If the area force (or moment) is uniform you need to

enter only one value per axis.
Note: The area force (or moment) can linearly vary in any direction. The area force variation could be for snowdrift, or sloping soil. Note: If the area force (or moment) varies you need to enter three values, separated by commas (vertices 1, 2 and 3). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment) in two directions. See Figure 19-2. Note: If you use more than three vertices, Concept calculates the unique value at all vertices (three points define a plane).
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it is satisfactory to make the load oversize. RAM Concept ignores any part of an area load that is not on a floor element. Exaggerating the size too much affects the automatic printing and zooming bounds.
To draw an area load:
1 Choose the Area Load tool (
).
2 Click at the vertices of the area load (or enter the coordi-
Note: Area loads must be at least partially located on finite

elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule. Concept ignores any part of an area load not on a finite element.
nates in the command line).

3 Close the polygon by typing c in the command line or
clicking at the first vertex.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs. Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the load at the slab centroid.
19.9 Copying loads

You can copy loads from one Loading plan to another. This is convenient since in practice most loads have values for more than one loading.
To copy a load from one loading to another:
1 Select the load and choose Edit > Copy. 2 Open the loading plan to which you wish to paste. 3 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new load in the same
plan location as the original load. The pasted load is the active selection.
4 Edit the properties of the new load.
Note: You can copy, paste and edit multiple loads simultaneously.
Figure 19-2 Area load properties varying from 10 to 20 to 30 units at the first three vertices. Concept calculates the values at all other vertices.
RAM Concept
73
Chapter 19
74
RAM Concept
Chapter 20
20 Creating Pattern Loading

RAM Concept generates pattern loadings based upon the load patterns that you draw. About load pattern on page 32 explains the principle of load pattern.
To Draw Load Patterns:
1 Choose Layers > Pattern. 2 Open one of the load pattern plans (from Load Pattern 1
through Load Pattern 10).

3 Double click the Pattern Load tool (
).
20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use

Mathematically, there could a large number of floor pattern loadings, which would all have different results. For practical reasons, the maximum number of load patterns is ten. This allows you to draw five load patterns in each direction. Typical pattern loading configurations are:
4 Specify which pattern number you wish to use (the
number should correspond to the load pattern plans number). Draw the on-pattern areas with a polygon.
5 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively. 6 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or

7 Repeat for all patterns.
Note: Regardless of which load pattern plan you are using,

the pattern number will be the last one specified. You will need to change this for each different pattern plan.
20.3 Load pattern filtering

Internally, RAM Concept resolves a pattern loading by determining which slab and beam finite elements are partially or wholly within the related load pattern. The loads on these elements (the element loads) are multiplied by the on-pattern factor. For elements totally outside the pattern, the element loads are multiplied by the off-pattern factor.
Figure 20-1 Beam Pattern Loadings. Note that these will not necessarily produce the maximum negative moments, but they will produce moments that are very close to the maximum and represent a practical solution in most situations.
Thus, RAM Concepts calculation pattern areas approximate the pattern areas that you draw. You should consider this when drawing load patterns and choosing mesh size as it will affect the actual pattern loadings generated.
20.2 Drawing load patterns

You draw load patterns as part of the pattern loading process.
20.3.1 Effect of mesh on load pattern

The finite element mesh regularity and intensity has an effect on the load pattern process. The following example best explains the process.
RAM Concept
75
Chapter 20
Load pattern for four-panel slab Actual pattern areas for an irregular fine mesh
Figure 20-2 To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this load pattern. Actual pattern areas for an irregular coarse mesh
Figure 20-4 With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and there will be less additional area load in the pattern loading. Actual pattern areas for a regular coarse mesh
Figure 20-3 The point load and some additional area load will be included in the pattern loading.
Figure 20-5 This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that closely resembles the load pattern.
76
RAM Concept
Chapter 20 Drawing design strips significantly improves the mesh. See Chapter 17, Generating the Mesh for more information on improving the mesh.
Note: The mesh becomes more regular if you generate or regenerate after design strips are drawn.
RAM Concept
77
Chapter 20
78
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21 Defining Design Strips

Note: Design strips are perhaps the most important tool in RAM Concept. It is highly recommended that the designer takes the time to fully understand what a design strip does, and how to use them. If you use design strips improperly then the results will be meaningless.
Finite element analysis often produces high peak moments and stress concentrations which are inappropriate for calculation of reinforcement and evaluating performance. Code rules are generally intended for strip methods that assume an averaging (or smearing) of moment and shear across a designated width, such as a column strip. RAM Concept uses design strips and design sections to link finite element analysis with concrete code rules and concrete design. three Span Segment Strips (left, center and right). These are known as design strips. See Figure 21-1 for further explanation.
21.1 Definition of a design strip

A design strip is an object that: contains a series of cross sections at specific locations is usually the length of a span, or part of a span, but can in fact have any length within the structure integrates resultants (moments, shears, axial forces, torsions) for all load combinations along each cross section (and, hence, across the design strips width) applies appropriate code rules to the resultants A design strip is the same as a span segment strip.
21.2 Design strip terminology

It is important to understand the different objects used to define design strips. Span segment A line segment-line entity that is intended to indicate a portion of a structural span or a whole structural span. The at support properties of the Span Segment indicate where the span starts and stops. Span One or more connected Span Segments that together make up a single structural span. Nearly all spans require only one Span Segment. Frame One or more Spans that are connected together to form a continuous line of spans. Span Segment Strip A set of cross sections associated with a Span Segment. The Span Segment can have up to
Figure 21-1 Design strips for a two-way flat plate.
21.3 Understanding how a design strip works

RAM Concept generates design strips from span segments. A design strip is normally the length of a span with a logical width. Concept subdivides each individual design strip segment according to the following parameters: minimum number of divisions
RAM Concept
79
Chapter 21 maximum division spacing support width changes in concrete section along the span Concept locates a design strip cross section at the start of each division, plus one at the end. The length of each cross section equals the width of the design strip at that location. See Figure 21-2.
Note: You can specify the minimum number of divisions as zero, such that, with a large maximum spacing, the number of cross sections is zero. This could be useful to help generate span segment widths.
Concept modifies the geometrical properties of each design strip cross section according to the cross section trimming and inter cross section slope limit settings. Concept integrates the resultants for each load combination along the length of each design strip cross section (and hence across the width of the design strip). See Figure 213. Concept uses some properties of each span segment to determine applicable code rules (beam or slab, posttensioned or reinforced) for the corresponding design strip. Concept applies the code rules to the envelope of the load combination integrals within a rule set. Other span segment properties (reinforcement bar sizes, cover) facilitate the actual code rule calculations. See Span segment properties on page 82 for more information. Concept separates design strips into two sets: latitude and longitude. The two sets are for convenience and recognize that concrete floors should be designed in two directions.
Figure 21-2 Column strip and two middle strips belonging to one span with cross sections visible.
Note: As with all plans, you can rename the Latitude Design Strip Plan and Longitude Design Strip Plan by choosing Layer > Rename.
Figure 21-3 Moment about the y-axis (My) plotted across one cross section of three design strips.
21.4 The design strip process

This is best explained by Figure 21-4. 80 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Step 1 - Create the Span Segments
Specify the default span segment properties
EITHER
AND / OR
Generate Span Segments

(and supplement and adjust if necessary)
Draw Span Segments

(manually)
Step 2 - Create Span Segment Strips

You create Span Segment Strips from Span Segments with the Generate Strips command. You cannot draw or directly edit Span Segment Strips.
Step 3A - Examine Span Segment Strips

Check the Lock Generated Strips box of any Span Segment that has satisfactory strips.
Step 3B - Edit Span Segment Properties

Use the strip generation tab of the Span Segment properties dialog to modify the Span Segment Strips.
Step 3C - Edit Span Segments manually

Use the Span Boundary, Strip Boundary, and Orient Span Cross Section tools to control the strip generation.
Step 3D - Set cross section trimming

This enables you to modify the concrete section used for shear and flexure calculations.
Continue
Figure 21-4 Flow diagram of the design strip process
RAM Concept
81
Chapter 21
21.5 Span segment properties

Span segment properties serve different purposes. RAM Concept uses properties to determine the following: design method (e.g. inclusion of axial force) design strip width and cross section geometry appropriate code design rules (e.g. beam or slab) reinforcement live load reduction The following is an explanation of Concept span segment properties:
Consider Axial Force in Strength Design Uses the net section axial force in bending design. This is a very important setting related to the effect of axial force resultants (not necessarily axial loads) in a cross section. If you select this option, Concept includes the interaction of the axial force with the bending in the cross section strain calculations, similar to typical column design using strain compatibility. We generally recommend the consideration of axial forces in strength design. For sections with net axial compression this will tend to reduce the reinforcement demand while for sections with net axial tension it will typically increase the reinforcement demand. Consider as Post-Tensioned Enables Concept to decide which code rules are used. This determines if the design strip segment is checked for initial service design code rules (for the Initial Service LC) and whether RC or PT code rules are used (some codes do not make this distinction).
Note: If consider as post-tensioned is not used then Concept ignores tendons in strength calculations.
Dont reduce integrated M and V due to sign change The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less than that for a shorter sub- cross section. When this option is selected, the design forces are always more conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due consideration.
Figure 21-5 Span segment properties - General
See Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option on page 339 for explanation.
Span Set Determines the set the span segment belongs to: latitude or longitude. Environment The environment setting affects which service rules Concept selects in some codes. Refer to the appropriate code discussion chapter for more information: Section 52.5.4 on page 398 and Section 52.6.10 on page 404 for relevance to ACI318-02. Section 54.6.15 on page 443 for relevance to AS3600. Section 55.5.4 on page 453 for relevance to BS8110. Section 56.5.4 on page 476 for relevance to IS 456. Section 57.5 on page 476 for relevance to EC2.
Note: This setting has a significant effect on reinforcement

quantities.
Figure 21-6 Span segment properties - Strip Generation
82
RAM Concept
Chapter 21 Span Width Calc This determines how Concept calculates the span width. The choices are: Automatic: this applies (sometimes fallible) logic to calculate the span width as the closest of: the Span Boundaries (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment) the slab edges half-way to the nearby spans or walls Manual: this overrides the automatic calculation and determines span widths by the closest Span Boundary items (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment). See Drawing span segments manually on page 86 for further information. the web with plus 0.07 times the span length plus 0.2 times the overhanging flange width on either side, not to exceed 0.14 times the span length (EC2 only) Manual: the column strip width is the narrower of: the span width the Strip Boundaries (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment) Design Column Strip for Column + Middle Strip Resultants instructs Concept to combine the column and middle strip forces into a single resultant at the centroid of the column strip cross section. The middle strip cross sections will still be generated, but the resulting forces in them will be zero. This can be useful, for example, when designing a beam with a column strip sized for the effective flange width and middle strips for the slab between the beam effective flanges. Using this option in this scenario will result in the beam cross section being designed for all forces in the entire bay. The middle strip cross sections will not have any design forces, but can still be designed for minimum reinforcement. Skew Angle The angle between the design strip cross section and a line perpendicular to the span segment. The typical value is zero. Min Number of Divisions Determines how many design cross sections per span. For N divisions there are N+1 design cross sections. It is generally advisable to make N an even number. The upside of more divisions is greater design accuracy; RAM Concepts ability to find critical design locations and length of reinforcement is a function of the number of divisions. The downside of more divisions is that calculating takes longer; for large models, you might consider using a small number of divisions (say, 4) and then increasing the number for final design (but you should consider the effect of the next property). There is no reason for all design strips to have the same number of divisions. Should you be designing a transfer beam within a flat plate it would probably make sense to have more divisions for the beam design strip. Max Division Spacing Overrides the Min Number of Divisions with an upper bound on division spacing. Detect Supports and Edges Automatically (resets supports and widths below) This detects: the presence of supports at ends of span segments and overrides Consider End as Support and Support Width.
Note: When the Manual setting is used in a strip segment,

all of the span boundaries for that strip segment must be defined. A strip segment generates a span width of zero when some of its length does not have any span boundaries defined. Column Strip Width Calc This determines how the column strip width is determined. The term column strip width is used for more than flat slabs with column and middle strips. The choices are: Full Width: this is typical for PT slabs designed to ACI318 and TR43. The column strip width is the same as the span width. Code Slab: this is typical for two-way RC slabs, and two-way PT slabs designed to AS3600. The column strip width is the narrower of: the span width the Strip Boundaries (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment) a fraction of the distance to the adjacent spans or supports (for all current codes this fraction is 0.25) a fraction of the span length on each side of the span line (for all current codes this fraction is 0.25) Code T-beam: the column strip width is the narrower of: the span width the Strip Boundaries (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment) the web width plus 8 times the flange thickness on either side (ACI codes only) 25% of the span length (ACI codes only) the web width plus 0.07 times the span length on either side (AS 3600 and BS 8110 only) the web width plus 0.058 times the span length plus 3 times the flange thickness on either side (IS 456 only) RAM Concept
83
Chapter 21 where the span spine is near the slab edge and pulls back the closest cross section by x, where x is the bar end cover plus 1 inch / 25 mm. This is done by setting the support width to x. If the spine end near the slab edge has detected a support, then the slab edge detection is NOT performed (and the regular support width calcs are used). Consider End 1 as Support These checkboxes allow Concept to determine your interpretation of spans in the structure. This determination of spans affects how Concept applies code rules that are span-related, including determining support regions, span regions and areas used in live load reduction. Support Width at End 1 The dimension of the support parallel to the design strip. The support width determines where the first and last design strip cross sections are located. Their locations are at half the support width (measured in the direction of the span) from the ends of the design strip. This is to facilitate reduction of moments to face of supports (it is thus important to start and end design strips at the center of supports). It is conservative to enter the support width as zero. CS Top Bar The label used to identify the top face reinforcing bar used for flexural design. CS Bottom Bar The label used to identify the bottom face reinforcing bar used for flexural design. CS Shear Bar The label used to identify the reinforcing bar used for one-way shear design. The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria > Materials. It is possible for different design strips to have different bars. After completing the calculation process, RAM Concept reports design strip reinforcement requirements based upon the bars specified in the design strip properties. You can view the required reinforcement area in plots and tables. CS Top Cover Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars. CS Bottom Cover Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars. CS Legs in Shear Reinforcement Determines the area of vertical shear reinforcement by multiplying the number of legs by the Shear Bar area. CS Torsion Design The method used for torsion design. See Torsion Considerations on page 352 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes for further explanation. CS Design System The design system (beam / one-way slab / two-way slab) for the design strip. Minimum reinforcement and other rules are dependent upon what type of system is in use in the span. For example, the minimum requirements for beam stirrups are different to those for a one-way slab. CS Service Design Type (Eurocode 2 only) The service design type for members defined as PT for the design strip. The choices are: Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as prescribed in TR43. Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance with Eurocode 2 clause 7.2/7.3. Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack Width design. See Chapter 57, BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) with TR43 Design for additional information. CS Crack Width Limit (Eurocode 2 only) The crack width limit wmax to use when designing for Eurocode 2 clause 7.3. When Code is selected the values in UK National Annex Table NA.4 are used. RAM Concept
Figure 21-7 Span segment properties - Column Strip
Cross Section Trimming Reduces design strip cross sections based on geometry. See About cross section trimming on page 91 for more information. Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Reduces design strip cross sections based on slope limits. See Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Trimming on page 94 for more information.
84
Chapter 21 CS Span Detailer The detailing system used. See Span detailing on page 363 of Chapter 50, Reinforcement Notes. The choices are: None Code User-defined CS Min. Reinforcement Location Determines the face for minimum reinforcement. The choices are: Elevated Slab: Some minimum tensile reinforcement code rules do not consider flexural stress conditions; they determine minimum reinforcement based solely on geometry and the expected tensile face. For example, ACI 318-99 Rule 18.9.3.3 stipulates that the minimum reinforcement at a column in an elevated slab should be in the top face. This setting ensures RAM Concept uses that face. Mat Foundation: Similar to above, you would expect the minimum reinforcement at a column in a mat to be in the bottom face. Tension Face: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the tensile face, or the face with the least amount of compression. Top: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the top face, regardless of the concrete stresses. Bottom: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the bottom face, regardless of the concrete stresses. None: No minimum reinforcement is detailed. CS Min. Top Reinforcement Ratio The user defined reinforcement ratio for the top face. Concept multiplies the trimmed cross sectional area by this ratio.
Figure 21-8 Span segment properties - Middle Strip
CS Min. Bottom Reinforcement Ratio The user defined reinforcement ratio for the bottom face.
Note: Middle strips have one additional property to column strips. The rest of the properties are the same, but can have different values to those of the column strips.
Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties Sets the middle strip properties to those of the column strip.
Figure 21-9 Span segment properties - Live Load Reduction
Max live Load Reduction See Chapter 49, Live Load Reduction Notes for information on Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
RAM Concept
85
Chapter 21 User specified LLR parameters See Chapter 49, Live Load Reduction Notes for information on Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
21.6.2 Drawing span segments manually

You sometimes need to manually draw or adjust span segments for floors that are not rectilinear or have complications.
To draw a single span segment:
21.6 Creating span segments

You can create span segments in two ways: automatic and manual. For most models you use the automatic feature to generate span segments once in each orthogonal direction, and then make manual adjustments.
1 Choose the Span Segment tool ( 2 Click at the span segment start point. 3 Click at the span segment end point.
).
The two clicks define the span segment spine.

To draw multiple span segments:
21.6.1 Generating span segments automatically

Unless you have a truly one-way concrete floor, it would be usual to first generate one set of span segments (and hence design strips) on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and then an orthogonal set on the Longitude Design Spans Plan.
To generate latitude span segments:
1 Choose the Span Segment Polyline tool ( 2 Click at the first span segment start point. 3 Click at the first span segment end point. 4 Click at the second span segment end point.
).
5 Continue to click segment end points until all related
segments are drawn.

6 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
1 Click the Generate Spans tool (
), or choose Process >
Generate Spans. The Generate Spans dialog box appears.
Note: Start and end points are normally supports. There are, however, exceptions, such as a design strip used for a pour strip to discriminate between PT and RC areas, or used for a span with user-defined reinforcement in discrete locations.
21.7 Creating span segment strips (design strips)

You generate span segment strips from span segments. This can be done for all strips (on both latitude and longitude plans) or just selected strips.
To generate span segment strips
1 Click the Generate Strips tool (
Generate Strips.
2 Set Spans to Generate to latitude. 3 Select other options and click OK.
Note: The Generate Strips command does not generate strips for any span segment with the Lock Generated Strips checked. This is useful when you are satisfied with some, but not all, of the design strips. Note: Each span segment can generate up to 3 strips: a center (column) strip, a left (middle) strip and a right (middle) strip. Together, these three strips form the entire span strip.
To generate some span segment strips
The span segments appear (with nominated orientation) on the Latitude Design Spans Plan. You should repeat this process for the longitude direction.
1 Select one or more span segments 2 Choose the Generate Selected Strips tool (
).
86
RAM Concept
Chapter 21 Concept recalculates the span segment strips for the selected span segments. Example 21-1 Figures 21-10 through 21-12 show the use of span boundaries to control the span segment width. Figure 21-13 shows an alternative.
21.8 Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually

Concept often generates span segment widths and strips that require modification. This tendency becomes apparent once you have tried the span segment generation a few times. You should always examine the strip widths to determine that they are to your satisfaction.
21.8.1 Defining span segment boundaries manually

You can manually define the span segment width when the automatic span width calculation has not provided a satisfactory result.
To set the span segment width:
1 Choose the Span Boundary Polyline tool. 2 Click at the span boundary start point. 3 Click at the next span boundary point. 4 Continue to click span boundary points until all are
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
Note: Boundaries with a span set of latitude (longitude) only affect latitude (longitude) span segment strips.
Figure 21-10 Slab with span segments.
RAM Concept
87
Chapter 21
Figure 21-11 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 21-10. One span has some illogical design strips because the calculated span width is excessive.
Figure 21-13 The same span segment strips with the cross sections oriented to ninety degrees. This did not require manual span boundaries.
21.8.2 Defining strip boundaries manually

You can manually define the column strip boundaries when the Column Strip Width Calc has not provided a satisfactory result.
To set the strip boundary:
1 Choose the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( 2 Click at the strip boundary start point. 3 Click at the next strip boundary point.
Figure 21-12 Regenerated design strips after modification of span width with span boundaries (shown inside ellipses).
).
4 Continue to click strip boundary points until all are
defined. Unequal spans are a source of varying column strip widths. You can choose to accept the column strip widths that Concept calculates, or make some modifications. BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 states the following: Columns strips between unlike panels: Where there is a support common to two panels of such dimensions that the strips in one panel do not match those in the other, the division of the panels over the region of the common support should be taken as that calculated for the panel giving the wider column strip. The column strips in the following example are modified with logic derived from this clause.
88
RAM Concept
Chapter 21 Example 21-2 Figures 21-14 through 21-16 show the use of strip boundaries to control the column strip width
Figure 21-16 Strip boundaries have made transitioning column strip widths Figure 21-14 Slab with span segments.
Note: The short span segments in Figure 21-16 have

Column Strip Width Calc set to Manual Example 21-3 Figures 21-17 through 21-20 show the use of strip boundaries to control the column strip width.
Figure 21-15 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 21-14.
Figure 21-17 Slab with span segments
RAM Concept
89
Chapter 21
Figure 21-20 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Example 21-4
Figure 21-18 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 21-17. One span (with gray shading) has illogical span width and column strip width.
Short spans and cantilevers present problems for the design because Concept will generate narrow column strips. Codes recommend that columns strips are no more than half the span in width. Concept makes the (commonly used) assumption that the equivalent length of a cantilever is 2L. The cantilever column strip width is thus L. This can be quite narrow for short cantilevers.
Figure 21-19 Span boundaries have made a logical span width, but the column strip width is still a problem.
Figure 21-21 Slab with span segments
90
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.9 Cross Section Trimming

RAM Concept automatically trims cross sections in span segment strips according to the trimming settings in the associated span segments.
21.9.1 About cross section trimming

True cross section shapes in a slab can be quite irregular due to slab steps and other forming or architectural considerations. While it is generally advised to model the geometry of the concrete as per the form in the constructed building, it is not advised to always use the true geometry in design. It is often better to modify cross sections considering both their own shape and that of the nearby concrete. Concept offers two types of cross section trimming: Single Cross Section Trimming and Inter Cross Section Slope Limits. Single Cross Section Trimming considers one cross-section at a time and modifies the cross-section based on the userspecified trimming type. Inter Cross Section Slope Limits trims the top and/or bottom of cross-sections based on the adjacent crosssections, their elevations, and the distance between the cross-sections. Inter Cross Section Slope Limit trimming always occurs after Single Cross Section Trimming.
Figure 21-22 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 21-21.
21.9.2 About shear core

It is important to understand shear core before using cross section trimming. Concept defines the shear core as the parts of the trimmed cross section that include any vertical slices that extend from the top of the cross section to the bottom of the cross section, as shown in Figure 21-24. Concept bases one-way shear calculations on the entire shear force and shear core. For example, in a T-beam the shear calculations are based on the cross-sectional area of the stem and the flange immediately above the stem. Cross-sections can have multiple separate cores. For example, in a double-T-beam, the core is the two stems and the flange areas above the two stems. Concept typically
Figure 21-23 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
RAM Concept
91
Chapter 21 considers this core to be the same as a single core with the same (total) width.
21.9.3 Shear core in slabs

It is common for Concept to report unexpected shear reinforcement in slabs with section changes when the trimming is not set appropriately. It is quite possible for a slab cross section with a small shear core to show large amounts of shear reinforcement or even design failure, even when the shear force is small. See Section 21.9.5 for trimming settings for rectification.
Note: The shear core is modified for post-tensioning ducts

as described in Concrete Core Determination on page 352.
Figure 21-26 Slab depression showing shear core (right). Such narrow shear core slivers often result in shear reinforcement and design failure.
21.9.4 Viewing a perspective of design strip cross sections

Viewing a perspective of the design strip cross sections is a useful way of checking the validity of the design strip cross section trimming settings.
To view the latitude design strip cross section perspective:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Cross Sections
Perspective
Figure 21-24 Shear core (shaded) for various cross sections
Some odd shaped cross-sections do not have a shear core. In such cases, Concept cannot calculate some capacity values (such as shear capacity). See the example in Figure 21-25.
Figure 21-27 Design strip cross section perspective. Parts of the cross section not in the shear core are a different color.
narrow shear core
zero shear core: no vertical slice extends from top to bottom
21.9.5 Single Cross Section Trimming

Concept offers six different types of single cross section trimming: Max Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to produce a cross section with a uniform top and bottom elevation, and a maximum area. The rectangle formed may actually be
Figure 21-25 One cross section with a narrow shear core and one with zero shear core.
92
RAM Concept
Chapter 21 multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom elevations. separated. Rectangles are considered the same as flangeless Tees. See the example in Figures 21-30 and 21-31.
Figure 21-28 Untrimmed slab showing cross-section (left) and shear core (right).
Figure 21-30 Untrimmed beam showing cross-section (left) and shear core (right). Figure 21-29 Beam rectangle trimming (left) and Slab Rectangle trimming (right) showing revised cross-sections. The shear core is now the same as the cross section.
Beam Rectangle Vertical slices of the cross section are removed until the remaining portion is the maximum height rectangle possible. This rectangle can be multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom elevations. See the example in Figures 21-28 and 21-29. Slab Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed to produce a cross section with a uniform top and bottom elevation, and a maximum width. If multiple maximum-width rectangles are possible, the deepest on (maximum area) is used. The rectangle formed may actually be multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom elevations. See the example in Figures 21-28 and 21-29. T or L The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to produce a cross section with a uniform top elevation, and only two bottom elevations (flange bottom and web bottom). The Tees and Els formed can be joined (such as double-tees) or
Figure 21-31 T or L trimming showing revised section (left) and shear core (right).
Inverted T or L Same as T or L, but with the flange on the bottom. Max Shear Core The top and/or bottom of the cross section is trimmed to produce a cross section with the maximum shear core area. See the example in Figures 2132 and 21-33.
Figure 21-32 Untrimmed beam showing cross- section (left) and shear core (right).
Figure 21-33 Max Shear Core trimming showing revised section (left) and shear core (right).
None - No (single) cross section trimming is performed.
RAM Concept
93
Chapter 21
21.9.6 Selecting cross section trimming

You must determine which cross section trimming is most appropriate, but the following is provided for guidance:
Typical slabs with drop caps (but not drop panels):
t1
t2
The best trimming is usually Max Rectangle.

Slabs with drop panels (but not drop caps):
span direction
The best trimming is usually T or L.

Slabs with drop panels and drop caps:
Figure 21-34 Elevation of thickened slab. It would be unrealistic to use a design depth of t2 at cross-section A-A.
The best trimming is usually T or L, but this assumes that the drop cap cross-sectional area is smaller than the drop panel cross sectional area.
Down-turned beams:
Figure 21-35 Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope limit of 0.25.
The best trimming is usually T or L.

Up-turned beams:
The best trimming is usually Inverted T or L. After a Calc-All, you can view the actual cross-section perspectives. See Viewing a perspective of design strip cross sections on page 92.
A slope limit of 0.0 will not allow any change between adjacent cross sections top elevations and bottom elevations. This effectively trims all the cross sections in a span segment strip to have the same top and bottom elevation. In general, we do not recommend using a slope limit over 0.25.
21.9.7 Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Trimming

Once cross sections have been individually trimmed, they are trimmed relative to each other. This Inter Cross Section Slope Limit trimming effectively trims the top and bottom elevations of adjacent cross section to limit the slopes between them. This is done because compression and tension forces cannot flow at sharp angles from one cross-section to the next. Figures 21-34 through 21-37 show two examples with the Inter Cross Section Slope Limit set to 0.25. span direction
Figure 21-36 Elevation of stepped slab. It would be unrealistic to use the full depth for all cross-section design.
Figure 21-37 Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope limit of 0.25.
21.10 Improving the mesh

The presence of design strips can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate the mesh. See Chapter 17, Generating the Mesh for more information.
94
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.11 Additional design strip information

RAM Concept automates a large percentage of the design strip process. It is relatively straightforward to rationalize the layout of design strips when the support arrangement is rectilinear. The more complicated the geometry the more you have to think about the design strip layout and make manual changes. If there is a lot of repetitive geometry in a floor then it should not be necessary to use design strips everywhere. You should only use as many as required to adequately design the floor. For example, if a floor has many beams of the same loading, tributary area, span and size then there is no need to use design strips for each similar beam. This is just as you would not perform hand calculations for each of twenty identical beams. Not withstanding, although slabs or beams may appear identical, continuity effects and other considerations may have a significant influence and the results could be different. It is better to define design strips properly in some critical areas than to cover the floor with unsuitable strips. When in doubt, draw a design strip, but keep in mind that the number of design strips affects the calculation time. Some engineering judgement is always a good thing. Keep in mind that any area without strips will not have the finite elements improved when you regenerate the mesh. In general, design strips for one span set (latitude or longitude) should not overlap. For beam and slab systems, you might consider placing design strips parallel and in between the beams. This is because the beam strips only collect the moments and shears over the width of the strip. If the beams are not significantly stiffer than the slab, there may be design reinforcement required for the slab. The following sections discuss some situations with irregular geometry.
21.12 Irregular column layouts

Laying out design strips for irregular column layouts requires consideration of a number of issues. These include:
1 Skew angles: whether latitude and longitude design strips
should be strictly orthogonal.

2 If tendons components from two directions are affecting
the design strip. The following sections discuss these issues.
21.12.1 Design Strip Skew Angles

It is intuitive that there would be a limit on the skew angle of design strips. One reference guideline is the Eurocode (EC2: 4.3.1.1 P(8)): For slabs, deviations between the direction of the principal stress and the main reinforcement of less than 15 degrees may be ignored. This suggests that flat slabs / flat plates should be designed for two directions that are between 75 and 105 degrees apart, which means the skew angle should not exceed fifteen degrees. The span segment property Skew Angle enables you to manipulate span segments such that design strip cross sections are normalized in each direction. This is shown in figures 21-38 through 21-41.
Note: See Miscellaneous tips on page 100 for some

more tips and hints.
Figure 21-38 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is zero so the cross sections (shown in Figure ) are perpendicular to the span segment.
RAM Concept
95
Chapter 21
21.12.2 Effect of tendon components on design strip cross sections

In many instances the latitude and longitude tendons may be detailed and constructed in a non-orthogonal manner. This is often ignored in hand or strip calculations but it is a real issue that can affect design criteria such as service, strength and ductility. RAM Concept considers the force components of all tendons that cross a design strip cross section (or a design section). The following figures show an example.
Figure 21-39 Design strip cross-section
Figure 21-40 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is minus fifteen degrees so the cross sections (shown in Figure 21-41) are parallel to those of adjacent spans
Figure 21-42 A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The latitude tendons are not orthogonal to the longitude tendons.
Figure 21-43 Perspective shows the central cross section is perpendicular to the latitude tendons which are at the low point. Due to the layout the strip collects a component of the longitude tendon which is at its high point. This configuration may cause design issues. Figure 21-41 Revised design strip cross sections.
96
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.12.3 Examples of irregular grids

The following examples show design strip layouts for nonrectilinear grids. Example 21-5 Column and middle strips Figures 21-44 through 21-46 show the process of generating column and middle strips for an irregular grid. Figure 21-46 shows design strips, a number of which are not satisfactory. In particular, the 3-2 span segment strips do not adequately consider the slab near the irregular columns. Figures 21-47 through 21-50 show a better solution enabled with manual modifications.
Figure 21-46 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.
Figure 21-44 Irregular column layout
Figure 21-47 Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted
Figure 21-45 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 21-48 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
RAM Concept
97
Chapter 21 Example 21-6 Full panel design strips for an irregular grid (ACI318 and TR43 post-tension design)
Figure 21-49 Regenerated design strips based on revised spans. Figure 21-51 Irregular column layout
Figure 21-50 Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span Cross Section tool. Figure 21-52 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 21-53 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.
98
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-54 Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted
Figure 21-57 Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span Cross Section tool.
21.12.4 Drawing design strips near walls

There are some considerations for drawing design strips near walls.
Omission of design strips parallel to walls
Since a wall is a continuous support, there is usually no need to design a floor over, and parallel to, a wall for strength. You may, however, be interested in the minimum reinforcement requirements and so a design strip could be warranted. Strips over or under walls will occasionally have unrealistic stress peaks as the forces and moments are continually transferred back and forth between the wall elements and the slab elements. For this reason, some designers eliminate span segments over and under walls.
Figure 21-55 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
Figure 21-58 Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
21.12.5 Changing from PT to RC design

Figure 21-56 Regenerated design strips based on revised spans.
It is quite common for a floor to have a mixture of PT and RC areas. For example, a pour strip (an area with no posttensioning that joins two post-tensioned slabs).
RAM Concept
99
Chapter 21 For most codes, PT design rules are different from those for RC. As such, you should use multiple design strip segments in one span. Figure 21-59 shows two examples of a slab with tendons stopping either side of a pour strip (in gray). On the left, span segment 2-1 has been generated and extends from support to support. This means that the entire segment is designed according to the Consider as PostTensioned option. If the option is checked, then the pour strip design is wrong. On the right, span segments 1-1, 1-2(2) and 1-1 (3) have been drawn manually. The Consider End x as Support options have been unchecked, and support widths set to zero, where end x is at the pour strip. The Consider as Post-Tensioned option is checked for 11 and 1-1(3), but not 1-1(2). The pour strip is thus designed as reinforced, not post-tensioned, concrete. Concept designs the PT span segments for service stress rules and checks initial stresses, but not the RC areas.
21.13 Miscellaneous tips

Middle strip support widths
Middle strip support widths are the same as those of the associated column strip. Should you require to use middle strips with a different support width (say, zero), you need to manually draw span segments for the column and middle strips and use the span boundary tool.
Span segments that have no width
A span segment has zero width if the Span Width Calc is set to manual and some of its length does not have any span boundaries defined.
Design strips (span segment strips) with no cross sections
You can specify a design strips minimum number of divisions as zero. Combined with a large maximum spacing, the number of cross sections could then be zero. This could be useful in affecting other span segments strip generation, without slowing down the calculations. (The overall number of cross sections has a significant effect on calculation time). For an example of this application, see steps 13 to 15 on page 313 of Chapter 45, Mat Foundation Tutorial.
21.14 A final word on design strips

Figure 21-59 Multiple span segments used to model an RC pour strip.
Note: You could define the pour strip to have orthotropic behavior such that it is very flexible in the Y direction. This is done in the Mesh Input Layer. See Slab area properties on page 56 of Chapter 16, Defining the Structure.
Design strips are extremely powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand the calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools parameters correctly.
100
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
22 Defining Design Sections

A design section is the equivalent of one design strip cross section. You draw design sections manually to supplement design strips. Bottom Ignore Depth The bottom concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore depths on page 102 for more information on this important issue.
22.1 Using design sections

There are situations where you may choose to use design sections rather than design strips. This would include: In some areas, you may only require design information at one cross section rather than for an entire span. A design strip may not provide sufficient design information. A design strip may be inappropriate. For example, a slab step may not be orthogonal to the span (and design strip) and you want the reinforcement bars designed perpendicular to the step. In this case, you might draw a design section parallel to the step. You find it is too difficult to define a design strip for an area with very complicated structural geometry.
Figure 22-2 Design section properties - Design Parameters
Span Length Used to calculate the following: Minimum reinforcement rules for some codes. The upper bound on fps for unbonded tendons based upon the selected codes criteria (these criteria often include a span length parameter). Tributary Length This creates a zone over which the reinforcement required by the design section must be provided (development lengths, if required, are in addition to this zone). The zone length on the right side of the design section is the smaller of these two values: TributaryLength/2.0 (SpanRatio - 0.0) * SpanLength The zone length on the left side of the design section is the smaller of these two values: TributaryLength/2.0 (1.0 - SpanRatio) * SpanLength The intent of the span-ratio-based limit is to restrain the reinforcement zone to within the span, even if the design section is at the beginning or end of a span.
22.2 Design section properties

Design sections have similar properties to design strips. See Span segment properties on page 82 for definitions and explanations. The following properties are unique to design sections:
Figure 22-1 Design section properties - General
Note: The Visible Objects dialog can be used to show the reinforced zone to be outlined and hatched. The region displayed also considers all the span ratio implications. The hatched region does not display before a calc-all.
Span Ratio Determines the location of the design section relative to supports and midspan.
Top Ignore Depth The top concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore depths on page 102 for more information on this important issue.
RAM Concept
101
Chapter 22 Strip Type (Eurocode 2 only) Determines the type of strip defined by this design section. The choices are: Col. Strip (Full Width): Use design rules for full bay width cross sections (generally used without middle strips). Col. Strip (w/ Mid. Strips): Use design rules for partial bay width column strips (generally used in conjunction with middle strips). Middle Strip: Use design rules for partial bay width middle strips (generally used in conjunction with column strips). CS Service Design Type (Eurocode 2 only) The service design type for members defined as PT for the design strip. The choices are: Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as prescribed in TR43. Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance with Eurocode 2 clause 7.2/7.3. Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack Width design. See Chapter 57, BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) with TR43 Design for additional information. CS Crack Width Limit (Eurocode 2 only) The crack width limit wmax to use when designing for Eurocode 2 clause 7.3. When Code is selected the values in UK National Annex Table NA.4 are used.
22.4 About ignore depths

Design sections use the full concrete section available unless overridden by Top Ignore Depth or Bottom Ignore Depth. In many instances, it is inappropriate to use the full concrete cross-section properties of a design section for flexural and one-way shear design since some concrete is not effective.
Note: Design section ignore depth settings are the equivalent of design strip cross section trimming settings. See Cross Section Trimming on page 91 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips for more information.
22.4.1 When to use ignore depths
It is sometimes obvious when to use ignore depth. Often, however, engineering judgement is required to determine the use of ignore depth. You should decide if the concrete is effective based on code rules and a practical assessment of the situation. There are too many permutations of concrete form to lay down rules, and, as such, the following is for discussion purposes only.
22.4.2 Examples of concrete form that should use ignore depth

The following are examples of when design sections should ignore part of the concrete cross-section:
Example 1
22.3 Drawing design sections

When using design sections it is advisable to draw one set on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and the other on the Longitude Design Spans Plan. Design sections are located by a line that has a start point and an end point.
To draw a design section:
A two-way slab thickening that the building code deems does not comply as a drop panel. That is, a drop cap. You should ignore the incremental thickness of the drop cap below the slab. RAM Concept then only uses the drop cap for punching checks.
1 Choose the Design Section tool (
).
2 Click at the design section start point. 3 Click at the design section end point.
Note: You can use relative coordinates to define exact lengths. Alternatively, you can draw User Lines to provide snap points to define exact lengths.
Figure 22-3 Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flexure.
102
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Example 2
A beam or slab that supports an upstand that is not an effective part of the concrete section. You should enter an appropriate Top Ignore Depth value.
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment within the beam then you should consider the actual depth that can be mobilized for bending.
Figure 22-6 Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.
Figure 22-4 Beam with upstand to be ignored. Example 3
A beam or slab that deepens abruptly and the full depth of the concrete cannot be mobilized for flexure. You should enter an appropriate Bottom Ignore Depth value. Figure 22-5 shows bending moments in a slab perpendicular to a beam. For such an arrangement you need to decide if the slab should be designed for the bending moment at the face of the beam, or within the beam.
Figure 22-7 Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for slab bending. Ignore depth should be used for the design sections to utilize a shallower section.
22.4.3 Effect of ignore depth on reinforcement location

RAM Concept locates reinforcement based upon the covers and ignore depth settings. You should consider this to ensure that reinforcement bars are designed at the appropriate depth.
Figure 22-8 Using ignore depth to locate reinforcement bars at the correct elevation. Figure 22-5 Slab bending moments
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment at the face of beam, then it is a matter of locating a design section within the slab depth.
22.5 A final word on design sections

Design sections are powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand the calculations
RAM Concept
103
Chapter 22 that these tools perform, so you can determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools parameters correctly.
104
RAM Concept
Chapter 23
23 Defining Punching Shear Checks

Punching shear is often a critical consideration when designing slabs, In particular, post-tensioned slabs are usually thinner than their reinforced counterparts and hence punching considerations are even more important. Angle This is the angle of the first ray measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. Number of Desired Sections per Zone A zone can be envisioned as a region outside a column, drop cap, beam, etc. A column connection in a simple plate will have only one zone. A column connection with a drop cap will have multiple zones. This property enables Concept to determine how many sections you want to generate in each of these zones. This property can be used to eliminate unwanted sections, but caution should be used when reducing the desired number of sections. The sections generated are based upon the minimum critical section cross-sectional area, and they are not actually analyzed until after they are generated. By setting this value to 1 you would be likely to get only the most critical section in each zone but this is not guaranteed. Edge Treatment This determines how RAM Concept treats edges and openings. An edge treatment of Sector Voids is always conservative. For columns near a slab edge, however, the Sector Voids setting stops the critical section before it reaches the slab edge (at a ray from the column center to the slab edge that has a length equal to the search radius). An edge treatment of Failure Planes probably produces better results for critical sections at edge and corner locations. This setting, however, requires you to review the results more carefully to ensure that Concept has checked all the appropriate sections. An edge treatment of Ignore Edges is generally unconservative. You may want to try this setting to see if Concept finds a critical section that it missed with the other settings. Connection Type This determines which column classification Concept uses for calculating allowable stresses. A Corner type uses corner column rules (post-tensioning is ignored). An Edge type uses edge column rules (post-tensioning is ignored). An Interior type uses interior column rules (Concept considers the section as post-tensioned if the P/A exceeds 125 psi). An Auto type determines if the column is corner, edge or interior type based upon the total void angle around it. If the void angle is less than 90 degrees then the column is an interior type. If the void angle is between 90 and 180
23.1 About punching shear checks

RAM Concept can calculate punching failure planes and the punching shear stresses due to column reactions (Fz, Mx, My). RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical sections. For unusual geometries, RAM Concept may not check the appropriate section and / or may check inappropriate sections that give higher than appropriate stress ratios. You should review RAM Concepts selections of potentially critical sections and use engineering judgment to decide if RAM Concepts selections and the application of the ACI 318 model are appropriate.
23.2 Punching shear check properties and options

The following explains the general and code specific Punching Shear Check properties and options.
23.2.1 General
Maximum Search Radius The radius that defines the area RAM Concept searches for potential failure locations. The analysis is conservative when you set a very large radius, but this has two detrimental effects: Concept will need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer to check that punching location. More importantly, Concept will consider slab openings that are far from the column in determining the potentially critical section that may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate. Cover to CGS The distance that will be subtracted from the slab depth in each region to determine the effective depth for critical section calculations. For columns under, this is usually the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d distance. If the depth in any region is smaller than the specified Cover to CGS, the region is treated as a hole. RAM Concept
105
Chapter 23 degrees then the column is an edge type. If the void angle is 180 degrees or more then the column is a corner type. See Column connection type on page 532 of Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes for more information. SSR System The stud shear reinforcement system used, if required, for design. These systems can be edited on the Materials page. Align with Rectangular Columns Aligns the punch check angle with the rectangular column angle during a calc all. Design SSR if Necessary Generates an SSR design (if possible) where the unreinforced strength is insufficient. Align SSR w/ Punch Check Axis Aligns the SSR with the punch check axis. For example, it is intended to be used when the slab edge is not parallel to the column faces and it would be preferable to have the rails align with the slab geometry instead of the column face.
23.2.4 BS 8110/EC2 specific options

Reinforcement Ratio For specification of 1 for equation 6.47. You should calculate the input value using the equation in clause 6.4.4 of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 code. Beta Factor This represents a ratio of the maximum stress on a critical section (including shear and moment transfer) over the maximum stress due to shear only. This option allows the user to select Auto Calc, 1.15 (interior), 1.4 (edge), 1.5 (corner), or input any positive value for Beta directly. The factors for each column condition are taken from clause 6.4.3 (6) of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 Code and are meant to be used only when lateral stability does not depend upon frame action and where adjacent spans do not differ in length by more than 25%. Auto Calc uses the model and calculation methods described in Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes.
Note: This last option is not available for AS3600 as the SSR are always aligned with the punching check axis. 23.3 Drawing punching shear checks
23.2.2 ACI 318 specific options
Use ACI 421.1R-99 Increased Max Vn Suggestion Allows the use of a higher maximum V n for SSR design. Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Vc Suggestion Allows the use of a higher vc value for use in strength computations for SSR design. Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Max Stud Spacing Suggestion Allows higher maximum stud spacings, depending upon the stress levels in the critical sections. You can draw punching shear checks for all columns simultaneously.
To draw punching shear checks:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan. 2 Select the Punching Shear Check tool ( 3 Fence the columns.
).
A circle of the prescribed radius appears at each column within the fence.
Note: Although ACI 421.1R-99 is an ACI publication, it is

not officially recognized by the ACI 318 standard. As such, it should only be utilized under the discretion and judgment of an Engineer with a full understanding of the provision and its recommendations.
23.4 A final word on punching shear checks

Punching shear checks are extremely powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand the calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools parameters correctly.
23.2.3 AS3600 specific options

Closed Ties In R/S-Axis Torsion Strip Use these options if you are providing minimum closed ties in the torsion strips in accordance with AS3600. Concept does not actually design this reinforcement, but uses the appropriate code provisions in calculating the punching capacity. You should ensure that this reinforcement is provided if using these options.
106
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24 Drawing Reinforcement Bars

Note: Drawing your own reinforcement bars is not necessary but an advanced feature you may wish to utilize once you are experienced with the program.
The Reinforcement layer allows you to: supplement the Program reinforcement by drawing actual (User) bars on plans using various tools change some Program bars to User reinforcement The Reinforcement layer facilitates a production quality reinforcement layout. Transverse Individual Bars - single transverse bars (strirrups/links/ligatures) that are generated from Transverse Reinforcement Stud Shear Reinforcement (SSR) Callouts - a fixed number of SSR rails with a fixed number of studs. SSR Rails - individual rails that are generated from SSR Callouts. You can directly create (by drawing) Concentrated Reinforcement and Distributed Reinforcement. You cannot directly create any of the other types of reinforcement.
24.1 Reinforcement bar definitions

24.1.1 About User and Program Reinforcement
There are two types of reinforcement bar: Program and User. All reinforcement is tagged (identified) as one type or the other. When performing design calculations, Concept generates Program reinforcement required in addition to any existing User reinforcement. In subsequent calculations, Concept removes all of the Program reinforcement before starting the calculations. You can change Program Concentrated Reinforcement to User Concentrated Reinforcement merely by changing its tag (in the object properties window). You might do this to modify Concept's design. When performing subsequent calculations, Concept only designs reinforcement needed in addition to the reinforcement tagged as User. You could also change User reinforcement to Program reinforcement, but this has no value since Concept removes all existing program reinforcement when it generates new Program reinforcement.
24.2 Reinforcement properties
Figure 24-1 Concentrated rebar properties - General
24.1.2 Reinforcement object types

There are seven object types in the Reinforcement layer: Concentrated Reinforcement - a fixed number of bars over a parallelogram area Distributed Reinforcement - a bar spacing applied over a polygon area. Individual Bars - single bars that are generated from Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement. Transverse Reinforcement - a fixed number of transverse bars at a fixed spacing. RAM Concept 107
Figure 24-2 Distributed rebar properties - General
Chapter 24 Span Set Determines the set the reinforcement belongs to: latitude or longitude. Elevation Reference The choices are: Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This is not recommended other than for very complicated geometry. Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the center of the bar. Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the center of the bar. The value is almost always negative Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the top of the bar. The value is always positive. Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the underside of the bar. The value is always positive. Elevation The distance used with the elevation reference. Ending at End 1 The choices are: Straight: 90 Hook: 180 Hook: Anchored: Ending at End 2 Similar to End 1 Slab Face This is used for (1) graphic display purposes (2) design rules. The choices are: Per Elev. Reference - the default and typical setting Top Bottom Both Auto You can draw reinforcement in a number of ways: A group of one or more concentrated reinforcement bars using one of the three Concentrated Reinforcement tools. A group of distributed reinforcement bars using one of the three Distributed Reinforcement tools Skew Reinforcement Extent tool on page 112 for more information). Quantity Type The choices are: Quantity: number of bars Spacing: bar spacing Number of bars Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Quantity Spacing Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Spacing. Orientation The plan angle of the reinforcement (distributed reinforcement only - see The Orient Reinforcement tool on page 112 for more information). Zone Width The width of the concentrated reinforcement zone. Designed By The choices are: User: Bars drawn by the user Program: Bars calculated and drawn by Concept.
Note: See Concentrated and distributed reinforcement

callouts on page 114 for discussion on the second (Presentation) tab.
24.3 About drawing reinforcement
24.3.1 Expected workflows

It is expected that you will typically convert the Program reinforcement to User reinforcement and modify it. One common exception to this might be that you may want to specify a bottom mat of reinforcement. There is no difficulty if you convert some reinforcement and directly draw other reinforcement.
Note: Special Caution - Reinforcement set to Auto face will not appear on either the top or the bottom reinforcement plans. If you use Auto face reinforcement, change the default plan settings (or add some plans) to be certain that all of the reinforcement used is visible on the plans in your report.
Bar Type The label used to identify the reinforcing bar. The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria > Materials. Bar Extent Skew The orientation of the bars extent line in degrees (concentrated reinforcement only - see The
24.4 Drawing concentrated reinforcement

Concentrated reinforcement consists of one or more bars located within a parallelogram.
108
RAM Concept
Chapter 24 The parallelogram is initially a rectangle with a default width, but you can use the stretch tool to edit the width and the skew tool to change the shape.
24.5 Drawing distributed reinforcement

Distributed reinforcement consists of a group of bars located within a polygon.
24.4.1 Drawing concentrated reinforcement

You can draw concentrated rebar by specifying the end points or specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
To draw concentrated reinforcement #1:
24.5.1 Drawing distributed reinforcement

You draw distributed reinforcement within a polygon. This is done by defining the polygon with mouse clicks or using the slab perimeter.
To draw distributed reinforcement #1:
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( 2 Click at one endpoint. 3 Click at the other endpoint.
).
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. tool (
).
Note: See Example 24-1 Drawing concentrated bottom

bars on page 110 for more information.
To draw concentrated reinforcement #2:
2 Click at each polygon vertex consecutively. 3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or

1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( 2 Click at the midpoint. 3 Click at one endpoint.
).
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon and a reinforcement object that belongs to either the latitude reinforcement layer or longitude reinforcement layer. Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars through the Visible Objects dialog box. Note: See Example 24-4 Drawing distributed bottom
bars over part of the floor on page 111 for more information.
Note: See Example 24-2 Drawing concentrated bottom

bars by defining the midpoint on page 110 for more information.
24.4.2 Drawing concentrated reinforcement in two directions

You can draw concentrated rebar in two directions by specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
To draw concentrated reinforcement in two directions:
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. in Perimeter tool ( 2 Click somewhere on the slab. 3 Click at another point to define the orientation of the
).
reinforcement.
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool
).
2 Click at the midpoint. 3 Click at one endpoint.
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon matching the slab outline and a reinforcement object that belongs to either the latitude reinforcement layer or longitude reinforcement layer. Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars. Note: See Example 24-5 Drawing distributed bottom
bars over the entire floor on page 111 for more information.
Note: This creates two reinforcement objects: one that belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and one that belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer. Note: See Example 24-3 Drawing concentrated bottom
bars in two directions on page 110 for more information.
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter tool
).
2 Click somewhere on the slab. 3 Click at another point to define the orientation of the
reinforcement.
RAM Concept
109
Chapter 24 A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the file is run you can view the individual bars. Example 24-2 Drawing concentrated bottom bars by defining the midpoint
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer. Note: See Example 24-6 Drawing a bottom mat over the
entire floor on page 112 for more information.
24.6 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples

Example 24-1 Drawing concentrated bottom bars
Figure 24-4 Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with the second Concentrated Reinforcement tool.
Example 24-3 Drawing concentrated bottom bars in two directions
Figure 24-3 Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with the first Concentrated Reinforcement tool.
Figure 24-5 Concentrated bars in two directions drawn by clicking at points A and B with the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool.
110
RAM Concept
Chapter 24 Example 24-4 Drawing distributed bottom bars over part of the floor Example 24-5 Drawing distributed bottom bars over the entire floor
Figure 24-6 Distributed bar polygon drawn over part of the slab by clicking at 5 vertices with the Distributed Reinforcement tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 24-8 Distributed bars polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement in Perimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 24-7 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.
Figure 24-9 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.
RAM Concept
111
Chapter 24 Example 24-6 Drawing a bottom mat over the entire floor
24.7.1 The Orient Reinforcement tool

This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents the desired orientation of selected reinforcement objects individual bars. After you draw this line, Concept rotates any selected concentrated reinforcement objects, and orients any distributed reinforcement parallel to the drawn line. The selected reinforcement creates individual bars of the same orientation after calculation.
To change the reinforcement orientation:
1 Select the reinforcement object. 2 Choose the Orient Reinforcement tool ( 3 Click anywhere on the plan. 4 Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to
).
the desired direction of the reinforcement.

Figure 24-10 Distributed bottom mat polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement Cross in Perimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Note: Use snap orthogonal or snap to perpendicular to help with orientation where appropriate Note: Selecting both reinforcement objects created with the Concentrated Rebar Cross tool or the Distributed Rebar Cross in Perimeter tool orientates both reinforcement objects. Note: See Example 24-7 Orientating concentrated
reinforcement on page 113 for more information.
24.7.2 The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool

This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents the desired orientation of selected Concentrated Reinforcement objects' extent line. This tool allows you to create parallelogram regions of Concentrated Reinforcement. Distributed reinforcement cannot be skewed.
To skew the reinforcement extent Figure 24-11 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.
1 Select the concentrated reinforcement object. 2 Choose the Skew Reinforcement Extent tool (
).
3 Click anywhere on the plan (but preferably near the reinforcement object)
24.7 Other reinforcement plan tools

There are two special tools in the Reinforcement layer that you can use to edit the plan properties of reinforcement.
4 Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to
the desired extent line.
Note: See Example 24-8 Skewing concentrated

reinforcement on page 113 for more information.
112
RAM Concept
Chapter 24 Example 24-7 Orientating concentrated reinforcement Example 24-8 Skewing concentrated reinforcement
Figure 24-12 Using the Orient Reinforcement tool to define the line A B parallel to the desired orientation
Figure 24-14 Using the Skew Reinforcement tool to define the line A B parallel to the desired skewed ends
Figure 24-13 The reoriented concentrated reinforcement
Figure 24-15 The skewed concentrated reinforcement with the extent line parallel to line AB.
RAM Concept
113
Chapter 24 Example 24-9 Stretching concentrated reinforcement modify so the reinforcement is described per your office standards.
24.9.1 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement callouts
Figure 24-16 Using the stretch tool at point A to widen the concentrated reinforcement parallelogram
Figure 24-18 Concentrated rebar properties - Presentation
Figure 24-17 The stretched concentrated reinforcement Figure 24-19 Distributed rebar properties - Presentation
24.8 Layout and Detailing Parameters

There are five calculation option parameters that influence how Concept lays out and details reinforcement. Refer to Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters on page 127 of Chapter 27, Calculating Results.
The Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement format specifiers use the following key values: $Q - Bar quantity $F - Bar face $B - Bar name $L - Bar length $U - Bar length units $u - Bar spacing units $S - Bar spacing \n - Start new line RAM Concept
24.9 Reinforcement Text Formatting:

Concentrated Reinforcement, Distributed Reinforcement and SSR Callouts all have format specifiers that you can 114
Chapter 24
24.9.2 Examples of reinforcement text formatting

The following examples show generated text for different codes. Example 24-10 ACI 318-05 The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x $L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view such as: 28 #5 x 15 feet T @ 12.1 inches For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F would generate the text: (28)#5x15T Example 24-11 AS 3600-2001 The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x $L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view such as: 28 N16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F would generate the text: (28)N16x4.57T Example 24-12 BS 8110 : 1997, EC2 and IS456-2000 The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x $L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view such as: 28 T16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F would generate the text: (28)T16x4.57T
24.9.3 SSR Callout

The SSR Callout format specifiers use the following key values: $R - Rail quantity $S - Studs per rail $F - First stud spacing $T - Typical stud spacing $N - SSR system name $U - Stud spacing units $S - Stud spacing \n - Start new line The SSR Callout format specifier ($R)$S@$T First Spacing = $F $U\n$N would generate text on the plan view such as: (12)8@3 First Spacing = 2.5 inches 3/8 SSR For the same SSR Callout, the format specifier $R rails with $S studs would generate the text: 12 rails with 8 studs
24.10 About SSR callouts and SSR rails:

Concept generates SSR Callouts and SSR Rails from the results of its punching shear calculations. This generated reinforcement is for display purposes only - it is not used in calculations and cannot be changed to user reinforcement.
RAM Concept
115
Chapter 24
116
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
25 Defining Tendons
Note: You should bypass this chapter if you are designing
a structure with only bar reinforcement. There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning that provides a satisfactory PT design. This is particularly true with partial prestress design where the emphasis is on strength, deflection and crack control rather than hypothetical service stresses. Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable service stresses to drive their algorithms for providing a PT solution. This is fast losing favor; some codes have all but abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a design criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in that direction. Some computer generated tendon layouts are not practical for real design. Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a workable tendon design based upon spans, sections and loads, the possible randomness of supports makes this extremely difficult in 3D. Thus, in RAM Concept, it is necessary for you to define the tendons by drawing them in plan and specifying parameters such as profile and number of strands. For guidance, you should use one of the following for your first estimate: your experience a preliminary run with Strip Wizard a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A) considerations a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag incorrect guesses, and you can use The Auditor for help in iterating)
25.2 Tendon properties

Before you begin drawing tendons, specify the default properties for the tool(s) you will use. The default values are set in the Default Properties dialog box. Double click one of the tendon drawing tools (Half Span Tendon ( Full Span Tendon ( ), Half Span Tendon Panel ( )) to edit its properties. ), ), or
Full Span Tendon Panel (
Note: Setting the default properties for one tendon drawing tool sets properties for all the tendon drawing tools.
The following is a list of RAM Concept tendon properties: PT System The label used to identify the PT system for each tendon. The label is not necessarily the size and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the PT system properties. It is possible to mix systems in a single tendon layer. Strands per Tendon Specifies the number of strands in the selected tendon(s). It need not be an integer value. In Concept and in post-tensioned construction a strand is the unit of post-tensioning reinforcement, similar to a reinforcing bar being the unit of RC reinforcement. In practice, the PT industry defines a tendon as a group of strands that share a common anchorage. The group may be just one strand, as is the case with most unbonded systems, or monostrand. While the total number of strands in Concept and the real structure must match, the grouping of strands into tendons need not be the same in Concept as in the real structure. It is usually not necessary to model each real tendon as a Concept tendon - fewer Concept tendons (with a larger number of strands per tendon) are often used. An exception is for specific code rules that require a deduction in shear area for duct size. In those situations you should specify the correct duct size and number of strands per tendon. For example, if you model six 4-strand ducts containing 2 strands each, as three 4-strand ducts containing 4 strands each, Concept considers the correct number of strands (12), but only three of the six ducts. Profile (Profile at end 1 and Profile at end 2) The tendon profile is the vertical distance between the floor soffit and the centroid of the tendons strands. Another name for profile is cgs (center of gravity of strand).
25.1 Using the latitude and longitude tendon layers

RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called latitude and longitude. By using Concepts two tendon layers, you can separate tendons into two groups. Separating orthogonal tendons allows for easier editing and a clearer presentation. You could also separate PT systems (say, bonded and unbonded tendons) on the two layers.
Note: Latitude and longitude are just names. You could draw all tendons, which might be at various plan angles, on one plan.
Note: The cgs is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded tendons duct.
RAM Concept
117
Chapter 25 The dimension from the floor soffit (at that exact plan location) to the cgs is the profile point dimension. Thus, if a profile point is located over a slab thickening (drop cap, beam etc.) then the thickening should be taken into account. Concept does not use dimensions to the underside of duct, or cover, to determine profiles. The path of a tendon along with the number of strands determines the forces the tendon exerts on the concrete. Profile points (that are usually the tendon high and low points) define this path. If necessary, you can introduce intermediate profile points. Tendons are comprised of segments. For elevated floors, each segment has a high point (end 1) and a low point (end 2). For mats, the reverse is generally true. Most spans have a tendon with two segments. Cantilevers and some spans have tendons with one segment Selections should consider cover and load balancing. Profiles typically vary according to span lengths. Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from end 1 to the point where the tendon curvature changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of 0.2 places the inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end 2 is at midspan. This is a commonly used value. A number of tendons one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon Panel tool. A number of tendons one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon Panel tool. You use these tools in different situations. You might find drawing one tendon and then copying it is quicker than using the polyline and panel tools.
25.4 Drawing single tendons

The following instructions are relevant for elevated floors where the tendon has a high point at supports and a low point near midspan. For mats, the reverse is generally true.
25.4.1 Drawing a half-span tendon

You might use the half-span tendon tool for cantilevers and short end spans. For such uses, the Profile at End 2 value would commonly be half the slab thickness or the beam centroid dimension.
To draw a half-span tendon:
1 Select the Half Span Tendon tool ( 2 Click at the tendon high point. 3 Click at the tendon low point.
).
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple

parabola. Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile). Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads If two tendon segments in one span have different values for end 1 then the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option moves the low point in plan to equilibrate the uplift during an analysis calculation.
Note: The order of mouse clicks is very important when drawing half-span tendons because the tool measures the inflection point from the high point (end 1).
25.4.2 Drawing a full-span tendon
You typically use the full-span tendon tool for conventional spans.
To draw a full-span tendon:
Note: Do not select this option when the end 1and end 2 profiles are at the same elevation. A segment with such profiles would have zero uplift and so the formulation does not work.
1 Select the Full Span Tendon tool (
).
2 Click at the two tendon high points. The low point (End
2) automatically locates at the midpoint of the tendon.
25.3 About drawing tendons

You can draw tendons in a number of ways: A single tendon one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon tool (typically used for cantilevers). A single tendon one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon tool. A single tendon with numerous spans using the Tendon Polyline tool. 118
Note: The low point can be adjusted with the Stretch tool ( ) or the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option in the Tendon Properties dialog box.
25.4.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the tendon polyline
The Tendon Polyline tool ( ) allows you to draw a series of full span tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
To draw a tendon polyline:
1 Select the Tendon Polyline tool (
).
2 Click a series of tendon high points. The low points (End
2) automatically locate at the midpoint of high points.

3 Right-click after clicking the last high point. 4 Click Enter
25.5 Drawing multiple tendons

You can draw a group of tendons in one operation with the tendon panel tools. You designate the panel to lay out the tendons, along with the desired tendon spacing, and RAM Concept draws the tendons. The drawing process requires you to draw the panel points sequentially in a clockwise or counter-clockwise manner to form a quadrilateral.
25.5.1 Tendon panel layout options

Layout The choices are Parallel and Splayed.
Figure 25-2 Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five feet.
Tendon Spacing The choices are Fixed, Equal and Auto Connect. Fixed draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing distance apart. It is not available with splayed tendons. Equal (not to exceed maximum) draws tendons an equal distance apart that is at most the spacing value. Auto connect (based on last edge) draws tendons connected to the profile points on the last edge of the tendon panel area. Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge tendons.
Figure 25-1 Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five feet.
RAM Concept
119
Chapter 25
2 Click at the tendon high and low points of the first tendon
in the tendon panel area.

3 Click at the tendon low and high points of the opposite
edge of the tendon panel area. The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
To draw a Full-Span Tendon Panel:
1 Select the Full Span Tendon Panel tool (
).
2 Click at the tendon high points of the first tendon in the
tendon panel area.

3 Click at the tendon high points of the opposite edge of the
tendon panel area (following a clockwise or counterclockwise direction). The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
Note: A low point (End 2) automatically locates at the midpoint of each tendon.
Figure 25-3 Tendons after Auto Connect.
25.6 Editing tendons

As with any object, you can edit tendons after they are drawn.
25.6.1 Calc profile tool

You can adjust profiles manually or use the Calc Profile tool ( ) for automatic adjustment.
Too much uplift in a tendon can cause deflection reversals that may crack the slab. For this and other reasons, it is a good idea to have the amount of uplift or load balance somewhat consistent from span to span.
To edit a tendon based on uplift:
1 Select a tendon segment. 2 Click the Calc Profile tool (
).The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance load.
3 Input the desired balance load (values are typically
negative) in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.
Figure 25-4 Tendons after Auto Connect. To draw a Half-Span Tendon Panel:
The low point (end 2) adjusts to provide the desired uplift You can select two segments in the same span and Concept calculates the low point based on average uplift ). It is generally not necessary to balance exactly the same amount of load in each span. It is not advisable to have an RAM Concept
1 Select the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
120
Chapter 25 excessive number of different low points. Manually rounding the profile values can produce a more practical design. If the desired balance load is too high then Concept could calculate a negative profile that causes an error when calculating the results.
25.7 About jacks

RAM Concept calculates the force losses in a tendon if you draw jacks at live (stressing) ends. If you draw a jack at each end of a tendon then it is double end stressed. If only one jack is drawn then the other end of the tendon is a dead end. If you draw a single jack on a tendon layer then every tendon on that layer must have at least one jack attached. Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any tendon without a jack.
Note: Concept does not check cover violations

25.6.2 Change profiles tool
When a plan viewing one of the tendon layers is active, Concept adds a Change Profiles items to the Tools menu. This menu item allows you to change all tendon profiles with a given value to a new value. This can be very useful in circumstances such as change slab or beam depths.
To change the profile of a number of tendons:
25.8 Jack properties

Set the default jack properties in the Default Jack Properties dialog box by double clicking the Jack tool ( ). You can choose to ignore the jack property values in the Jack Properties dialog and instead use the PT System values. The following is a list of jack properties: Jacking Stress The stress in the strand at the jack at jacking. Anchor Friction Coefficient Loss of stress due to friction in the anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You would enter a 2% loss as 0.02. Most PT suppliers recommend a value of zero for unbonded tendons. You might consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded tendons. Wobble Friction Coefficient Friction calculations use this property (k) to estimate losses due to accidental curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the product of the angle friction coefficient and the accidental angular change per unit length.
1 Open a plan from the Latitude Tendon or Longitude
Tendon layer.
2 Choose > Tools > Change Profiles.
The Change Tendon Profiles dialog box appears.

3 Enter the profile value that you wish to change. 4 Enter the new profile value. 5 Uncheck either tendon layer that you do not want edited. 6 Uncheck either end number that you do not want edited,
and click OK.
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
Angle Friction Coefficient Loss due to deliberate curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). Most designers know it as mu. Seating Distance The distance that the wedges recede into the anchorage. This occurs when the field operator releases the tension in the jack. Long Term Losses The sum of losses such as creep and shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of strand. It also
Figure 25-5 Change tendon profiles tool
RAM Concept
121
Chapter 25 includes the loss due to elastic shortening of the concrete even though it is a short-term loss.
To draw tendon jack(s):
1 Select the Jack tool (
).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing the
tendon live ends.
25.9 Drawing the jacks

You draw jacks with the Jack tool ( ) by clicking a rectangle around the stressed ends of the tendons.
Note: You can delete a single jack by double clicking it. To delete multiple jacks, consider making all objects except the jacks invisible, then select and delete the jacks.
122
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
26 Using Live Load Reduction

RAM Concept can automatically perform live load reduction calculations on columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design sections per the requirements of the selected live load reduction code.
2 Choose the live load reduction code, as shown in Figure
26-1.
26.1 About Live Load Reduction

Most design codes allow the design of members supporting large areas to ignore a fraction of the live load effects on the member. This live load reduction is allowed because the probability of all of a large supported area being simultaneously fully loaded is small. While each code has its own rules, the common approach is that the larger the supported area, the larger the allowed reduction, up to a limit.
Figure 26-1 Calc Options Window
26.4 Live Loading Types 26.2 Live Load Reduction Options

RAM Concept currently allows six different live load reduction calculation options: ASCE 7-02 Reduction using ASCE 7-02, section 4.8. IBC 2003 Reduction using IBC 2003, section 1607.9. UBC 1997 Reduction per UBC 1997, section 1607.5. AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Reduction per AS/NZS 1170.1, section 3.4.2. BS 6399-1:1996 Reduction per BS 6399, sections 6.1 through 6.3. None No live load reduction is performed. RAM Concept allows four different live loading types. These types are affected by live load reduction in different ways, depending upon the design code. The types are: Live (Reducible) Loading Standard live load reduction is performed Live (Unreducible) Loading No live load reduction is performed Live (Storage) Loading Special storage live load reduction is performed if allowed in the specified code. Live (Roof) Loading No live load reduction is performed. These loading types are specified in the Loadings window. See section 10.2 though section 10.6 of Chapter 10, Specifying Loadings for more information.
26.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Code

You choose the live load reduction code in the Calc Options.The default live load reduction code is None, causing no reductions to be used.
To set the live load reduction code:
Note: Live (Roof) Loading is reducible in the RAM Structural System, but not in RAM Concept.
26.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters

RAM Concept uses up to six parameters to determine the allowed reduction factors: Loading type - Only certain loading types may be reduced (as is discussed above) Member type - Most codes have special reduction rules for certain member types (such as columns)
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options
RAM Concept
123
Chapter 26 Maximum allowed reduction - The user may specify a maximum reduction value for each member. Number of levels supported - Most codes consider the number of levels supported when calculating the allowed reductions. If RAM Concept's automatic calculation of areas is used, then the number of levels supported is assumed to be one. Tributary area - Most codes use the tributary area of the member as the primary live load reduction parameter. Influence area - RAM Concept has options for two codes that use the influence area of the member as the primary live load reduction parameter. RAM Concept calculates the last three parametric values. You can view the values on plan as described in To view the column element LLR results and To view the latitude design strip LLR results on page 131. You can override the calculation by specifying the parameters values. The next section describes how to edit these values. Click the Live Load Reduction tab Check the Use Specified LLR Parameters box Set the values for LLR Levels, Trib Area, and Influence Area.
5 Click OK.
26.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters

You can specify live load reduction values for columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design sections.
To specify overriding values for number of levels supported, tributary area, and influence area: Figure 26-2 Live Load Reduction Properties
26.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction

See Chapter 49, Live Load Reduction Notes for information on RAM Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
1 Open the appropriate plan 2 Select the object(s) 3 Choose Edit > Selection properties 4 In the Default Properties dialog box (see Figure 26-2):
124
RAM Concept
Chapter 27
27 Calculating Results
You generally calculate results many times during the modeling and design process. You can calculate as soon as elements have been generated (e.g. self-weight deflection) or wait until modeling is close to finished. It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until all tendons, loads and design strips are drawn. It makes sense, however, to run the file during modeling to check for errors. That way you could avoid repeating the same modeling error. The slider on the left side of the Calc dialog box determines the level to which Concept performs the calculations. The options are: Through analysis Calculations are performed up to and including the global slab analysis (slab moments deflections, etc.) and the strip and section forces. Through design Concept performs the design of strips, sections and punching shear checks, in addition to all the Through analysis calculations. Through layout Concept performs the layout of program reinforcement on the Reinforcement layer, in addition to all the Through design calculations. All Concept performs the detailing of program reinforcement into individual bars (viewable in perspectives), in addition to all the Through layout calculations. The checkboxes on the right side of the Calc dialog window provide options on how Concept performs the calculations. The options are: Skip warnings Optional warnings do not stop the calculations, but are added as notes to the Calc Log. This setting is off by default. Calculate only out-of-date items Existing calculation results are not replaced by new calculations unless Concept detects that the existing calculations are out-of-date. This setting is on by default. Warnings invalidate calculations Previous calculation warnings are considered to invalidate their associated results, causing the re-calculation of the item that caused the warning. This setting is on by default.
27.1 Calculating the results

You can calculate all or some of the results with or without a review of the calculation options.
27.1.1 Calculating all of the results

To calculate results:
1 Click Calc All (
), or choose Process > Calc All.
Modeling errors are common and you may encounter error messages when calculating results. If the file runs successfully without errors, the Calc All icon becomes grayed-out. If errors occur then the calculator does not become grayed-out. See About analysis errors on page 127 for more information.
27.1.2 Partially calculating the results

To partially calculate results:
1 Click Calc Partial (
), or choose Process > Calc Partial.
The dialog box shown in Figure 27-1.
27.1.3 Calculation options

You can review and change the calculation options.
To access the Calc Options:
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options.
The calc options dialog box opens.
Figure 27-1 Calc dialog box
RAM Concept
125
Chapter 27 Live load reduction The applicable loading code. See Chapter 26, Using Live Load Reduction, for information on the loading code.
27.1.6 Zero tension iteration options

If a mat is flexible or there are large overturning loads then the springs may initially be resisting tension. You can reduce this tension by iteration. Zero tension iterations use an accelerator factor to make convergence faster. An accelerator value of 1 results in no acceleration, while a value that is too large may result in wild oscillations instead of convergence. RAM Concept calculates the accelerator value as follows:
Figure 27-2 Calc options dialog box
accelerator = (Tj / Ti)power maxAccelerator where
The following describes the calculation options:
Tj = the tension force offset in iteration j (j = i+1) Ti = the tension force offset in iteration i power = the user-controlled Accelerator Power (typically 1.0) maxAccelerator = the user-controlled maximum allowed acceleration (typically 1.5) Iterations to use The number of iterations used in calculations. The higher the number of iterations, the closer the tension is to zero. Accelerator Power The power in the above formula; typically this is 1. Max. Acceleration The maximum allowed acceleration.
27.1.4 General options

Auto-stabilize structure in X- and Y-directions Auto-stabilization introduces a small horizontal brace for structures that have no horizontal restraint. This is only suitable for structures with no external horizontal loads. Create viewable self-dead loading This setting controls whether RAM Concept creates loads that are viewable in plans and perspectives for the self-dead loading. This setting has no effect on the actual loading calculations. You would normally leave this unchecked. Include supports above slab in self-dead loading This includes the weight of supports (columns and walls) as loads. You should consider that Concept bases punching shear calculations at columns below on the total column reaction that includes any loads applied directly above. Include tendon component in punch check reaction This includes the vertical component of the tendon force within the punch zone (which often reduces the punch check reaction). See Contribution from the Vertical Component of Prestress on page 530 of Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes for more information.
27.1.7 Effective curvature ratio options

RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio (ECR) at every cross section: ECR = Ce / Cg Where Ce = the effective cross section curvature Cg = the gross section curvature RAM Concept calculates Ce by the approximate formula: Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 BSR) Cccs) where
27.1.5 Code options

Design The applicable design code. You can switch design codes during the design process. Note that switching codes does not automatically change the load factors. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35 for information on changing code specific load factors.
126
RAM Concept
Chapter 27 kc = the concrete design creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic strain not use this rounding length is where both ends of a reinforcement callout are not straight (they are hooked or anchored). Bar End Cover Concept uses this value when detailing both user and program reinforcement. Bar ends - except for bar ends with anchors - are always pulled back from slab edges by this amount.
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a default.
BSR = Bransons Stress Ratio Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage. See Chapter 48, Section Design Notes for further explanation. Creep factor kc as defined above. Shrinkage strain The design shrinkage value used to determine long-term curvature in cross sections.
27.2 About analysis errors

Two types of errors can occur during calculation: fatal and non-fatal. RAM Concept generates an Analysis Error message if an error occurs. If a fatal error occurs, analysis cannot continue. You must correct the problem, then recalculate. For example, if the structure is unstable then Concept cannot triangularize the stiffness matrix. After non-fatal error occurs, you can choose whether to continue the analysis calculation or not. For example, if a point load is not located on the structure, you can do one of the following: continue the analysis and ignore the point load fix the problem and continue calculation stop the analysis
27.1.8 Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters

There are five parameters that influence how Concept lays out and details reinforcement. Three of the parameters are layout cost values that affect Concept's priorities when laying out program reinforcement. They have no effect on user reinforcement. The cost parameters are: Bar Length Cost When this value is increased Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the weight of the reinforcement. This also causes Concept to create a larger number of callouts. Bar Group Length Cost When this value is increased Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the total length of all of the callouts summed together. This also causes Concept to use more reinforcement than necessary in some areas. Bar Callout Cost When this value is increased Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the total number of callouts. This also causes Concept to use more reinforcement than necessary in some areas, and may cause Concept to provide reinforcement where none is required. Using the default values for these three cost parameters usually results in acceptable program reinforcement layouts. However, you may want to try adjusting these parameters if you want Concept to arrive at different layouts. The other two parameters are as follows: Bar Rounding Length Concept lays out the program reinforcement with lengths that are a multiple of this value. The only instance where the program reinforcement does
27.3 Recalculating
Some or all of the calculation analysis information becomes out-dated when you edit the model. Click Calc All ( ) to run a new analysis calculation. If the Calc All ), the analysis results are current.
option is grayed-out (
When you recalculate, the analysis starts from the point where the information is no longer valid. For example, if you were to add a load, it would not affect the stiffness matrix. The recalculation would start with the analysis of loads and then move on to design. If you were to edit the concrete elements however, the calculation would start from the beginning.
27.4 Reviewing the calc log

After RAM Concept calculates results, you can review the calc log to check for detected errors.
RAM Concept
127
Chapter 27
To open the Calc Log:
1 Choose Report > Calc Log.
27.5 Decreasing calculation time

The time it takes RAM Concept to calculate results is dependent upon a number of parameters. You have control over some of these parameters.
Desired Element Size
enveloping are quite efficient and so do not slow down the calculations very much. You could, however, speed up the calculation time by eliminating load patterns and setting alternate envelope factors to the same as load factors in the Load Combinations window (Choose Criteria > Load Combo to open the Load Combinations window).
SSR Design
Stud shear reinforcement design adds significantly to the calculation time. You might consider delaying the drawing of punching checks until most of the design is close to finish.
Detailed Section Analysis
The time to analyze the stiffness matrix is a function of the number of finite element nodes. You can speed up the analysis time by using larger finite elements for preliminary work. This means specifying a large Desired Element Size when generating the mesh.
Design Strip Min Number of Divisions and Max Division Spacing
A cracked section analysis takes significant time. If you are not interested in these results or they are not appropriate then you can turn the detailed section analysis off.
To turn off Detailed Section Analysis:
1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules. 2 Uncheck the Include detailed section analysis boxes.
The calculation time is a function of the number of span segment strip cross sections and design sections on the slab. Each span segment strip with n internal divisions produces at least n+1 design cross sections; more if the maximum spacing governs. You can speed up the analysis time by using a small number of divisions and large maximum spacing for preliminary design.
Enveloping
Load patterns and alternate envelope factors produce additional calculations. The Concept algorithms for
128
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
28 Viewing the Results

RAM Concept produces a large volume of results from the model analysis. If you take the time to understand how Concept calculates results (and their accessibility), Concept can be a much more powerful tool in your workplace. these plans by editing the visible objects and plots. Keep in mind that this may void or make irrelevant some of the instructions below.
28.2.1 Viewing reinforcement results

RAM Concept stores the envelope of all required reinforcement for all rule set designs in the Design Status folder. There are a number of plans available to show different reinforcement. The names of reinforcement plans in the default new file setup match the visible reinforcement.
To view reinforcement
28.1 Type of results

You can view the results generated via text tables, plans, and perspectives on layers of the following types: Loading Load Combination Rule Set Design Design Status To locate a particular result, you need to know on which layer it belongs. Only that layer contains the plans, perspectives and text tables that show those results. For example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on the Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the Service LC layer.
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
If this plan shows more information than you require, consider using an alternate plan such as the Longitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
To view longitudinal direction bottom reinforcement
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Longitude Bottom
Reinforcement Plan.
To view a reinforcement plot
1 Choose a reinforcement plan. 2 Choose View > Plot (
).
28.2 Viewing frequently used results

In general, using plans is the most useful way to view results. Most results of interest relate to the following: reinforcement quantities status deflections support reactions precompression load balance bending moment contours section stresses (for some codes) punching shear bearing pressures This section explains how to find such results.
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design dialog.
3 Check the Active box. 4 Select a reinforcement radio button. 5 Enter the Min Frame # and Max Frame #, and click OK.
28.2.2 Viewing status

It is possible for a concrete member not to comply with code irrespective of the reinforcement provided. For example, there is a limit on how much shear a member can resist. RAM Concept reports a violation when the shear exceeds the limit. Status refers to code violations. When a design strip complies with all code rules in a rule set design then its status is OK. If there are violations then the status is Failed or Exceeded (depending on the rule) and RAM Concept identifies the code rule. Concept stores the envelope of status for all rule set designs in the design summary layer folder.
Note: When you create a new file without using a template, the file has RAM Concepts default new file setup. The default new file setup provides preconfigured plans to show some of the results in an organized way. You can change
RAM Concept
129
Chapter 28
To view the status
28.2.4 Viewing support reactions

Support reaction plans are available by default for most loadings and some load combinations. Filtering can make trivial reactions invisible.
To view self-weight reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Status Plan.
Note: There is no consideration of deflection limits in the

status report.
28.2.3 Viewing deflections

You may be interested in a number of different deflection plans. Usually these are for vertical deflection but RAM Concept does calculate lateral deflections and hence these are viewable. All deflection intensity and contour plots use uncracked section (Igross) results and do not consider cracking (unless the load factors have been increased for this purpose).
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Self-Dead Loading >
Reactions Plan.
To view live load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Std
Reactions Plan.
To view dead load reactions:
Note: Intensity and contour plots are accessed via the plot
Slab tab. Deflection results that do consider cracking are available via plots that use the Section Analysis tab and L.T. Deflection plot. Such a plot is shown by default in new files in either Rule Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan or Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan (depending on the code).
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC >
Std Reactions Plan.

To view factored load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC >
Std Reactions Plan.
28.2.5 Viewing post-tensioning precompression (P/A)

Precompression plans can be useful for viewing the level of tendon prestress and the effect of restraining supports. The default plans are for the x and y directions.
To view the precompression in the x-direction
Note: You could change these plans with the plot setting such that the plot is no longer consistent with the plan name. As such, changing the plot is discouraged.
See Chapter 58, Estimating deflections for more information.
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Balance Loading > Fx
Precompression Plan.
Note: Slab (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots are available for loadings and load combinations. Section Analysis (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots are available for rule sets.
To view service deflection
28.2.6 Viewing balanced load percentages

You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips.
To view the balanced load percentages on the latitude design strips plan
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC >
Max Deflection Plan.

To view the strip-based long term deflection for ACI318 or BS8110
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips
Plan
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
).
L.T. Deflection Plan.

To view the strip-based long term deflection for AS3600
3 Check the Balanced Load Percentages box, and click
OK.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design
Note: See Calculating the balanced load percentages

on page 337 for more information.
> L.T. Deflection Plan.

To view the strip-based long term deflection for EC2
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Quasi-Permanent
28.2.7 Viewing bending moment contours

Bending moment contour plans can be useful for understanding the flexural behavior of complicated floors.
Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
130
RAM Concept
Chapter 28 The Bending Moment Distribution tool ( usefulness of the plan.

To view the factored moments about the x-axis
) increases the
To view the punching shear SSR
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC >
28.2.10 Viewing live load reduction results

You can view live load reduction results for each member (columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design sections) and some loadings.
To view the column element LLR results
Mx Plan.
28.2.8 Viewing section stresses

Some codes have concrete stress limits for post-tensioned floors. You may want to know these stresses for the Initial Service Design and Service Design. Usually you want to view stresses based upon the design strips rather than contours, as the design process rarely uses peak stresses derived from contours.
To view the strip-based initial top stresses
1 Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.

To view the latitude design strip LLR results
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Strip
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service
Plan.
Design > Top Stress Plan.

To view the strip-based initial bottom stresses
).
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK. 1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service
Design > Bottom Stress Plan.

To view the strip-based service top stresses
28.2.11 Viewing soil bearing pressures

Files created with Mat foundation checked in the New File dialog box have bearing pressure plans provided.
To view live loading soil bearing pressure
Top Stress Plan.

To view the strip-based service bottom stresses
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Soil
Bearing Pressure Plan.

To view service soil bearing pressure
Bottom Stress Plan.
Note: If too much information is visible then edit the plot.

You could make the capacities invisible, or limit the range of strip numbers
Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Note: You can add soil bearing pressure plans to files. See
Creating new result plans on page 132.
28.2.9 Viewing punching shear results

RAM Concept checks punching (or two-way) shear for the appropriate code. It calculates the stresses at each vertex of a potential failure plane and compares the calculated stresses to allowable values.
To view the punching shear status
28.3 Viewing other results

There are times when the result you seek is not visible on the default plans. The following describes how to show such results.
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status
Plan.
Note: USR is unreinforced stress ratio Note: RSR is reinforced stress ratio Note: CTSR is closed ties stress ratio. This is only
available for AS3600. See The AS 3600 Punching Shear Model on page 537 of Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes.
28.3.1 Changing which result objects are visible

In the default new file setup, specific objects are visible by default. You can modify the visible objects to show less or more results.
To change the visible objects:
). 131
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
2 Choose options in the Visible Objects dialog box and
Enter a name such as Strength BMD. RAM Concept automatically appends the word plan to the name and prepends the layer name. Select the Strength Design layer, and click OK. The Visible Objects dialog box appears. Click Show Nothing, and click OK. Choose View > Plot ( ). The Plot dialog box appears. Select the Section Analysis tab. Check Active. Keep the Value as Bending Moment
click OK
Note: See Controlling views on page 11 for more information.
28.3.2 Changing which results plot

The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings for particular plans or perspectives. You may decide to change the settings to suit your requirements, or to make the plan easier to read.
To change a plot setting:
1 Choose View > Plot (
).
Uncheck Maximum Capacity and Minimum Capacity. Click OK.
The Plot dialog box appears.

2 Make changes and click OK.
Note: You can select specific frame numbers in the dialog

box. This could be used to show a plot for, say, a single beam.
Note: The way plans and perspectives are named is often

a reflection of the plot settings used. If you change the plot settings, you might make the names inaccurate.
Note: You must first open the plan or perspective before

you can use the plot command. Example 28-1 Plotting the strip bending moment on an existing plan The following example demonstrates plotting the bending moment envelope on the Strength Design: Reinforcement Plan: Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design > Reinforcement Plan. Choose View > Plot ( Select Bending Check Maximum Moment, and Minimum Moment. Click OK. ). On the Strip tab, check Active.
Note: You can selectively turn off left, middle and right strips. Left and right are the half middle strips. Center is the column strip.
Example 28-3 Creating a new reactions plan The following example demonstrates creating a Service LC reactions plan: Choose Layers > New Plan. Enter a name such as Reactions. RAM Concept automatically appends the word plan to the name and prepends the layer name. Select the Service LC layer, and click OK. The Visible Objects dialog box appears. Click OK. Choose View > Plot ( Select the Reaction tab. ). The Plot dialog box appears. Check Active. Select Standard. Check the supports (under Value) for which you want to view reactions.
28.3.3 Creating new result plans

You can create new plans for results that are not available in the plans in the default new file setup. See Creating new plans on page 11 and Creating new perspectives on page 11 for more information on how to create new plans and perspectives. Example 28-2 Creating a new bending moment plan The following example demonstrates creating a bending moment plot plan for the Strength Rule Set. Choose Layers > New Plan.
28.4 Section distribution plots

RAM Concepts section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of analysis values across any line drawn on the structure. These distribution plots can be very helpful in RAM Concept
132
Chapter 28 understanding the behavior of the structure (especially for moments and deflections), but they are not intended to be used for quantitative design purposes. Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ), the contour plot and the distribution plot would display the same values.
28.4.1 Distribution plot values

Distribution plots are created using the Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ( ), Vertical Shear Distribution tool ) and Selected
), Axial Force Distribution tool (
Plot Distribution tool ( ). These plots display predictions of values along the lines drawn across the slab. RAM Concept bases these predictions on the calculated results of the individual elements. RAM Concepts calculation method guarantees that the results for design strip segments and design sections are in equilibrium with the nodal loads. The results for plots across elements are not necessarily exact, however, and can be much less accurate for coarse meshes or elements with high aspect ratios. Even though RAM Concepts calculation method guarantees stored elastic energy of the stresses in each element is equal to the energy of the loads applied to the element, for some oddly shaped elements (such as pointy triangles), the energy formulation can result in local fictitious stress spikes. Note that this limitation does not affect design strip segments or design sections and does not affect RAM Concepts reinforcement calculations.
28.4.2 Moment distribution plots

You can create moment distribution plots using the Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of bending moment about the axis of the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on the moment distribution plot. The integrated moment value shown below the moment distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot, but does not include the bending moment that is due to axial forces and variations in the centroid elevation of the slab (such as the bending moment caused by axial forces in the web and flanges of a T-beam). You should use design strips and design sections to determine design quantities as they capture both components of the bending moment. Figure 28-1 on page 133 shows a moment distribution plot for My moments drawn on a contour plot for Mx moments. The distribution plot shows My moments because the line drawn on the plan is parallel to the y-axis. The distribution plot has an integrated value of 657 kip-ft and a peak value of 73.9 kips (or -73.9 kip-ft/foot). The contour plot values have no effect on the distribution plot values. If you used the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) instead of the
Figure 28-1 Moment distribution plot showing My moments on an Mx contour plot.
28.4.3 Shear distribution plots

You can create shear distribution plots using the Vertical Shear Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of vertical shear force across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on the shear distribution plot. The integrated shear value shown below the shear distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design sections provide a more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
28.4.4 Axial force distribution plots

You can create axial force distribution plots using the Axial Force Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of axial (horizontal) force across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any)
RAM Concept
133
Chapter 28 controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on the axial force distribution plot. The integrated axial force value shown below the axial force distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design sections provide a more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
28.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of analysis values across any line draw on the structure. These distribution plots are very helpful in understanding the behavior of the structure, but you should not use them for quantitative design purposes. You should always use design strips and design sections to determine design quantities
28.4.5 Selected distribution plots

You can create selected distribution plots using the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of the values shown in the main 2D plot (controlled in the Plot ( ) dialog box). The integrated value shown below the distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. This integrated value may or may not be useful depending upon the plotted quantity (for example, the integration of a topstress plot is a force/length value, which is largely useless). You need to take special care when using the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) with the max and min axis contour plots (such as a Service LC Max Bottom Stress Plan). The max and min stress plots show the maximum or minimum principal value at every point in the slab. At each point along a selected plot distribution of the principal values, the principal axes may be different. The integrated value for the distribution plot has mathematical meaning, but does not have any structural meaning. If you want to see the distribution of stresses (or moments, etc.) about a particular axis, you can use the Plot ( ) dialog box to set the contour plot axis (using the Value Plotted Axis) to be the axis of the results you want to view. The Selected Plot Distribution tool ( values for that axis. ) then shows the
28.5 Miscellaneous results information

The following sections are for clarification of some results.
28.5.1 Top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement

RAM Concept shows longitudinal reinforcement on plan with the following parameters: number of bars bar type (as defined as a design strip property) length of the bars bar spacing Figure 28-2 and Figure 28-3 show top reinforcement at a column. There are two callouts because the design strips terminate at the column. The required reinforcement is different on each side, as often happens. You need to rationalize this information and detail the bars in a logical manner. The left hand reinforcement is nine #5 bars, each 6.5 ft. long [nine 16 mm bars, each 1.8 m long].
28.4.6 Effects of averaging

Distribution plots display the calculated results of the individual elements. At the shared edge of two elements, RAM Concept uses simple averaging. This produces reasonable results in most cases, but can cause distortions of the integrated result when RAM Concept averages a small elements result with a large elements result. The selected distribution plots are additionally affected by the plan averaging that occurs in the 2D plot controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box.
Figure 28-2 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (US units)
Figure 28-3 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (metric)
This distortion caused by averaging is another reason why you should always use design strips and design sections to determine design quantities.
134
RAM Concept
Chapter 28 Figure 28-4 and Figure 28-5 show bottom reinforcement. The reinforcement is thirteen #4 bars, each 9.5 ft. long [fifteen 12 mm bars, each 2.9 m long]. cross sections. If the reinforcement is placed away from the perpendicular orientation (such as that shown in Figure 286), the reinforcement quantity may need to be increased.
Figure 28-4 Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (US units)
Figure 28-5 Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (metric)
28.5.2 Reinforcement bar lengths

Concept calculates the reinforcement bar lengths by determining termination points. The termination points are located at design strip segment cross sections where the bars are no longer required for any rule set design. The bar lengths shown on plan do not include development or embedment lengths.
Figure 28-6 Reinforcement drawing and plotting relative to local axis
28.5.4 Shear reinforcement

Concept shows shear reinforcement zones on plan with the following parameters: number of spaces in the zone number of legs per shear reinforcement set spacing of the sets length of the zone Figure 28-7 shows shear reinforcement. For US units and bar size, the zone is 2.78 ft. long and has 4 spaces with two #4 legs @ 8.34 centers. For metric units and bar size, the zone is 0.772 m long and has 4 spaces with two 12 mm legs @ 193 centers. For both unit systems, there are five shear reinforcement sets (spaces + 1).
28.5.3 Orientation of reinforcement

Concept draws and plots reinforcement along an axis determined by the first and last cross section of the design strip. Top bars appear over the axis and parallel to it. Bottom bars appear under this axis and parallel to it. Reinforcement plots are perpendicular to the axis. Figure 28-6 shows the axis, line A-B, for a middle strip. Point A is at the midpoint of the first middle strip cross section, and point B is the midpoint of the last middle strip cross section. Design and capacity calculations always assume that the reinforcement (other than tendons) is perpendicular to the
RAM Concept
135
Chapter 28 If a punching section can be classified by any of the standard rules, it is considered to be a standard section. The rules for standard sections are:
1 Interior Rectangular:
must be uniform thickness must have 4 sides section centroid must coincide with column centroid opposite sides must be parallel and have same length adjacent sides must be perpendicular must be continuous (no gaps)
2 Edge Rectangular:
must be uniform thickness

Figure 28-7 Design Status: Shear Reinforcement Plan (US and metric units).
must have 3 sides opposite sides must be parallel and have same length adjacent sides must be perpendicular can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab edge)
3 Corner Rectangular:
28.5.5 Punching Shear Results

Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes.
Non-Standard Sections: ACI 318
must be uniform thickness must have 2 sides sides must be perpendicular can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab edge)
4 Interior Round (circular shape idealized into straight line
Some times the punching shear status is Non-Standard Section. This is a warning, not an error. Non-Standard Section means that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three ACI cases: interior, edge and corner. When you get a Non-Standard Section, you need to inspect the critical sections that Concept has defined, and use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel they fit the ACI punching model (you should always visually inspect the critical sections, even if Concept does not flag them as non-standard). Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456
segments): must be uniform thickness section centroid must coincide with column centroid all segment ends must be on same radius from the center of the column must be continuous (no gaps)
5 Corner or Edge Round (circular shape idealized into
straight line segments): must be uniform thickness column must be round can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab edge) can only have two segment end points that are a different radius from the center of the column than all other segment end points (assumed at slab edge) discontinuous segment end points must be the off radius points (at slab edge)
Some times the punching shear status is Non-Standard Section. This is a warning, not an error. Non-Standard Section means that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. When you get a Non-Standard Section, you need to inspect the critical sections that Concept has defined, and use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel they fit the code punching model (you should always visually inspect the critical sections, even if Concept does not flag them as non-standard). Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Note: The rules are applied to EC2 sections before the corners are filleted.
136
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
RAM Concept
137
Chapter 28
138
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
29 Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings for particular plans and perspectives. You can customize these settings or create new plans and perspectives that show your desired plots. Plot settings are controlled via the Plot dialog which is accessed through the Plot command ( ). Slab plots are available for loading, load combination and rule set layers.
29.1 Setting the plotted results

You may decide to change the settings to suit your requirements.
To change a plot setting:
1 Open the plan or perspective you want to change. 2 Choose View > Plot (
Figure 29-1 The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
).
The Plot dialog box appears.

3 Select a tab and check Active to make that plot active. 4 Make changes and click OK.
29.2.1 About slab plotting contexts

There are three possible contexts: Standard, Max and Min. The Max and Min context are used to envelope the maximum and minimum values for each point in the slab. While the meaning of the Standard, Max and Min contexts is somewhat self-evident, Table 29-1 lists how Concept calculates these values considering load patterns and standard and alternate load factors.
Note: The name of a plan or perspective is often indicative

of its plot settings. If you change the plot settings, you may want to rename the plan or perspective.
29.2 Slab
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to display and control various slab analysis plot quantities such as moment, shear, axial, torsion, deflections, and area spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or in-plane shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value. Other plot values are not dependent upon depth. We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without curve smoothing, contours will be plotted element by element, which can make it difficult to observe the results of a larger region (also, for some plotted quantities, nothing will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM Concept allows you to define a resolution for the selected plot value. Finer plot resolutions require longer screen regeneration times. For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the contour lines by unchecking Use default magnitudes and entering the desired contour value. For color contour plots, you can set the upper and lower limits of the contour values by entering the minimum and maximum values.
29.2.2 Max and Min context slab plot limitations

Concept stores only a limited number of slab analysis values. For example, standard, maximum and minimum Mx, My and Mxy values are stored, while moment values about other axes (not x- or y- axis) are calculated via Mohrs Circle calculations. Similarly, standard, maximum and minimum Px, Py, Vxy, Mx, My and Mxy values are used to calculate stress values at the top, center and bottom of the slab. Because minimum and maximum values are not stored for these derived values, the calculation of the minimum and maximum values is approximate. Example: if one loading pattern gives an x-deflection of 10 and a y-deflection of 0, while another pattern gives a xdeflection of 0 and a y-deflection of 10, the Max context deflection will be reported as 14.4, even though the true maximum deflections never exceeded 10.
RAM Concept
139
Chapter 29 The following slab maximum and minimum context plot values should always be considered approximate: Values for any axis that is not the x- or y- axis. Stress values for any depth that is not mid-depth. Lateral deflection values for any depth that is not middepth. Lateral deflection values where the center of the slab is not at elevation zero. Layer Type Loading Standard Max Min Minimum values that occur considering each pattern loading (complete with pattern factors) and the full loading. Values that occur when combining all loadings, taking the minimum value of the following four values for each loading: Standard Load Factor * Max Alt Load Factor * Max Standard Load Factor * Min Alt Load Factor * Min Values that occur when combining all gravity loadings, taking the minimum value of the following four values for each loading: Std Load Factor * Max Alt Load Factor * Max Std Load Factor * Min Alt Load Factor * Min Plus the minimum single value of all of the lateral loadings' (of the correct type) values: Std Lateral Load Factor * Max Alt Lateral Load Factor * Max Std Lateral Load Factor * Min Alt Lateral Load Factor * Min
Values with full applied Maximum values that occur considloads (no pattern loading) ering each pattern loading (complete with pattern factors) and the full loading. Values that occur when combining all loadings, taking the maximum value of the following four values for each loading: Standard Load Factor * Max Alt Load Factor * Max Standard Load Factor * Min Alt Load Factor * Min
Linear combination of Loading Standard values Load Combination using the Standard load factors Single
Lateral Group Load Combination
(not available)
Values that occur when combining all gravity loadings, taking the maximum value of the following four values for each loading: Std Load Factor * Max Alt Load Factor * Max Std Load Factor * Min Alt Load Factor * Min Plus the maximum single value of all of the lateral loadings' (of the correct type) values: Std Lateral Load Factor * Max Alt Lateral Load Factor * Max Std Lateral Load Factor * Min Alt Lateral Load Factor * Min
Rule Set
(not available)
Maximum of all of the related load combination values
Minimum of all of the related load combination values
Table 29-1 Calculation of Standard, Max and Min values
140
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
29.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to display and control analysis reaction quantities. Selecting the Standard context button displays reactions corresponding to the standard results (more information about standard and enveloping results is available in Chapter 47, Analysis Notes). For the standard results, you can display any number of reactions for column above/below, wall above/below, point spring/support, line spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the punching checks. If a column above and below occur at the same location in plan, and both Column Above and Column Below boxes are checked, the sum of the reactions is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls above and below. The other buttons in the Context group are for the enveloped results. Concept displays reactions for columns (above/below) and punching checks for the envelope result of the selected context. Wall reactions will be enveloped and available for plotting in future versions. The standard reaction context values are only available for loading and load combination layers, while the six enveloped contexts are available for loading, load combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 29-3 Plot dialog reaction tab
29.4 Strip
Checking the Active box in the Strip tab allows you to display analysis results for the design strips. Each plot value represents the variation of the selected value at each design strip segment cross section (along the axis of each strip selected). Plots related to the maximum and minimum moments and shears can be displayed, enabling the envelope for a particular plot value to be displayed. The Torsion value is the torsion about the centroid of the design strip segment, in equilibrium with the element nodal forces. The Twist value is the component of the torsion due to the slab twisting moment (Mxy for design strips parallel to the x- or y- axes) calculated from the element stress predictions (and is not necessarily in equilibrium with the element
RAM Concept
141
Chapter 29 nodal forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use in torsion design. Absolute Twist is the sum of the absolute value of the twist along the cross section. This value differs from the Twist value in that it is always positive, and that in its calculation, twist values of different signs do not cancel out. The Absolute Twist value is not used in design unless Wood-Armer torsion design is selected. Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design layers.
Note: The accuracy of the Twist and Absolute Twist values are determined from element stress predictions and are dependent upon the quality and the refinement of the mesh. Unlike the Torsion value, there is no guarantee that these values will be in equilibrium with the applied nodal loads.
Definitions of other values can be found in Chapter 47, Analysis Notes. The standard strip context values are only available for loading and load combination layers, while the four enveloped contexts are available for loading, load combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 29-6 Plot dialog section analysis tab.
29.6 Section Design

Checking the Active box in the Section Design tab allows you to plot top, bottom and shear reinforcement quantities corresponding to Concepts final design or a design for a particular rule set. The Top Developed and Bottom Developed values represent the amount of fully developed top and bottom reinforcement that is required at each location. Section design plots are only available for rule set designs and the design summary layers.
Figure 29-5 Plot dialog strip tab.
29.5 Section Analysis

Checking the Active box in the Section Analysis tab allows you to display analysis and design results for the design strips including moments, shears, stresses, crack width, and effective curvature ratio. The plotted analysis results are for the envelope results. They can be plotted against the design capacity resulting from RAM Concepts final design. Note that some quantities may not have capacity values defined.
Figure 29-7 Plot dialog section design tab
29.6.1 About section design context plots

The Section Design plot group box, Context allows for three possible contexts: 142 RAM Concept
Chapter 29 With Span Detailing Without Span Detailing, and User Provided Reinf. Span detailing is explained in Section 50.1 on page 363 of Chapter 50, Reinforcement Notes. The effects of the Span Detailing Contexts on plots are explained in Table 29-2 and Table 29-3. For the Design Status layer, the context of With Span Detailing includes the effects of the assumed reinforcement development calculations in the plots of developed reinforcement. In a skyline plot, each calculated value is valid for a portion of the span (as shown by a horizontal line) instead of the values being interpolated between cross sections. While this is primarily just a graphical difference, the actual detailing of the reinforcement into bar callouts is performed using the skyline plot values. For rule set designs, the effects of the Span Detailing Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as shown in Table 29-2 below. For the Design Status layer, the effects of the Span Detailing Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as shown in Table 29-3 below.
29.6.2 About skyline plots

When you select the With Span Detailing or User Provided Reinf contexts, Concept plots the reinforcement with a skyline plot. Value Top Bottom Top and Bottom Top Dev Bottom Dev Shear Shear Density Shear Spacing
Table 29-2 Effects of span detailing context on rule set plots
Without span detailing
With span detailing
User provided reinforcement
Vector component of area of user As calculated per section Values calculated per section are individual bars intersected by the lengthened according to the span detailer rules (see Section 50.1 Span cross sections detailing of Chapter 50, Reinforcement Notes). As calculated per section As calculated per section Vector component of developed area of user individual bars intersected by the cross sections (none)
As calculated per section As calculated per section
RAM Concept
143
Chapter 29
Value Top Bottom Top and Bottom Top Dev Bottom Dev
Without span detailing
With span detailing
User provided reinforcement
Vector component of area of user As calculated per section Values calculated per section are individual bars intersected by the lengthened according to the span detailer rules (see Section 50.1 Span cross sections detailing of Chapter 50, Reinforcement Notes). As calculated per section Plotted values are the maximum of Vector component of developed area the reinforcement calculated per sec- of user individual bars intersected by the cross sections tion and the amount of developed reinforcement calculated from the span-detailed amounts of non-developed reinforcement (see Section 50.1 Span detailing of Chapter 50, Reinforcement Notes). These values are used in the final capacity check calculations.
Shear Shear Density Shear Spacing
As calculated per section As calculated per section
(none)
Table 29-3 Effects of Span Detailing Context on Design Status Plots
29.7 Punching Analysis

Checking the Active box in the Punching Analysis tab allows you to display information about the punching analysis including stresses for each critical section for any of the enveloped force sets. The values displayed are for the selected critical section(s) with the selected force set, and are not necessarily the worst case for the column. The most critical punching case can always be displayed by selecting the Max Stress Ratio button and checking Section 1. Punching analysis plots are only available for rule set design and the design summary layers.
Figure 29-8 Plot dialog punching analysis tab
29.7.1 Punching Shear Results

Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes. There is discussion of Non-Standard Section in Punching Shear Results on page 136.
144
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30 Using the Auditor

There will be times when a design result calculated by RAM Concept may be confusing or unexpected. This could be due to incorrect input, an unusual set of resultants (for example: a negative moment at mid-span), or a code rule interpretation. The Auditor assists in displaying design information for you to review. Pass 1 Pass 2 Final check
30.3 About the information displayed by the Auditor

The information displayed by the Auditor is for a single cross section of one span segment strip, or a design section.
The Auditor displays the following:
30.1 How the Auditor can assist the design process

The Auditor is a tool that displays input data, parameters, resultants and code specific results for design strip cross sections, design sections and punching checks, in text format.
The Auditor displays information that could be useful for:
1 Design strip and cross-section number, or design section
number
2 Concrete components for a cross section
number of concrete blocks top and bottom elevation of each block depth and width of each block initial and final strengths (cylinder and cube) initial and final Ec (modulus of elasticity) values density inclusion or exclusion of block from shear core See Concrete Core Determination on page 352 for discussion of shear core.
3 Reinforcement properties for each bar type
1 Checking input data such as reinforcement bar cover. 2 Checking calculated data such as the elevation of the
center of a reinforcement bar.

3 Reviewing the rule set designs (service, strength etc.) 4 Checking the envelope of resultants (moment, shear
force, axial force etc.).

5 Revising the number of strands in a tendon to satisfy code
stress limits.
30.2 About the three design steps

RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps: Step 1: Each Rule set performs its Pass 1 selection of reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design. Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized. Step 2: Each Rule set performs its Pass 2 selection of reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in step 1b. For most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but for some rule sets such as shear design and ductility design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be known before the design can be performed. Step 2b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized. Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis. The Auditor reports the three steps as the following: RAM Concept
elevation yield stress Ec (modulus of elasticity) value bar area bar diameter
4 Tendon properties for each tendon type
elevation of cgs (center of gravity of strand) above datum ultimate strength (stress) yield stress effective stress Ec (modulus of elasticity) value area of strand bonding R-component [the component of the tendon parallel to the design strip cross section (perpendicular to the design strip spine)] 145
Chapter 30 S-component [the component of the tendon perpendicular to the design strip cross-section (parallel to the design strip spine)] Z-component [the vertical component of the tendon across the cross-section (only used for hyperstatic calculations)] length initial concrete strain duct width number of strands per duct cross sectional area per strand number of ducts force force elevation Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar elevation strain stress bar area force Post-tensioning forces for each tendon elevation cross-section strain component cross-section strain (considers tendon angle) Tendon Force (effective force in cross section plane)
5 Base design envelopes (for each Rule Set Design):
The envelopes for maxima and minima of moment and shear force are displayed. These are modified, as appropriate, for torsion and axial force design. The envelopes list the following resultants: Vr (horizontal shear) Ps (axial tension) Vz (vertical shear) Mr (bending) Ts (torsion) Mz (diaphragm bending)
6 Reinforcement (for each Rule Set Design):
30.4 Using the Auditor

The Auditor can be used for specific rule set designs, or for the design summary.
Note: A rule set audit has significantly less data than a design summary audit. As such, a rule set audit may be more useful.
To use the Auditor for a rule set design:
Depending upon the rule set, RAM Concept adds reinforcement to the cross section. As Top As Bot. As Shear Density As Shear Spacing As Shear (density multiplied by spacing) Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule governed.
7 Cross Section Forces (Analysis)
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design >
Selected Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool (
).
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section, or design section, you wish to audit.
The Auditor window opens.

4 Scroll to find the information you require.
Note: You may find it convenient to make the design cross sections visible for the purpose of selecting the correct one. Note: The Auditor selects either (i) the nearest crosssection (of a visible span segment strip) to the point you click, or (ii) nothing, if there is no cross section within 3 feet [1m] of the point you click. The cross-sections themselves do not need to be visible. Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been performed. Note: The Auditors results may not be current if the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out ( ), the analysis results are current).
RAM Concept
Depending upon the rule set, the Auditor displays cross section forces and other information. Cross Section Strains curvature top, centroid and bottom strains Concrete Forces for each block top and bottom stress
146
Chapter 30
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan. 2 Follow instructions for rule set design above.
30.6 About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor

The information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor is for a punching check at a single column.
30.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning

Certain codes limit the service stresses and designers are required to comply with the limits. The Auditor displays advice on how much additional post-tensioning strand is required in a design strip to satisfy certain code clauses. This information is accessible from many plans, but the instructions below are for using the Service Rule Set Design.
To use the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning:
The Auditor displays the following:
1 Punching check number 2 Location (coordinates) 3 Geometry
axis angle radius

4 Cover to CGS 5 Concrete Strength 6 Precompression 7 Resultant envelopes 8 Critical section perimeter properties
Status Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool (
).
number of critical sections perimeter length perimeter depth torsion strip properties (for AS3600)
9 Unreinforced stress ratio 10 Stud shear reinforcement rail properties (if required for
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section which
has failed a stress criterion and for which you require guidance. The Auditor window opens.
4 Scroll to the text bordered by two lines of asterisks (top
and bottom) near the bottom of the audit. If the maximum tensile stress is within code then no information will be displayed. If the calculated concrete tensile stresses exceed the allowable limit then the Auditor suggests the percentage increase in strand required to satisfy the stress limit.
design).
11 Summary
30.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor

The Auditor can be used for the strength rule set design, or for the design summary.
To use the Punching Check Auditor for the strength rule set design:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design >
Figure 30-1 Auditor text indicating percentage increase required to comply with code.
Selected Plan
2 Select the Punching Check Auditor tool (
).
Note: The precompression and balance effects of a tendon

are not necessarily limited to the area (and design strip) where the tendon is located. Due to the diversion of prestress (bleed of P/A) beyond the design strip the suggested percentage increase may not be exact.
3 Click on the plan at the punching check location you wish
to audit. The Auditor window opens.

4 Scroll to find the information you require.
Note: If there are tendons intersecting the cross-section at

an angle other than ninety degrees then the suggested percentage increase may be inaccurate.
Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been performed. Note: The Auditors results may not be current if the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out ( ), the analysis results are current).
147
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
Follow instructions for the strength rule set design above.
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan.
148
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
31 Using the Estimate

When preparing a design, it can be useful to know the amount and cost of the materials used in the model. The estimate window serves this purpose. The estimate is particularly useful for comparing preliminary schemes. You can also use it to compare changes made to a design. RAM Concept automatically calculates material quantities. Specified unit costs allow supply and installation costs to be calculated
Mild Steel Reinforcing
The weight of reinforcement based upon the detailed reinforcement in the Reinforcement layer. This does include bar hooks, but does not include laps. The quantities do not include bars not shown in the Reinforcement layer such as detailing or tendon support bars.
31.3 Editing the unit costs

You can only edit unit costs. The estimate separates unit costs into materials and installation (labor).
To edit the unit costs:
31.1 Viewing the estimate

The Estimate window lists the different material quantities and their unit costs for supply and installation (labor).
To view the Estimate:
1 Choose Report > Estimate. 2 Enter the costs for each material.
1 Choose Report > Estimate.
Note: The costs update when you press Enter or Tab.
31.2 What the estimate calculates

The material quantities calculated are:
Concrete
31.4 About unit costs

Unit costs can vary for many reasons, including the following: Region (labor availability and skill). Size of the floor and the project. Formwork system (usually flat slabs are more economical to form than beams). Post-tensioning costs are not the same for different systems. Unbonded systems are often less expensive in some countries, but this may not be true if large bonded tendons are used in beams. Large diameter reinforcing bar is generally less expensive than small diameter bar for materials and labor.
The volume of the concrete floor excluding supports.

Formwork
The area of horizontal soffit formwork.

Post-Tensioning
The weight of strand based upon tendon plan length. This does not include stressing tails or allowance for drape.
RAM Concept
149
Chapter 31
150
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
32 Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization options to help you create professional printouts and reports. You control the information included on a page and in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be printed individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes the printing features you can use to achieve the result you want and offers techniques for printing efficiently. Consult your printer documentation for information on setting up your printer and selecting the appropriate printer driver.
32.2.2 Page range

In the Page Range section of the Print dialog box, select which pages to print: Use the All option to print all the pages in the report, or all the pages that are required to print the active window. Specify the range of pages you want to print. Type a hyphen between two numbers to print the pages in that range (inclusive). You must type the numbers separated by hyphens in ascending order (4-7, not 7-4).
Note: See Determining the fit of plans on page 152 for

more information on setting the print scale of plan windows.
32.1 Basic printing instructions

You can selectively print windows, or the entire report.
To print a window:
1 Make the window you want to print the active window. 2 Choose Report > Print Window. 3 Select the printing options you want. See General
32.2.3 Number of copies

In the Print dialog box, the Number of copies option indicates the number of printed copies of the print job you want. Enter a value from 1 to 9999.
printing options on page 151 for more information.

4 Click Print.
To print the report:
32.2.4 Printing to PDF

RAM Concept has the ability to print directly to the .pdf file format. Desired paper size, orientation, and margins can be set up by choosing the Report > Setup PDF Export dialog.
1 Choose Report > Print Report 2 Select the printing options you want. See General
printing options below for more information.

3 Click Print.
Note: To make sure you get the desired printing results, preview the print job before you print. See Previewing the print job on page 153 for more information.
32.3 Select and Configure Printer options

In the Select and Configure Printer dialog box, you can set the printer, page size and source, default orientation, and margin size for your printed pages. These per-printer settings are stored on your system and are used as the default settings every time you print.
To change the print setup options:
32.2 General printing options

The Print dialog tells RAM Concept what printer to use, which pages to print, and how many copies you need. Review these settings every time you print a window or report.
1 Choose Report > Select and Configure Printers. 2 Select the printer that is of interest. 3 Click on the Page Setup button and select the options that
32.2.1 Printer selection

Specify the printer you want RAM Concept to print via the Select and Configure Printers menu item. The printer can also be selected in the Select Printer section of the Print dialog, but the per printer stored settings will not be used. With the latest compatible drivers installed, RAM Concept can print on any Windows printer or plotter connected directly to your computer or connected via a network. RAM Concept
you want in the dialog that opens.Click OK.

4 Click OK.
32.3.1 Printer selection

The last printer selected in the Select and Configure Printers dialog is the default printer for RAM Concept.
151
Chapter 32 RAM Concept can print on any printer with the appropriate printer drivers installed.
To specify the printed area with coordinates:
1 Choose View > Print Area or double click on the Print
Area tool (
).
32.3.2 Paper size and source

Select the paper size and paper source the printer uses from the Paper section of the Page Setup portion of the Select and Configure Printer dialog. The printer selection dictates the options for the size and source.
2 Uncheck the option to Automatically calculate printing
area and enter the left, right, top, and bottom coordinates in the Printing Area Setup dialog. Check Set for all plans if you want this printing area to be used by all plans.
3 Click OK.
32.3.3 Default orientation

In the Orientation section of the Page Setup portion of the Select and Configure Printers dialog, select the default page orientation: Use Portrait for a vertical page orientation. Specify Landscape for a horizontal page orientation. Page orientation is also customizable for each individual printed window in the Report Contents window. See Printing optimizations on page 153 for more information.
32.5 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint

The saved print viewpoint determines how a perspective window prints. Sometimes a viewpoint that looks good on screen may not appear as desired in print due to the dimensions of the page. Remember to examine the print preview carefully after setting the print viewpoint to verify that the scale and orientation of the model fit on the page as intended. Use the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ) to save the print viewpoint to what is visible on screen. This viewpoint does not change unless you reset it. You can manipulate the model on screen without affecting the saved print viewpoint. To display the saved print viewpoint, use the Show Print Viewpoint tool (
To set the print viewpoint:
32.3.4 Margin size

Set the page margins in the Margins section of the Page Setup portion of the Select and Configure Printers dialog. If the left, right, top, or bottom margin sizes you select overlap, or they are off the paper, an alert message appears.
).
1 Adjust the on screen viewpoint by:
32.4 Determining the fit of plans

Plans print according to their Print Area and Print Scale settings. Everything within the printing area boundary prints using as many pages as necessary to print at the desired scale.
To specify the print scale:
Setting the relative scales of the coordinate axes using the Scale tool ( y-axes tool ( ( ). ). Rotating the model with the Rotate about x- and ) and the Rotate about z-axis tool
Zooming to show the desired portion of the model. ). Setting the projection to Parallel Projection ( or Perspective Projection ( Solid Modeling (
2 Click Set Print Viewpoint (
1 Select the Print Scale tool (
2 Enter the scale in the Print Scale dialog and click OK.
Note: Typically, you want to check Set for all plans in

the Print Scale dialog if you are printing a report.
To specify the printed area on the plan:
) and the modeling to ). ).
) or Wire Modeling (
1 Select the Print Area tool (
).
To show the set print viewpoint on screen:
2 Click at two opposite corners to identify the rectangular
1 Click Show Print Viewpoint (
).
boundary.
152
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
32.6 Previewing the print job

Preview the print job before you send it to the printer to ensure the images and text fit as desired on the chosen paper with the specified margin, and orientation settings. See Select and Configure Printer options on page 151 for more information on how to change the page setup.
To preview the active window print job:
32.7.1 Customizing page orientation

You can print each window or report item in RAM Concept in Portrait or Landscape orientation. The default page orientation is set in the Select and Configure Printer dialog box. See Select and Configure Printer options on page 151 for more information on setting the default orientation. You may want some items in a report or a specific window to print in a different orientation than the rest. Use the Orientation column of the Report Contents window to specify the orientation of an item. Choose Default to use the Page Setup settings, or Portrait or Landscape to override the Page Setup orientation.
To set the orientation of a particular window or item:
1 Choose Report > Window Preview. 2 Examine the preview as described in the following
sections and click Close.

To preview the report print job:
1 Choose Report > Report Preview. 2 Examine the preview as described in the following
sections and click Close.
1 Make sure the Orientation column is visible in the Report Contents window. You may need to widen the window or scroll horizontally. 2 Click on the Orientation column value for the item to
32.6.1 Zooming
Scale the print preview by setting the zoom percentage in the print preview window. You can choose a zoom factor of 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, Fit Page or Fit Width, or you can type a numeric percentage of your choice (between 5% and 500%).
toggle between Default, Portrait and Landscape. A value of Default in the Orientation column sets the orientation to the default orientation set in the Page Setup dialog box.
32.7.2 Customizing the printed appearance of plans and perspectives

In the same way that you change the colors, font, and line type of plan and perspective windows on the screen, you can customize their appearance in print. Use the Print tab for schemes in the Appearance dialog to set the appearance settings for a plan or perspective you wish to print. See Changing colors, font, and line type on page 12 for more information about appearance schemes and changing appearance settings. If you want the printed plan or perspective to have the same appearance settings as what you see in the respective window, click Set Same As Screen on the Print tab. In most cases, you want: background color in printing to be white (no printed background) print font size to be smaller then the screen font print line scale to be larger then on screen
32.6.2 Viewing multiple pages at once

You can view the print preview one, two, or four pages at a time. Use One Page ( ) to view one page of the print job
at a time. Click Multi Page ( ) and select 2-up to view two pages at a time or 4-up to view four pages at once.
32.6.3 Paging through the print job

The print preview automatically opens to the first page in the print job. Use Next ( print job and Previous ( ) to page forward through the ) to page back.
32.7 Printing optimizations

To achieve the best possible results when printing, you may need to customize the page orientation and appearance settings for the individual report items (or windows).
To change the printed appearance of a plan or perspective:
1 Make the Plan or Perspective the active window. 2 Choose View > Appearance. 3 Specify options on the Print tab of the Appearance
Settings dialog box and click OK.
RAM Concept
153
Chapter 32
32.8 Changing the report contents

The contents of the report are customizable to suit your specific needs. You have control over what plans, perspectives and text items are included in a report and their order and orientation. You change the report contents through the Report Contents window.
every plan, perspective, and text table on that layer to No.

To include or exclude a report item:
1 Make sure the Include column is visible in the Report
Contents window. You may need to widen the window or scroll horizontally.
2 Click on the Include column value for the item you wish
to include or exclude to toggle between Yes and No. A value of Yes in the Include column includes the item in the report printout while a value of No excludes the item.
Note: If you want to include an item in the report, make sure every item in the hierarchy above it is also included.
The following is an example list of windows you might include in a report for an elevated PT slab using the ACI 318 design approach: Report Cover Units Signs Materials Loadings Load Combinations Design Rules Estimate Element: Standard Plan
Figure 32-1 In the Report Contents Window, you can change the order of report items, set whether an item is included in the report, and change the printed orientation or an item.
Element: Slab Summary Plan Element: Structure Summary Perspective Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan Temporary Construction (at Stressing) Loading: All Loads Plan (if used) Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan Live (Unreducible) Loading: All Loads Plan [other live loadings (Storage, Roof) if used] Service LC: Deflection Plan Factored LC: Mx Plan Factored LC: My Plan Factored LC: Reactions Plan LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Deflection Plan Reinforcement: Latitude Bars Plan Reinforcement: Longitude Bars Plan Reinforcement: SSR Plan
32.8.1 Including items in the report

Any window can be included as an item in the report. Modify the selection of plans, perspectives and tables to be included in the report via the Report Contents window. Toggle the Include column value to specify whether an item is included in the report or not. For something to print in the report, it requires that its Include value is Yes and every item above it in the report hierarchy is also Yes. For example, if you want the Standard Plan on the Latitude Tendon Layer to be included in the report, the plan itself should have an Include value of Yes, the Latitude Tendon layer should be Yes and the Layers folder should be Yes. Likewise, with an Include value of No for the Criteria folder, RAM Concept does not include anything in that folder in the report. This functionality is especially useful if you want to omit everything on a particular layer from the report. You can do so with one click, rather then changing the Include value of
154
RAM Concept
Chapter 32 Service (/ Max Service) Design Rule Set: L.T. Deflection Plan Design Status: Status Plan Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan new position. You cannot move items outside their folder or layer. For example, you can move the Units item to a new location inside the Criteria folder but you cannot move it into the Layers folder.
To change the location of a report item:
32.8.2 Reordering report items

The order of report items in the Report Contents window is the order they print in the report. You can reorder items that are within the same folder or layer by dragging them to a
1 In the Report Contents Window, press down on the left
mouse button over the report item you want to move.

2 Drag the report item to its new location and release the left mouse button. (RAM Concept does not allow you to move a report item outside of its folder or layer)
RAM Concept
155
Chapter 32
156
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
33 Exporting Plans and Tables

You can export any plan or text table in RAM Concept. Concept supports export of plans as .dwg or .dxf files in AutoCAD R12 through AutoCAD 2000 format. Tables export as text files, which you can open with most spreadsheet software.
To choose a text size:
1 Choose View > Appearance. 2 In the Font section of the Appearance dialog box, click
AaBbZz to select a font. The point size of text is 72 times the actual size. Thus, 9 points is one-eighth of an inch.
33.1 Exporting a plan

RAM Concept exports a plan with whatever information is visible at the time. You need to open a plan and make it the active window before exporting. You make a plan the active window by clicking on it.
To export the active plan:
3 In the Select Font dialog box, choose the font size and
click OK.
4 Set the font scale to zero and click OK.
Note: Do not use Enlarge Fonts (

(
) or Shrink Fonts ) to change the text size before exporting.
1 Choose File > Export Drawing.
33.2 Exporting a table

Text tables export to tab-delimited text files that you can open with most spreadsheet software.
To export a text table:
The Export Drawing dialog box appears.

2 Choose a name and type for the AutoCAD file and click
Save. The File Units dialog box appears.

3 Select the units for the AutoCAD file and click OK.
1 Open the text table you wish to export. 2 Click Export (at the top of the window). 3 Enter a name for the text file and click Save.
33.1.1 Selecting the text size

The exported text size depends on the visible text size on the screen. You can change the text size to suit the export.
RAM Concept
157
Chapter 33
158
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System

Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural
System is referred to as RSS. RAM Concept has functions that can export reactions and geometry to the RAM Structural System.
34.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead Loading and the Balance Loading during export
Concept adds the Self-Dead Loading reactions to the Dead Load reactions during export. This ensures that the RAM Concrete Analysis of the structure considers the selfweight of the slab.
34.1 About the export of reactions

RAM Concept has a function that exports wall and column reactions to the RAM Structural System.This export capability allows RSS to use Concept's accurate load distribution to calculate wall, column and foundation gravity forces. The export capability also allows RSS to consider the effects of floor tendons on columns and walls for post-tensioned structures. This export capability only applies to elevated slab models created in RAM Concept by importing from the RAM Structural System.
Note: The RAM Structural System provides the option to have beam and slab self-weights calculated automatically, or input manually as part of the dead load case. Conversely, RAM Concept always automatically includes beam and slab self-weights in its analysis. We recommend that, when using RSS in combination with Concept, you have RSS automatically calculate the beam and slab self-weight loads. That will eliminate any confusion regarding whether self-weight loads are included in the analysis or need to be manually specified as part of the dead load case, even when some levels are designed with RSS and some levels are designed with Concept.
RAM Concept does not currently export Transfer loading reactions to RSS. When analyzing a building with a transfer slab, RSS uses its own internal distribution of the transfer forces in the slab rather than forces from Concept's floor analysis. Concepts exported Direct loading reactions will be used by RSS, if you so direct. See Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete on page 160 for further information. RAM Concept exports the balance loading reactions to a hyperstatic load case that is only visible in RAM Concrete. Generally, balance forces and hyperstatic forces are not the same, but for a support that contains no tendons, however, the balance forces are equal to the hyperstatic forces.
Note: The RAM Structural System requires RAM Concrete to consider the exported Concept reactions.
The RAM Concept force export function transfers column and wall reactions to the RAM Structural System database. The export only sets the wall and column reactions for the end of the columns and/or walls that are touching the elevated slab. Exporting of reactions does not affect the support axial force of walls and columns above the slab. The structure above the column or wall determines the axial force. RAM Concept only exports reactions from gravity loadings imported from RSS back to RSS. For example, if you add Swimming Pool Loading to a Concept file, the export function will not transfer reactions from that loading to RSS.
Note: See Post-tensioning loadings on page 334 for a

discussion of balance and hyperstatic loadings.
Note: RAM Concept does not export Construction Dead Loading reactions, as they would have no further use in RSS. Note: RAM Concept never exports lateral loadings (imported from RSS or otherwise) to RSS. Note: Loadings in RAM Concept are analogous to load cases in RSS.
34.1.2 The export of reactions process

You can export reactions to RSS at any time after you perform a Calc All operation and you save the file.
To export to the RAM Structural System
Choose File > Export Reactions to RAM Structural System. A dialog box, as shown in Figure 34-1, opens with a list of RSS story names to which you can export reactions. Concept labels one story name as Source Story. This is the RSS story previously imported to create this Concept file. Concept lists other stories in the RSS file with the
RAM Concept
159
Chapter 34 same floor type, and labels them Identical Story or Compatible Story. A story is compatible with, but not identical to, the source story if it has a different story height, member sizes, or (for the top story of the type) any columns above it have different orientations. Select any combination of stories, and click OK. RAM Concept displays a log detailing the results of the export operation when the export is completed.
34.1.5 Checks performed after choosing export stories

RAM Concept checks each story you choose to export against the RSS file in detail. If Concept detects any errors, you may cancel the export operation or return to the story selection window to deselect the stories with errors. If Concept issues only warnings, you may continue with the export or return to the story selection window. Concept generates warnings for any columns or walls above the Concept slab that do not have matching columns or walls above the export story selected. This typically only happens at the highest story of the floor type, where it transitions to a different floor type or the roof. Concept also generates warnings if a selected story's height is different from the source story height.
34.1.6 Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete

Once you export the column and wall reactions to RSS, they become available to RAM Concrete for analysis and design purposes, but only if you inform RSS that you want to use them.
To set RAM Concrete to use RAM Concepts reactions
Figure 34-1 Export Reactions to RAM Structural System dialog box
34.1.3 About export reactions access and consistency checking

RAM Concept performs consistency checking before the actual export operation to ensure that it can export reactions correctly. Concept performs the checks before and after choosing the export stories.
1 Start RAM Concrete 2 Choose Criteria > Column Forces
Select the button at the top to Use RAM Concept Analysis Forces at selected levels. Select the levels by checking the box in the Use column. You can use this dialog to review the RSS levels that have Concept forces and the Concept file name from which you exported the forces. The Read column displays the date you imported each level from RSS into Concept. The Saved column displays the date you exported member reactions from Concept to that level. The Source Story column indicates the source story of the RSS file used to import data into the Concept file. If the Source Story, Saved and Concept File entries are empty, then you have not exported member forces to that level. If the Read entry is empty, then you have never imported that level to Concept.
34.1.4 Checks performed before choosing export stories

The first check performed is your access to the RSS file from which the RAM Concept floor was imported. The export operation can proceed only if the RSS file exists, it is not currently open in RSS and you are able to access and modify it. Concept also checks the RSS file for changes made to the source story since importation into the Concept file. If someone has made a major change to the source story, you must reimport from RSS and recalculate results before exporting. If someone has made a minor change to the source story, Concept gives you the option of reimporting. Major changes include adding or deleting columns or walls. Changing a column size is a minor change. Concept cannot export the file if someone has added columns or walls after importing from RSS, or if any springs or rigid supports are present in the Concept model.
Note: RSS uses Concept wall reactions on all levels where

Concept column reactions are used.
Note: After exporting Concept reactions to RSS, you will need to perform a RAM Concrete reanalysis of the structure before designing any members or importing any member forces from RSS to Concept (such as for a mat foundation).
160
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34.1.7 How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept link works
The key to the export of Concept's reactions to RSS are the imported walls and columns and the imported direct gravity loadings. Walls and columns that you import from RSS have special RSS identifiers tagged to them. These identifiers allow Concept to match its column and wall elements to the corresponding members in RSS. Concept will even allow you to move the walls and columns slightly (up to 50mm or 2"). Concept will not allow you to export if you add, delete, or significantly move imported columns or walls (or do not import walls and columns). Concept does this to ensure transfer of the full equilibrium gravity load between Concept and RSS.
Concept model design code is ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02 or BS8110, the design code of the RSS database is set accordingly. Otherwise the database design code of the new RSS database will be the user's default design code. After a file is selected, the Export Geometry to RAM Structural System dialog appears, as shown in Figure 342.
Note: If you accidentally delete an imported support, or the supports change in RSS, you can always reimport the walls and columns.
RSS tracks a fixed set of gravity loadings through the structures. These loadings are Dead Load, Live Load Reducible, Live Load Unreducible, Live Load Storage and Live Load Roof (when Concept and RAM Concrete are used the Hyperstatic loading is tracked as well). To ensure compatibility with RSS, Concept will not allow you to delete these imported gravity loadings. Concept does allow you to modify the imported RSS gravity loading and to add more gravity loadings. Concept assumes that you are fully aware that it considers only the loads that appear in the imported RSS loadings in the reactions it exports back to RSS.
Figure 34-2 Export Geometry to RAM Structural System dialog box
The dialog lists the floor types present in the RSS file.
3 Enter the new floor type name in the New Floor Type
Name text field. A popup notifies you if the floor type name entered is already defined. The Columns (below) and Walls (below) check boxes select whether columns and/or walls are exported. Concept exports only the columns and walls below the floor, because it is those elements that are associated with a floor type in RSS. If you check Start RSS after Export, then RSS starts on the file after the geometry is exported. This has no effect if RSS is already running.
4 Click Create New Floor Type to export the selected
34.2 About the export of geometry

Column and wall geometry can be exported to a new or existing RAM Structural System database file. This geometry can only be exported to a new RSS floor type.
To export geometry to the RAM Structural System
1 Choose File > Export Geometry to RAM Structural
System.
members to the new floor type.
Note: The menu item is disabled if there is no model currently open.

A file browser appears which allows the selection of an RSS file.
2 Select a RSS file or enter a new filename.
Note: Column and wall geometry can only be exported to

a new RSS floor type.
34.2.1 About errors and ambiguities

Errors and ambiguities in a Concept model are normally detected and corrected when the model is meshed. Concept allows models to be exported before they are meshed, so 161
If a new RSS filename is entered, a new RSS database is created with the current Concept models units. If the RAM Concept
Chapter 34 some errors are detected and arbitrarily corrected when the geometry is exported. If two or more walls overlap, completely or partially, only one of the overlapping segments will be exported. If two or more columns have the same location, only one column at that location will be exported. In either case, a pop-up dialog describes the columns and wall segments that were not exported. If any columns or wall segments are not exported, the user should check the material properties of the elements that were exported to RSS. If the overlapping columns or walls had different properties, the user may have to reassign the desired values in RSS. The user can also mesh the model and resolve such errors within Concept before exporting. Walls defined in RSS may not intersect other walls or span columns or the ends of other walls. Each Concept wall is split into segments at each of these locations before being exported. The splitting of walls is not reported, but the effect will be seen as individual walls in RSS.
162
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
35 Using Strip Wizard

Strip Wizard is a dialog that automates the initial steps in the process of creating a model in RAM Concept. When modeling a straightforward slab or beam, you can efficiently use Strip Wizard to enter the structural data without having to draw in a plan window. With the wizard, you can enter the spans, tributaries, loads and posttensioning in the same way you would with a conventional two-dimensional program. Since entering the structural data in Strip Wizard is so quick and easy, it is particularly useful for preliminary design of slabs, beams, and joists. Strip Wizard uses the structural information you provide to build a model in a new Concept file. You can then modify the file by drawing openings, surface steps, point loads, and such using plan windows. Strip Wizard is deliberately simple, so use it to create the basic structure, and then modify the structure in plans if necessary. The authors intend that Strip Wizard be largely for assessment of two-dimensional behavior. The (automatic) design results are only for one direction (the x-axis). Since Concept is a three-dimensional program, line supports are automatically included along the edges of the model that allow deflection but no rotation. This closely simulates two-dimensional behavior.
3 Click Next to proceed or you can load Strip Wizard
Settings (see Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings on page 167 for more information).
35.2 Specifying general parameters

Specify the structure type, spans and concrete mixes on the General Parameters page of the Wizard.
Structure Type
Decide what type of structure you want Strip Wizard to create and whether to use post-tensioning. The floor can be set up as post-tensioned or reinforced and can be one of the following systems: Two-way slab One-way slab Beam Joist
Spans
35.1 Starting Strip Wizard

When you start Strip Wizard, it prompts you to create a new RAM Concept file. This file is where the wizard generates your model once you enter all the structural data. Strip Wizard uses all the generic settings defined in the new file (such as units, materials, loadings, etc). If you want Strip Wizard to use your custom settings, create the new file from a template. For example, if you want certain concrete mixes to be available when specifying general design parameters, you should create the new file from a Concept template with these concrete mixes. After you have chosen options in the New File dialog, the Strip Wizard dialog appears. At this point, you can load previously saved Strip Wizard settings if you want (see Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings on page 167 for more information). To start defining your strip, proceed to the next page in the wizard by clicking Next.
To start Strip Wizard:
Enter the number of spans for the strip (not including cantilevers). Decide if you are using start or end cantilevers. Check Asymmetric to allow the model to have different tributaries on either side of the columns.
Concrete Mixes
Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for the supports.
Note: The concrete mixes available are the mixes in the new file created when you started Strip Wizard. If you want to use specific mixes, use a template when creating the new file.
35.3 Entering span data

The table you see on the Span Data page depends on the information you entered on the General Parameters page. The cantilevers and spans appear as rows in the table. The table columns depend on whether you are modeling a oneway or two-way system, beam system, or joist system. For this table and subsequent pages, the top data rows name is Typical. Data entered here automatically copies to the rows below. You can overwrite the copied data.
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard. 2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click
OK. The Strip Wizard dialog appears.
RAM Concept
163
Chapter 35
35.3.1 One-way and two-way systems

Span length, slab thickness and tributary width define these systems. They can vary span by span.
Length
35.3.3 Joist systems

Span length, web properties (depth, width, spacing and number), slab thickness and tributary width define these systems. They can vary span by span. This system does not allow asymmetry.
Length
The span length from center to center of supports.

Thickness

W Depth
The slab structural depth.

Start Width
The joist web structural depth (including the flange depth).

W Width
The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Start Width is the left start width, and R Start Width is the right start width.
End Width
The joist web width.

F Depth
The slab width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L End Width is the left end width, and R End Width is the right end width.
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).

Pan Start Offset
35.3.2 Beam systems

Span length, beam depth, beam width, slab thickness and tributary width define these systems. They can vary span by span.
Length
The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the span to the pan (or void former).
Pan End Offset
The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the end of the span.
Additional Web Properties

W Depth
The following properties determine the tributary width for the whole model. The width cannot vary span by span.
Spacing
The beam web structural depth (including the flange depth).

W Width
The center-to-center spacing of the webs.

Number
The beam web width.

F Depth
The total number of webs.
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).

Start Trib Width
35.4 Entering support data

The Support Data page is for entering supports above and below. You must specify supports below but they are optional above.
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib Start Width is the left tributary start width, and R Trib Start Width is the right tributary start width.
End Trib Width
35.4.1 Support (above and below) properties

Depth, width, height, bottom fixity and top fixity define the supports. They can vary span by span. Strip Wizard interprets a support with a width four or more times the depth as a wall. Otherwise, it is a column. RAM Concept
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib End Width is the left tributary end width, and R End Width is the right tributary end width.
164
Chapter 35
Depth
35.6 Entering the loads

The Loads page is for entering area and line loads in the zdirection for two standard loadings.
The support dimension parallel to the span.

Width
The support dimension perpendicular to the span (enter zero for round columns).
Height
35.6.1 Load properties

Area and line loads can be input for two different loadings on each span.
Dead Area Load
The supports height from its base to mid-depth of the floor.

Bottom Fixity
The moment connection at the base of the support.

Top Fixity
The area load over the entire span.

Dead Line Load
The moment connection between the support and the floor.
The line load from the first support center to the second support center for each span.
Live Area Load
35.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels

The Drop Caps and Drop Panels page is for entering drop caps and drop panels for two-way slabs. The page is not available for one-way slabs, beams or joists. Strip Wizard uses drop caps for punching shear only; it ignores them for flexural design. Some codes provide guidance on what dimensions are required to consider a thickening as a drop panel. Strip Wizard does not check such rules.
The live load over the entire span.

Live Line Load
The live load from the first support center to the second support center for each span.
Loadings to use
The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the loads as belonging to any of the Standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
Dead
35.5.1 Drop cap and drop panel properties

Thickness, width, before length and after length define the drops. They can vary span by span. It is possible to have drop caps and drop panels at the same support. The drop cap should be the thicker of the two.
Thickness
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
Live
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file (except for that used for Dead).
The total thickness (structural depth) of the drop. This is not the incremental increase in thickness.
Width
35.7 Specifying the post-tensioning

The Post-Tensioning page is only available if you checked Post-Tensioned in the Structure Type section of the General Parameters page. Most of the data entered on this page relates to minimum precompression, load balancing and tendon cover. Strip Wizard uses this data in conjunction with data for spans, depths and loads to generate a single profiled tendon.
The drop dimension perpendicular to the span.

Before Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the beginning of the drop to the support center.
After Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the support center to the end of the drop.
RAM Concept
165
Chapter 35
35.7.1 General PT information

You specify the type of tendon and information that helps to determine the number of strands.
PT System
35.8 Specifying reinforcement

The Reinforcement page is for specifying reinforcement bars and general covers.
Specifies the size and type of strands for the tendon (as defined in the Materials Specification of the RAM Concept file).
Stressing
35.8.1 Reinforcing bar

You specify the bars from those available in the RAM Concept file.
Top
Specifies the stressing (jack) locations. Concept calculates tendon friction and other losses if jacks are located at one or both ends.
Min P/A
Name of reinforcement bar used in the top face for flexural design.
Bottom
The minimum average precompression required for the concrete. Following the code minimum does not usually result in the most economical design.
Name of reinforcement bar used in the bottom face for flexural design.
Shear
35.7.2 Balance load

Balance load refers to the amount of uplift provided by the tendons. The industry has traditionally expressed this as a percentage of gravity loads.
Min Balance Load Percentage:
Name of reinforcement bar used for one-way shear design.
35.8.2 Reinforcement clear cover

The covers are for bars and tendons. Rounding of tendon profiles could override the tendon covers.
Top
The percentage of the specified load balanced by tendons.

Balance Load Considers:
Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars and tendons.

Bottom
Specifies the loadings that the balance loading is based upon. The choices are self-weight of concrete, self-weight plus dead, or total load.
Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars and tendons.
35.7.3 Profiling
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
Straight Profile Distance at Supports
35.8.3 Punching shear checks

You decide if Concept performs punching shear calculations.
Perform punching shear checks
The length of tendon that is horizontal at a support. The dimension is the total flat distance, not the distance each side of the support.
Round Profiles to Nearest
Checking this box instructs Concept to draw punching shear checks at each column.
Cover to CGS
The profile distance increment. This allows rounding of tendon high and low points to convenient values. If this value is too large it may cause cover violations.
The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the top reinforcement. Usually this is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d distance.
166
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
35.9 Completing Strip Wizard

The Completing Strip Wizard page is the final page in the wizard dialog. At this point, you can choose to save the information you have just entered so that you may load it into the wizard later. See Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings on page 167 for more information. When you click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page, Strip Wizard draws your model in the RAM Concept file based on the data you have provided. The leftmost support of your model is located at the origin (0,0). Open plans on the Mesh Input, Latitude Tendon, and Design Strip layers to view your model. You cannot view the finite element mesh, however, until you generate the mesh.
To complete the wizard:
See Chapter 17, Generating the Mesh and Chapter 27, Calculating Results for further information.
35.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings

The data you entered into the Strip Wizard can be saved as a Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename extension of .cptstrip) and reloaded into the wizard later. The Strip Wizard Settings file contains only the information you entered into the wizard pages. Save your Strip Wizard Settings before you click Finish on the final page of the dialog. Loading Strip Wizard Settings just sets the values in the Strip Wizard dialog to the values stored in the Settings file. After you load your Strip Wizard Settings, you then page through the dialog as usual by clicking Next. You can change the data in the wizard to create a different strip. This does not affect the Settings file you loaded. You must save a new Strip Wizard Settings file if you want your changes to be stored for later use.
To load strip wizard settings:
1 Click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page.
35.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results

After completing Strip Wizard, you are ready to generate the mesh and run an analysis calculation on your model. To get the best finite element mesh you need to regenerate twice: once before, and once after, calculating.This is because calculating generates the design strips, which in turn can be used to improve the mesh the second time you generate.
1 Click Load on the Welcome to Strip Wizard page. 2 Select the Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename
extension of .cptstrip) and click Open.

To save strip wizard settings:
1 Click Save on the Completing the Strip Wizard page
(before you click Finish).

2 Enter the name of your Strip Wizard Settings file and
click Save.
RAM Concept
167
Chapter 35
168
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
36 General Tips
This chapter provides advice on learning RAM Concept and tips that are not explained elsewhere.
36.2 Walls
36.2.1 Drawing connecting walls
It is recommended that intersecting walls are drawn such that one wall terminates at the centerline of the other, as shown in 36-2.
Note: It is strongly suggested that you refer to Learning

RAM Concept on page 2 of Chapter 1, Introduction before reading this chapter.
36.1 Beams
You should be careful when modeling beams. If you use standard finite elements then the beams torsional stiffness could be overestimated, which could erroneously reduce the deflection in the adjacent slabs. In Concept, there is no difference between standard slab and beam elements, and standard elements have a torsional stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed. The actual torsional stiffness of a beam is proportional to the cube of the lesser value of depth and width. Standard elements thus overestimate the torsional stiffness of beams that are deeper than they are wide. For this reason, you should consider using the No-torsion behavior for beams, especially deep edge beams. See Beam properties on page 57 for more information.
Figure 36-2 Connecting walls
36.2.2 Walls above

Walls above behave similarly to beams: they stiffen the floor. This is especially relevant in transfer floors. The floor moments DO NOT include the bending moments in the actual walls. We recommend that if you are in doubt as to the effect of walls above, do not model them.
Figure 36-1 No-torsion beam setting
Figure 36-3 Comparison of two floors identical in all respects except that one has a wall above (Two images with slab shown, two with no slab shown).
RAM Concept
169
Chapter 36
36.3 Restraint
Columns and walls restrain the floor against (posttensioning induced) axial deformations unless you model columns with rollers and walls as slip walls (shear wall property unchecked). It is unlikely that columns above restrain the floor so a roller above will generally be appropriate Restraint generally reduces the precompression and hence increases the service reinforcement. It usually increases strength reinforcement too.
Figure 36-4 Effect of wall modeled above: no wall (left) vs. wall above (right) - plot of slab moment about x-axis.
36.2.3 The difference between walls above and upstand beams of similar proportions
Concept treats walls above the slab similarly to beams. Using wall-beams instead of just thickened slab elements has both advantages and disadvantages; overall it is not recommended to model walls above the slab as beams. Slab elements have two major advantages over wall elements (wall-beams): Concept design strip cross sections automatically integrate the forces across slab elements. Wall-beam elements are ignored in these integrations. Also, Concept provides you many controls over how slab element results can be displayed; wall-beam elements (like wall elements) can only plot their reactions to the slab. However, as discussed in Beams on page 169, Concepts standard slab elements have a torsional stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed. This can cause a large over-estimation of the torsional stiffness for a very thick slab element if it is adjacent to relatively thin elements. Wall-beam elements do not have this problem. As such, walls above that are modeled as upstand beams should use the No-torsion beam setting discussed in Beams on page 169. When modeling wall-beams, Concept interprets some of the wall element parameters differently. If the wall-beam is not rotationally fixed to the slab then the wall-beam will have zero torsional stiffness. If the wall-beam is not a shear wall then it will have zero axial stiffness. The vertically compressible and rotationally fixed at far end parameters are ignored. Wall-beam elements have one advantage over slab elements. Slab elements of drastically differing thicknesses in the same structure can cause the automatic plotting controls to show (correctly) huge force variations in and adjacent to thick slab elements and almost no variation within the thin slab element areas. This does not generally happen if walls above are modeled as wall-beams. 170
36.4 Miscellaneous
There are many tools and capabilities described in the preceding chapters that are useful but often overlooked.
36.4.1 Templates
We have created a template (for the purpose of starting a file) that may or may not suit your needs. You can create your own template with additional plans, materials and settings that you can use when you start a new file. See About templates on page 6.
36.4.2 Adding plans

You can add plans. SeeCreating new plans on page 11 and Creating new result plans on page 132.
36.4.3 Copying and moving objects

Many users do not appreciate that selected objects can be copied and moved through a combination of holding down the shift key and using the move command (or similar). See Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects on page 17. You should also familiarize yourself with using the relative coordinates command. See Using relative coordinates on page 16.
To copy and move an object using relative coordinates
1 With the Selection tool ( 2 Choose the Move tool (
), select the object. ).
3 Hold down the Shift key and click anywhere on the
workspace.
4 Type the letter r followed by the x- and y-coordinates
separated by a comma (e.g. r10, 5), and press Return.
RAM Concept
Chapter 36 This moves a copy of the selection x units to the right and y units upward. based) moments (actual and demand), crack widths and reinforcement, to name just a few. Some clients prefer to plot the reinforcement on new plans rather than use the template plans that show bar call-outs.
36.4.4 Expanding tool buttons

You can expand many tools to reveal additional capabilities. See Expanding tool buttons on page 6.
36.4.9 Reducing the information shown on plans

You can remove trivial results such as small reactions in two different ways. See Specifying report as zero on page 21, and Reaction on page 141 and Figure on page 141.
36.4.5 The Utility tool

The Utility tool can save you a lot of time when you need to move and stretch many objects or control points. See Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 17.
36.4.6 Left Wall and Right Wall tools

The Left Wall and Right Wall tools can be very useful. See Drawing walls on page 52.
36.4.10 Load balancing

You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips. See Viewing balanced load percentages on page 130.
36.4.7 Changing multiple tendon profile points

You can seek and change profile points that have the same value in one operation. See Change profiles tool on page 121.
36.4.11 The Auditor

This can be invaluable in unlocking the black-box of calculations. See Chapter 30, Using the Auditor.
Note: Many users complain that there is too much information revealed by the auditor. You can reduce the information by auditing a rule set rather than the design summary.
36.4.8 Plotting Results

Many users are unaware of the power of the plot capabilities. You can plot many results including (strip
RAM Concept
171
Chapter 36
172
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
37 Frequently Asked Questions

This chapter addresses many of the questions that we are frequently asked. It should be read in conjunction with: Learning RAM Concept: Section 1.5 of Chapter 1 Chapter 36, General Tips, and Chapter 38, Errors and Warnings
Is Concept capable of running a single design strip for quick preliminary runs without modeling the whole building?
Yes. See Chapter 35, Using Strip Wizard and Chapter 46, Strip Wizard Tutorial.
Can I model a pour strip?
Yes, although there are limitations.

1 Use the orthotropic properties for the pour strip area such
37.1 Capabilities and Modeling

What can Concept design?
that the axial stiffness perpendicular to the strip is significantly reduced. See the discussion below Figure 16-6 on page 57
2 Terminate tendons either side of the pour strip.
Elevated (suspended) concrete floors and mat foundations (rafts). They can be reinforced concrete, post-tensioned concrete or hybrid. See Structural systems on page 1 for more information.
Is there a limit on the size of structure modeled?
Note: Modeling a pour strip in this manner does not consider the temporary situation before the strip is poured back. This could affect deflections and resultants.
How can I model curved edges or walls?
The only limit is the performance of the computer hardware. The analysis run time is approximately proportional to the square of the number of nodes in the model, so large structures may take a significant amount of time to analyze. Design time is approximately proportional to the number of span segment strip cross sections. See Decreasing calculation time on page 128 for more information.
Is there any restriction to the maximum thickness of slab that can be modeled?
Use a series of straight lines. The approximation should have negligible effect.
Can Concept be used to design retaining walls by drawing the wall as a slab?
While Concept is not optimized for this use, it can perform most of the analysis and design tasks if you are very careful. Care must be used as Concept assumes that gravity loads are in the downward Z direction. You need to set all of the self-dead loading load factors to zero and create your own self-weight loadings. You probably want to apply these loads at the mid-slab depth; otherwise the eccentricity will add a self-weight moment to the slab. While Concept's design cross sections reports all of the moments and forces on the design cross section, Concept does not perform design considering all of the forces and moments. Specifically, Concept does not consider the Mz value in design, because Concept does not specify the positioning of reinforcement that is important for Mz design. Concept does not consider P-delta effects.
What does hybrid mean?
Concept's analysis of slab elements considers shear deformation as well as bending deformation. This ensures that Concept gives reasonable results for both thin slabs and thick slabs. In general, Concept's design provisions apply the code requirements that are appropriate for slabs with typical span-to-depth ratios. If the geometry of your slab is outside the usual ranges, you may need to consider if any special design considerations are necessary.
Can Concept design more than one story at a time?
Not by itself. You can use the RAM Structural System to integrate numerous floors into one large model.
Can I use Concept to design slab-on-ground?
The expression slab-on-ground is often used to described residential house slabs. The designer has to use engineering judgment to determine if mat analysis and design techniques are suitable for such structures. See the FAQ for Mats (rafts) on page 176. RAM Concept
A hybrid floor is one that contains both PT and RC areas. Most post-tensioned floors have some RC elements such as pour strips and elevator core slabs. By selecting the appropriate design rules these regions can be designed at the same time as the PT elements.
173
Chapter 37
37.2 Files
What is the difference between creating a mat (raft) file and an elevated slab file?
37.3 Plans and perspectives

What's the difference between a plan and a layer?
There is really no difference; all files give you the same capabilities. The default files are setup differently because there are usually additional load cases and plans for a mat (lateral load cases, soil bearing plans, etc.). With some work, you could turn any elevated slab file into a mat file and vice versa.
Can I save the data file with results?
A layer is an organizational concept. A layer is a collection of related objects and results and each object and result resides on one and only one layer. For example, all slab elements are on the Element layer. Plans, on the other hand, are a display and editing concept. Each plan is a filtered view of all of Concepts layers. A plan can be set up to edit a particular layer, but the plan does not own the layer. All changes that are made to the layer using the plan will be visible in all other plans, because all plans are viewing the same set of layers. See Chapter 3, Understanding Layers and Chapter 4, Using Plans and Perspectives for more information.
How do I delete unwanted plans?
This cannot be done with the current version - you need to open the file and recalculate. We expect to add this feature in a future version (but the save with results files will be huge).
Can I work from CAD drawings?
Yes. See Chapter 13, Using a CAD Drawing.

Is it necessary to start a model with a DWG or DXF file?
1 Choose Layers > Delete.
A dialog box appears.

2 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Can I view all information on one plan?
No. For straightforward geometry it may be quicker to draw from scratch. It can be useful to specify a grid and then use snap to grid to locate columns and walls.
I deleted the imported drawing can it be brought back?
Yes. It is sometimes a good idea to delete the imported drawing as it affects the extent that Concept displays and prints. Any DWG or DXF file can be re-imported if necessary. If you moved the imported drawing or structure after the first import then the new import will not match. You can move the new drawing if necessary.
Can Concept export to a drawing file to aid in drafting?
Yes, but it is generally not advised. You can turn on all objects from one layer in one operation, and then repeat for the next layer.
1 Make the plan or perspective the active window. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3 Click on the tab for the objects layer.
The plan or perspectives layer is the one initially selected.

4 Check the Show All box, and click OK.
Yes. See Exporting a plan on page 157 of Chapter 33.

Can I export results?
How can I tell if there is an object on a layer?
Yes. See Exporting a table on page 157 of Chapter 33.

Can I change the default new file settings?
See Determining which plans contain objects on page 10 of Chapter 3, Understanding Layers.
I have two items at the same location, how do I select just one of them?
Yes. See About templates on page 6.

Can I set the default file for an RC design?
Yes. You could create a template that is suited to RC design, such as eliminating the Initial Service Load Combination and Initial Service Rule Set, and unchecking the Consider as Post-Tensioned option in the span segment properties. See About templates on page 6.
Double click at the location and you should select just one object. Hold down shift and double click again and you select the other object.
Why do I see nothing in a perspective display?
The perspective camera may be looking in the wrong direction. Click Zoom Extent ( Viewpoint ( ). ) or Show Print
174
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
Why can I not see the area springs in a perspective?
Area springs can take a long time to generate in a perspective and so are not turned on in the default files. You need to turn them on with the Visible Objects dialog.
What does conflicting mean in a Selected Items field?
Without the priority system the modeling of floors would require one of two methods: Objects for slabs of different thicknesses, beams, openings etc. could not overlap - this would be very tiresome for all but very simple floors, or Depths would have to additive. For example, you would have to deduct slab depth from beam depth. If you had to change the slab depth then a change would be required for the beam, unless its depth changed by the same amount.
Can I copy columns or walls below to the same above?
This means that more than one object has been selected and they have different values for that property. For example, if you select two slab objects that have different thicknesses then the thickness field displays conflicting.
Note: In versions prior to 3.0 the field would be blank in

such instances.
Yes.
1 Select all of the columns or walls you wish to copy. 2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
37.4 Units
What units can I use?
from the popup menu that appears).

3 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from
the popup menu that appears). The pasted objects are the current selection.
4 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
See Chapter 7, Choosing Units.

Can I switch units after creating a file?

5 Change Support Set from Below to Above, and click OK.
See Changing the units on page 21.
Note: It is important that you do not abandon the process 37.5 Codes
Can I change codes after creating a file?
after pasting. Otherwise, you will have two supports below at various locations, which causes calculation errors.
The meshing operation produces a very irregular mesh. Is this satisfactory?
Yes. See Code options on page 126.
This depends upon a number of factors. See Deciding what mesh element size to use on page 61 and Improving the mesh on page 62.
Can I vary the mesh intensity at different locations?
37.6 Sign Conventions

What is the sign convention for moments shears and reactions?
Indirectly. See Selectively refining the mesh on page 62.

What value should I use for the area springs Z force constant?
See Selecting sign convention on page 23 and About plot sign convention on page 24.
Can I change the sign convention?
The geotechnical engineer commonly provides a value called the subgrade modulus or modulus of subgrade reaction. As a guide only: realistic values vary from 100 pci (approx. 25 MN/m3) for soft clay to 750 pci (approx. 200 MN/m3) for very dense gravel.
Yes. See Changing the sign convention on page 24.
37.7 Structure
37.7.1 Mesh Input layer
Why is it necessary to have priorities?
37.7.2 Element layer

How can I view the slab without the mesh?
Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan
RAM Concept
175
Chapter 37
What is the difference between beam and slab elements?
37.7.5 Mats (rafts)

How do I design a mat foundation?
There is no difference unless you modify their behavior. See discussion of behavior in Slab area properties on page 56 and Beam properties on page 57.
How many nodes or elements are allowed?
The Chapter 45, Mat Foundation Tutorial introduces the concepts for mat design.
Does Concept ignore soil tension?
There is no limit, other than the limitations of your computer.

How many elements should I use per span or panel?
You can reduce the tension by iteration. The tension gets closer to zero with an increase in the number of iterations. See Zero tension iteration options on page 126 for more information.
Does Concept design for soil heave?
This cannot be answered directly as it depends upon the structure and loads. See Deciding what mesh element size to use on page 61.
37.7.3 Columns
Do columns restrain the slab?
Not directly. You could draw spring supports that approximate varying soil support.
Do I need to draw the columns above in a mat foundation model?
Depending upon the defined fixity, columns can provide rotational and lateral restraint. If the far end of a column is defined as a roller support (or both ends of the column are pinned) then the column does not provide any lateral restraint to the slab.
Do columns above the slab support the slab vertically?
No, but it is a good idea. It ensures a node is placed at that location where there is likely to be a heavy point load.
Can Concept design for pile supports?
Yes. Use either (flexible) columns under, or point springs. Skin friction is not considered.
Can Concept design for pile and mat (raft) action together?
No. Columns only restrain the slab rotationally and laterally.
37.7.4 Walls
Do walls restrain the slab laterally?
Yes, but the results could be very susceptible to variations in geotechnical parameters. For example, if the soils stiffness is overestimated, the actual pile reactions could be significantly underestimated. Use caution.
Does the area spring support have to match the mesh?
Yes, if you select Shear Wall as a property. If the Shear Wall is unchecked then the slab is allowed to slip freely over the top of the wall. The walls rotational stiffness is independent of the Shear Wall setting; use the fixity settings to control the walls rotational stiffness about its longitudinal axis.
What is the effect of specifying walls above?
No.
Can the soil stiffness vary?
Yes. You can vary the stiffness in two directions. See Area spring properties on page 55.
Where do I select the allowable soil bearing pressure?
Wall elements can be used to model the stiffness and spanning ability of walls connected to the slab. You should exercise caution when using them. See Walls above on page 169.
Do walls above the slab support the slab vertically?
This is not an input parameter. You need to look at soil bearing pressure plans (which have a maxima / minima legend) to assess the maximum pressures. Also, see the FAQ on Soil bearing on page 186 (in the results section).
Does Concept iterate to remove tension in a point or line spring?
No, they act like beams. See Walls above on page 169.
Do walls above the slab provide rotational restraint?
No, only for area springs.
There is no restraint at the far end of a wall above. (Even if Rotationally Fixed at Far End is checked, it is ignored).
176
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
37.8 Tendons
Why are some tendons shown at the wrong elevation in the tendon perspective?
Does it matter how I draw half tendons?
The soffit elevation at each profile point is determined during the Analyze All and Calculate All commands. If one of these commands is not performed since the drawing (or moving, etc.) of a tendon, or since a change in the mesh, the tendon elevations in perspectives are not accurate. The same is true for elevations optionally shown as text on the plans. It is quicker to analyze (but not using Calculate All) with Process > Analyze All. This avoids processing the design calculations.
What do Latitude and Longitude Tendons mean?
Yes. The inflection point is measured from the first point clicked and the profiles are specified in the order of the points clicked. To be compatible with the tendons created using the Full Span Tendon tool, we strongly recommend that you always start at the high point.
Can I terminate some strands past a column?
This can be done with one of two methods.

1 The tendon can be forked such that the number of
strands decreases. As shown in Figure 37-1, if the transition is from 15S (15 strands) to 10S (because an adjacent span does not require that many strands) then terminate 5S using a half span tendon. It is common to terminate strands at quarter span and at the slab centroid.
Note: You should only use this method for tendons with no
jacks attached. This is because a jack attached to tendons of different lengths has inaccurate seating (wedge draw-in) loss calculations.
In the USA, Britain and other countries it is typical practice to place all the tendons in one direction in a concentrated band over column lines. If the designer is using another practice then we recommend that you still use the Latitude and Longitude tendon layers because it makes editing the PT easier. i.e. Put the tendons in the X direction on one layer and the Y tendons on the other. Latitude and Longitude are just layer names.
Do I have to draw the tendons for a post-tensioned slab?
Figure 37-1 Termination of strands (no jacks)
Yes. It is not difficult, and encourages you to address detailing issues before they become field problems.
How do I draw tendons?
2 The second method can be used when jacks are modeled.
If the total number of strands is 15S then one tendon with 10S needs to be continuous with an additional tendon with 5S alongside. It is common to terminate tendons at quarter span and at the slab centroid.
See About drawing tendons on page 118, Drawing single tendons on page 118 and Drawing multiple tendons on page 119. You double click the tendon tool to change default tendon properties and then draw tendons span by span, or panel by panel. You can select a specific tendon segment and right-click to change that segments properties. You can seek and change profile points that have the same value in one operation. See Change profiles tool on page 121.
Can I harp tendons?
Figure 37-2 Termination of strands / tendons (jacked). Plan alignment of tendons is subjective. Does Concept check to make sure the number of strands in connected tendon segments is consistent?
Yes. See section 38.3.3 of Chapter 38, Errors and Warnings.

How does Concept calculate friction losses?
Yes. Any tendon segment can be declared to be harped. The half-span tendon tool is useful for any harp point (or any low point) that is not at mid-span. Multiple harp points can be located in any span by using multiple tendon segments.
Concept only calculates friction losses if jacks are specified. Concept performs friction loss calculations considering the (elevation view) curvature of the tendons, the (plan view) horizontal kinks in the tendon and the jacking and friction parameters. The stress in the tendon is assumed to vary linearly along each tendon segment. 177
RAM Concept
Chapter 37 Along each tendon the following formula used is: P2 = P1 * exp-(mu * theta + k * L) where P1 is the known stress at one end of a tendon segment P2 is the unknown stress at the other end of a tendon segment mu is the angular friction coefficient (in units of 1/radians) theta is the total angular change along the tendon segment k is the wobble coefficient (in units of 1/length) L is the tendon segment length
Does Concept calculate elongations (extensions)?
Yes, if jacks are specified. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view Jack Elongation on a plan.
Do the elongations (extensions) include the effect of the seating distance (wedge draw-in)?
Yes. The elongation reported includes the deduction of the seating distance.
Where are tendon profiles measured from?
See discussion on Profile in Tendon properties on page 117.

It's much easier to take all the strands and put them into one tendon bundle instead of having to lay them all out. Is there much difference to the model whether you distribute tendons over the tributary or not?
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
At the joints between tendon segments Concept uses the following formula: P4 = P3 * exp-(mu * angle) where P4 is the unknown stress in the next tendon segment P3 is the known stress in the previous tendon segment (or the jack stress) mu is the same angular friction coefficient as above angle is the total angle change at the tendon profile point (includes both horizontal and vertical kinks) Concept incorporates seating loss (wedge draw-in loss) into the losses using the standard strain integration formulation. The equations above are still used, but the known and unknown values are swapped. Concept adjusts the tendon stresses iteratively until the integration of the strain change in the tendon equals the specified anchorage seat loss. Long term losses are input by the user as a jack parameter. See About jacks and Jack properties on page 121 for more information.
Do I have to specify jacks?
This is a matter of engineering judgment. There is certainly no need to lay out individual strands and it is usually satisfactory to group strands in larger tendon groups than that installed in the field. Keep in mind that design strip cross sections consider only the tendons that they cut through to calculate strength etc. There could be instances where you want to model banded tendons in multiple groups (if the band is very wide).
I have laid out the longitude tendons but want to change the number of strands per group. Do I have to lay them out again?
No. The number of strands in a tendon does not have to be an integer, so you can change it by any increment.
Can I determine the force in a tendon?
Yes. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view the Tendon Forces on a plan.
Does Concept check for tendons being outside of the concrete?
Yes. See discussion in sections 38.3.4 and 38.3.5 of Chapter 38, Errors and Warnings.
Do I need to do a load balancing calculation with all the tendons?
No. The load balance tool is available to help you calculate low points, but is not mandatory.
The load balancing percentage shown on the design strips plan does not make sense. How is this calculated?
No. Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any tendon without a jack.
Concepts balanced load percentage calculation assumes that what you define as a span, actually behaves like a span. Sometimes this is not the case. To calculate the effective dead load applied, Concept uses: D = 8 Md / L2
178
RAM Concept
Chapter 37 Where: D is the dead load to be calculated Md is the total dead load span moment (calculated from the moments at the first, middle and last cross sections of the span) L is the span length (as determined from the span segments, support conditions, etc.) The calculation for the effective balance load is similar: B = 8 Mb / L2 The percentage balanced is 100 . (-B/D) If, for example, the dead load moments at the start, middle and end cross sections are not negative, positive and negative then percentage balance calculation will not be useful. This does not mean your strips are wrong, but it might mean that your tendon layout is not doing what you think it is doing. Look at the DL (or DL + LL) deflections (without balance loading) and try to get a better feeling for how the structure is working and from there determine where to add and remove tendons. Example 37-1 Lateral SE Consider the structure with two elevated floors shown in Figure 37-3. Each level is 3m high and the structure is 10m wide.
Figure 37-3 Example with two elevated floors
Assume the following: a frame analysis has been performed on the building for this 100kN loading and the column forces are known a very simple distribution of forces (reasonable for beams much stiffer than columns) The forces on the top level slab (including column reactions) are:
37.9 Loadings
Is pattern loading possible?
Yes. See Chapter 20, Creating Pattern Loading.

For an irregular structure it is very time consuming to draw the area loads to match the structure. Is there a faster way?
It is not necessary for area loads to match the structure. Area loads can overlap each other and they can overhang the floor. This is shown in the PT tutorial.
Figure 37-4 Forces on top level slab Are area loads additive or does the maximum govern?
Loads are additive.

How do Lateral Self Equilibrium loadings work?
Fx0 = 100kN Fx1 = -50kN Fz1 = -15kN My1 = 75kN-m Fx2 = -50kN Fz2 = 15kN My2 = 75kN-m
Refer to Self-equilibrium analysis on page 335 of Chapter 47, Analysis Notes. However, the best way to understand Lateral SE could be this simple example:
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to the slab in a lateral SE loading. Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching checks.
RAM Concept
179
Chapter 37 For the intermediate level there are more forces to consider (all of these are from the frame analysis). The forces that the columns apply to the slab are: This situation is very much like shrinkage/swelling. Expansion / swelling generally causes compressive stresses in the slab which enhance its strength (they act similar to prestressing) and can usually be ignored. Shrinkage/contraction generally causes tension stresses which are more troublesome. Many designers take the approach that shrinkage is primarily a deformation compatibility problem and as soon as cracks form in the slab (or supports), most of the shrinkage forces are relieved. These designers ensure that there is enough reinforcement to control cracking and take measures to reduce the shrinkage, but generally do not design for the shrinkage forces. For temperature gradients across the slab, transverse deformations (like slab curling) happen. Cracking will also partially relieve these stresses, but the situation is not as simple as in-plane temperature changes. Concept does offer a means to model the thermal forces, but it takes some work, and does not consider the reduction in stresses that happens after cracking. Here is the approach: Add a Thermal loading, set its Analysis type to Lateral SE (the loading will be a self-equilibrium loading, but wont be lateral). Leave the loading type as Other. Set the load combo load factors for the Thermal Loading. Apply the thermal restraint reactions to the Thermal Loading, but dont apply any load that simulate the thermal deformations themselves. This set of reactions is in self-equilibrium (more on how to calculate these below). This approach will appropriately design for the thermal (restraint) forces in the slab, but will not appropriately consider the thermal deformations in the deflection predictions. There are two methods to calculate the thermal restraint reactions: get them from another analysis or iteratively determine them in Concept. You may be able to model the thermal loads in SAP. If so, you can just apply the reactions to the slab from the walls and columns as the thermal loads. The reactions will be a self-equilibrium set of forces. To determine the reactions loads iteratively in Concept: Apply loads to the Thermal Loading that create the thermal strains assuming the slab is free to deform. These loads should be a self-equilibrium set of forces. Analyze the slab (and see that the loads cause the slab to separate from the walls and columns). Change the Thermal Loading analysis type to Normal (temporarily) RAM Concept
Figure 37-5 Forces on intermediate level slab
Fx3 = 50kN Fx5 = 50kN Fz3 = 15kN Fz5 = -15kN My3 = 75kN-m My5 = 75kN-m
Fx4 = -50kN Fx6 = -50kN Fz4 = -45kN Fz6 = 45kN My4 = 75kN-m My6 = 75kN-m
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to the slab in a lateral SE loading. Since the 3 and 4 forces occur at the same location, they can be added together and applied as a single load (same for 5 and 6). Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching checks.
Note: There is one simplification - if you do not care about

diaphragm forces, then you can ignore all the Fx and Fy forces. This assumes that the Fx and Fy forces act at the center of your slab and that the centroid elevation of your slab is constant. When these two assumptions are not true, the effects of these forces are typically still not large, but you may need to use some judgment before you ignore them.
Can I input thermal loads into Concept?
Rationally considering thermal loads and stresses is difficult. Concept does not make it significantly easier. The most important thing to remember is that thermal loads cause deformations, not forces. It is the restraint of the deformations that induce forces into the slab. If there is no temperature gradient through the slab (and the slab is flat), then the thermal expansion/contraction will not cause any out-of-plane deformation, but will cause in plane stresses if the temperature changes are not uniform across the slab, or if the supports restrain the slab from lateral movement. 180
Chapter 37 Analyze the slab (and see that the reactions keep the slab attached to the supports). Apply the support reactions as loads (they will be a selfequilibrium set). Ensure that the load elevations are set correctly. Change the Thermal Loading analysis type back to Lateral SE. Analyze the slab (and see that the reaction loads keep that slab attached to the supports). Remove the original loads that caused the thermal strains. The remaining loads are still a self-equilibrium set - and are the loads for which to design.
37.12 Results
37.12.1 Reactions
Does Concept include the weight of columns and walls in self weight calculations?
Concept never includes the weight of supports below. You decide if the weight of supports above is included. This is a choice you can make in the Calculation Options.
Can I choose which column and wall reactions are shown?
Yes - you can change what Concept plots. See Reaction on page 141 and Figure on page 141.
37.10 Analysis
Should I use Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions in the Calc Options?
If there are columns (and or walls) above and below an elevated slab you can select (through the Plot dialog) which reactions are shown. The choices are the total reaction on the slab (below and above) the reaction below the reaction above
The reaction plans show many small values for Fx and Fy which makes the plan difficult to read. Can I look at just Fz?
This is only necessary if your structure has no lateral stability, such as an elevated floor with columns on rollers, or a mat (raft) with no X or Y direction springs. Autostabilize does not work if there are lateral loads.
37.11 Design Issues

What support width is used for round columns?
You can control this in two ways. The simplest way is to turn off Fx and Fy with the plot settings. See Changing which results plot on page 132. Alternatively, you can filter out small reactions and moments through the Units window. See Specifying report as zero on page 21.
The wall reactions are shown per straight section of wall. Can I see the reaction per wall element?
Concept calculates the support width for an equivalent (in area) square column.
What is the relevance of the Include Detailed Section Analysis box in Criteria > Design Rules?
That box instructs Concept to do a cracked section analysis even if one is not required for the code criteria. The only reason to check the box is if you want to see cracked section stresses even when they are not used for code checking / design. The only reason not to check the box is that cracked section analyses can be slow. See Detailed Section Analysis on page 128 of Chapter 27, Calculating Results.
No. This is not available because there would be too much information shown.
I have modeled columns at the end of walls. The column reactions are huge and the wall reaction is negative. Is this realistic?
The huge result is mathematically correct but may not be realistic. Try modeling the column and walls in question as vertically compressible. This may reduce the column reaction to a more realistic value.
How can I determine the reaction at the end of a wall?
Reactions are reported for continuous walls, so if you need discrete reactions leave a gap in the wall or specify a column at the end of a wall.
RAM Concept
181
Chapter 37
37.12.2 Plots
Why is there moment shown at a free edge about an axis parallel to the edge?
For example, for the service load combination, the load factor on live load could be 1.0 and the alternate envelope factor could be 0.0. This would produce differing maximum and minimum values. Pattern loadings More than one load combination using the same rule set. The default plot shows the maximum and minimum deflections. You could choose to show just the maximum values via the plot dialog, but remember that the absolute of minimum could be more than the maximum. It would be possible that minimum governs if you have upward deflection.
Note: This also applies for plots of demand for resultants such as moment or shear.
Figure 37-6 Plan of moment about Y-Y axis at opening. The circled moment is displayed as non-zero.
37.12.3 Torsion
I have set the Behavior of a beam to No-torsion. Why is there still torsion in the beam?
The plotted moments are smoothed curves of the element center moments. A slab element at a free edge may have a small moment at it center. The values shown between element centers are interpolated, but since there is no element outside the edge, there is no way for that value to ever reach zero. For better visual results (values closer to zero at the edge), you should use smaller elements at the edge. The distance from the edge to the edge element center is the most important parameter.
I have a pinned column at the edge of the slab. Why is there moment shown at the edge about an axis parallel to the edge?
When you set your beams to have no torsion, you are really setting them to have no twist (Mxy). Twist is only one component of torsion. Torsion is a moment that in Concept is measured about the centroid point of the cross section. The z-coordinate of this centroid is the mathematical centroid elevation of the cross section, the x- and y- coordinates of the centroid are the centre of the core portion of the centroid. The vertical shear in the cross section will create torsion unless it is centred upon the centroid. In an edge beam, the vertical shear at the ends must be centred on the column, or there MUST be torsion to maintain equilibrium.
37.12.4 Envelopes
What is the significance of Envelopes in the Audit?
An envelope is a resultant (set of forces) in which one of the force values is a maximum or minimum for an item (such as a cross section) under consideration. All of the force values within a single envelope occur simultaneously. The explanation is the same as the preceding question.
Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip plots?
Audit envelopes are created by the following process: for each rule set, 6 envelopes are added to a list (Max M, Min M, Max V, Min V, Max P, Min P) duplicates are removed (if Max M and Max V are identical, one of them will be removed) torsion conversion is performed (this can modify the torsion values, it can also create additional envelopes)
The two plots for maximum and minimum differ if you have one of the following conditions: Alternate envelope factors that are not the same as the load factors (see About alternate envelope factors on page 37 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations).
182
RAM Concept
Chapter 37 The result is a list of envelopes (possibly just one, but also possibly up to 12).
2 The depth of the span segment strip cross section
Note: Some torsion conversions (such as modifying the

bending moment due to the torsion) can double the number of envelopes in effect.
contributes to a large amount of minimum reinforcement. This may be because the cross section depth is based upon a thickened area.
3 The bonded tendons are not in the tensile zone.
Why are the reinforcement results on the Design Status layer in different colors?
37.12.5 Reinforcement
Can I determine the reinforcement spacing?
The default Appearance scheme uses different colors for Failed Span Design and OK Span Design.
Yes.
1 Choose the appropriate reinforcement plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
37.12.6 AS3600 specific reinforcement questions

I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
3 Check Bar Spacings under the Span Designs or Section
Designs columns.
Note: Plotted reinforcement quantities cannot show bar

spacing.
Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed on the wrong slab face?
The default setting for design strip Environment is Normal. Changing to Protected can reduce the amount of reinforcement. See Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature on page 443 for further clarification.
This sometimes happens for an ACI318 or BS8110 / TR43 design. Concept locates the minimum reinforcing required by certain design criteria on the tension face of the slab (or the face with the least amount of compression); this normally works well for both elevated slabs and mat foundations. However, in certain cases the moment at a design strip cross section is of the opposite sign of what would be expected given the location. For an elevated slab this can lead to reinforcing at columns being at the bottom of the slab and reinforcing at mid-span being at the top of the slab. For example, for ACI318 or TR43 if there is no tension at a slab location under service conditions, then Concept places the minimum support rebar on the face with the least amount of compression. This could be the bottom face at a column. You can overrule this by choosing Elevated Slab for the design strip property CS Min. Reinforcement Location. See Span segment properties, which starts on page 82. The description of CS Min. Reinforcement Location follows Figure 21-7.
I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
37.12.7 BS8110 / TR43 specific reinforcement questions

Why is there bottom steel at the column?
There are a couple of possibilities.

1 See Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed
on the wrong slab face? on page 183.

2 TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that additional
un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater for the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for Support zones in all flat slabs. The note under TR43 table 2 states that the support zone shall be considered as any part of the span under consideration within 0.2 x L of the support, where L is the effective span. This often means that there is tension on the bottom face near the edge of the support zone, beyond contraflexure. Per 6.10.5, Concept adds reinforcement to the bottom face in such instances.
Note: Concept might draw reinforcement bars to the column, but a plot could reveal that is only required over a limited zone. Note: Using column and middle strips for a TR43 PT flat plate tends to increase the likelihood of this situation.
This can be for a number of reasons. The common ones are:

1 The floor is post-tensioned and yet you have not checked
the Consider as Post-Tensioned option. Concept is ignoring the tendons. See the description in Span segment properties on page 82.
RAM Concept
183
Chapter 37
Why is there mild service reinforcement near midspan of a bonded post-tensioned flat plate?
When designing to TR43 (BS8110) with bonded tendons, many designers are surprised to see bottom service reinforcement. TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that .... additional un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater for the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for .... span zones in flat slabs using unbonded tendons where the tensile stress exceeds 0.15 f cu . Many designers consider that they do not have to provide un-tensioned reinforcement if they use bonded tendons. However, what they miss is that the reinforcement shall be placed in the tensile zone, as near as practicable to the outer fibre. Concept examines the location of the bonded tendons and determines if it is effective. See Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5 on page 461 for further explanation. The following figures show where bonded tendons would not provide serviceability crack control.
Figure 37-9 Example 2: ineffective tendons in tension zone: (i) small number of strands (ii) near neutral axis
37.12.8 Punching Shear

How does Concept check punching shear?
See Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes.

Does Concept check punching shear at the ends of the walls?
No.
What is the stress ratio?
The ratio of maximum stress to allowable stress.

Does Concept use redistributed moments in punching shear checks?
No. The biaxial moments are factored elastic moments.

Is the design insufficient if the stress ratio exceeds 1.0?
The punching shear at such a column is either:

1 sufficient if provided with design punching shear
reinforcement, or
2 insufficient (reinforcement cannot solve the problem and the concrete form needs revision).
Why is there a punching failure at a beam? I thought that punching shear failures occur only in flat slabs. Figure 37-7 Assumed stress distribution
The code provides formula for calculating punching shear. This does not apply any logic as to whether a punching failure can occur. Concept is only doing a punching check at a column supporting a beam because the user drew a punching check there. You should decide the nature of the potential failure mechanism and thus whether punching check is appropriate.
Figure 37-8 Example 1: tendons in compression zone (not effective)
Shallow beams could certainly have punching failure. Deep beams are less likely to have punching failure, and one-way shear failure would be the likely failure mechanism. For example, column A in Figures 37-10 and 37-11 is satisfactory for one-way shear (with reinforcement in the beam) but the code equation determines that there is a punching failure. You need to decide if this is appropriate.
184
RAM Concept
Chapter 37 It would be possible, but very rare, for a punching failure at column B since it is satisfactory for one-way shear in the beam (with reinforcement).
37.12.9 Shear reinforcement (one-way)

Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-way shear reinforcement results? I would expect punching shear to govern, not one-way shear. [Similarly: Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have oneway shear failures?]
When engineers design flat slabs by hand, they often IGNORE the one-way checks. They decide that punching is all that is appropriate. (This is often decided without much consideration it just seems right). Concept does not make this decision, as nowhere does the code advise to ignore one-way shear checks in a flat slab or flat plate. Nonetheless - you should decide what the possible failure mechanism is and so what is appropriate. It may, or may not, be appropriate to ignore the one-way shear results. For example, columns C in Figures 37-10 and 37-11 are satisfactory for punching shear (without reinforcement) but the mathematics of the code requires one-way shear reinforcement. It is up to you to decide if this is appropriate.
Figure 37-10 Mixed form: flat slab with column capitals and beams
Note: In fact, ACI 318-02 rule 11.12.1.1 specifically requires a one-way shear check in flat plates.
The results have a lot more shear reinforcement than expected.
This is likely to be a shear core issue. Refer to About shear core on page 91 and Shear core in slabs on page 92 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips. For a post-tensioned beam, the reason could be that Concept is deducting a fraction of the (bonded) duct from the web width per the appropriate code rules. Concept calculates the number of duct by dividing the Strands per tendon by the Max strands per duct (as specified in the Materials) and rounding up to the next integer. Refer to the following sections for an explanation of Concepts shear web calculation: For AS 3600, Section 8.2 Shear Design on page 439
Figure 37-11 Shear results
For BS 8110, Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams on page 456. For IS 456, Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams on page 484. For EC2, Section 6.2 Design shear resistance on page 502.
Note: There is no ACI318 rule concerning deduction of

ducts.
RAM Concept
185
Chapter 37
What does this audit text mean: Depth d is zero - replacing with column effective depth. Depth is still zero - giving up.?
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design > Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
The is likely a combination of two things: there is net compression force and a small moment, and as such the bending designer does not provide any reinforcement the minimum designer has been turned off If this is the case, you should consider turning the minimum designer back on.
37.13 Performance
My computer ran out of memory - what can I do?
1 Choose Help > Machine Settings 2 Change Optimization from Speed to Memory.
37.12.10 Deflection
Is cracking taken into account for deflection?
Not all deflection results consider creep and cracking. It is very important that you understand which ones do and which do not. See Chapter 58, Estimating deflections.
Why are there two lines for the LT Deflection plot?
See Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip plots? on page 182.
Figure 37-12 Machine Settings dialog box Does Concept warn if deflection is too high? What are the graphics cards requirements?
No. Allowable deflection is a very subjective issue and Concept does not warn if deflections exceed conventional limits.
Note: Concept does display a warning when deflections are so large that the analysis itself may no longer be valid. This typically happens for structures that are unstable or nearly unstable. Often the instability is related to unrestrained lateral displacements.
37.12.11 Soil bearing
There are many soil bearing pressure plans. Is there a summary?
It is recommended that you use a graphics card supported by DirectX 9.0. See the graphics card manufacturer for latest information on DirectX drivers. If no graphics card supported by DirectX can be found, Concept attempts to use software emulation under Windows XP SP2 and Vista. At least 128 MB of video RAM is recommended, but 256 MB is more desirable. For optimal performance, graphics display color depth should be set to 24-bit or higher. When using a color depth setting of 16-bit, some inconsistencies will be noted.
The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum and minimum bearing pressures for all load combinations.
186
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
38 Errors and Warnings

RAM Concept has many error and warning messages that can be triggered during modeling and analysis. Some messages are self-explanatory and do not warrant further explanation. This chapter explains some of the more complicated warning and error messages that commonly arise. Most errors and warnings advise of a coordinate (x,y) or an object number. Concept shows coordinates at the bottom of the workspace (see Figure 2-1 on page 5). You can turn on object numbers with the Visible Objects (
To show an object number:
3 Check the Priorities boxes under Beams and Slab Areas,
then click OK.

4 Use the coordinates in the error dialog box to find the
location of the problem, and revise the assigned priorities. Usually this requires making sure that the thickest slab or beam have the higher priority (the lowest priority is 1).
Note: The highest priority is not always assigned to the thickest element. For example, where a standard slab area overlaps a depressed slab area.
38.1.2 Line is too short at (x,y)
Concept has a minimum element size of 50 mm (approximately 2 inches). This is effectively a snap distance. When an object such as a slab area has two nodes closer than this distance the line between them is too short. In such cases, Concept merges the two nodes together and reports the coordinates of this occurrence in the dialog box. You can view the resulting elements and nodes in the element standard plan.
) dialog box.
1 Choose Layers > Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3 Check the Numbers box under the appropriate objects
column, then click OK.
38.1 Meshing
Concept can generate several different errors and warnings for meshing. A general description of meshing limitations is in Limitations of the automatic meshing on page 61. It is strongly advised that you heed such errors and warnings and fix the problems. Otherwise, Concept generates the mesh everytime you do a Calc All.
38.1.3 Feature eliminated at (x,y)

This warning is a result of one of two things: A feature is too small to model (for example, a 1" (25mm) wide slab area), or Failure to use snapping, causing small overlaps.
38.1.4 Recursion too deep

If the mesh ends up with 3 nodes at a tight angle, Concept attempts to use recursion numerous times to adjust the nodes and make the minimum angle larger. In such a case, the standard number of recursions did not solve the tight angle, so the warning message reported that the recursion was too deep. This does not generally cause a problem, although it is indicative that there is a pointy element which can affect the contour plots. Generally it is best to avoid this situation. See Feature eliminated at (x,y).
Note: Nearly all meshing problems are due to the users failure to use snapping properly.
38.1.1 Two or more slab areas or beams with the same priority overlap at (x,y)
Overlapping slabs and beams should have different priorities. This is explained in The priority method on page 56. The error is generated when two or more overlapping slab or beam objects have the same priority.
To fix this error:
Note: You should investigate the meshing / modeling of the

problem area to ensure that Concept's elements are reasonable for the area.
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
Note: This error is usually caused by a failure to use snapping while drawing: two lines that are supposed to be in the same place are instead slightly off parallel and intersect.
RAM Concept
187
Chapter 38
38.1.5 An error has been found. Two column elements below the slab are at the same location. Delete column element #a or #b.
This error occurs when you inadvertently draw a column at the same location twice, or copy and paste a column and do not change the Support Set (above or below).
To fix this error:
38.3 Tendons
38.3.1 Tendon # has a radius (a) that is less than the minimum allowable (b).
Parabolic tendons with a large drape relative to their length have a small radius. A warning is triggered when the tendon segment radius is less than the minimum radius for that tendon system. A tendons minimum (vertical) radius is specified in the Materials section. Concept does not check horizontal radii as tendon segments are straight in plan. The radii shown are suggestions based on industry standards. You can change them based on advice from prestress companies.
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Check the Column numbers box. 4 Place the cursor at the appropriate column, double click
).
and delete.
38.1.6 An error has been found. A column element below the slab is not attached to the slab. Revise column element #a (below the slab)
This error occurs when a column is outside the slab boundary (or within an opening). To fix the problem you should move the column or edit the slab such that the column is within the slab boundary.
Note: The warning can be indicative of an overbalanced condition (too much uplift) for parabolic tendons.
To remove the warning you can adjust the tendon profile or change the minimum radius in the Material section.
To edit the minimum radius:
1 Choose Criteria > Materials. 2 Edit the minimum radius for the PT system.
38.2 Loads
38.2.1 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A point load is not on the slab. Revise point load #a.
A point load that is not on a finite element is considered an error. Apart from generating the error, Concept essentially ignores the load.
38.3.2 Cannot auto-position profile point at (x,y) due to profile point value
This warning occurs when both of the following are true for two tendon segments that share a Profile Point 2:
11The tendon segments have the Position Profile Point 2 for
equal balance loads option checked, and

12One, and only one, of the tendon segments is flat (that is, the
38.2.2 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A line load is not totally on the slab. Revise line load #a.
A line load that is not completely on finite elements generates this error. There may be times you ignore the error, such as when a line load crosses an opening. Concept ignores the part of the load crossing the opening.
values for Profile Point 1 and Profile Point 2 produce a flat tendon segment: this usually occurs when the two values are equal).
The Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option is intended to move the plan position of Profile Point 2 so that the uplift is equal for both tendon segments. This is not possible when one tendon segment is flat (zero drape) as there is no uplift in that tendon segment.
Note: You should closely investigate such an error. A line

load may appear to be on a slab edge, but actually be outside it. If you believe you have a line load across an opening and ignore the error, you may miss a real problem.
38.3.3 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is not on the slab. Click on the Fix button to correct the profile point at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon extends beyond the slab edge. To fix this error, stretch the profile point so its end is on the edge or slightly inside the slab edge.
188
RAM Concept
Chapter 38 The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix button). If you click this button, Concept moves the profile point to the nearest concrete element. To avoid the warning go to the appropriate tendon layer (the dialog box indicates on which layer the tendon is located) and change the number of strands in the tendon.
Note: It is usually best to use the Select Connected Tendons

38.3.4 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is not within the slab (vertically). Adjust the profile at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon profile point is not within the slab thickness. Profile values are always relative to the slab or beam soffit at the location of the profile point. The easiest way to find these problems is to look at a tendon perspective. If a profile point is at a top or bottom surface step, Concept moves the profile point so that there is no ambiguity. You should check that the profile point is within the expected slab area. tool. See Can I terminate some strands past a column? on page 177 of Chapter 37, Frequently Asked Questions for more advice.
38.3.8 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. A tendon is not connected to any jacks. Investigate tendon #a. [If any tendons are stressed then all tendons must be stressed.]
Concept calculates losses in tendons that have one or two jacks attached. Concept does not allow a (latitude or longitude) tendon layer to have some tendons with jacks but other tendons with no jacks. You can have one tendon layer (say, latitude) with jacked tendons and the other tendon layer with no jacks. When you encounter this error, find the tendon (from the number given) and draw at least one jack on the tendon.
38.3.5 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon profiles. A tendon is out of the slab at (x,y).
This is different to 38.3.4 in that the profile points are within the slab, but the tendon is out of the slab somewhere between the profile points. This usually occurs when there is a top or bottom surface step.
38.4 Miscellaneous
38.3.6 Tendon #a is harped, and hence violates the minimum allowable radius (b)
A harped tendon has (vertically) straight segments. There is thus a zero radius at the profile point(s).
To avoid the harped tendon warning:
1 Choose Criteria > Materials. 2 Create a new PT system (possibly called Harped). 3 Set the minimum radius for the new PT system to zero. 4 Use the new system for the harped tendons.
38.4.1 An Error occurred while trying to calculate everything. An error has occurred while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The structure is unstable at node: a, DOF: Y-Axis Translation. Revise the structure.
This means that the structure has no lateral stability. You need to either provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral springs etc.) or auto-stabilize the structure.
To auto-stabilize the structure:
38.3.7 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. A tendon has a different number of strands than an adjacent tendon. Investigate tendon #a.
You can vary the number of strands along a continuous tendon, but it is discouraged. This warning alerts you that the number of strands within the tendon is variable.
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options 2 Check the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions
box.
Note: This does not work if there are lateral loads.
RAM Concept
189
Chapter 38
38.4.2 An error occurred: Loading has horizontal loads, but the structure is automatically stabilized in the X and Y directions.
You cannot auto-stabilize the structure if there are horizontal loads (other than tendons). You must (1) uncheck the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions box in the Calc Options, and (2) provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral springs etc.).
38.4.5 Rule Set Strength Design is being used by load combinations that appear to have load factors set for different purposes. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Strength (or Ductility) rule sets should logically have a load factor (and alternate envelope factor) of 1 for the Hyperstatic Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons). Concept provides the warning when this is violated. The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Hyperstatic Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors (and alternate envelope factors) for the Hyperstatic Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the strength or ductility rule sets.
38.4.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set Service Design do not appear compatible with the load factors in the load combinations using the rule set. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have a load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons) and load factors of no more than 1 for dead and live loadings. Concept provides the warning when this is violated. The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the service (sustained service / max service) rule sets.
38.4.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There is less that 25% contact area.
When the mat (raft) has a significantly reduced bearing area it is likely that bearing pressures are very high and there could be instability.
38.4.7 Punching Check #a is not located at a column

This error occurs when a column is relocated after the punching checks have been drawn and the punching check is no longer centered on the column. You need to remove and redraw the punching check. It usually helps to show the punching check number.
To display the punching check number (as opposed to column number):
38.4.4 Load Combination Service (Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual balance and / or hyperstatic load factors. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have a load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons) and a load factor (and alternate envelope factor) of zero for the Hyperstatic Loading. Concept provides the warning when this is violated. The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the service (sustained service / max service) rule sets.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3 Check the Punching Shear Checks numbers box.
38.4.8 An error has been found. The cross section trimming for strip ab-c has caused there to be no concrete remaining at one or more locations.
This error is typically reported at steps in the slabs. The inter cross section slope limit is trimming the entire cross section away at the step. See Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Trimming on page 94 for more information. You can avoid the problem by setting the inter cross section slope limit to a large value in spans containing large steps. You should, however, consider the underlying reason for the error.
190
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
38.4.9 An error has been found. [Design strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too much cover (the bottom bar is closer to the top than the top bar).
The trimmed cross section has a thickness and covers such that the location of the bars is illogical.
This is likely to happen with thin slabs, or steps.
RAM Concept
191
Chapter 38
192
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39 Simple RC Slab Tutorial

This chapter describes the steps for modeling a single panel two-way flat plate with uniform loads. The objective of the tutorial is to help you learn some basic modeling skills and expose you to a number of tools and methods that should prove useful for real projects. The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001, BS8110:1997, EC2 - 2004 and IS 456 : 2000. The instructions show US units for an ACI 318 design, with metric values and units in square brackets for AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456. The metric values are not exact conversions. For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files on page 5.
6 Go to Draw the slab area:, or select and delete the four
columns and try the next method.

7 Right click over the plan and choose Grid. 8 In the Grid Setup dialog box:
Set x and y to 1 foot [0.25 meters]. Click OK.

9 Turn on Snap to Grid ( 10 Click the Column tool (
). ).
11 Place the cursor near the following coordinates and click
(the cursor will snap to the grid and the coordinates appear in the command line): 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m] 24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m] 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
12 Go to Draw the slab area:, or select and delete the four
39.1 Defining the structure

You start by drawing the structure and generating the element mesh.
Define the column locations and properties:
columns and try the next method.

13 Draw the two columns at 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] and 24, 0 ft.
[7.25, 0 m] by one of the previous two methods.

14 Select the two columns. 15 Click the move tool (
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan. 2 Double click the Column tool (
).
).
16 Hold down shift and click anywhere on the workspace. 17 Type r0,20 [r0, 6], and press Return.
3 In the Default Column Properties dialog box:
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 & EC2, M40 for IS 456]. Set Width to 24 inches [600 mm]. Set Depth to 24 inches [600 mm].
4 Click OK.
Note: This copies the two columns using the relative command. See Using relative coordinates on page 16 for further explanation.
Draw the slab area:
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( 3 Double click the Slab Area tool (
). ). ) to edit the default
Define the column locations by one of the following three methods. We strongly recommend you try all of them for the purpose of learning different procedures.
5 Enter the following coordinates (x, y) and press return
2 If previously turned on, turn off Snap to Grid (
properties.
4 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
after each: 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m] 24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m] 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 & EC2, M40 for IS 456]. Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm]. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.
5 With the Slab Area tool (
Note: The coordinates will appear in the command line, see Figure 2-1 on page 5. Note: Do not enter the actual units (ft., m)
) selected, define the four corners of the slab by snapping at the outside corner of each column.
6 Complete the rectangle by clicking at your starting point
(or type c in the command line and press Return).
RAM Concept
193
Chapter 39
Hatch the slab area:
).
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.

2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas, and then click
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This produces reasonable results, but a regular mesh is better. You can regenerate a significantly improved mesh once you have defined design strips. This mesh is shown in Figure 39-4.
OK.
You have now defined the slab but the element mesh does not yet exist.
Figure 39-2 Element: Standard Plan (ACI318 example dimensions).
Figure 39-1 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab area (hatched), and the columns. Generate the mesh:
).
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to
2 feet [0.6 m].

3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
Figure 39-3 Element: Standard Plan (AS3600, BS8110, EC2 & IS 456 example).
194
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.2 Drawing the loads

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically. There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be specified but this example defines only Live Loading.
Draw live loads:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
All Loads Plan.

2 Double click the Area Load tool (
).
3 In the Default Area Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 50 psf [2.5 kN/m2]. Click OK.

Figure 39-4 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration (for ACI318 example; the metric codes produce a similar mesh) View the structure:
This tool will now draw area loads of 50 psf [2.5 kN/ m2].
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four
1 Choose Layers > Element > Structure Summary
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
corners of a quadrilateral and then typing c. This shape need not match the slabs exact dimensions, but should cover the slab.
) to rotate
the floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
Upon returning to this perspective, you can look at the saved view by clicking Show Set Viewpoint ( ).
Figure 39-6 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on): ACI318 example.
Figure 39-5 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
RAM Concept
195
Chapter 39 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box. Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude (as shown in Figure 39-8): Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet [0.6 meters]. Click OK.
Figure 39-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on): AS3600, BS8110, EC2 & IS 456 example.
39.3 Defining the design strips

Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept because they link finite element analysis with concrete design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes, cover, and parameters that Concept uses to determine which code rules are applicable for cross-section design. There are two directions named Latitude and Longitude. It is normal practice to design two-way RC flat plates with column and middle strips in two orthogonal directions, and that practice is used here.
Draw latitude design strips:
Figure 39-8 Generate spans dialog box
The latitude spans appear, as shown in Figure 39-9.

Generate Strips. The latitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 39-10.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
3 The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
Generation properties. Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is the default for the AS3600 and IS 456 templates). Click the General tab. Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box. Click the Column Strip tab. Change CS Top Bar to #6 [N20 for AS3600; T20 for BS8110; H20 for EC2; T20 for IS 456]. Change CS Bottom Bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for BS8110; H16 for EC2; T16 for IS 456]. Click the Middle Strip tab.
Figure 39-9 Latitude direction spans
196
RAM Concept
Chapter 39 Click the up-down orientation button, and click OK.
Figure 39-10 Latitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on) Draw longitude design strips: Figure 39-11 Generate spans dialog box
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Longitude Design Spans
Plan.
The longitude spans appear, as shown in Figure 39-12.

).
3 Click the Column Strip tab in the Default Span Properties
Generate Strips. The longitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 3913.
dialog box. The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal direction. Change CS Top Cover to 2.25 inches [60 mm]. Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.38 inches [41 mm]. Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
Set Spans to Generate to Longitude.
Figure 39-12 Longitude direction spans
RAM Concept
197
Chapter 39
Figure 39-13 Longitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much more regular mesh.
Regenerate the mesh:
Figure 39-14 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan
39.5 Calculate and view the results

). You can run the file at any time during modeling to analyze and check for errors. After you have drawn design strips, Concept can analyze and design. You can then view the results.
Calculate:
1 Click Generate Mesh ( 2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the
Element Standard Plan. Refer to Figure 39-4 to view the new mesh.
1 Click Calc All (
).
39.4 Drawing punching shear checks

39.5.1 Design status
Drawing the punching checks is very straightforward.
Draw punching shear checks:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan. 2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool (
The purpose of status plans is to indicate whether there are any violations of code limits for ductility, one-way shear, and punching shear.
View Status:
).
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog box:
Change Cover to CGS to 2.25 inches [60 mm] (the average top cover) Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
For ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the status plan shows OK for all design strips and punching shear checks. See Figure 39-15. The BS8110 status plan shows punching shear failure. See Figure 39-16. The EC2 status plan show OK for all design strips and OK with SSR for all punching shear checks.
See Figure 39-14 to view the punching checks.
Note: Status does not flag excessive deflections.
198
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Figure 39-17 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for ACI318 Figure 39-15 Design Status: Status Plan for ACI318, AS3600 & IS 456
Figure 39-18 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
Figure 39-16 Design Status: Status Plan for BS8110
39.5.2 Design reinforcement

You can view reinforcement results as bar drawings or plots.
View Reinforcement:
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the eight design strips. See Figures 39-17 through 39-20.
Figure 39-19 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for BS8110
RAM Concept
199
Chapter 39 See Figures 39-25 through 39-28 for latitude bottom reinforcement controlling criteria.
Figure 39-20 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for IS 456
Such plans often suffer from information overload with congested results. For this reason, you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom), direction (latitude or longitude), and type (flexural or shear). You should decide which plans best convey the results without too much clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement:
Figure 39-21 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318.
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Latitude Bottom
Reinforcement Plan. See Figures 39-21 through 39-24. Concept provides you with the code clause numbers that control the maximum top and bottom reinforcement at any design strip cross section. The following uses latitude bottom reinforcement as an example.
View Reinforcement Controlling Criteria:
Reinforcement Plan.
Figure 39-22 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600.
).
3 In the span designs (not section designs) column:
uncheck Bar Descriptions and check Controlling Criteria, and click OK.
200
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Figure 39-23 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110. Figure 39-26 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria checked.
Figure 39-24 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456.
Figure 39-27 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria checked.
Figure 39-25 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and controlling Criteria checked.
RAM Concept
201
Chapter 39
6 Check the Active box. 7 Select the Bottom radio button. 8 Change Max Frame Number to 2, and click OK.
See Figures 39-29 to 39-32 for the reinforcement plots.
Figure 39-28 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria checked.
39.5.3 Design reinforcement plots

Concept has plotting options that you can use to view various strip-based results such as moment, shear, precompression, reinforcement and crack width. This section steps you through setting up a reinforcement plot. You can bypass this section, but there are steps that help you learn the more powerful aspects of the program.
To create a new plan that plots latitude bottom reinforcement: Figure 39-29 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318.
1 Choose Layers > New Plan. 2 Enter a name for the plan, such as Plot: Latitude Bottom
Reinforcement. (Concept automatically prepends the layer name and appends the word Plan).
3 Select the Design Status layer, and click OK.
The Visible Objects dialog box appears.

4 Click Show Nothing and click OK. 5 Choose View > Plot (
).
Figure 39-30 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design dialog.
202
RAM Concept
Chapter 39 You can see that, for ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0 and hence punching shear capacity is satisfactory. These results are shown in Figure 39-33, Figure 39-34 and 39-37. The USR for BS8110 is 1.17, as shown in Figure 39-35. Since the stress ratio exceeds 1.0, shear reinforcement is required. Concept designs stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for such situations.
View SSR:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
The result for BS8110 is shown in Figure 39-36.
Figure 39-31 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110
Figure 39-33 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for ACI318.
Figure 39-32 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456
39.5.4 Punching shear

You can view punching shear results on dedicated plans.
View Punching Shear:
Plan.
Figure 39-34 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for AS3600
RAM Concept
203
Chapter 39 Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours. You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking with the strip based LT Deflection plot. See Chapter 58, Estimating deflections for more information.
Note: The following deflection plans DO NOT consider cracking, creep or shrinkage.
View service deflection:
Deflection Plan. The service deflection contours should be visible, as shown in Figures 39-38 through 39-41.
Figure 39-35 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for BS8110
Note: These models use compressible columns and hence the deflection includes column deflection. Note: The AS3600 template uses 70% of live load for the Service LC.
Figure 39-36 Design Status: SSR Plan for BS8110
Figure 39-38 Service LC: Deflection Plan for ACI318.
Figure 39-37 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for IS 456
39.5.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in deflections for Service (Dead and Live Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term (Creep and Cracking Factors used). 204
Figure 39-39 Service LC: Deflection Plan for AS3600.
RAM Concept
Chapter 39 .
39.5.6 Bending Moments

While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can be useful, especially for irregular structures. Even though principal moments are important, the default moment contours plans are for Mx (moment about the x-axis) and My. This is because most designers detail reinforcement orthogonally, and the directions are usually the x- and yaxes. You can view moments about any axes, including the principal axes. It is not particularly easy to assess the moment contours. This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful.
Note: Plot Distribution Tools are useful for qualitative results but not quantitative results. Refer Section distribution plots on page 133, and, in particular, the Summary on page 134
Figure 39-40 Service LC: Deflection Plan for BS8110. View Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Code Specific
Load Combination > Mx Plan. For ACI318, use Factored LC: 1.4D. For AS3600, use Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5 L. For BS8110, use Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L. For IS 456, use Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5 L. The contours are moment per unit length about the global x-axis.
2 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
) ).
3 Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool (
4 Click first at the top of the structure and again on the
bottom side.
Figure 39-41 Service LC: Deflection Plan for IS 456. View service deflection without colors:
This shows the bending moment shape, about the x-axis, along the line you have drawn. See Figures 39-42 through 39-45.
5 Now click from left to right across the structure.
Deflection Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot (
) to change
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour.
Note: As previously mentioned, you are strongly advised to

review Chapter 58, Estimating deflections to understand how Concept considers cracking, creep and shrinkage for deflection calculations.
This shows how Mx varies along the span. If you do it through the column centers, you will see how the column strip has large negative moments and a small positive moment near midspan. If you do it in the middle strip, you will see only positive moments. See About plot sign convention on page 24 of Chapter 8, Choosing Sign Convention for further information.
RAM Concept
205
Chapter 39
Figure 39-42 Factored LC: 1.4D: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for ACI318.
Figure 39-44 Ultimate LC: 1.4D+1.6L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for BS8110.
Figure 39-45 Ultimate LC: 1.5D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for IS 456. Figure 39-43 Ultimate LC: 1.2D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for AS3600.
39.6 Drawing reinforcement

Version 3.0 introduces vastly improved tools for drawing reinforcement bars.
39.6.1 Drawing a bottom reinforcement mat

In this section you are shown how to draw a bottom reinforcement mat and see the ramifications.
Draw bottom reinforcement:
1 Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan. 2 Double click the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter
tool (
).
3 The Default Distributed Reinforcement Properties dialog box opens.
206
RAM Concept
Chapter 39 Note that Elevation Reference is set to Bottom Cover. Change Elevation to 0.75 inches [25 mm for AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456]. Change Bar Type to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for BS8110; T16 for IS 456]. Change Spacing to 12 inches [225 mm for AS3600; BS8110 and IS 456].
4 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( 5 Click somewhere on the slab. 6 Click at another point to the left or right to define the
).
orientation of the (primary) reinforcement. A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the file is run you can view the individual bars via the Visible Objects dialog box.
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the

slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
7 Using the Stretch tool, you can adjust the bar grip
Figure 39-47 Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C appears such that AC = AB. The bars are shown to points A and B but the symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
postilions for a better appearance. Refer to Figures 39-46 to 39-47 for ACI 318. Refer to Figures 39-49 to 39-51 for AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456.
Figure 39-48 Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.
Figure 39-46 ACI 318: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
RAM Concept
207
Chapter 39
Figure 39-49 AS3600, BS8110, IS456: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
Figure 39-51 Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.
Figure 39-50 Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C appears such that AC = AB. The bars are shown to points A and B but the symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
208
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-05

This chapter describes the steps for modeling a posttensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads. The objective of this tutorial is to build on the skills learned in the Chapter 39 RC tutorial and introduce new steps, such as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning. Some tools and methods described in the RC tutorial are not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you first do the RC tutorial. This is not a particularly aggressive design. After you have completed the tutorial, you may wish to make the slab thinner to investigate the ramifications. You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker slab). For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files on page 5.
Draw the slab area:
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection (
) and Snap to Point ) to edit the default
).
2 Double click the Slab Area tool (
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi. Set Thickness to 10 inches. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.
) selected, define the 10 vertices of the slab outline by snapping to the imported drawings slab corners.
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at 86, 27 ft and 86, 29 ft. Cursor plan coordinates display next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
40.1 Import the CAD drawing

The CAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept program directory
Import the CAD file:
(or type c in the command line and press Enter).
1 Choose File > Import Drawing. 2 Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate.dwg.
The File Units dialog box appears.

3 Select Inches (the units used in the CAD file) and click OK.
40.2 Define the structure

To use the CAD file you need to make it visible on the Mesh Input layer.
Show the drawing on the mesh input layer: Figure 40-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan. Draw the balcony slab area:
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
includes the Visible Objects command.
3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
) to edit the default
properties.
Change Thickness to 8 inches. Change Surface Elevation to -2 inches. Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
RAM Concept
209
Chapter 40
) selected, define the six vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex, and then click at your starting point (or type c in the command line and press Enter).
Draw the opening:
1 Select the Slab Opening tool (
).
2 Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each
location, and then click at your starting point.
Figure 40-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan. Draw the drop caps:

Figure 40-3 The opening on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan. Hatch the slab areas:
properties.
Change Thickness to 20 inches. Change Surface Elevation to 0, and leave the Priority as 2. Click OK.
).

2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas. 3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and click OK.
) selected, define the four drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
4 Go to Draw the opening:, or try the next method 5 With the Selection tool ( 6 Click Redraw (
), select (by double-clicking) and delete the drop cap at B-2. ).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other similar tools available for this button.
7 Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool (
1 Double click on the Column tool (
).
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi. Set Width to 24 inches. Set Depth/Diameter to 24 inches.
3 Click OK. 4 Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on
) and press
down on the left mouse button for one second. A pop-up menu appears.
8 Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu.
The selected tool becomes current for that button.

9 Click at the column at B-2.
the imported drawing.

Define the wall location and properties:
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears.

10 Enter an angle of zero degrees. 11 Enter a side dimension of 3.75 feet and click OK.
1 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( 2 Double click on the Wall tool (
). ).
3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
Choose a Concrete Strength of 3000 psi.

4 Click OK.
210
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
the centerline. Place the cursor near 29.5, 87 ft and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of the slab, and click. Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 (it will snap orthogonally) and click. You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
6 Go to Generate the mesh:, or try the next method. 7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current 1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve when you regenerate it later on.
selection. If not, select it by double-clicking and press Delete.

8 Click Redraw (
). ) and press down
9 Place the mouse over the Wall tool (
on the left mouse button for one second. A pop-up menu appears.
10 Select the Left Wall tool from the menu. 11 Click at the extreme corner of the slab near D-2. 12 Click at Grid C, near C-2.
Figure 40-5 Element: Standard Plan. View the structure:
Perspective.
) to rotate the ).
floor.
Figure 40-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall. Generate the mesh:
).
3 feet.
RAM Concept
211
Chapter 40
40.3 Define the loads

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically. Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to define areas with increased area loads is to draw a blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the additional loads. There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be specified.
Define the typical live load: Figure 40-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
All Loads Plan.

).
Change Fz to 40 psf and click OK. This tool will now draw area loads of 40 psf.
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a quadrilateral and then typing c. This shape need not match the slabs exact dimensions, but should cover the slab.
Define the balcony live load:
).
2 Define an area load by snapping to the six vertices of the
balcony (and then type c). In this situation, it is best for the load to match the balconys dimensions. You have drawn another 40 psf load. This load should be highlighted as it is the current selection. If not, select it before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection tool.
Figure 40-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on). Define the other dead loading:

4 In the dialog box, change Fz to 60 psf and click OK.
All Loads Plan.

2 With the Selection tool ( 3 Choose Edit > Copy. 4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 100 psf.
), select both area loads (fencing the balcony load selects both loads).
Note: You could have drawn the 60 psf load by first

changing the area load default properties and then using the tool.
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
), select the blanket load by double clicking in the center of the floor.
7 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
from the popup menu.

8 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 20 psf, and
click OK. 212 RAM Concept
Chapter 40
9 Double-click the balcony load.
The balcony load should be the only selected load.


11 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -20 psf, and
click OK. The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 40-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
213
Chapter 40
40.4 Define the post-tensioning

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In the USA it is common to use the banding technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding means concentrating the tendons over support points in one direction, and distributing them uniformly in the orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column and middle strips are not used.
Click at the corner of the slab near D-2. Right click, and then click Enter.
11 Turn off Snap Orthogonal (
). ) to edit its
12 Double click the Tendon Polyline tool (
default properties.
13 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
Set Strands per Tendon to 20, and click OK.

14 With the Tendon Polyline tool (
) selected, draw a
tendon along grid B: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at B-3. Click at the center of the column at B-5. Right click, and then click Enter.
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called latitude and longitude. Refer to Using the latitude and longitude tendon layers on page 117 for more information. Note: The tutorial in Chapter 46 explains the use of Strip
Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of strands required for the critical band.
Define the latitude tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 4 Click Show All, and click OK.
) selected, draw a
).
tendon along grid C: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-4. Right click, and then click Enter. The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions easier to follow.
) to edit its
default properties.
Set Strands per Tendon to 9. Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches. Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap, by: Double clicking at grid intersection B-1. Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.81.
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand

determines these profiles.
7 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( 8 With the Tendon Polyline tool (
). ) selected, draw a
Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4. Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2. Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4.
tendon along grid A: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at A-2. Click at the center of the column at A-3. Right click, and then click Enter.

18 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 5
inches and click OK.

), select all of the terminated tendon segments over a drop cap, by: Double clicking at grid intersection A-1. Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3. Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
tendon along grid D: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection D-4. Click at the center of the column at D-3.
from the popup menu. 214 RAM Concept
Chapter 40
21 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 15 inches and click OK.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of the drop cap.
), double click the tendon
segment at B-2.

24 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75 inches and click OK. 25 With the Selection tool (
segment at C-2.

27 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6.75 inches, and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location.

Figure 40-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan Define the longitude tendons:
), select the tendon segments ).

1 Choose Layers > Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan. 2 Turn on Snap to Intersection (
between C-2 and C-3.

29 Click the Calc Profile tool (
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance load is -2.58 kips/ft. If this is not the number then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
30 Click Cancel. 31 With the Selection tool (
). ) to
3 Double click the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
edit its default properties.

Set Strands per Tendon to 4. ), select the tendon between ). Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches. Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
C-3 and C-4.

32 Click the Calc Profile tool ( 33 Input the desired balance load as -2.6 kips/ft in the Calc
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand

determines these profiles. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
5 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc. The low point (end 2) adjusts to 5.01 inches.
), select all the end span
) selected,
tendons between grids 3 and 5.

draw tendons in the bottom left panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at B-1. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at A-2.
6 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:

inches, and click OK.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually changed the low points for practical reasons.
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 6 feet, and click OK.
Note: This spacing exceeds some code maxima, but the tendon layout is for design purposes and not necessarily for detailing.
RAM Concept
215
Chapter 40
) selected,
) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1. Click at the center of the column at B.8-1. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at B-2.
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-2. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at B-3.
20 In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the
Set Auto Connect, and click OK.

9 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point (
) and Snap
last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto Connect, but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon.
) selected,
Orthogonal (
). ) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel:
10 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
Note: This sequence is counterclockwise.

Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Enter 31, 86 (feet). Turn off Snap Orthogonal (
draw tendons in the balcony: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1. Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 59 ft. Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 24, 59 ft.

Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.
).
Click at the center of the column at C-2. Set Auto Connect. Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.


13 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6 inches and Profile at end 2 to 4 inches, and click OK. 14 With the Selection tool (
) selected,
), select the two shortest of the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.


16 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 4 inches, and click OK.
Set Layout to Splayed. Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 6 feet. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat.

) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-2. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at B-3. Click at the center of the column at A-3.
) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at the center of the column at D-4. Click at the center of the column at C-4.
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 6 feet. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Set Auto Connect.
216
RAM Concept
Chapter 40 Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.

Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click

because there are already two tendon segments connected at that point. The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some should be deleted.
27 Select the second tendon in this panel. 28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon in this panel,
inches, and click OK.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of the drop cap.
segment at B-2.
and press Delete.


41 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75
) selected,
draw tendons that terminate in this panel: Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( Type r0,7. Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft. ).
inches and click OK. Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the opening.
42 With the Selection tool ( 43 Choose the Move tool ( 45 With the Selection tool (
Click at the profile point at 63.2, 58 ft.
), select the tendon segment that passes through the opening. ). ), select the tendon segment ).
44 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-1.5,0.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 72.8, 65 ft.

Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
above the moved tendon.

46 Choose the Stretch tool ( 47 Stretch the end of the tendon segment to meet the end of

the moved tendon.

48 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.

inches, and click OK. The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within the balcony slab: Fence the tendon segments that end on grid A. Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure until you have selected all applicable end tendon segments (tendon segments terminating at grids B and D).
Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information.

inches and click OK.

Figure 40-11 Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
217
Chapter 40
40.5 Create the design strips

Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept because they link finite element analysis with concrete design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes, cover, and parameters that Concept uses to determine which code rules are applicable for section design. There are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.
Generate the latitude spans:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
).
The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip Generation properties.
3 Click the General tab. 4 Change Environment to Class U (corrosive).
Note: This actually has no effect because ACI 318 requires

two-way post-tensioned slabs to be designed as class U.
Figure 40-12 Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan.
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already

checked in the ACI 318 template.
5 Click the Column Strip tab. 6 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle. 7 Change CS Top Cover to 1 inch. 8 Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to
Two span segments are skewed. How you treat skewed strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a different manner.
Generate the latitude strips:
Elevated Slab.
9 Click OK. 10 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Strips. The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
Generate Spans. The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude.
11 Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet and click OK.
The span segments appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 40-13 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips, 218 RAM Concept
Chapter 40 as shown in Figures 40-14 through 40-16. You can make corrections with a number of tools You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
Hatch the strips: Edit the span cross section orientation:
1 Select span segment 3-1 as shown in Figure 40-15. 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
).
or below the first click. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.

2 Check Hatching under Latitude Span Segment Strips, and click OK.
Figure 40-14 Skewed span segment that snapped to end of wall Straighten a span segment: Figure 40-16 Design strip with excessive width. Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
1 Select span segment 4-2 (between the wall and grid D3),
as shown in Figure 40-14.

2 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( 3 Select the Rotate tool (
).
1 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool (
).
).
2 Click at the intersection of Grid B and Grid C design
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3. 5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
strips near Grid 3 (point A in Figure 40-16).

3 Click to the right of the slab edge (point B). 4 Right-click, and click enter.
Regenerate the latitude span strips:
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.

6 Enter 180 and press Enter.
The selected span segment is now horizontal.
).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in Figure 40-17.
Figure 40-15 Diagonal strip that warrants manual improvement.
RAM Concept
219
Chapter 40
Figure 40-17 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after strip regeneration. Generate the longitude spans:
Figure 40-18 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan. Straighten a span segment:
1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (the
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design
highlighted span segment in Figure 40-18).

Spans Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( 3 Click the Column Strip tab.
).
).
3 Select the Rotate tool (
).
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2. 5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal direction. Change CS Top Cover to 1.63 inches. Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.25. Click OK.

The selected span segment is now vertical.

Delete the span segment over the wall:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
Delete.
Edit the span cross section orientation:
Generate Spans.
Set Spans to Generate to Longitude. Click the up-down orientation button tool ( ). Click OK. The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in Figure 40-18. One span segment on grid 2 is slightly skewed due to the column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a wall and is unnecessary since the slab is continuously supported (see Drawing design strips near walls on page 99 for discussion).
1 Select the diagonal span segment between B-5 and C-4. 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
left or right of the first click. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now horizontal.
Generate the longitude strips:
Generate Strips. The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
220
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.6 Regenerate the mesh

The presence of design strips can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate the mesh.
).
2 Enter Element Size of 2.5 feet and click Generate.
There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element: Standard Plan.
Figure 40-19 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation. Check for punching shear:
).
Change Cover to CGS to 1.63 inches (cover to centroid of top reinforcement). Click OK.
Figure 40-21 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.
Figure 40-20 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan.
RAM Concept
221
Chapter 40

After you run the model, you can view the results of the analysis and design calculations.
Review Calc Options:
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
1 Choose > Criteria > Calc Options 2 Review the options, and click OK.
Spans Plan.
).
Note: See Calculating the results on page 125 of

Chapter 27 for more information.
Calculate:
3 Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span
Segments, and click OK.

4 Select span segment 6-2. 5 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
1 Click Calc All (

6 Click the Column Strip tab. 7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to Inverted T or L, and click OK.
Recalculate:
An error message appears concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue three times to clear the error message.
The source of the error messages must be investigated.

View the design strips with tendons:
1 Click Calc All (
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross
Concept completes the calculations without errors. See Cross Section Trimming on page 91 for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Tendons tab. 4 Select the Longitude Tendons layer, check Tendons, and click OK. 5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool (
).

Look at design status:
) and the Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location shown in Figure 40-22 and Figure 40-23.
Figure 40-22 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 40-24 Design Status: Status Plan.
Figure 40-23 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4022.
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
222
RAM Concept
Chapter 40 There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching plan.
Plan. Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column locations and OK with SSR at one column. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three ACI 318-05 cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: ACI 318 on page 136 of Chapter 28 for more information. Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0, the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning Non-standard section)). Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports OK with SSR. If Concept reports Failed then SSR does not solve the problem and a thickening is required.
Figure 40-26 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to view the stud shear reinforcement.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).
2 Choose the plans that best convey the results without too
much clutter.
Figure 40-25 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan.

Look at design reinforcement:
Figure 40-27 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so that the number is consistent each side of columns.
RAM Concept
223
Chapter 40
Look at detailed top reinforcement:
Click OK
Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Top Bars Plan.
Figure 40-28 Reinforcement: Top Bars Plan
Figure 40-29 Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
40.7.3 Concrete stresses

ACI 318-05 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon averaging rather than peak values. Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available in Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these plots because, in following the code, Concept does not use the contours directly in design. What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
View top stress plan:
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck Max Capacity in the plot options. Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
40.7.4 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. The Service LC (dead and live load plus posttensioning if applicable) and LT Uncracked Deflection LC (load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage) provide contour plans for deflection. RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for these deflection contours. You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking with ECR and long-term deflection strip-based plots. See Chapter 58, Estimating deflections for more information.
Top Stress Plan.

2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( 3 In the Plot Settings dialog box:
).
Change Max Frame # to 4.
Note: The strip based long-term deflection plots are not overly useful for two-way post-tensioned flat plates designed to ACI318. This is because the design method assumes uncracked sections.
224
RAM Concept
Chapter 40

View Factored LC Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC:
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr > Mx Plan. The Mx contours should be visible.

) ).
4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid intersection D-3.
Figure 40-30 Service LC: Max Deflection Plan.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn. ) to change
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-

View long-term uncracked deflection:
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3. This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate nature of the ACI318-05 post-tension design method. See Section distribution plots on page 133 for more information.
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > LT Uncracked
Deflection LC > Max Deflection Plan.
Figure 40-31 LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Max Deflection Plan
Figure 40-32 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
RAM Concept
225
Chapter 40
View the balanced load percentages:
3 Choose Balanced Load Percentages in the Visible
Objects dialog box and click OK. See Calculating the balanced load percentages on page 337 for more information.
Plan
).
226
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
41 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001

Draw the slab area:
).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa. Set Thickness to 250 mm. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates display next to the command prompt.

1 Choose File > Import Drawing. 2 Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate_metric.dwg.

3 Select Millimeters (the units used in the CAD file) and
click OK.

).
properties.
Change Thickness to 200 mm. Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm. Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
RAM Concept
227
Chapter 41
Draw the opening:
).

properties.
Change Thickness to 500 mm. Change Surface Elevation to 0, and leave the Priority as 2. Click OK.
).

2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas. 3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and then click
OK.
).
) and press
Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa. Set Width to 600 mm. Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.



10 Enter an angle of zero degrees. 11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.
). ).
Choose a Concrete Strength of 20 MPa.
228
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
4 Click OK. 5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
the centerline: Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of the slab, and click. Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 (it will snap orthogonally) and click. You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
6 Go to Generate the mesh:, or try the next method. 7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current

8 Click Redraw (
). ) and press down
Perspective.
) to rotate the ).
floor.
).
RAM Concept
229
Chapter 41

All Loads Plan.

).
Change Fz to 2 kN/m2 and click OK. This tool will now draw area loads of 2 kN/ m2.
).
balcony (and then type c). In this situation, it is best for the load to match the balconys dimensions. You have drawn another 2 kN/m2 load. This load should be highlighted as it is the current selection. If not, select it before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection tool.
All Loads Plan.


4 In the dialog box, change Fz to 3 kN/ m2 and click OK.
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 5 kN/ m2.
Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m load by first

Loads Plan.
), select the blanket load
by fencing the entire area.


8 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 1 kN/ m2, and
click OK.
230
RAM Concept
Chapter 41


11 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -1 kN/ m2, and
RAM Concept
231
Chapter 41

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In Australia, engineers use column and middle strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and, generally, detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and middle strips.
Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the grid intersection C-1.
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 2 m, Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
) selected,
draw tendons in the next two panels: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-2. Click at the center of the column at A-3. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-2.
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
).
Set Auto Connect. Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
5 Double click the Full Span Tendon Panel tool (
). ) selected,
) to
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-3. Click at the center of the column at B-5. Click at the center of the column at C-4. Click at the center of the column at C-3.

Set Strands per Tendon to 4. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.
Note: The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing 12.7 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles.

) and Snap Orthogonal
) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: ( ). ) selected,

8 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool (
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at grid intersection D-2.
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at A-2. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at B-1.
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 2 m. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 2 m, and click OK.

) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: ) selected, Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-4.
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1. 232
RAM Concept
Chapter 41 Click at the center of the column at D-4. Click at the center of the column at D-3.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.


mm and click OK.

because there are already two tendon segments connected at that point.
21 With the Select Connected Tendons tool (
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the drop cap.
) selected,
double-click the tendon on grid B.

segment at B-2.

23 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon

to 10, and click OK.

mm and click OK.

) selected,
double-click the tendon directly above grid B.

25 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly
segment at C-2.
41 Hold down the Shift key, and double click the tendon
below grid B.
segment immediately below (profile point at (9,15.7)).



to 5, and click OK. The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
mm and click OK.

between D-2 and D-3.

), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within the balcony slab: Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1. Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure until you have selected all applicable end tendon segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3, 4 and 5).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance load is -5.67 kN/m. If this is not the number then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
), select the tendon between ).
C-3 and C-4.

48 Click the Calc Profile tool ( 49 Input the desired balance load as -6 kN/m in the Calc

Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc. The low point (end 2) adjusts to 126 mm.
mm and click OK.

), double click the tendon segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200 mm balcony slab.



mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.

), select all of the tendon segments that terminate over a drop cap, by: Double clicking at grid intersection A-1. Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3. RAM Concept
233
Chapter 41 Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the opening.
Click at the center of the column at A-2.

) and Snap

Orthogonal (
).
), select the tendon segment that passes through the opening.

) selected,

mm and click OK.

57 Choose the Stretch tool (
).
58 With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile
point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening.

Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor to the edge of the opening.
) and Snap ) selected,
Orthogonal (
).
draw tendons in the balcony: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1. Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 17.8 m. Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 7.2, 17.8 m.

Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.


mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK.

Figure 41-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan. Define the longitude tendons:


1 Choose Layers > Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan

remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
mm, and click OK.

) selected,
). ) selected,
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at B-1. Click at the center of the column at B-2.
234
RAM Concept
Chapter 41 Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 2 m. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Click at the center of the column at C-4.

) selected,

), select the second tendon in
this panel.
26 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
Delete.
) selected,
) selected,
draw tendons that terminate in this panel: Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( Type r0,2.1. Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m. ).
Note: This sequence is anti-clockwise.

Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Enter 9.25, 26, and press Enter. Turn off Snap Orthogonal (
Click at the profile point at 19, 17.5 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 22, 19.6 m.

). Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.
Click at the center of the column at C-2. Set Auto Connect. Uncheck Skip Start Tendon, and click OK.


) selected,
mm, and click OK.

) selected,
double-click the tendon on grid 2.


33 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 10, and click OK. 34 With the Select Connected Tendons tool (
Set Layout to Splayed. Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 1.8 m. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
) selected, double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.

35 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
the right of grid 2.


37 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 5, and click OK.
) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at the center of the column at D-4.
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
RAM Concept
235
Chapter 41

mm and click OK.


mm, and click OK.

segment at B-2.

mm and click OK. Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the opening.
Plan.
).
49 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-.5,0.
3 Click the General tab. 4 Change Environment to Protected.

Note: This setting often has a significant effect on reinforcement quantities. Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already checked in the AS3600 template.
5 Click the Column Strip tab. 6 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle. 7 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm. 8 Click the Middle Strip tab. 9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
the moved tendon.

Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving

the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information. 236
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Generate Spans. The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude. Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12 Click OK.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips, as shown in Figures 41-14 through 41-17. You can make corrections with a number of tools. You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
Figure 41-12 Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan. Hatch the strips:
).

Figure 41-14 Skewed span segment that snapped to end of wall Straighten a span segment:
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
shown in Figure 41-14).

).
RAM Concept
237
Chapter 41
).

).
The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There is one more to edit.
Figure 41-15 Diagonal strip that warrants manual improvement. Edit the span cross section orientation:
1 Select the diagonal span strip as shown in Figure 41-15. 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
Figure 41-17 Span segment C-2 to C-3. Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
).
).
).

3 Click at point B. 4 Right-click, and click enter. 5 Click at point C. 6 Click at point D. 7 Right-click, and click enter. 8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( 9 Click at point E as shown in Figure 41-17. 10 Click at point F, to the right of the opening. 11 Right-click, and click enter. 12 Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3). 13 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
).

14 In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to
Manual.
15 Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically. 16 Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
Figure 41-16 Design strip with excessive width. Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
click OK. This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
17 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool (
).
).
strips near Grid 3 (point A in Figure 41-16). 238 RAM Concept
Chapter 41 The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in Figure 41-18.
Figure 41-19 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan.
Figure 41-18 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration. Generate the longitude spans:
One span segment on grid 2 is slightly skewed due to the column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a wall and is unnecessary since the slab is continuously supported (see Drawing design strips near walls on page 99 for discussion).
Straighten a span segment:
Spans Plan.
).
1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2
(highlighted in Figure 41-19).

The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal direction. Change CS Top Cover to 41 mm. Change CS Bottom Cover to 37 mm. Click OK.
).
).


Generate Spans.
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall. 2 Press Delete.
Set Spans to Generate to Longitude. Click the up-down orientation button tool ( ). Click OK. The spans appear in the longitude direction.
RAM Concept
239
Chapter 41
8 Click at point C and D. 9 Right-click, and click enter. 10 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( 11 Click at point E as shown in Figure 41-21. 12 Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G
).
(another corner).
13 Right-click, and click enter. 14 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3. 15 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool (
).
1 Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4. 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
).
Figure 41-20 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
).
The new design strips appear, as shown in Figure 41-22.
Figure 41-21 Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips. Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
highlighted line in Figure 41-20).

Figure 41-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.

3 Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK. 4 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( 5 Click at point A as shown in Figure 41-21. 6 Click at point B. 7 Right-click, and click enter.
).
Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilever. See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually on page 88 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips. In particular, Example 21-2 on page 89 and Example 21-4 on page 90.
240
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Check for punching shear:

). The presence of design strips can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate the mesh.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan. 2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( 3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog
box: Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to centroid of top reinforcement). Click OK.
).
2 Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.
RAM Concept
241
Chapter 41


Calculate: Figure 41-26 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4125.
1 Click Calc All (
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be investigated. Two more errors appear to do with reinforcement detailing.
3 Click Continue twice to clear the reinforcement error messages.
Spans Plan.
).


).
Plan.
).
3 Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments,
and click OK.


6 Click the Column Strip tab. 7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to None.
8 Change CS Inter Cross Section Slope Limit to 0. 9 Click the Middle Strip tab. 10 Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box. 11 Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm. 12 Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
242
RAM Concept
Chapter 41 The above changes are made to eliminate the reinforcement warnings. In a proper design you should investigate this further.
Recalculate:
Plan. You can see that ten columns have an unreinforced stress ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Two columns report OK with SSR which means stud shear reinforcement is required. One column fails in punching. SSR does not solve the problem. A thickening is required. Concept has noted Non-standard section at five column locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 136 of Chapter 28 for more information. Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0, the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning Non-standard section)). Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports OK with SSR.
1 Click Calc All (
Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See Cross Section Trimming on page 91 for a

thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.

This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections. There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching plan.
RAM Concept
243
Chapter 41

41.7.3 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. The Max Service LC (dead and live load plus post-tensioning if applicable) and LT Uncracked Deflection LC (load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage) provide contour plans for deflection. RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for these deflection contours. You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking with ECR and long-term deflection strip-based plots. See Chapter 58, Estimating deflections for more information.
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Max Service LC
> Max Deflection Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).
much clutter.
Figure 41-31 Max Service LC: Max Deflection Plan.
) to change
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour Similarly, you can view the long term uncracked deflection from the LT Uncracked Deflection LC layer.
View strip-based long-term deflection:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design
> L.T. Deflection Plan.

2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( 3 Uncheck Minimum Demand.
).
244
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
4 Change Max Frame Number to 4, and click OK. 4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid intersection D-3.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn.
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3. This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the different column and middle strip moments. See Section distribution plots on page 133 for more information.
Figure 41-32 Max Service Rule Set: L.T. Deflection Plan.

Figure 41-33 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool. View the balanced load percentages:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Ultimate LC:
Plan
1.2D + 1.5L > Mx Plan. The Mx contours should be visible.

).
Objects dialog box and click OK. ). See Calculating the balanced load percentages on page 337 for more information.
RAM Concept
245
Chapter 41
246
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43

This chapter describes the steps for modeling a posttensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads. The objective of this tutorial is to build on the skills learned in the Chapter 39 RC tutorial and introduce new steps, such as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning. Some tools and methods described in the RC tutorial are not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you first do the RC tutorial. This is not a particularly aggressive design. After you have completed the tutorial, you may wish to make the slab thinner to investigate the ramifications. You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker slab). BS8110 does not cover post-tensioned flat plates, and refers the designer to specialist literature. The Concrete Society prepared Technical Report 43 for this purpose. RAM Concept currently uses the first edition of TR43. For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files on page 5.
Draw the slab area:
).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40. Set Thickness to 250 mm. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.


click OK.

).
properties.
Change Thickness to 200 mm. RAM Concept 247
Chapter 42 Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm. Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
3 With the Slab Area tool ( 11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.
Draw the opening:
) selected, define the six vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex, and then click at your starting point (or type c in the command line and press Return).
).

properties.
).

).
Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40. Set Width to 600 mm. Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.
) and press


). ).

10 Enter an angle of zero degrees.
Choose a Concrete Strength of C20/25. RAM Concept
248
Chapter 42
4 Click OK. 5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on
View the mesh:
the centerline. Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of the slab, and click. Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 (it will snap orthogonally) and click. You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.

8 Click Redraw (
). ) and press down
Perspective.
) to rotate the ).
floor.
).

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically.
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
RAM Concept
249
Chapter 42 Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to define areas with increased area loads is to draw a blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the additional loads. There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be specified.
Define the typical live load:
All Loads Plan.

).
Figure 42-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).

Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m2 load by first

All Loads Plan.

Loads Plan.


Chapter 42


RAM Concept
251
Chapter 42

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In the USA it is common to use the banding technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding means concentrating the tendons over support points in one direction, and distributing them uniformly in the orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column and middle strips are not used. In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards Technical Report 43 (BS8110 does not cover posttensioned flat plates) and that document encourages the use of full panel design strips with the banding technique. This method, with bonded tendons, is used in this tutorial.
) selected, draw a
tendon along grid D: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection D-4. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at the corner of the slab near D-2. Right click, and then click Enter.
). ) to edit its
default properties.

) selected, draw a
) selected, draw a
).
tendon along grid C: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-4. Right click, and then click Enter.
) to edit its
default properties.
) selected,
Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded. Set Strands per Tendon to 9. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.


7 Turn Snap to Intersection (
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap, by: Double clicking at grid intersection B-1. Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.81. Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4. Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2. Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4. RAM Concept
).
252
Chapter 42
20 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties 39 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125

21 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 125 mm and click OK. 22 With the Selection tool (
mm and click OK.

24 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 375 mm and click OK.
segment at B-2.

segment at C-2.


Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.

). ) to


) selected,
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: ), select the tendon between ). Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at B-1. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at A-2.
C-3 and C-4.



) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: 253
RAM Concept
Chapter 42 Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1. Click at the center of the column at B.8-1. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-2. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at B-3.

) and Snap
) selected,
Orthogonal (
). ) selected,


).


13 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 150 mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK. 14 With the Selection tool (
) selected,


16 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100 mm, and click OK.

) selected,
) selected,
Set Auto Connect.
) selected,
254
RAM Concept


this panel.

Delete.
) selected,
mm and click OK.


Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.

mm, and click OK.


mm, and click OK.

segment at B-2.
) selected,







the moved tendon.

Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to
RAM Concept
255
Chapter 42 Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information.
256
RAM Concept
Chapter 42

).
Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Full

Width.
2 Click the General tab.
Note: Environment is already set to Class 3 - 0.1 mm. Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already
checked in the BS8110 template.
3 Click the Column Strip tab. 4 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle. 5 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm. 6 Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to
Elevated Slab.
Generate Strips. ), or choose Process > The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
9 Click OK.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips,
RAM Concept
257
).
).
).


).
).
).


6 Enter 180 and press Return.
).
258
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Spans Plan.
).

).
).
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle. ), or choose Process >
Generate Spans.

Delete.
).
).
left or right of the first click.

5 The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
horizontal.
RAM Concept
259
Chapter 42
Figure 42-19 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan. Check for punching shear:

).
Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to centroid of top reinforcement). Click OK.

).
260
RAM Concept
Chapter 42

Spans Plan.
).

Calculate:

1 Click Calc All (

Recalculate:

1 Click Calc All (
).

This shows OK for all but one design strip. OK means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
RAM Concept
261
Chapter 42 The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is TR43 6.10.2. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that it is the transfer condition. It is known as the Initial Service Rule Set in Concept. It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution would be to terminate some strands at grid 3. There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching plan.

Plan. Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column locations and OK with SSR at eight columns. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 136 of Chapter 28 for more information. Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0, the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning Non-standard section)). Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports OK with SSR.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).
much clutter.
262
RAM Concept
Chapter 42 The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so that the number is consistent each side of columns.
Click OK
Figure 42-29 Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck Max Capacity in the plot options.
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.

TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon averaging rather than peak values. Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available in Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these plots because, in following the code, Concept does not use the contours directly in design. What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
42.7.4 Deflection
Top Stress Plan.

).
Note: The strip based long-term deflection plots are not overly useful for two-way post-tensioned flat plates designed to TR43. This is because the design method assumes uncracked sections.
Change Max Frame # to 4.
RAM Concept
263
Chapter 42

Deflection Plan.

) ).
Figure 42-30 Service LC: Deflection Plan.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn. ) to change

1, and then click at grid intersection B-3. This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension design method. See Section distribution plots on page 133 for more information.
Deflection LC > Deflection Plan.
Figure 42-31 LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Deflection Plan. Figure 42-32 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
264
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Plan
).
RAM Concept
265
Chapter 42
266
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43

This chapter describes the steps for modeling a posttensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads. The objective of this tutorial is to build on the skills learned in the Chapter 39 RC tutorial and introduce new steps, such as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning. Some tools and methods described in the RC tutorial are not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you first do the RC tutorial. This is not a particularly aggressive design. After you have completed the tutorial, you may wish to make the slab thinner to investigate the ramifications. You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker slab). RAM Concepts EC2 implementation considers the base EC2 code, the UK National Annex and the second edition of the Concrete Societys Technical Report 43 for posttensioned slab design. For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files on page 5.
Draw the slab area:
).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40. Set Thickness to 250 mm. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.


click OK.

).
properties.
Change Thickness to 200 mm. RAM Concept 267
Chapter 43 Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm. Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
3 With the Slab Area tool ( 11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.
Draw the opening:
) selected, define the six vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex, and then click at your starting point (or type c in the command line and press Return).
).

properties.
).

).
Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40. Set Width to 600 mm. Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.
) and press


). ).

10 Enter an angle of zero degrees.
Choose a Concrete Strength of C20/25. RAM Concept
268
Chapter 43
4 Click OK. 5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on
View the mesh:
the centerline. Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of the slab, and click. Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 (it will snap orthogonally) and click. You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.

8 Click Redraw (
). ) and press down
Perspective.
) to rotate the ).
floor.
).

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically.
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
RAM Concept
269
Chapter 43 Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to define areas with increased area loads is to draw a blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the additional loads. There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be specified.
Define the typical live load:
All Loads Plan.

).
Figure 43-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).

Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m2 load by first

All Loads Plan.

Loads Plan.


Chapter 43


RAM Concept
271
Chapter 43

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In the USA it is common to use the banding technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding means concentrating the tendons over support points in one direction, and distributing them uniformly in the orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column and middle strips are not used. In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards Technical Report 43 and that document encourages the use of full panel design strips with the banding technique. This method, with bonded tendons, is used in this tutorial.
) selected, draw a
tendon along grid D: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection D-4. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at the corner of the slab near D-2. Right click, and then click Enter.
). ) to edit its
default properties.

Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called

latitude and longitude. Refer to Using the latitude and longitude tendon layers on page 117 for more information.
) selected, draw a
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 46 explains the use of Strip

).
) selected, draw a
tendon along grid C: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-4. Right click, and then click Enter.
) to edit its
default properties.
Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded. Set Strands per Tendon to 9. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.
) selected,


7 Turn Snap to Intersection (
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap, by: Double clicking at grid intersection B-1. Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.81. Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4. Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2. Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4. RAM Concept
).
272
Chapter 43
20 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties 39 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125

mm and click OK.

segment at B-2.

segment at C-2.


Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.

). ) to


) selected,
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: ), select the tendon between ). Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at B-1. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at A-2.
C-3 and C-4.



) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: 273
RAM Concept
Chapter 43 Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1. Click at the center of the column at B.8-1. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-2. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at B-3.

) and Snap
) selected,
Orthogonal (
). ) selected,


).


13 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 150 mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK. 14 With the Selection tool (
) selected,


16 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100 mm, and click OK.

) selected,
) selected,
Set Auto Connect.
) selected,
274
RAM Concept


this panel.

Delete.
) selected,
mm and click OK.


Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.

mm, and click OK.


mm, and click OK.

segment at B-2.
) selected,







the moved tendon.

Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to
RAM Concept
275
Chapter 43 Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information.
276
RAM Concept
Chapter 43

).
Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Full

Width.
2 Click the General tab.
Note: Environment is already set to Normal. Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already
checked in the EC2 template.
3 Click the Column Strip tab.
Note: CS PT Service Design Type is already set to Stress &

Crack Width. You may change this to perform only stress checks or only crack width designs.
4 Set Cross Section Trimming to Slab Rectangle. 5 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm. 6 Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to
Elevated Slab.
9 Click OK.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips,
RAM Concept
277
).
).
).


).
).
).


).
278
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Spans Plan.
).

).
).
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle. ), or choose Process >
Generate Spans.

Delete.
).
).
left or right of the first click.

5 The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
horizontal.
RAM Concept
279
Chapter 43
Figure 43-19 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan. Check for punching shear:

).
Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to centroid of top reinforcement). Click OK.

).
280
RAM Concept
Chapter 43

The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
Spans Plan.
).

Calculate:

1 Click Calc All (

Recalculate:

1 Click Calc All (
).

This plan shows many failures due to EC2 section 7.3.
RAM Concept
281
Chapter 43
43.7.2 Stress and Crack Width Designs
Note: Some UK slab designers consider that designing slabs according to TR 43 is deemed to comply with the EC2 crack width provisions and hence the EC2 crack width calculations need not be checked.We will take that approach here.
To have Concept use only the TR43 stress limits:
It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution would be to terminate some strands at grid 3 (not done in this tutorial). There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching plan.
1 Open the Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans plan. 2 Select all of the design spans and edit their properties. 3 On the Column Strip tab in the properties dialog, change the CS PT Service Design Type to Stress and click OK 4 Make the same changes to the Longitude Design Spans
Calculate and Review Updated Status:
Plan. Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column locations and OK with SSR at eight columns. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 136 of Chapter 28 for more information. Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0, the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning Non-standard section)). Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports OK with SSR.
1 Click Calc All (
Figure 43-25 Design Status: Updated Status Plan.
This shows OK for all but two design strips. OK means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections. The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-1 is TR43 5.8.1. This is due to a slightly too high tensile stresses at the column face. This can be resolved by adding one more tendon along grid B (not done in this tutorial). The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is TR43 5.8.2. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that it is the transfer condition. It is known as the Initial Service Rule Set in Concept.
282
RAM Concept
Chapter 43

The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so that the number is consistent each side of columns.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).Choose the plans that best convey the results without too much clutter.

TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon averaging rather than peak values. Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available in Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these plots because, in following the code, Concept does not use the contours directly in design. What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Characteristic
Service Design > Top Stress Plan.

).
Change Max Frame # to 4. Click OK
RAM Concept
283
Chapter 43
Figure 43-30 Characteristic Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
Figure 43-31 Service LC: Deflection Plan.
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck Max Capacity in the plot options. Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers > Rule Set Designs > Characteristic Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
) to change

Deflection LC > Max Deflection Plan.
43.7.5 Deflection
Note: The strip based long-term deflection plots are not overly useful for two-way post-tensioned flat plates designed to TR43. This is because the design method assumes uncracked sections.
Figure 43-32 LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Deflection Plan.

While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can be useful, especially for irregular structures. Even though 284 RAM Concept
Chapter 43 principal moments are important, the default moment contours plans are for Mx (moment about the x-axis) and My. This is because most designers detail reinforcement orthogonally, and the directions are usually the x- and yaxes. You can view moments about any axes, including the principal axes. It is not particularly easy to assess the moment contours. This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful.
View Ultimate LC Moments:
This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension design method. See Section distribution plots on page 133 for more information.
1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L > Max Mx Plan. The Mx contours should be visible. Lets modify this plan to show moments for the Standard context (full load, with standard load factors) instead of the Max context (maximum value for any set of standard or alternate load factors and any load pattern).
).
3 In the plot window that opens, the Slab tab should be
active. Change the Context item from Max to Standard. Click OK. Now lets draw some section distribution plots.
Figure 43-33 Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L Max Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
) ).
6 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid
intersection D-3. This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn.
Plan
).
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.
RAM Concept
285
Chapter 43
286
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
44 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000

Draw the slab area:
).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of M40. Set Thickness to 250 mm. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.


click OK.

).
properties.
Change Thickness to 200 mm. Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm. Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
RAM Concept
287
Chapter 44
Draw the opening:
).

properties.
).

2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas. 3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and then click
OK.
).
) and press
Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa. Set Width to 600 mm. Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm, and click OK.
3 Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on


). ).

10 Enter an angle of zero degrees. 11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 20 MPa.

4 Click OK.
288
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
the centerline: Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of the slab, and click. Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 (it will snap orthogonally) and click. You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
6 Go to Generate the mesh:, or try the next method. 7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current 1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.

8 Click Redraw (
). ) and press down
Perspective.
) to rotate the ).
floor.
).
1 m.
RAM Concept
289
Chapter 44

All Loads Plan.

).
).
All Loads Plan.


Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m load by first

Loads Plan.


click OK.
290
RAM Concept
Chapter 44


RAM Concept
291
Chapter 44

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In India, engineers commonly use column and middle strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and, generally, detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and middle strips.
Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at C-2. Click at the grid intersection C-1.
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 2 m, Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
) selected,
draw tendons in the next two panels: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-2. Click at the center of the column at A-3. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-2.
).
). ) selected,
) to
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-3. Click at the center of the column at B-5. Click at the center of the column at C-4. Click at the center of the column at C-3.

Set Strands per Tendon to 4. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.

) and Snap Orthogonal
) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: ( ). ) selected,

Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-2. Click at the center of the column at C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at grid intersection D-2.
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at A-2. Click at the center of the column at B-2. Click at the center of the column at B-1.

) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: ) selected, Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at C-4.
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1. 292
RAM Concept
Chapter 44 Click at the center of the column at D-4. Click at the center of the column at D-3.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.


mm and click OK.

because there are already two tendon segments connected at that point.
) selected,

segment at B-2.


to 10, and click OK.

mm and click OK.

) selected,
double-click the tendon directly above grid B.

25 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly
segment at C-2.
41 Hold down the Shift button, and double click the tendon
below grid B.
segment immediately below (profile point at (9,15.7)).



to 5, and click OK. The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
mm and click OK.

between D-2 and D-3.

), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within the balcony slab: Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1. Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure until you have selected all applicable end tendon segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3, 4 and 5).
), select the tendon between ).
C-3 and C-4.

48 Click the Calc Profile tool ( 49 Input the desired balance load as -5.3 kN/m in the Calc

mm and click OK.

), double click the tendon segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200 mm balcony slab.



mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.

), select all of the tendon segments that terminate over a drop cap, by: Double clicking at grid intersection A-1. Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3. RAM Concept
293
Chapter 44 Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the opening.
Click at the center of the column at A-2.

) and Snap

Orthogonal (
).
), select the tendon segment that passes through the opening.

) selected,

mm and click OK.

57 Choose the Stretch tool (
).
58 With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile
point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening.

Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor to the edge of the opening.
) and Snap ) selected,
Orthogonal (
).



mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK.

Figure 44-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan. Define the longitude tendons:


Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan

remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
mm, and click OK.

) selected,
). ) selected,
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1. Click at the center of the column at B-1. Click at the center of the column at B-2.
294
RAM Concept
Chapter 44 Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. Set Spacing to 2 m. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Click at the center of the column at C-4.

) selected,

this panel.
Delete.
) selected,
) selected,


). Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.


) selected,
mm, and click OK.

) selected,





) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3. Click at the center of the column at D-3. Click at the center of the column at D-4.
RAM Concept
295
Chapter 44

mm and click OK.


mm, and click OK.

segment at B-2.

Plan.
).
Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Code Slab.

3 Click the General tab. 4 Check the Consider as Post-Tensioned box. 5 Click the Column Strip tab. 6 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle. 7 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm. 8 Click the Middle Strip tab. 9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box. 10 Click OK. 11 Click the Generate Spans tool (

the moved tendon.

Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving

the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information. 296
Generate Spans.
RAM Concept
Chapter 44 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude. Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12 Click OK.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips, as shown in Figures 44-14 through 44-17. You can make corrections with a number of tools. You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
Hatch the strips:
).
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear. ), or choose Process >

).
RAM Concept
297
Chapter 44
).

).
The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There is one more to edit.
Figure 44-15 Diagonal strip that warrants manual improvement. Edit the span cross section orientation:
Figure 44-17 Span segment C-2 to C-3. Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
).
).
).

3 Click at point B. 4 Right-click, and click enter. 5 Click at point C. 6 Click at point D. 7 Right-click, and click enter. 8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( 9 Click at point E as shown in Figure 44-17. 10 Click at point F, to the right of the opening. 11 Right-click, and click enter. 12 Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3). 13 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
).

14 In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to
Manual.
15 Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically. 16 Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
click OK. This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
).
).
strips near Grid 3 (point A in Figure 44-16). 298 RAM Concept
Chapter 44 The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in Figure 44-18.
Spans Plan.
).

).
).


Generate Spans.
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall. 2 Press Delete.
RAM Concept
299
Chapter 44
8 Click at point C and D. 9 Right-click, and click enter. 10 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( 11 Click at point E as shown in Figure 44-21. 12 Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G
).
(another corner).
13 Right-click, and click enter. 14 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3. 15 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool (
).
1 Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4. 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
).
Figure 44-20 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
).
The new design strips appear, as shown in Figure 44-22.
Figure 44-21 Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips. Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
highlighted line in Figure 44-20).

Figure 44-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.

3 Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK. 4 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( 5 Click at point A as shown in Figure 44-21. 6 Click at point B. 7 Right-click, and click enter.
).
Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilever. See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually on page 88 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips. In particular, Example 21-2 on page 89 and Example 21-4 on page 90.
300
RAM Concept
Chapter 44

). The presence of design strips can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate the mesh.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan. 2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( 3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog
box: Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to centroid of top reinforcement). Click OK.
).
RAM Concept
301
Chapter 44


Calculate: Figure 44-26 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4425.
1 Click Calc All (
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be investigated. One more error appears to do with reinforcement detailing.
3 Click Continue to clear the reinforcement error message.
Spans Plan.
).

2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Tendons tab. 4 Select the Longitude Tendons layer, check Tendons, and
).

click OK.
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool (
Plan.
).
3 Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments,
and click OK.


6 Click the Middle Strip tab.
7 Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box. 8 Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm. 9 Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
The above change is made to eliminate the reinforcement warning. In a proper design you should investigate this further.
302
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Recalculate:
1 Click Calc All (
Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0, the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning Non-standard section)). Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports OK with SSR.
Note: See Cross Section Trimming on page 91 for a

thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
44.7.1 Design Status


This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections. There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching plan.
Plan. You can see that seven columns have an unreinforced stress ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Six columns report OK with SSR which means stud shear reinforcement is required. Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 136 of Chapter 28 for more information.
RAM Concept
303
Chapter 44 This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).
You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking with ECR and long-term deflection strip-based plots. See Chapter 58, Estimating deflections for more information.
much clutter.
Figure 44-31 Service LC: Max Deflection Plan.
) to change
44.7.3 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. The Service LC (dead and live load plus posttensioning if applicable) and LT Uncracked Deflection LC (load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage) provide contour plans for deflection. RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for these deflection contours.
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour Similarly, you can view the long term uncracked deflection from the LT Uncracked Deflection LC layer.
View strip-based long-term deflection:
L.T. Deflection Plan.

2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( 3 Uncheck Minimum Demand. 4 Change Max Frame Number to 4, and click OK.
).
304
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn.
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3. This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the different column and middle strip moments. See Section distribution plots on page 133 for more information.
Figure 44-32 Service Rule Set: L.T. Deflection Plan.

Figure 44-33 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool. View the balanced load percentages:
Plan

).
Objects dialog box and click OK. ). See Calculating the balanced load percentages on page 337 for more information.
RAM Concept
305
Chapter 44
306
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
45 Mat Foundation Tutorial

This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a mat foundation, also known as a raft. Alternative metric values and units are identified in square brackets [] next to the US units. The metric values are not exact conversions. The code used is ACI 318-05. For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files on page 5. You should ensure that you select mat foundation in the new file dialog box. Most mats support columns and walls. You may choose to model the columns and walls but you should be aware that this could affect the mat behavior. In particular, if there are lateral loads then you should be very careful in defining the supports above as having no horizontal restraint. Otherwise, the supports above rather than the soil (springs) below could resist some lateral moment and shear. A mat need not have columns and walls modeled above. The reasons to model columns and walls above include improving the appearance of the model, and providing snap points for point and line loads. Additionally, a wall above will stiffen the mat in a beneficial way.
Draw the slab area:
).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 4000 psi [25 MPa for AS3600; C25/30 for BS8110 and EC2]. Set Thickness to 30 inches [750 mm]. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1. Click OK.
) selected, define the four corners of the slab by snapping to the imported drawings slab corners.
Note: You can type c to close the polygon instead of entering the last point.

The CAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept program directory.
1 Turn on Snap to Center (
). ).
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2]. Set Height to 10 feet [3 m]. Set Support Set to Above. Set Width to 30 inches [750 mm]. Set Diameter to 30 inches [750 mm]. Check Roller at Far End. Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
1 Choose File > Import Drawing. 2 Select the CAD drawing file mat_tutorial.dwg
[mat_tutorial_metric.dwg]. The File Units dialog box appears.

3 Select Inches [Millimeters] (the units used in the CAD
file) and click OK.

Show the drawing on the mesh input layer:

). ).
).
Choose a Concrete Strength of 3000 psi [20 MPa for AS3600; C20/25 for BS8110 and EC2]. Set Height to 10 feet [3 m]. Set Support Set to Above.
RAM Concept
307
Chapter 45 Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm]. Uncheck Shear Wall. Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
4 Click OK. 5 Define each wall by snapping to the start and end points of the wall centerlines shown on the CAD drawing.
Define the area spring location and properties:
1 Double click on the Quad-Area Spring tool (
).
2 In the Default Area Spring Properties dialog box:
Set an r-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001 N/mm3]. Set an s-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001 N/mm3]. Set a z-force constant of 250 pci [0.07 N/mm3], and click OK.
Note: You need horizontal springs (r and s) with very small stiffnesses since there are lateral loads.
3 Define an area spring over the entire slab by clicking four
corners of a quadrilateral. This shape need not match the slabs exact dimensions, but should cover the entire slab. You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
Generate the mesh: Figure 45-1 Mesh Input: Standard Plan
).
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 2 feet [0.7 m]. 3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
View the structure:
Perspective.
) to rotate the
floor.
Figure 45-2 Element: Standard Plan
308
RAM Concept
Chapter 45

Mat loads could consist of point, line and area loads for a number of loadings (such as live, other dead, north seismic, east seismic, north wind and east wind). For simplicity, this tutorial will not use area loads (except for the automatic calculation of self-weight) and will adopt loads belonging only to other dead, live, and ultimate seismic east loadings.
Define the other dead loading:
This pastes the other dead loads onto the Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan.
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
Loads Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
).
). ).
6 Double click the Point Load tool (
7 In the Default Point Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 40 Kips [180 kN], and click OK.

8 Define 40 Kip [180 kN] point loads by snapping to
column centers at the following locations: A-1 A-3 D-1 D-3

9 Define the rest of the point loads as shown in Figures 45Figure 45-3 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
3 and 45-4.
10 Double click the Line Load tool (
).
11 In the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
Set Fz to 8 kip/ft [120 kN/m], and click OK.

12 With the Line Load tool (
) selected, draw a Line Load along the centerline of the wall on grid 2.
13 Repeat for the wall at grid 2.5 with a load of 5.5 kip/ft [80 kN/m].
Note: Draw these loads to the outside face of the intersecting walls.
Copy to the live (reducible) loading layer:
For simplicity, use the same loads for other dead and live (reducible) loads
1 With the Selection tool ( 2 Choose Edit > Copy. 3 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
), select all of the other dead loads by fencing the entire slab.
Figure 45-4 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
All Loads Plan. RAM Concept 309
Chapter 45
Define the ultimate seismic east loading:
8 Double click the Line Load tool (
) and in the Default
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Ultimate Seismic East
Line Load Properties dialog box: Set Fy to -12.8 kip/ft [-174 kN/m]. Click OK.
9 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection points, as shown in Figure 45-7 and Figure 45-8. 10 Double click the Line Load tool (
Loading > All Loads Plan.

2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 4 Click Show All, and then click OK. 5 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( 6 Double click the Line Load tool (
).
). ) and in the Default
) and in the Default
Line Load Properties dialog box: Set Fy to (+)12.8 kip/ft [(+)174 kN/m]. Click OK.
11 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection points, as shown in Figure 45-7 and Figure 45-8.
Line Load Properties dialog box: Set the elevation above the slab surface to 360 inches [9000 mm]. Set Fx to 4.1 kip/ft [60 kN/m]. Set all other items in the dialog box to 0. Click OK.
7 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
points, as shown in Figure 45-5 and Figure 45-6.
Figure 45-7 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set)
Figure 45-5 East Seismic: All Loads Plan
Figure 45-8 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set) [METRIC]
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a fivestorey building. The load elevation is the average floor height (third storey).
Figure 45-6 East Seismic: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
Note: The loads in the y-direction cancel the couple about

the mat centroid.
310
RAM Concept
Chapter 45

Draw latitude design strips:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
).
3 The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
Generation properties. Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is the default for the AS3600 template). Click the General tab. Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box. Click the Column Strip tab. Change CS Top Bar and CS Bottom Bar to #8 [N25 for AS3600; T25 for BS8110; H25 for EC2]. Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 2 inches [50 mm]. Set the Min. Reinforcement Location to Tension Face. Click the Middle Strip tab. Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box. Click OK.
Figure 45-9 Generate spans dialog box
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude (as shown in Figure 45-9).

6 Click OK.
Choosing span segments in a mat is a subjective matter. Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips. It is recommended that some span segments in this tutorial are deleted.
), select the seven span segments highlighted in red in Figure 45-10 and press Delete.
RAM Concept
311
Chapter 45
Generate the latitude strips: Regenerate the latitude span strips:

Hatch the strips:
Generate Strips.
).

Figure 45-12 Latitude design strips after editing and regeneration. Draw longitude design strips:
Spans Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( 3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
).
).
7 Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 3 inches
Two span segments are slightly skewed. How you treat skewed strips is also a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we suggest the span segment strips cross sections are manually reoriented.
Edit the cross section orientation:
[75 mm], and click OK.

Generate Spans.
Set Spans to Generate to Longitude. Click the up-down orientation button tool ( ). Click OK.
10 The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in
), select span segments 5-2 and 6-2 as shown in Figure 45-11.

2 Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
).
4 Click near one of the span segments, and then again
Figure 45-13. Similar to the latitude direction, some editing of the span segments is required.
above or below the first click. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
312
RAM Concept
Chapter 45

19 In the dialog box:
Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically. Uncheck Consider End 2 as Support. Change Support Width at End 1 to 12 inches [300 mm], and click OK.
), select the span segments over the walls (highlighted in red in Figure 45-13) and press Delete.
12 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( 13 With the Span Segment tool (
).
), draw a span segment by clicking at the wall intersections at point A and B in Figure 45-14.

15 In the dialog box, change:
Figure 45-14 Manually drawn span segments Generate the longitude strips:
Min Number of Divisions to 0. Max Division Spacing to 30 feet [10 m], and click OK. This span segment has been drawn to assist with Concepts span segment strip width calculation.
Generate Strips. The design strips appear in the longitude direction. Two span segments are slightly skewed. We suggest the span segment strips cross sections are manually reoriented.
) and Snap Nearest
Snapable Point (
).
17 With the Span Segment tool (
), draw a span segment by clicking at the wall intersection at point B and then at point C in Figure 45-14 (it should snap to the visible grid line).
RAM Concept
313
Chapter 45
Figure 45-15 Longitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required. Figure 45-16 Longitude design strips after editing and regeneration Edit the cross section orientation:
), select span segments 9-3 and 12-1 as shown in Figure 45-15.

2 Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool (
).
3 Click near one of the span segments, and then again to the
left or right of first click. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now horizontal.
Regenerate the longitude span strips:
Note: Many of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilevers. See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually on page 88 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips. In particular, Example 21-2 on page 89 and Example 21-4 on page 90.
Generate Strips.
).
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog
box: Change Cover to CGS to 3 inches [60 mm] (cover to centroid of top reinforcement). Click OK.
314
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
).
2 Enter Element Size of 2 feet [0.7m] and click Generate.

RAM Concept
315
Chapter 45

Plan. Concept has noted Non-standard section at the corner column locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three ACI 318-02 cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: ACI 318 on page 136 of Chapter 28 for more information.
1 Choose > Criteria > Calc Options 2 Review the options. 3 Uncheck Auto-stabilize structure in x- and y-direc-
tions, and click OK.
Note: See General options on page 126 of Chapter 27

for more information.
Calculate:
Click Calc All (
Look at reinforcement and design status:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips and punching checks. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility, one-way shear, and punching shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
3 Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Reinforcement
Plan. This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. The results are, however, too congested to be useful. You can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom), direction (latitude or longitude), and type (flexural or shear). You should decide which plans best convey the results without too much clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement: Figure 45-19 Design Status: Status Plan.
Reinforcement Plan.
There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching plan.
).

3 Check Bar Spacings under Latitude Span Designs, and
click OK.
316
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Figure 45-22 Service LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
2 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design
45.6.1 Bearing stresses

Maximum bearing stress is a critical consideration when designing a mat. Contour plots of the bearing stresses are available in RAM Concept. These will vary according to the load combination. Note that the minimum and maximum bearing values often occur for different load combinations. The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum and minimum bearing pressures for all load combinations. The maximum bearing pressure plan is probably the most useful for your design.
View bearing stress plans:
> Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Figure 45-23 Soil Bearing Design: Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
RAM Concept
317
Chapter 45
318
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
46 Strip Wizard Tutorial

This chapter walks you through the steps for using Strip Wizard to provide a preliminary design for the slab (grid B) in the PT Flat Plate Tutorial. Alternative metric values and units are identified in square brackets [] next to the US units. The metric values are not exact conversions. The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001, BS8110:1997, EC2 - 2004 and IS 456. For more information, see Using Strip Wizard on page 163.
7 Click Next to proceed to the Span Data page.
46.3 Enter the span data

Enter the span dimensions and data on the Span Data page. (The type of data entered depends on which structural system you chose on the General Parameters page.)
Set the span data as follows:
1 Set the length of Span 1 and 2 to 30 ft [9 m]. 2 Set the length of Span 3 to 25 ft [7.75 m]. 3 Set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
46.1 Start Strip Wizard

When you choose File > Strip Wizard, the New File dialog automatically opens before the Strip Wizard dialog box is opened. After you create the new RAM Concept file, the Strip Wizard dialog appears.
Start the Strip Wizard:
Note: To set all the values in a column at once, enter the

value in the Typical row (first row) of that column. For example, for the step above, you can simply type 10 [250] in the Typical row of the Thickness column to set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
4 Set the left start width of Span 1 to 11.5 ft [3.5 m]. 5 Set the left start width of Span 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m]. 6 Set the right start width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m]. 7 Set the right start width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m]. 8 Set the left end width of Spans 1, 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m]. 9 Set the right end width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m]. 10 Set the right end width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard. 2 In the New File dialog box, set the Structure Type to
Elevated and choose the Code.

3 Click OK. 4 The Strip Wizard dialog box appears; click Next to
proceed to the General Parameters page.
46.2 Set the general parameters

On the General Parameters page, you define the structure type, number and type of spans, and concrete mixes.
Set the general parameters as follows:
1 Choose Two-Way as the structural system. 2 Check Post-tensioned. 3 Set the number of spans to 3. 4 Check Asymmetric strip. 5 Set the concrete mix for slabs and beams to 5000 psi [32
MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40 for IS 456].
6 Set the concrete mix for supports to 5000 psi [32 MPa for
Figure 46-1 The Span Data page.
AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40 for IS 456].

11 Click Next to proceed to the Support Data page.
RAM Concept
319
Chapter 46
46.4 Create the supports below

Add the four supports in the Supports Below table on the Support Data page.
Set the supports below as follows:
Set the loads as follows:
1 Set the typical Dead Area Load to 20 psf [1 kN/m2]. 2 Set the typical Live Area Load to 40 psf [2 kN/m2]. 3 Click Next to proceed to the Post-Tensioning page.
1 Set the depth of all four supports below to 24 inches [600
Note: You can leave the Dead Line Load and Live Line Load fields blank (no need to enter zero).
mm].
2 Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600
mm].
3 Set the height of all four supports below to 10 ft [3 m]. 4 Leave the bottom and top fixity of all supports below as

Enter the post-tensioning parameters on the PostTensioning page.
Set the post-tensioning as follows:
Fixed.
5 Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels
page.
1 Uncheck the stressing Start and End check boxes. 2 Set the minimum P/A to 140 psi [1 MPa].
46.5 Add drop caps

Enter the dimensions for a drop cap at Supports 2 and 4 in the Drop Caps table (top table) on the Drop Cap and Drop Panels page.
Set the drop cap data as follows:
3 Set the minimum balance load percentage to 65%. 4 Click Next to proceed to the Reinforcement page.
46.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters

Enter the reinforcement parameters on the Reinforcement page.
Set the reinforcement as follows:
1 For Support 2 in the Drop Caps table set the following
values: Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm]. Set the left width to 22.5 inches [600 mm]. Set the right width to 22.5 inches [600 mm]. Set the before length to 22.5 inches [600 mm]. Set the after length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
2 For Support 4 in the Drop Caps table set the following
1 Set the top reinforcing bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16
for BS8110 and IS456; H16 for EC2].

2 Set the bottom reinforcing bar to #4 [N12 for AS3600;
T12 for BS8110 and IS456; H12 for EC2].

3 Set the top and bottom reinforcement clear cover to 1 inch [25 mm].
values: Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm]. Set the left width to 33 inches [900 mm]. Set the right width to 12 inches [300 mm]. Set the before length to 33 inches [900 mm]. Set the after length to 0 inches [0 mm].
3 Click Next to proceed to the Loads page.
Note: Strip Wizard does not differentiate between cover to

tendons and reinforcement bar.
4 Check the Perform punching shear checks box. 5 Set Cover to CGS to 1.625 inch [41 mm]. 6 Click Next to proceed to the Completion page.
46.9 Complete the Strip Wizard 46.6 Specify the loads

Enter the area loads on the Loads page. Completing the Strip Wizard is the final page of the Strip Wizard dialog box. You can save the data you just entered in a Strip Wizard Settings file by clicking Save. When you click Finish, Strip Wizard creates your strip in the open RAM Concept file.
320
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
Complete the strip:
1 Click Save and name the file in the Save Strip Wizard
File As dialog box that appears.

2 Click Finish.
46.10 Proceed with RAM Concept

Figure 46-5 The completed strip on the Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
After you have completed Strip Wizard, you can proceed with RAM Concept. After you have created your strip, generate the mesh (with a 2.5-foot [0.75 m] mesh) and run a calculation analysis. Refer to the relevant manual chapters, or one of the three PT Flat Plate tutorials for further information.
View your strip:
46.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial

The results of the Strip Wizard analysis are similar but not the same as the PT Flat Plate Tutorial. The reasons for different results include: Strip Wizard does not automatically consider transverse continuity effects. Increased balcony loads not considered by Strip Wizard. Strip Wizard automatically modified the drapes in spans 2 and 3 (you can change these if you wish).
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan.
Figure 46-2 The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Longitude tendons not considered by Strip Wizard.
46.12 Conclusion
Strip Wizard allows you to perform a preliminary or final design for a strip within a floor. The results are similar to those generated by any strip program, but not as accurate as a RAM Concept model that considers all of the irregularities within a floor.
Figure 46-3 The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip after the mesh has been generated.
Figure 46-4 The Element: Standard Plan after calculation and mesh regeneration.
RAM Concept
321
Chapter 46
322
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
47 Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on finite element method (FEM) plate analysis as well as specific information on how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
47.1 Review of plate behavior

In RAM Concept, slab areas are modeled as plates. Engineers have historically used approximate methods for designing plates; these approximate methods assume that the plate behaves in a beam-like manner in two perpendicular directions. Because engineers have used these approximate methods for so long, RAM Concepts true elastic plate analysis results can sometimes be confusing. This section will review plate analysis theory, so engineers can better understand RAM Concepts results.
47.1.1 In-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Slabs are subject to both in-plane and out-of-plane forces. In-plane forces stretch and shear the slab, but do not cause it to deviate from the plane defined by the slab centroid. For horizontal slabs (like those in RAM Concept), in-plane forces cause stretching, compressing and shearing of the centroid plane in plan view only. Out-of-plane forces cause the slab to bend and twist, moving it perpendicular to the plane defined by the slab centroid. For horizontal slabs (like those in Concept), out-of-plane forces cause the slab to deflect vertically from the original centroid plane. In a horizontal slab that has one continuous centroid elevation, the equilibrium equations of in-plane and out-of-plane forces are totally separate. However, if there is a shift in the centroid, the two sets of forces become interrelated due to equilibrium considerations and must be solved for simultaneously; RAM Concept handles this interrelation automatically. For slabs that are not made of a linear-elastic material, the strains due to the in-plane and out-of-plane forces can no longer be linearly superimposed, so the equilibrium equations of the two force systems become indirectly related through their strains. This interrelation of the two force systems strains for non-linear elastic materials can be seen in the simple example of a flat concrete slab that is subject to transverse loads that cause out-of-plane forces and deflections. If a uniform in-plane compression force is applied to the same slab, the slab will have less cracking, smaller out-of-plane displacements and a somewhat different out-of-plane force pattern. Concepts global analysis of structures assumes that the concrete behaves like a linear-elastic material. However, the following discussion of the in-plane and out-of-plane forces is based purely on equilibrium considerations, and therefore is valid for any material.
Note: P-delta effects are not considered.

47.1.2 In-plane behavior
In-plane forces can be quantified as an axial stress in two perpendicular directions, along with a shear stress. For a differential element (with no loads applied) the stresses are shown as follows:
RAM Concept
323
Chapter 47
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be shown to be: Fx/x + Vxy/y = -Px Fy/y + Vxy/x = -Py where Px and Py are applied loads. If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes:
Fr = Fx cos2 + Fy sin2 + 2Fxy sin cos Fs = Fx sin2 + Fy cos2 2Fxy sin cos Vrs = Vxy (cos2 sin2 ) + (Fy Fx) sin cos This Mohrs circle relationship is based on equilibrium considerations, so it is valid for all materials. For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular principal axes where the shearing stresses are zero and the forces in the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The angle between the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
324
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
47.1.3 Out-of-plane behavior

Out-of-plane forces can be quantified as bending moment about two perpendicular axes, a torsional moment and vertical shears on the two perpendicular faces. For a differential element the moments and shears are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can be shown to be: Vxz/x + Vyz /y = -Pz Mx/y + Txy/x = -Vyz My/x + Txy/y = -Vxz where Pz is an applied load. If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like relationship:
RAM Concept
325
Chapter 47
Mr = Mx cos2 + My sin2 - 2Txy sin cos Ms = Mx sin2 + My cos2 + 2Txy sin cos Trs = Txy (cos2 sin2 ) + (Mx My) sin cos
Vrz = Vxz cos + Vyz sin Vsz = -Vxz sin + Vyz cos Again, these relationships are based on equilibrium considerations, so they are valid for all materials. For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular principal axes where the torsion moments are zero and the bending moments about the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The angle between the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
47.1.4 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Where the centroid plane of a slab changes elevation, there is an interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane forces. The interaction of the two sets of forces is simple and is defined purely by moment and force equilibrium. A simple centroid step is shown in elevation view below:
326
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Fx = Fx Vxy = Vxy Vxz = Vxz My = M y - Fx d Mxy = Mxy - Vxy d
47.1.5 RAM Concept plotting and relevant axes

RAM Concept can plot its results relative to the x-axis, the y-axis, a specific axis (specified with an angle) or a maximum or minimum axis. The minimum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the minimum value for the quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to point in the plot. Similarly the maximum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the maximum value for the quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to point in the plot.
47.2 Finite element analysis

RAM Concept uses a linear-elastic finite element formulation based on gross section properties for its global analysis.
47.2.1 About finite element analysis

Finite element analysis (also known as the finite element method) has become the standard way for engineers to analyze complicated structures. While explaining the theory of the finite element method is beyond the scope of this chapter, engineers using RAM Concept should understand how the parameters they specify affect the program's analysis.
47.2.2 Finite element formulation used in RAM Concept

RAM Concept models the slab portion of the structure with triangular or quadrilateral slab elements. These slab elements are based on a formulation by Robert Cook [Two Hybrid Elements for Analysis of Thick, Thin and Sandwich Plates, International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, Volume 5, pages 277-288, 1972]. The elements consider both in-plane and bending deformation. Five degrees of freedom are used per node.
47.2.3 Slab element general properties

The slab elements used in RAM Concept have the following general properties: The elements consider both in-plane and out of plane forces. RAM Concept 327
Chapter 47 The elements can (optionally) have different stiffnesses in two orthogonal directions. The elements consider transverse shear deformations. The elements consider the relative elevations of adjacent slab elements.
47.3 Orthotropic behavior

RAM Concept allows you to specify six stiffness factors that modify the behavior of the slab elements (see description of the orthotropic behavior settings in Slab area properties on page 56 and Beam properties on page 57 of Chapter 16, Defining the Structure). When all of the factors are set to 1.0, the slab element behave as an isotropic material (a material having the same properties in all directions). When the factors are different from each other, the slab elements behave as an orthotropic material (a material having different properties along its three perpendicular axes.) Care must be used when setting these stiffness factors. With certain combinations of factors, the structure can become unstable and the results can become unreliable. Also, the interaction of the stiffness factors may be more complex than it appears upon first inspection. This section gives some guidance to assist in avoiding these issues.
47.3.1 K Factors and Instability

When K factors other than 1 are used (either directly, or indirectly by setting the slab or beam Behavior), it is possible that the structure may become unstable or nearly unstable. This is generally not a problem unless the Custom option is used.
Interaction of KMrs and KMr or KMs Stiffness Factors
If custom settings are used, and both KMrs and KMr or both KMrs and KMs are reduced, the elements may become unstable and the analysis results may be suspect. For this reason we recommend that these parameters be kept within a limited range: KMr / KMs > 0.5 or KMrs / KMs > 0.5 KMs / KMr > 0.5 or KMrs / KMr > 0.5 Similar instabilities can occur with KVrs and KFr/KFs.
47.3.2 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses

In situations where the centroid of the slab is not at a uniform elevation, the in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses of Concept's slab elements will interact. For example, in a T-beam, the axial stiffness of the web and the flanges will interact with their bending stiffnesses (creating a stiffer section than just the web and flange bending stiffnesses added together). In these situations, you may need to modify the in-plane behavior to modify the out-of-plane behavior. For example, if you want to reduce a T-beam bending stiffness by half, you would need to set both KMs and KFr to 0.5.
47.4 Deep beam considerations

47.4.1 Analysis of slab and beam elements
RAM Concept assumes that beam elements and slab elements behave the same; unless their behavior is specified for the finite elements. The first analysis assumption that Concept makes for slab elements is that linear sections remain linear; this is analogous to plane sections remain plane in beam theory.
328
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Figure 47-6 Linear Sections Before Deformation
Figure 47-7 Linear Sections After Deformation
The second analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is that the force and stress patterns in the element are that of a typical slab location. The following table shows the possible slab element forces and their associated stresses. Symbol Force
Fx Fy Vxy Vxz Vyz Mx My Txy Axial force on x-face Axial force on y-face In-plane shear force
Related Stress
Uniform axial stress x Uniform axial stress y Uniform shear stress xy
Transverse shear force on x-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress xz Transverse shear force on y-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress yz Bending moment about x-axis Bending moment about y-axis Torsional moment Linear (along z-axis) axial stress y Linear (along z-axis) axial stress x Linear (along z-axis) shear stress xy
Table 47-4 Relation between force and stress
Figure 47-8 In-Plane Actions (Plan View)
Figure 47-9 Out-of-Plane Actions (Plan View)
RAM Concept
329
Chapter 47
47.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams For bending moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will assume a linear distribution of bending stress over the deep beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
Figure 47-10 RAM Concept Analysis Bending Stresses
Figure 47-11 True Bending Stresses
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally ignored. In design, Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations that are appropriate only for deep beams and Concept will not provide any deep beam detailing information. Concepts shallow beam calculations will generally be conservative for deep beams. The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The engineer will also need to provide appropriate detailing for the deep beam.
330
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
47.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the stiffness of a deep beam subjected to transverse bending moments. Concepts analysis will assume that the entire beam is effective in resisting the transverse moment.
Figure 47-12 RAM Concept Analysis Bending/Axial Stresses
Figure 47-13 True Bending/Axial Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored. In design, it is important that Concepts design sections have the appropriate ignore depth settings, so only the portion of the beam that is truly effective is used in the capacity calculations.
Figure 47-14 Before Ignore Depth
RAM Concept
331
Chapter 47
Figure 47-15 After Ignore Depth
47.4.4 Analysis of deep beams with torsion

Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the torsional stiffness of deep beams. At the worst case, Concepts assumptions lead to a torsional stiffness at the deep beam that is proportional to bh3, while the true torsional stiffness is proportional to b3h. Typically Concepts overestimation is not that great as the slab elements have a transverse shear stiffness that makes the beams more flexible. The larger the number of elements across a deep beam, the smaller the overestimation of torsional stiffness.
Figure 47-16 RAM Concept Analysis Torsion Shear Stresses
Figure 47-17 True Torsion Shear Stresses
The torsion in the beam may be necessary for a complete structural load path - for this reason it cannot be ignored. It may be appropriate to reduce the torsional stiffness of the beam (this will modify the structural load path to one that is less
332
RAM Concept
Chapter 47 dependent upon the beam torsional capacity). Concept provides four options of considering this torsion in design. See Torsion Considerations on page 352 for more information.
Note: When the torsion stiffness of a beam has been reduced using a K-factor, it is generally recommended to provide a
minimum level of torsion stirrups/ligatures/links to ensure that the beam can torsionally crack without precipitating a failure.
47.4.5 Analysis and design of moment transfer through step-beams

Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will not consider that a step beam could bend about its longitudinal axis. Concepts assumption that linear sections remain linear prohibits this type of bending and will cause Concept to over-estimate the stiffness of the step-beam for moment transfer.
Figure 47-18 RAM Concept Step-Beam Bending Stresses
Figure 47-19 True Step-Beam Bending Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored. However, it is up to the engineer to assure that step-beam has the capacity and detailing to transfer the analyzed moment.
47.5 Wall behavior

47.5.1 Walls above slab
RAM Concept considers walls above the slab to act as beams. It appropriately analyzes the influence of these walls on the slab, but it does not report the wall-beam forces nor does it design the wall-beams. Design strips and design sections that cross walls ignore both the capacity of the wall-beam in the cross section and the forces in the wall-beam. Wall-beams interpret some wall properties differently than walls below the slab:
RAM Concept
333
Chapter 47 Fixed Near = wall has torsional stiffness Fixed Far = (ignored) Shear Wall = beam has axial stiffness Compressible = (ignored) Note that while the prediction of the bending behavior of the slab and beam is accurate, the division of shear between the wall and the slab is not well predicted. For a combined wall-beam / slab section the proportion of the vertical shear force carried by the slab will be between the two extremes: As / Atotal, and Is / Itotal Where As = cross-sectional area of slab in section Atotal = cross-sectional area of slab and wall together Is = moment of inertia of slab Itotal = moment of inertia of slab and wall together
47.6 Post-tensioning loadings

47.6.1 Hyperstatic loading
RAM Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements, springs, support, design sections, design strip segment cross sections and punching checks) by using the following vector relationship: Fh = Fb - Fp where Fh = the hyperstatic forces and moments Fb = the balance loading forces and moments (tendon forces on real structure) Fp = the primary forces and moments in the object (forces in object due to PT if the object was not restrained, but still contained tendons if any) For objects that do not contain tendons (walls, columns, springs, rigid supports, design sections without tendons and design strips without tendons), Fp is zero, so: Fh = Fb For slab elements the calculation of Fp for every element is not performed, as there is no clear definition of Fp for anything except a cross section. Concepts slab analysis plots assume Fp = Fb (Fh = 0), but these plotted values are NOT used in the slab design and checking. Concept calculates design section and design strip cross section forces (without the assumption of Fp = Fb) as follows: Fh = Fb - Fp
334
RAM Concept
Chapter 47 Concept bases the calculation of Fp on the tendons at each cross section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use Concepts slab analysis plots for cross-section design values in PT structures. (It is not recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because design strips and design sections provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to Complete Secondary (Hyperstatic) Effects by A. Bommer; PTI Journal, January 2004, Vol 2 No. 1).
47.7 Self-equilibrium analysis

RAM Concept can analyze loadings using a self-equilibrium analysis.
47.7.1 About self-equilibrium analysis

Any static loading on a structure, when combined with the structure support reactions (considered as additional loads), is a self-equilibrium loading. In such a loading the total loads upon the structure are in force and moment equilibrium. However, the equilibrium loads still produce moments and forces in the structure. In certain cases, it is desirable to analyze a self-equilibrium loading upon a floor system while ignoring the effects of the floor system supports. We call this type of analysis a self-equilibrium analysis.
47.7.2 Uses of Self-Equilibrium Analyses

Load Paths Compatible with Full Building Lateral Analysis
The most common use of self-equilibrium analyses is to ensure that a load path in Concept is consistent with a load path in a lateral analysis performed by a separate program. If a lateral analysis of a building (perhaps using RAM Frame) is performed, and that analysis considers the slab to be part of the lateral load path, the slab - including the slab-column connections - needs to be designed to resist the forces and moments determined in the lateral analysis. This design can be performed using a self-equilibrium analysis. The forces/reactions from all of the supports (above and below the slab) onto the slab are considered as loads to the slab, any forces directly applied to the slab (such as a story-force in a seismic analysis) are also included. The result of this self-equilibrium analysis is a slab load path that is fully consistent with the lateral analysis of the entire building. The distribution of forces (and the displacements) within the slab may not match those in the building lateral analysis, but the distribution of slab forces in Concept is almost always more accurate than those predicted in the fullbuilding analysis.
Other Uses
While there are other potential uses of the self-equilibrium analysis, they are rare and not covered in this manual.
47.7.3 Using Self-Equilibrium Analyses

Setting the Loading Analysis Type
To have Concept analyze a loading using a self-equilibrium analysis, the loading's analysis type must be changed to Lateral SE (lateral self equilibrium). The loading analysis type can be changed in the loading window. See Changing Analysis on page 31 of Chapter 10, Specifying Loadings.
Note: The term Lateral SE is used instead of Self Equilibrium to remind users that this analysis type is primarily intended for lateral loadings.
RAM Concept
335
Chapter 47
Defining the Loads
There is no limit to the type or quantity of loads that can be applied in a self-equilibrium loading. However, the loads applied must be nearly in self-equilibrium. If the loads are out of equilibrium Concept will apply restraints to the slab to ensure that equilibrium can be maintained. The restraint reactions can be viewed in the Calc Log.
Note: See Importing a database on page 45 of Chapter 14, Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System for
information on how to automatically import self-equilibrium lateral loads.
Note: Mat/Raft foundations are typically not well suited for self-equilibrium analyses as the soil reactions are not known before the analysis.
47.7.4 Self-Equilibrium Analyses Details
Floating Stiffness Matrix
If you use self-equilibrium loadings, Concept creates an internal floating stiffness matrix in addition to the regular stiffness matrix. The floating stiffness matrix considers the slab, but not the supports above or below the slab. Concept also adds some minimal supports to the matrix to make it stable.
Minimal Supports
The minimal supports that Concept adds to the floating stiffness matrix are located at real support locations, but not at every real support location. Typically, Concept adds three supports to provide full stability, but not to provide any restraint.
Note: Concept gives a warning if there are not at least two support locations where minimal supports can be added.
The motivation for adding the minimal supports at the same location as real supports is that these locations are likely to be locations where self-equilibrium loads are applied, so any reactions at these locations can typically be considered as corrections to the self-equilibrium loads.
Punching Check Reactions
Punching checks consider the loads applied at the punching check location in their reaction calculations. Punching checks are the only support that have reactions from self-equilibrium analyses.
Displacements
Concept reports all displacements for self-equilibrium loadings as zero. Self-equilibrium loadings have no effect on the displacements calculated for load combinations or rule sets.
Pattern Loading
Pattern loading can be used in a self-equilibrium analysis, but it should almost never be used. When used, all patterns should contain a self-equilibrium set of loads.
Note: For an example, see Example 37-1 on page 179 of Chapter 37, Frequently Asked Questions.
47.8 Design strip and design section forces

47.8.1 Design section axes and sign convention
Design sections have a local coordinate system, with r, s and z axes: R-axis is collinear with the design section and is positive in the direction from end 1 to end 2. This direction is also referred to as Lateral. S-axis is 90 degrees counter-clockwise to the r-axis (still in the x-y plane) and goes through the design centroid (see below). This direction is also referred to as Axial 336 RAM Concept
Chapter 47 Z-axis is parallel to the global z-axis and goes through the design centroid. This direction is also referred to as Vertical Forces for the design section are considered as the forces that the structure in the positive-s region applies to the structure in the negative-s region. A design section drawn from point B to point A will have the same forces as a design section drawn from point A to point B except that the following two forces will have opposite signs: Vz (vertical shear on the s-face) Mz (moment about the z axis)
47.8.2 Design strip segment axes and sign convention

Design strip segments have a local coordinate system for each internal cross section. An internal cross section is perpendicular to the design strip segment spine and extends from the left tributary boundary to the right tributary boundary. Each internal cross section is treated exactly like a Design Section with its own r, s and z axes (see above). All of a DSSs cross sections will have coordinate systems that are parallel, but for certain structure geometries the s-axes of each cross section will not be collinear. This is due to each cross section determining its own design centroid (see below).
47.8.3 Design centroids

Each design strip (span segment strip) segment cross section and design section and determines its own design centroid location. The location is determined as follows:
1 A final cross section is determined by considering (i) the trimmed cross section for design strip segments, and (ii) the top
and bottom ignore depths for design sections.

2 The centroid z-elevation of this final cross section is the design centroid z coordinate. 3 A cross section core is determined (see Concrete Core Determination on page 352). For a T shaped section the core
will be the stem from the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section, the core will be the entire section.
4 The cores x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroids x and y coordinates. 5 You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the first page of an audit. See Chapter 30, Using the
Auditor for more information.
47.8.4 Calculating the forces on the cross section

RAM Concept calculates the cross section forces about the design centroid of the cross section (after trimming has been taken into account). For each of the same slab elements that make up the initial concrete cross section (before trimming has been taken into account), the elements nodal forces (for all the elements nodes on one side of the design section) are transformed to the centroid of the final concrete section and added to the design section forces. For slab elements that contain the end of the design section, only a fraction (proportional to the length of the design section in the element divided by the length across the element along a line collinear with the design section) of the nodal forces are included. Nodal forces are used in place of integrations of slab stresses because slab stress results may have local spikes caused by odd-shaped elements. These local spikes can significantly alter the total integrated value. The nodal forces used by Concept are not affected by the local stress spikes and always give results that will be in equilibrium with the nodal loads.
47.8.5 Calculating the balanced load percentages

RAM Concept calculates the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips. See Viewing balanced load percentages on page 130 for instructions on accessing this information. Each design strip segment reports two values: RAM Concept 337
Chapter 47 xx% DL Balanced xx% DL + RLL Balanced The values reported are valid for the last Calc All (tendon changes after that are not reflected). The values are calculated based on the total static moment for the span, for the balanced loadings and the dead and live loadings. For a cantilever span, the effective load is: w = 2M L where: M = moment at first cross section L = clear span For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is: w = 8M L where M = (M1 + M2)/2 - M3 M1 = moment at first cross section M2 = moment at last cross section M3 = moment at cross section closest to midway between first and last cross sections L = clear span The percentage is defined as: % = -100 Wb/Wl where Wb = effective load due to balance and transfer balance loadings Wl = effective load due to load combination under consideration (DL or DL + RLL) There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of a span. These have an undefined balance load percentage. The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation available in the tendon plans. The difference are due to: diversion of PT effects clear span vs total span moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines In the calculations, DL is based on the dead loading types, and means: Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
2 2
338
RAM Concept
Chapter 47 In the calculations, RLL is based on the new loading types, and means: Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (roof) + Live (reducible)(transfer) + Live (unreducible)(transfer) + Live (storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer) All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before addition to the total.
47.8.6 Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option
Design sections and span segments contain an option (checkbox) with the label Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change. If this option is selected, Concept will perform five integrations of the cross section forces for every loading and load pattern: 1. Standard Integration - this is as described in Calculating the forces on the cross section on page 337. 2. Max Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated bending moment value are considered. 3. Min Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated bending moment value are considered. 4. Max Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated vertical shear value are considered. 5. Min Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated vertical shear value are considered. The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less than that for a shorter sub- cross section. The values from the above integrations may not be considered in certain circumstances: Standard Integration - all values always considered. Max Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in Standard Integration. Min Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in Standard Integration. Max Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard Integration. Min Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard Integration. When the Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option is selected, the design forces are always more conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due consideration.
Note: These selective integrations are performed independently for each loading. Load(ing) Combinations cross section forces therefore may include (and exclude) forces from different elements in each loading. This adds to the conservatism of the option.
47.9 Result categories in RAM Concept

RAM Concept keeps track of 2 categories of results: standard and envelope.
RAM Concept
339
Chapter 47
47.9.1 Standard results

Standard results - loadings
Standard Results for a loading are the results due to the application of all loads of the loading with no patterns considered. These results consists of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab and the Standard context results for the Strip tab.
Standard results - load combinations
Standard Results for a load combination are the linear combination of loading standard results using the standard load factors. These results consist of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab and the Standard context results for the Strip tab.
Note: Standard results also include all of the results for items other than design strip segments, design sections and punching checks. Items such as slab bending moments, column reactions and soil reactions are included in the standard (nonenveloped) results. Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope results are calculated.
47.9.2 Envelope results
Envelope results are kept for only 3 object types - design strip segments, design sections and punching checks. Envelope results fully consider pattern loadings and alternate envelope factors (as well as standard factors). For design strip segments and design sections all of the cross-section forces are calculated, and there are six envelope result sets kept: Max M (forces in place at time of maximum M) Min M (forces in place at time of minimum M) Max V (forces in place at time of maximum V) Min V (forces in place at time of minimum V) Max P (forces in place at time of maximum P) Min P (forces in place at time of minimum P)
Note: Min refers to the minimum signed value, not the minimum absolute value.
For punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6 envelope result sets kept: Max Fz (reaction forces at time of maximum Fz reaction) Min Fz (reaction forces at time of minimum Fz reaction) Max Mx (reaction forces at time of maximum Mx reaction) Min Mx (reaction forces at time of minimum Mx reaction) Max My (reaction forces at time of maximum My reaction) Min My (reaction forces at time of minimum My reaction)
47.9.3 How RAM Concept calculates envelope results

Envelope Results - Loadings
Envelope results for a loading are determined by comparing the results for the full loading and the results of all of the pattern loadings (considering the pattern factors). Envelope results consist of a subset of results which occur simultaneously with minimum and maximum values of certain resultants. 340 RAM Concept
Chapter 47 For example, for a design section, all of the pattern results would be compared, and the pattern result with the largest bending moment would become the Max M result for that design section; other design sections Max M results might be determined by other patterns. If the loading is not patterned, then all of the envelope results are identical to the standard results.
Envelope Results - Load Combinations
Envelope results for a load combination are determined by comparing all the permutations of standard and alternate load factors multiplied by all envelopes for each loading in the load combination. For each location and envelope type, the chosen load factors are those that create the most extreme envelope. In mathematical terms: There are 2n(p+1) results for n loadings and p patterns. These 2n(p+1) results are enveloped together. The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2n(p+1) load combinations, but the result of the RAM Concepts calculations is the same as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets
Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes for all of the load combinations that use the rule set. For each location and envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously with the most extreme envelope. Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results on the Reaction tab and Strip tab except for those with the Standard context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as the standard envelope, but technically it is not an envelope at all.
Note: RAM Concepts enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and complicated models. It would be possible, however, for the six envelopes to miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in the envelopes may be critical for the design, you can manually create additional loadings (without patterning) and/or additional load combinations (without alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single load combination) to ensure that the force set of concern is considered in the design.
RAM Concept
341
Chapter 47
342
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
48 Section Design Notes

This chapter explains RAM Concepts general approach to the analysis and design of cross sections. The specific handling of each codes requirements are detailed in the chapters that follow.
48.1 General Design Approach

48.1.1 Strip and Section Design A 3 Step Process
RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps: Step 1: Each Rule set performs its Phase 1 selection of reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design. Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized. Step 2: Each Rule set performs its Phase 2 selection of reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in step 1b. For most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but for some rule sets such as shear design and ductility design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be known before the design can be performed. Step 2b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized. Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis.
48.1.2 Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept considers mild steel reinforcement to be a perfectly elastic/plastic material as defined by the modulus of elasticity and the yield stress.
48.1.3 Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a post-tensioning steel stress-strain curve base on a standard power formula that has been used in various forms for 25 years: fp = p [A + B/{1 + (C p)D}1/D] fpu Where A, B, C and D are coefficients chosen to best fit the experimental stress-strain curve data. RAM Concept uses coefficients A, B, C and D based on an analysis of prestressing steel stress-strain curves included a paper by Develapura and Tadros [Develapura, R. K. and Tadros, M. K.,Critical Assessment of ACI 318 Eq. (18-3) for Prestressing Steel Stress at Ultimate Flexure, ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, September-October 1992, pp. 538-546]. RAM Concepts values are: A = 0.0311 Ep B = Ep - A C = 0.958 Ep/fpy D = 7.36 These values provide exact correspondence with the recommended parameters for 270 ksi (1860 MPa) strand with fpy of 0.9 fpu. For other prestressing materials, there may be small differences (a few percent) from the theoretical curves in the region between the start of yield and ultimate strength.
RAM Concept
343
Chapter 48
300
300
Fp(strain ) Fpu Fpy
200
100
0 0.00
0.005
0.01
0.015
0.02 strain
0.025
0.03
0.035 0.04
48.1.4 Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains

The strains in a cross section can be determined using the plane sections remain plane assumption. However, due to the effects of prestressing and the sequence of construction, the strains in the post-tensioning in a cross section are not equal to the strains in the adjacent concrete. Conceptually, to calculate the strain in a bonded tendon at that corresponds to the adjacent concrete strain is simple: p = c + (pi ci) Where p = strain in tendon c = strain in concrete adjacent to tendon pi = strain in tendon at time of bonding ci = strain in adjacent concrete at time of bonding (typically negative) RAM Concept uses the following procedure and assumptions when calculating the pi and ci values for each tendon in each design cross section: All tendon long-term losses (relaxation, elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage) occur before bonding. The formwork applies an upward force on the concrete exactly the same as the weight of the concrete. The only forces in the concrete are those due to the balance loading. The concrete strains can be determined using gross section properties and the initial concrete modulus.
48.1.5 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory

RAM Concepts treatment of the effect of cross section strains on ultimate unbonded tendon stresses is loosely based on a paper by Naaman, Burns, French, Gable and Mattock [Naaman, A. E. et. al, Stresses in Unbonded Prestressing Tendons at Ultimate: Recommendation, ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 4, July-August 2002, pp. 518-529]. In the paper the authors, who are members of the Subcommittee of Stresses in Unbonded Tendons of Joint ASCE-ACI committee 423, Prestressed Concrete, recommend code modifications for ACI 318. The paper provides an equation for estimating tendon stresses at ultimate bending strength of a cross section. The proposed equation is shown to have a correlation with test results that is 2.5 times better than the ACI equations 18-4 and 18-5. The equation is:
344
RAM Concept
Chapter 48 fps = fse + u Ep cu(dp/c 1)(L1/L2) 0.80fpu where fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength fse = effective prestress in prestressed reinforcement Ep = elastic modulus of prestressed reinforcement cu = failure strain of concrete (typically assumed as 0.003) dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement. c = depth of neutral axis at ultimate strength L = span under consideration L1 = sum of lengths of loaded spans L2 = total length of tendon between anchorages u = K(dp/L) where K = 3 for uniform or third point loadings and 1.5 for midspan loading fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressed tendons It can be shown that: p cu ( d p c 1 ) where p = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending With this substitution (and the one for u) the equation becomes: fps = fse + K(dp/L) Ep p (L1/L2) 0.80fpu L can both realistically and conservatively be assumed to equal L1 as it is unlikely for two spans to simultaneously have large inelastic deformations. This simplifies the equation further to: fps = fse + Ep (Kdp /L2) p 0.80fpu It is obvious that in the above equations that (Kdp /L2) is a strain reduction factor that accounts for the distribution of the localized strain over the length of the tendon. The numerator is a consideration of the length of the yielding (high strain) region, while the denominator is a consideration of the length over which this strain is distributed.
48.1.6 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation

RAM Concept assumes that unbonded post-tensioning stresses are not affected by service loading. For ultimate strength considerations, RAM Concept treats unbonded tendons as partially bonded tendons: fps = F(pse + k p) flimit where fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength F() = post-tensioning material stress strain curve (described above)
RAM Concept
345
Chapter 48 pse = strain in tendon at effective prestress level p = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending k = strain reduction factor, taken as 0.1 flimit = limit stress as defined by the effective code For ACI 318-99, flimit is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p used in the ACI equations, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). For AS 3600-2001, flimit is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp used in the AS equations, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
48.1.7 Tendons External Load or Internal Force?

Tendons need to be considered as an external load for some purposes and as an internal force for other purposes. It is important that the tendon treatment be consistent throughout a calculation. RAM Concept always considers tendons as internal forces in strength calculations. The full force of the tendon is an internal force, while any hyperstatic effects generated by the tendons are considered as external forces. The balance loading should never be included in load combinations used for strength calculations, while the hyperstatic loading should always be included (as an external load) in strength calculations. Concept always considers the initial prestress in tendons as external forces in service calculations. Changes in the tendons stress (from effective stress levels) if any are considered as internal forces. For example if a bonded tendon is stressed with a final effective stress of 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2), but applying the service loadings to the structure results in a stress increase to 185 ksi (1276 N/mm2), then Concept will consider the 10 ksi (69 N/mm2)stress change as an internal force, while the 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2) initial stress is assumed to be considered in the applied loads. For this reason, the balance loading should always be included in load combinations used for service calculations, The hyperstatic loading should never be included in service calculations.
48.1.8 Tendons inclusion of force vector on a cross section

Tendons are excluded from a cross section if they cross the section at an angle of less than 15 degrees (i.e. if they are nearly parallel to the cross section).
48.1.9 Tendons calculation of number of ducts

The calculation of number of tendon ducts for Code bar spacing rules uses the following: an integral number of ducts is calculated from the area of prestressing steel and the specified Aps / duct the number is then modified by the vector component of the tendon This is true regardless of the angle of the tendon to the cross section, so long as the tendon is considered in the cross section (see Section 48.1.8).
48.1.10 Concrete Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a parabolic-plastic stress-strain curve for concrete based on the Portland Cement Associations parabolic stress-strain curve [see PCAs Notes on ACI 318-99 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Figure 6-8]. This curve is used for both strength and service cross section analyses. The curve is totally defined by two parameters: fc = Concrete Cylinder Strength 346 RAM Concept
Chapter 48 Ec = Concrete Elastic Modulus (tangent at zero strain) A third parameter, the strain at which the concrete behavior changes from parabolic to linear, is calculated: 0 = 2 (0.85 fc)/ Ec For c < 0 (tension) fc = 0 For 0 < c < 0 (parabolic range) fc = 0.85 fc [2(c/0) (c/0)2] For c 0 (plastic range)
fc = 0.85 fc
4000 3000 Fc (strain ) 0.85 fc 2000 1000 0
0.001
0.002
0.003 strain
0.004
48.1.11 Creep and Shrinkage Effects

RAM Concept considers creep and shrinkage in any cross section by modifying the concrete stress strain curves to be: = f(( - cs)/kc) where: = stress in concrete kc = concrete creep factor (typically 3.35 = 2.35 + 1.0) = strain in cross section cs = shrinkage strain f()= concrete material short-term stress-strain curve This modified concrete stress-strain curve is only used in the ECR calcs. It is never used for gross-section or cracked-section stress predictions.
RAM Concept
347
Chapter 48
48.1.12 Cracked Section Analyses

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a cross section strain (top strain and bottom strain) that results in the cross section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment and axial force. In the cracked section analyses, Concept considers concrete to have no tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have some tension strength, Concepts assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete has been previously cracked by some other loading condition. Concepts assumption is conservative. This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the cracked cross section stresses and the cracked moment of inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as Bransons formula does not consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the modulus of rupture. When a cross section with no concrete tension strains is analyzed with a cracked section analysis, Concepts analysis methods result in a transformed section analysis. The parameters considered in a Rule Sets cracked section analysis are For ECR (Effective Curvature Ratio) Calcs Only - The creep coefficient as specified in the Calc Options window. This coefficient is the value of (total strain under constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a typical value is 3.35 (1.0 for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain) For ECR Calcs Only - The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options window. The standard instantaneous concrete stress-strain curve as defined above. All mild steel reinforcement (from all rule sets) in each cross section this is the value reported by the Design Status area of steel plots, which will often be somewhat less than the value of the detailed reinforcement (number of bars and lengths). The displacement of concrete by reinforcement is not considered. The tendon stress strain curve for the type of rule set (see Tendons External Load or Internal Force? on page 346). Cracked section analysis is not available for rule sets such as Minimum Design that do not inherently have a tendon stress-strain curve type associated with them.
48.1.13 Bransons Stress Ratio

The most common method for determining an effective moment of inertia in concrete members is Bransons Formula: Ie = (Mcr/Ma)4 Ig + [1 (Mcr/Ma)4] Icr where Ie = the effective moment of inertia Ig = the gross concrete moment of inertia Icr = the cracked concrete moment of inertia Mcr = the gross cross section cracking moment Ma = the applied moment As Bransons formula does not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have modified it to consider axial forces: Ie = (fcr/fa)4 Ig + [1 (fcr/fa)4] Icr where fcr = the concrete flexural tensile strength fa = the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties)
348
RAM Concept
Chapter 48 If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Bransons formula. If there are axial forces, this formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Bransons formula. We call the value (fcr/fa)4 Bransons Stress Ratio. Its value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0. Note that you will more commonly see Bransons formula used with a power of 3 instead of 4. The power of 3 is appropriate when a peak moment in a span is used to determine an effective moment of inertia for the entire span. The power of 4 is appropriate for determining a local effective moment of inertia using local section forces [Branson, Dan E., Instantaneous and Time-Dependent Deflections of Simple and Continuous Reinforced Concrete Beams, Report #7, Part 1, Alabama Highway Research Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August 1963, pp.1-78].
48.1.14 Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio

The Eurocode 2 method for determining a distribution coefficient similar to Bransons stress ratio is given in Eurocode 2 equation 7.19: M cr 2 - SR = ------- Ma where = a coefficient taking account for the duration of loading = 1.0 for a short-term loading (characteristic or frequent service rule set) = 0.5 for sustained loads (quasi-permanent service rule set) Mcr = the gross cross section cracking moment Ma = the applied moment This stress ratio is only the right hand side of equation 7.19 as we use this ratio to modify the uncracked results. In Eurocode 2 this stress ratio is subtracted from unity to be applied to the cracked results. As this formula does not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have modified it to consider axial forces: f cr 2 - SR = ---- fa where fcr = the concrete flexural tensile strength fa = the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties) If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to the eq. 7.19 formulation. If there are axial forces, this formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Bransons formula. This value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0
48.1.15 Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio

RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio at every cross section: ECR = Ce / Cg Where ECR = the effective curvature ratio Ce = the effective cross section curvature (see calc below) RAM Concept 349
Chapter 48 Cg = the gross section curvature
Ce is calculated by the approximate formula: Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 BSR) Cccs) where kc = the concrete material creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic strain BSR = Bransons Stress Ratio or Eurocode 2 Stress Ratio (see Bransons Stress Ratio on page 348 or Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio on page 349) Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage (see Cracked Section Analyses on page 348) Note that if gross-section stresses are kept below the concrete tensile strength, then the effective curvature ratio will be equal to the concrete material creep factor (kc). If post-tensioning is considered as an internal force (not an external load) for the active design rules, then the gross-section calculations are performed with the post-tensioning primary forces added to the calculated cross section forces. It is unusual, but possible, for the ECR value to be less than the concrete material creep factor (kc). These cases occur if the amount of reinforcement is so large that the cracked stiffness (including concrete creep) is greater than the gross stiffness (including concrete creep).
48.1.16 Use of ECR

ECR values are defined for curvatures of cross sections - we need to be able to transform them into a span deflection multiplier for convenient design use. The deflection of a span is proportional to the elastic energy in the span. Considering only bending energy of the gross section: g = k ( M ) ( M EI ) dl Considering the ECR as softener of the gross section stiffness, this equation becomes: ecr = k ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M EI ) dl From these two equations we can create a span deflection multiplier for convenient design use: Deflection Multiplier = ecr / g Deflection Multiplier = Deflection Multiplier = k ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M EI ) dl k ( M ) ( M EI ) dl
( M ) ( ECR ) ( M EI ) dl ( M ) ( M EI ) dl
Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate structures as the bending moments in the structure will become rearranged (stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce ecr.
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR value in the span. Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral. See Using strip based deflection plots for slabs on page 521.
350
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
48.1.17 Crack Width Predictions

Unless the design code in use specifies a calculation for estimating crack widths, RAM Concept estimates crack widths based on a paper by Frosch [Frosch, R. J.,Another Look at Cracking and Crack Control in Reinforced Concrete, ACI Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June 1999, pp. 437-442]. In cracked concrete, with the concrete assumed to carry only small tension stress, the crack width can be calculated as: w c = c s c where: wc = crack width c = cross section strain at crack elevation sc = crack spacing The cross section strain (c) at the crack elevation can be easily calculated in a cracked-section analysis using the plane sections remain plane assumption. The crack spacing (sc) is more difficult to predict. For reinforcement with no bond to the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be: h sc 2 h where: h = height of the tension zone For reinforcement with no-slip with the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be: d * s c 2 d* where: d* = distance from crack to centroid of nearest reinforcement ( c + ( sb 2 ) )
2 2
= where:
for a single layer of reinforcement
c = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement centroid sb = spacing of reinforcement For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has shown that: sc = 2 d * leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept uses this assumption, but limits d* to a maximum value of h (the crack height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded reinforcement. The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width calculation can be written as: w c = 2 c d * (d* h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be optimally placed such that: d* = ( c i + ( s i 2 ) ) for all reinforcement i
2 2
RAM Concept
351
Chapter 48
w = si where: ci = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement i centroid si = length along on concrete tension face allocated to reinforcement i w = width of concrete tension face RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded reinforcement that when considered minimizes the value of d*. When using bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar equivalent. Unbonded and external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at an angle of less than 45 degrees to the cross section are ignored also.
48.1.18 Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations

Many design codes require that cross sections have a minimum moment capacity of at least some factor (often 1.2) times the cracking load of the cross section. The cracking load is derived as follows: fcr = (ML + MB)/S (PL + PB)/A where: fcr = the cracking stress ML = the bending moment due to applied loads at time of cracking MB = the bending moment due to the balance loading (same sign as ML) S = the section modulus for the direction of bending (Z in some communities) PL = the axial compression due to applied loads at time of cracking PB = the axial compression due to the balance loading A = the section area Solving for ML results in: ML = (fcr + (PL + PB)/A)S - MB Assuming that PL is zero: ML = (fcr + PB/A)S - MB Replacing MB with MP + MH and PB with PP + PH: ML = (fcr + (PP + PH)/A)S (MP + MH) where: MP = the primary post-tensioning bending moment MH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning bending moment PP = the primary post-tensioning axial compression PH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning axial compression (typically negative) Multiplying by 1.2 to get 1.2 times the cracking load: 1.2 ML = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 (MP + MH) 352 RAM Concept
Chapter 48 To get the design bending moment, we add in the hyperstatic bending moment: MD = 1.2 ML + MH = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 (MP + MH) + MH Simplifying: MD = 1.2 (fcr +(PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 MP 0.2 MH It is common and usually conservative to assume that PH is zero: MD = 1.2 (fcr +PP/A) S 1.2 MP 0.2 MH It is common (although not technically correct) to ignore the 0.2 MH, giving the final design moment equation: MD = 1.2 (fcr + PP/A) S 1.2 MP
48.1.19 Concrete Core Determination

The core of the cross section is used in various calculations. Refer to About shear core on page 91 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips for explanation of the core calculation. Tendon ducts in this core are investigated. Ducts are assumed to have the same heights as their widths and are assumed to be rectangular in shape. For all standard ducts, these assumptions give a conservative approximation of overlapping. Ducts are assumed to be centered on the prestressing steel that they contain (this is not true in the real structure, but this assumption rarely has any impact on the calculation result). Any horizontal line across the core is investigated to determine the maximum total width of duct across the shear area. Bonded duct widths and unbonded duct widths are multiplied by factors that differ for each code. For example, in BS 8110, 2/3 of bonded duct widths are considered, and full unbonded duct widths are considered. For ACI, the factors are zero, so the duct width is never excluded. The web width is equal to the core width minus the maximum total width of duct across the shear area.
48.1.20 Torsion Considerations

RAM Concept can consider torsion on a cross section in four different ways, depending upon the properties of the design strip segment or the design section. The four approaches are: The methods considered are: Beam Considers torsion by designing with code beam torsion equations. As Shear Assumes torsion is carried entirely by varying shear across the cross-section core length L. The shear force per unit length is v = 6 T / L2 The design shear force is Vd = V +/- 6 T / L As Bending Considers torsion by adding the torsion to the bending moment and designing bending for the combined total Md = M +/- T. Wood-Armer Refer to Wood-Armer Torsion Design on page 354. None Torsion is not considered in any way. RAM Concept 353
Chapter 48
48.1.21 Wood-Armer Torsion Design

This new torsion design option allows the designer to use the Wood-Armer approach to handle twisting moments in slabs. To provide this torsion design options, a new cross section analysis quantity, Absolute Twist, is calculated. You can plot Absolute Twist, as shown in Figure 29-5 of Chapter 29, Plotting Results. When you choose the Wood-Armer torsion design, every set of design forces is converted into two sets of design forces, identical to the original except with the design moments changed to: Md = M + AT, and Md = M - AT where AT = absolute twist The Wood-Armer method (as originally developed by Wood and Armer) was intended to be applied at every point in the slab; Concepts implementation is an extrapolation of the method for use in cross sections. The Wood-Armer method is NOT applicable to beams, and is not recommended for strips containing beams.
References
Wood, R. H., The Reinforcement of Slabs in Accordance with a Pre-Determined Field of Moments, Concrete, vol. 2, pp. 69-76, February 1968. Armer, G. S. T., Discussion, Concrete, vol. 2, pp. 319-320, August 1968.
354
RAM Concept
Chapter 49
49 Live Load Reduction Notes

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
49.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of each column, punching check, design strip segment and design section. For example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live (Reducible) Loading than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
49.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per member), the reductions do not affect the loading analysis. The analysis results that Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live load reduction.
49.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets

When RAM Concept combines loadings into load combinations, it considers the live load reduction of each loading added to the load combination. The analysis results that Concept displays for load combinations are always reduced by live load reduction. Similarly when Concept envelopes load combinations into Rule Sets, it considers live load reduction as all of the load combinations being enveloped have already been modified by the reduction factors. The analysis results that Concept displays for rule sets are always reduced by live load reduction.
Note: Remember that Concept only reduces live load on columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
Note: See Viewing live load reduction results on page 131 for more information.
49.2 Tributary Area Calculations

When a loading on a structure is uniform, it is common to assign to each structural member a tributary area that the member (alone) supports. This assignment is typically performed by a simplistic visual analysis. The assigned area is not truly supported by only the member to which it is assigned. The effects of the (true) uniform loading on the member are similar to the effects if the entire load of the tributary area was applied to the member. Most design codes use the tributary area as the primary parameter in the live load reduction calculations. RAM Concept calculates tributary areas by applying a unit uniform load to the entire slab and analyzing the flow of the vertical forces. The tributary areas for the following members are calculated from the unit load as follows: Columns - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero. Walls - (not currently reduced). Punching Checks - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero. Design Strip Segments - the absolute value of the difference between the vertical shears at both ends. When multiple segments make up a span, the segments combined tributary areas are used in calculations. Design Sections - the absolute value of the shear. With the above calculations, it is possible (but not common) for the sum of the tributary areas of walls and columns to exceed the total floor area. This happens when one or more of the support reactions are negative. RAM Concept 355
Chapter 49
49.3 Influence Area Calculations

ASCE-7 and IBC 2003 use an influence area instead of a tributary area in their live load reduction calculations. The influence area is defined as the floor area over which the influence surface for structural effects is significantly different from zero. Influence areas are not calculated when BS 6399 or AS/NZ 1170.1 are used. RAM Concept uses heuristic methods to calculate influence areas. These methods tend to define areas that are similar to those of that engineers would produce visually, but the methods do not calculate areas that are exactly the same as an engineer might calculate manually. Concept's influence areas can be shown on the plans so you can inspect the areas that Concept is using in its live load reduction calculations. Per ASCE-7 and IBC 2003, Concept limits the influence areas to be no larger than the following multiple of the tributary area: Tributary Area Columns Punching Checks Beam Design Strips Slab Design Strips Multiple 4 4 2 1
Figure 49-1 Maximum multiple of influence area to tributary
49.3.1 Example of Influence Areas

Figure 49-2 through Figure 49-6 shows RAM Concept's influence areas and the influence areas commonly used by engineers for a few slab conditions. Some engineers might (erroneously) suggest that the tributary area of the column in Figure 49-2 is 600 square feet, but continuity effects would obviously increase that value. The results show that the tributary area is actually 952 square feet.
Figure 49-2 Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An engineer would typically deem the influence area to be 2400 square feet.
356
RAM Concept
Chapter 49
Figure 49-3 Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 49-4 Design strip segments
RAM Concept
357
Chapter 49
Figure 49-5 Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 49-6 Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
49.4 ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction

ASCE-7 live load reduction is specified in code section 4.8. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less than 400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction. ASCE-7 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 4.8.2 and 4.8.3. These two load types must be drawn on a Live (storage) loading to be considered appropriately. ASCE-7 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section 4.8.4. These loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.8.5. However, if you limit the design strip width to 1.5 times the span length, and the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code section will be met.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
358 RAM Concept
Chapter 49
49.5 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction

IBC 2003 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.9. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less than 400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction. IBC 2003 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 1607.9.1.1 and 1607.9.1.2. These two load types must be drawn on a Live (storage) loading to be considered appropriately. IBC 2003 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section 1607.9.1.3. These loads must be drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately. The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section 1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never reduce oneway slab loads if IBC 2003 is selected.
Note: IBC 2003 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
49.6 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction

UBC 1997 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.5. Live load effects on members with tributary areas of 150 square feet or less are not modified by live load reduction. Equation (7-2) [R = 23.1 (1 + D/L)] is not considered in live load reduction calculations. This value needs to be calculated and set by the user in the maximum reduction property. UBC 1997 requires that storage loads in excess of 100 psf shall not be reduced, except that live loads on columns may be reduced up to 20%. These loads must be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading to be considered appropriately. UBC 1997 requires that other live loads in excess of 100 psf or in places of public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced. These loads must be drawn on a Live (Unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately. UBC 1997 can be used as IBC 2003 alternate live load reduction in accordance with IBC section 1607.9.2. Because minimum parking loads in UBC 1997 are higher than IBC 2003 minimum parking loads, it may not be appropriate to apply UBC 1997 parking garage reduction provisions to IBC 2003 loadings. For this reason, parking garage loads should be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading and thus will get a maximum 20% reduction on columns and no live load reduction on other members.
49.7 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction

AS/NZS 1170.1 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.4.2. When using AS/NZS 1170.1 to perform live load reduction, only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced. Live (Storage) loadings are assumed to have loads greater than 5 kPa and are therefore not reducible per 3.4.2(ii). Loading effects on one-way slabs are not reduced per 3.4.2(v). For other member types, the reduction is calculated per the formula in 3.4.2(b).
Note: Section 3.4.2 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
RAM Concept
359
Chapter 49
49.8 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction

BS 6399 live load reduction is specified in code sections 6.1 through 6.3. Only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced. For columns, the Table 2 and Table 3 values from the code are calculated and the greater of the two reductions is used. For other members, the Table 3 values are used. For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values; this is different from what is specified in the note in Section 6.2 of BS 6399. This does not affect any design in RAM Concept (or the RAM Structural System), but it does affect the reported column reaction values. Live load reduction is not used for one-way and two-ways slabs.
49.9 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction

IS 875 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.2. For columns, only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced. For beams, both Live (Reducible) and Live (Storage) loadings are reduced. For columns, the table in section 3.2.1 is implemented. The 5 kN/m2 provisions in section 3.2.1.1 are not implemented. For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values. For beams, the reductions in section 3.2.2 are implemented. The limitations of subsections a through d are not implemented as all loads on a Live (Reducible) or Live (Storage) loading layer are assumed to be reducible. Live load reduction is not used for one-way slabs, two-way slabs and punching checks.
49.10 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction

Eurocode 1 live load reduction is specified in code clause 6.3.1.2(10-11) and UK NA 2.5-2.6. Only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced. For columns, equation NA.1 and NA.2 values from the UK National Annex are calculated and the greater of the two reductions is used. For other members, equation NA.1 values are used.
Note: Eurocode 1 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
49.11 Mat Foundations

In the design of mat foundations supporting columns (and/or walls) supporting levels above, the live load reductions need to be applied to the loads instead of the member forces. The loads need to be reduced instead of the member forces for two reasons: 1) there is a clear understanding of the tributary area for the loads while (in most cases) there is not a clear understanding of the tributary area for the design strips; and 2) the zero-tension soil reaction iterations need to be performed with the reduced loads. For mat foundations, the live load reduction code should always be set to None. Otherwise the live loads may be reduced twice.
360
RAM Concept
Chapter 49 Mat foundation loads that are imported from the RAM Structural System will be automatically reduced appropriately (by the RAM Structural System). User-drawn loads will need to be reduced manually.
49.12 Special Member Considerations

49.12.1 Columns Above the Slab
Columns above the slab will have zero tributary area and zero influence area assigned to them in the automated area calculations. If you want to have live load reduction applied to columns above the slab you will need to manually specify the areas to use.
49.12.2 Columns Above and Below the Slab

When the reactions for columns above and below the slab are reported together, the live load reduction for the column below the slab is used. Because of this, the separate reported reactions for the column below and the column above will not necessarily sum to the reported reaction for the column above and below.
RAM Concept
361
Chapter 49
362
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50 Reinforcement Notes
This chapter provides information on how RAM Concept utilizes span detailing, calculates reinforcement development lengths and lays out and details reinforcement. contraflexure, assumed to be 20% of a continuous span's length (hence the factor of 5 applied to Lc). Span Detailing is controlled via the span segment dialog. See Section 21.5 of Chapter 21, Defining Design Strips.
50.1 Span detailing

Span Detailing is the process of determining the peak reinforcement requirements in a region (normally support or mid-span) and then extending the reinforcement based upon code or user defined rules. Code based span detailing are rules prescribed by the applicable building code. The detailed reinforcement for these spans can be non-symmetrical depending upon whether or not the span is continuous. The Code span detailing option uses the applicable code rules for continuous and end spans (as well as cantilevers), where applicable. Concept's Code span detailing generally implements some, but not all, of the specified detailing rules for a code. Refer to the code span detailing sections for further information (Sections 50.1.3, 50.1.4, 50.1.5 and 50.1.6 on page 364). User defined span detailing rules are controlled via the following screen accessed via Criteria > Detailing Rules.
Figure 50-2 Span segment dialog box
50.1.1 About Concepts detailing calculations

Two sets of design results are calculated in Concept - With span detailing and Without span detailing. Without span detailing simply considers the results without extending any reinforcement for span detailing. This is termed the raw reinforcement.
Figure 50-1 Span Detailing Parameters (Criteria > Detailing Rules)
With Span Detailing considers the results considering the detailed reinforcement as a minimum requirement. Some other modifications to the span detailed summary diagram are done. The developed requirements are removed from inside the support regions (there is still the requirement that the reinforcement is developed at the face of the support). Also, for cantilevers, the span detailed requirements are removed from the last cross section to the end of the span. Also, in the summary reinforcement, at the end of each pass an assumed amount of developed reinforcement is calculated from the AsRaw requirements and the length available for development, and applied as a minimum AsDev requirement in each cross section.
A, B, and C represent different sets of reinforcement used to detail rebar in the support region. E, F, and G represent different sets of reinforcement used to detail rebar in the span region. Each set of reinforcement has an associated fraction which is the amount of the peak reinforcement quantity to assign to that set. The sum of the three fractions should always be between 0 and 1. The R1, R2 values represent factors to be multiplied by the span length to arrive at a set's desired bar lengths. Span detailing in accordance with user rules is always symmetrical in a span (but not in a cantilever). The R1 value is applied to the cantilever such that the cantilever is assumed to be that portion of a full span up to the point of
RAM Concept
363
Chapter 50
50.1.2 Span detailing assumptions

The following general assumptions are made when performing span detailing: The peak reinforcement in each region is determined by taking the maximum reinforcement demand in every cross section over the following regions: Support - from support to 0.15L into the span Span - from 0.35L to 0.65L For a cantilever, the entire span is considered to be in the support region, and none of the span is considered to be in the span region For a span with no supports defined, the entire span is considered to be in the span region, and none of the span is considered to be in the support region Bar length calculations either consider the span length to center of support, or the clear span length depending upon the code rules (see specific code sections for more details: sections 50.1.3, 50.1.4, 50.1.5 and 50.1.6). Bar length calculations consider the support width as necessary (see specific code section for more details) At the supports, the lengths of the adjacent span's bar sets are considered in order to keep the detailed bars centered on the supports as much as possible. If an adjacent span has different fractions than the one being detailed, the bar length for this span is determined by selecting the longer of the following length fractions: the span length and length fraction corresponding to this bar set the span length and length fraction of any adjacent span bar set whose fraction overlaps this bar set's fraction The span detailing is performed in pass 0 before the main design steps begin. The following outlines the pass 0 process:
1 Any user defined reinforcement is removed from the
The pass 0 summarized span detailed design requirements are used as the starting point for the pass 2 span detailed design.
50.1.3 ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, and ACI 318-05 Code Span Detailing Rules
RC Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 12.12.3 is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span from the face of support. ACI 12.11.1 is implemented in span regions. RC Two-Way Slabs Figure 13.3.8 (without drop panels) is implemented in support and span regions. PT Beams, One-Way Slabs, and Two-Way Slabs Rule 18.9.4.2 is implemented in support regions. Rule 18.9.4.1 is implemented in span regions.
50.1.4 AS 3600 - 2001 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC and PT Beams Rule 8.1.8.6 (a) and (b) is implemented in support and span regions. RC and PT One-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.2 is implemented in support and span regions. RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.4 is implemented in support and span regions.
50.1.5 BS 8110 - 1997 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Figures 3.24 and 3.25 are implemented in support and span regions. PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 6.10.6 is implemented in support and span regions.
cross sections in the span.

2 A normal pass 1 is designed on the span (with the user defined reinforcement removed). 3 From the resulting design, the peak reinforcement in each region (support and span) is detailed according to the user specified or code span detailing rules. 4 The user defined reinforcement is subtracted from the
50.1.6 IS 456 - 2000 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC and PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 26.2.3.4 is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span from the face of support. Rule 26.2.3.3 is implemented in span regions. RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 16 (without drop panel) is implemented in support and span regions.
step 3 requirements, which results in the final pass 0 span detailed requirements. The resulting pass 0 design can be approximate if the subtracted user defined reinforcement does not have the same properties as the program designed reinforcement at that location. The final designed reinforcement for each cross section, which will be determined in future passes, will always be accurate.
364
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50.1.7 EC2 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Figures 8 and 10 from Chapter 10 of The Concrete Centre publication How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2 are implemented in support and span regions. PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 5.8.8 is implemented in support and span regions.
For any length less than the additional extension length, the effective development is zero. For any length greater than or equal to the desired additional extension length, but less than the full development length, the effective percentage development is (provided length)/(full development length) x 100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed. For any length greater than the full development length, the effective development is 100%.
50.2 Development lengths / anchorage Note: The term development length is used in this chapter. In some countries, the term anchorage is used rather than development length.
This section presents an overview of the development length calculations performed in RAM Concept. Development length calculations in Concept can be treated as per Code Rules, or development lengths can be specified by the user for a particular reinforcing bar as a multiple of the bar diameter. The general implementation used for calculating development lengths is: The clear spacing of the bars will be detailed to be greater than twice the minimum cover. This is the responsibility of the user, and is not checked by Concept. Each Code has a desired extension length beyond the theoretical cutoff point of the reinforcement. The desired extension length for ACI 318, BS 8110, and IS 456 is the maximum of d (effective depth) or 12 times the diameter of the bar. This is required primarily because diagonal tension cracks in a flexural member without transverse shear reinforcement may shift the location of the calculated tensile stress in a bar approximately d (effective depth) towards a point of zero moment. Refer to ACI 318 12.10.3, BS 8110 3.12.9.1, and IS 456 26.2.3.1. For AS 3600, the desired extension length, D, is used to satisfy provision 8.1.8.1 requiring use of a shifted moment diagram for design. While this implementation is not in strict compliance with the Code provisions near the ends of a member, it meets the design intent away from the ends. For a user defined bar, the effective development for any point along the bar is calculated in accordance with the following diagram. This approach is not used for AS 3600 - see section 50.2.2 on page page 366 for more details. The end of any user defined bar that is close to a slab edge such that it could not be extended will use a desired extension length of zero.
Figure 50-3 Effective development at any point along a bar. (This does not apply to AS3600 - see Figure 50-4)
When laying out program-designed bars, Concept uses the first option in the following list that fits in the slab: Straight bar end with full development length and full extension length. Straight bar end with full development length and partial (or no) extension length. 90 degree hook bar end with 90 degree hook development length 180 degree hook bar end with 180 degree hook development length Anchored bar end with no development length If the end of a bar is closer to a slab edge than the specified end cover, the bar will automatically be labeled anchored in Concept and considered to be fully developed. Development lengths of bars in compression are not considered. Tension development lengths are used in all locations where development of reinforcement is required, regardless of the actual stresses on the reinforcing bar.
50.2.1 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05 development lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 12-1. The following factors are used in this equation:
RAM Concept
365
Chapter 50 = reinforcement location factor concrete below is taken as the depth from the rebar center to the bottom of the concrete section 1.3 for concrete below > 12 inches 1.0 for concrete below < 12 inches = coating factor 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated) 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars 1.0 for uncoated bars distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete surface.
50.2.2 AS 3600 2001 Development Lengths

For a user defined bar, the effective development for any point along the bar is calculated in accordance with Figure 50-4. The end of any user defined bar that is close to a slab edge such that it could not be extended will use a desired extension length of zero. For other situations, the desired extension length is D, the overall depth of the member For any length less than the desired extension length D, the effective development is zero. For any length greater than or equal to the additional extension length, but less than the full development length, the effective percentage development is (provided length - desired extension length) / (full development length) x 100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed. For a program designed bar, when the bar is detailed the bar will be extended the full development length plus the desired extension length. If a bar is unable to be extended this full desired length, Concept will attempt to extend the bar just the straight development length, then the 90 degree hook development length, and the 180 degree hook development length. If there is not enough extension space to satisfy any of these conditions, an anchor will be placed at the end of the bar and it will be considered fully developed from that point.
Note: the product is never taken as greater than 1.7.

= reinforcement size factor 0.8 for #6 and smaller bars 1.0 for #7 and larger bars = lightweight aggregate concrete factor 1.3 for concrete density < 120 pcf 1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf c = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center of the bar to the nearest concrete surface (spacing is not considered) The term (c + Ktr)/db is never taken greater than 2.5 Ktr = conservatively assumed to be zero For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated in accordance with the following equation: 1200d b ----------------fc The following factors are used to modify this basic length: Bar yield strength factor = fy / 60 where fy is in ksi (12.5.3.1) Lightweight aggregate concrete factor:(12.5.3.5) 1.3 for concrete density < 120 pcf 1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf Epoxy-coated reinforcement factor = 1.2(12.5.3.6) The following factors / provisions are not used: Concrete cover (12.5.3.2) and Ties or stirrups (12.5.3.3) In accordance with ACI 318 12.10.3, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical 366
Figure 50-4 Effective development at any point along a bar for the undisplaced moment diagram (for AS3600 ONLY)
Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 13.1.2.1(a). The following factors are used in this equation: k1 = reinforcement location factor concrete below is taken as the depth from the bar center to the bottom of the concrete section 1.25 for concrete below > 300 mm 1.0 for concrete below < 300 mm k2 = 2.4 (conservatively) RAM Concept
Chapter 50 fsy = yield stress of bar Ab = cross sectional area of reinforcing bar 2a + db = twice the vertical distance from the nearest concrete surface to the center of the bar In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are applied: coating factor 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated) 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars 1.0 for uncoated bars lightweight aggregate concrete factor: 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m
3
= 0.5 (assumed Type 2 bars with minimum links in beams)
Note: If any bars other than Type 2 deformed bar are used
or if minimum links in accordance with Table 3.7 are not provided, the development lengths will need to be specified manually. Table 3.27 can assist with this. In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are applied: coating factor 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated) 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars 1.0 for uncoated bars lightweight aggregate concrete factor: 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3 1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3 For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is assumed to be 2db for bar diameters less than or equal to 18mm and 3.5db for bar diameters greater than 18mm. For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 4 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed 12db in accordance with 3.12.8.23 (b) For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 8 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed 24db in accordance with 3.12.8.23 (a) In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete surface.
1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3 For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated as half the straight tension development length in accordance with Clause 13.1.2.4. In accordance with 8.1.8.1, the extension length used for this Code is the overall depth of the section. This extension is applied in addition to the required development length. Concept applies the extension length to satisfy the Code provision requiring the displacement of the bending moment envelopes by a distance D. There are some noteworthy differences between Concept's approach and the Code provision: In most circumstances, extending the bar by a distance D beyond the required development length will satisfy the intent of the Code. Near the ends of members, where the displaced moment diagram would cause an increased design moment, Concept will design for the unmodified moment diagram, but will still ensure proper development is satisfied.
50.2.4 IS 456-2000 Development Lengths 50.2.3 BS 8110-1997 Development Lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using combined equations 48 and 49. fy db The resulting equation is: l d = ----------------------------------- m 4 f cu where: fy = yield stress of the bar db = diameter of the bar m = material strength reduction factor Basic straight tension development length is calculated using clause 26.2.1: fy l d = -------------4 bd where: fy = yield stress of the bar = diameter of the bar bd = design bond stress given in Table 26.2.1.1
RAM Concept
367
Chapter 50 For high strength deformed bars, the bond stress can be increased by 60 percent. This increase is assumed for any bar with fy > 250 N/mm2. In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are applied: coating factor 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated) 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars 1.0 for uncoated bars lightweight aggregate concrete factor: 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3 1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3 For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is assumed to be 2db for bars with yield stress less than or equal to 250 N/mm2 and 4db for bars with yield stress greater than 250 N/mm2. For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 8 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with 26.2.2.1 (1). For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 16 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with 26.2.2.1 (2). In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete surface. l bd = 1 2 3 4 5 l b, rqd l b, min where: 1 = bar shape factor from Table 8.1 2 = concrete factor from Table 8.1 3 = 1.0 (tranverse reinforcement not considered) 4 = 1.0 (transverse reinforcement not considered) 5 = 1.0 (transverse pressure not considered) l b, min max { 0.3l b, rqd, 10 , 100mm } For beams, the minimum cover cd is assumed to be 25 mm. As such, the minimum clear spacing between bars should be detailed as 50 mm. For slabs, the minimum cover cd for straight bars is calculated as the minimum vertical clear cover to the nearest concrete surface. For bent bars the cover cd is calculated as 5 times the bar diameter. The minimum clear spacing between bent bars should thus be detailed as 10 times the bar diameter. Anchorage length for bent bars is determined using Figure 8.1(a) and using the minimum bend diameters from Table 8.1N(a) A concrete density factor calculated in accordance with equation 11.1 is applied to the calculation of fbd in equation 8.2. In addition, the following factor (from ACI 318) are applied: coating factor 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated) 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars 1.0 for uncoated bars
50.2.5 EC2 Development Lengths

Basic anchorage length is calculated using clause 8.4.3: sd l b, rqd = --------------4 f bd where: f yk sd = design yield stress of the bar = -----m = diameter of the bar f bd = ultimate bond stress given by equation 8.2 The design anchorage length is calculated in accordance with 8.4.4:
50.3 How RAM Concept lays out program reinforcement Note: This section describes Concept's layout of longitudinal program reinforcement. Neither transverse reinforcement nor SSR are considered here.
368
RAM Concept
Chapter 50 Concept considers all of the spans' and all of the design sections' designs when laying out program reinforcement. Concept's layout algorithm uses 5 steps as follows: Step 1 Divide reinforcement requirements into groups. Concept divides all the span and section reinforcement requirements into similar groups by considering the following characteristics: Span Direction - latitude or longitude Slab Face - top or bottom Reinforcement Elevation - the absolute elevation of the reinforcement Reinforcement Orientation - the plan view orientation of the reinforcement (always perpendicular to the cross sections) Requirements with all similar characteristics are grouped together for further processing. Step 2 Find regions of overlapping and nearby requirement For each requirement group, Concept then finds requirements in a region that may be able to be satisfied by the same reinforcement callout. Step 3 Create preliminary callouts for each region For each region's requirements, Concept creates an optimal set of reinforcement callouts considering the cost factors specified in the Calc Options dialog. These preliminary callouts do not consider development lengths. Step 4 Consider development lengths For each preliminary callout, Concept investigates all of the related cross sections and determines (considering the area of developed reinforcement and the total area of reinforcement required at each cross section) the necessary extension of the bar beyond the related cross sections. If the required bar extension cannot be provided (due to a slab edge or bar end cover requirements), reduced extensions using 90-degree or 180-degree hooks are investigated. If the hooks will not provide the adequate development, anchors will be placed at the end of the bar.
50.4 How Concept details user and program reinforcement

Concept generates individual bars from concentrated and distributed user reinforcement. This facilitates the consideration of the individual bars in its cross section and span design calculations. Also, the generation of individual bars allows Concept to display program or user reinforcement in perspective drawings. The bars are still tagged as user since they are generated directly from user reinforcement. Concept also generates individual bars from its concentrated design reinforcement. These program individual bars are for display purposes only and are not used in calculations. The concentrated and distributed reinforcement is detailed into individual bars in 5 steps as follows: Step 1 Create a preliminary layout of bars Using the shape of the reinforcement region (rectangle or parallelogram for concentrated, and polygon for distributed), the reinforcement orientation and the spacing/quantity of bars, Concept determines a preliminary layout of parallel bar locations. For Concentrated bars, the first and last bars from the edge are always inset by a half bar spacing distance. Step 2 Determine the elevation of the bars Each concentrated or distributed reinforcement callout has an elevation reference point. For Concentrated reinforcement, the elevation reference point is the location where the (symbolic) bar and the extent arrow intersect. For distributed reinforcement, the elevation reference point is shown as a circle in the center of the (symbolic) bar. The elevation of the surface and soffit of the slab are determined at the elevation reference point and this information along with the reinforcement elevation reference (absolute, above surface, above soffit, top cover or bottom cover) and elevation values determines the absolute elevation of the bars that the callout creates. See Figures 50-5 and 50-6. Step 3 Determine the slab shape at the bar elevation For each bar elevation, Concept determines the shape of the slab. This shape may be one contiguous shape or it may be comprised of multiple separate shapes. Step 4 Trim the preliminary layout of bars with the elevation slab shape
Note: Any bar that is required to extend to within the end cover distance of a slab edge will be given an anchor end condition.
Step 5 Convert to concentrated program reinforcement As a final step, Concept converts the bar callouts (including development lengths and bar end conditions) into concentrated program reinforcement. See also Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters on page 127 of Chapter 27, Calculating Results. RAM Concept
369
Chapter 50 The preliminary layout of bars is trimmed by the slab shape determined in step 3. Additionally, the required end cover (as defined in the Calc Options window) may shorten a bar further. This trimming may convert a single bar into multiple bars, or may eliminate a bar altogether. Note that bars with anchor ends do not consider the required end cover. They are only trimmed by the slab shape at the bar elevation. Step 5 Convert the trimmed bar locations to individual bars Lastly, Concept converts the trimmed preliminary layout of bars into individual bars. This conversion sets the individual bars generated from user reinforcement to be user bars and those generated by program reinforcement to be program bars.
Note: The detailing of user reinforcement takes place before the design calculations and the detailing of program reinforcement takes place after the design calculations.
Figure 50-5 Stepped one-way slab with two reinforcement objects identical except for the respective location of the elevation reference point.
Figure 50-6 Reinforcement bars detailed by Concept from Figure 50-5
50.5 How Concept treats transverse reinforcement and individual transverse bars
Concept generates transverse reinforcement and individual transverse bars from the results of its shear and torsion calculations. This generated reinforcement is for display purposes only - it is not used in calculations and cannot be changed to user reinforcement. 370 RAM Concept
Chapter 50 At locations of complicated geometry (such as multiple beams in a single span design, or curved beams), Concept may not be able to create an appropriate representation of the reinforcement required by the design calculations. The correct design quantities can always be viewed in the Section Design plots of the Design Status layer. Note that with code detailing: the top bars are longer some bottom bars are continuous
Note: The no detailing example is very similar to results obtained with version 2.1.
Note: Reinforcement required for torsion should always have 2 legs selected in the design spans. Otherwise Concept's design will show a correct overall quantity of reinforcement, but will not show a correct selection of closed and open ties. Note: Transverse reinforcement required by design sections is NOT shown on the Reinforcement layer. This is another reason why design spans are preferable to design sections.
Reinforcement layer
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on the reinforcement on the reinforcement layer.
50.6 Example 1: reinforcement results

The introduction of the reinforcement layer and reinforcement detailing makes Concept much more powerful and complicated. The following example shows the effect, for a two span slab supported by walls, of: using the span detailer set to code in design strips, and different plot options using Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters in Calc options two different rule sets: strength and code minimum
Figure 50-8 Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that: these program bars are rationalized such that the number of top bars is consistent either side of a support these program bars could be changed to User bars individual bars can be shown via the visible objects Concept details the top bars at the right hand support with a 90 degree bend
50.6.1 Strength (only) calculations

This section shows results where only the strength rule set is considered.
Design Status layer Effect of Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on the reinforcement for the design status layer.
The Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters affect the reinforcement bar layout, Figure 50-9 exhibits different reinforcement results from Figure 50-8 when changes are made to one parameter (in this case, the Bar Length Cost parameter is 3 rather than 1). See Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters on page 127 of Chapter 27, Calculating Results.
Figure 50-7 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan
RAM Concept
371
Chapter 50 Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span detailing:
This plot is exactly the same as Bottom without span detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because this example uses just the Strength Rule Set and all such reinforcement must be developed.
Figure 50-9 Reinforcement: Standard Plan with the Bar Length Cost parameter set to 3.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code has no effect.
Figure 50-12 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH Span Detailing
50.6.2 Code Minimum and Strength calculations

This section shows results where both the Code Minimum and Strength rule sets are considered.
Reinforcement layer Figure 50-10 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [without span detailing]
Note: See Section 29.6 of Chapter 29, Plotting Results

for more information about reinforcement plotting.
The following figure shows the reinforcement for minimum and strength.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses skyline plotting.
Figure 50-13 Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that the minimum designer has increased the bottom bars in the left hand span for the no detailing case. See Figure 50-8.
Figure 50-11 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [with span detailing]
372
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing: Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code has no effect.
This plot is different from Bottom without span detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum reinforcement is not required to be developed.
Figure 50-14 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITHOUT span detailing] Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing: Figure 50-16 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITHOUT span detailing Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses skyline plotting.
This plot is different from Bottom with span detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum reinforcement at the end supports is not developed, and so the plotted value is zero. Additionally, portions of the raw reinforcement are now assumed to be developed because the span detailing process for the design status layer considers that continuous bars, whether they are required to be developed or not, become at least partially developed.
Figure 50-15 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITH span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code produces more reinforcement.
Figure 50-17 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH span detailing
RAM Concept
373
Chapter 50
374
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51 ACI 318-99 Design

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-99. The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules
51.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new ACI 318-99 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed here.
51.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading

This loading type describes a temporary loading that is present during construction when the contractor stresses the tendons. As it is a temporary load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load Combination. If a permanent load is present at stressing, you should define the load on the Temporary Construction (At Stressing) loading layer as well as the appropriate permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a permanent loading present at stressing with appropriate use of load factors.
51.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new ACI 318-99 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 31899, unless noted otherwise. RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations.
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further description.
51.2.1 All Dead LC

This load combination sums all of the dead loadings, with a load factor of 1.0, that act simultaneously in the standard service condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for design purposes.
RAM Concept
375
Chapter 51
51.2.2 Initial Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes a 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum. Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
51.2.3 Service LC: D + L

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
51.2.4 Sustained Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. For the purpose of this load combination, 100% of the Live (Storage) Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent loading. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
51.2.5 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC section 1918.9.2.2. This load combination is used by the DL + 0.25LL Design Rule Set. The load factors used are: Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 0.25 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
51.2.6 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 0.9 (alt) Live Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt) 376 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51.2.7 LT Uncracked Deflection LC

This load combination is intended for investigation of long term deflections with no consideration of cracking. The load factors are: Balance Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) [1.0 initial + 2.35 creep] Dead Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)] Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)] Live (Storage) Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
51.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
51.2.9 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
51.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + L + 0.7E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
51.2.11 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept
377
Chapter 51 Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
51.2.12 Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.6W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live Loading: 1.28 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.6 (std & alt)
Note: Since directionality factors were introduced in ASCE 7-98, the wind portion of the Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L
+ 1.6W and Factored Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.6W load combinations have been increased to 1.6 to account for this effect. The need for this change is described in detail in ACI-02 9.2.1(b) and commentary. If directionality factors are not applied to the wind loads, the wind factors may be reduced in accordance with the original ACI 318-99 combinations.
51.2.13 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L + E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.2.1. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
51.3 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors

It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw: parking garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer assembly loads (or live loads in excess of 100 psf) on a Live (Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw parking loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of 1.0 in the Sustained Service LC, and a (conservative) load factor of 3.35 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
51.4 ACI 318-99 material behaviors

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using ACI 318-99.
378
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51.4.1 Concrete Behavior

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 8.5.1 with or without the inclusion of Wc, an equation from another code, or a specified value. When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values: Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses Ec = value for all other conditions When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (w/ Wc) is selected the following values are used: E ci = w c Ec = wc
1.5
33 f ci 33 f c
1.5
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used: E ci = 57000 f ci E c = 57000 f c Where fci = cylinder strength at stressing fc = 28 day cylinder strength For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 346 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
51.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves on page 343 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes.
51.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 343, and Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 344, of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes.
51.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains. For DL + 0.25LL strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
RAM Concept
379
Chapter 51 For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concepts general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. For ACI 318-99, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
51.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which ACI 318-99 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
51.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement

The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, twoway slab). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment or design section: Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan. Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan. Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised) Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised) None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised) Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement requirement (see Service on page 381). Section 18.8.3 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically requires it. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table Design System
Beam One-Way Slab Two-Way Slab
RC
10.5.1 7.12 7.12
PT
18.8.3, 18.9.2 18.8.3, 18.9.2 18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
Table 51-1 Minimum reinforcement rule mapping
51.5.2 Initial Service

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces).
380
RAM Concept
Chapter 51 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table Design System
RC
(none) (none) (none)
PT
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Table 51-2 Initial service rule mapping
51.5.3 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.6.4 10.6.4 (none)
PT
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c, 18.9.3.2
Table 51-3 Service rule mapping
51.5.4 Sustained Service

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
PT
18.4.2a 18.4.2a 18.4.2a
Table 51-4 Sustained service rule mapping
51.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for how torsion is implemented.
RAM Concept
381
Chapter 51 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
PT
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Table 51-5 Strength rule mapping
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
51.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility reinforcement is added. The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be required for both positive and negative moments). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.3.3 10.3.3 10.3.3
PT
18.8.1 18.8.1 18.8.1
Table 51-6 Ductility rule mapping
51.5.7 UBC DL + 0.25 LL

UBC section 1918.9.2.2 is implemented. The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). Unbonded tendons are assumed to have no stress. A strength reduction factor () of 1.0 is used in the ACI calculations. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
PT
11.4, 18.7 (=1) 11.4, 18.7 (=1) (none)
Table 51-7 UBC DL + 0.25LL rule mapping
382
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation

51.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented The gross area of concrete after taking into account the ignore top depth and the ignore bottom depth is used to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1. For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. In the calculation of 7.12.2.1(c) only reinforcement with fy = 60,000 psi will be used in the calculation. Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1 The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations. For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is assumed. Post-tensioning is ignored.
51.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)

Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. Strain compatibility design is used RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility on page 382 for more information on applying ductility requirements. Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. User Es values are used For sections with multiple values of fc, the fc of each concrete block is used appropriately. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
51.6.3 Section 10.3.3 Ductility (Non prestressed)

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 383 for details). The neutral axis depth is limited to: (0.75) * (0.003 /(0.003 + y)) * d
RAM Concept
383
Chapter 51 where y = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid (excluding PT) Due to very large bar covers or other unusual conditions, the compression bar will be considered when determining d if the compression bar is in tension. For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see Unified Design Recommendations for Reinforced.... by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, April-March 1992
51.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed)

Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc, minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face). bw is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on page 353). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then bw is taken as the width of the section. The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances such as where the specified cover is extremely large. Post-tensioning is ignored.

Equation 10-5 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement. Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used. The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths. The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar. Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations). RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two circumstances: The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis. Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.
51.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non Prestressed)

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. For sections with multiple values of fc, the minimum fc is used Equations 11-5, 11-13, 11-15 are implemented. Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not). Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented. Lightweight concrete is not considered. A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a. Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 385 for further requirements.
384
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed)

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. For sections with multiple values of fc, the minimum fc is used If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth; otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth. Lightweight concrete is not considered. Equation 11-9 is used if the 40% criterion of section 11.4.1 is met; otherwise equation 11-5 is used. When equation 11-5 is used, both the tension mild steel and the PT in the tension zone is used to determine w. Equations 11-13 and 11-15 are implemented. Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not). Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented. A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a. Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 385 for further requirements. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib: rib width = total core width / num ribs with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs). To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib. The side cover is assumed to be equal to the lesser of the top cover and the bottom cover. Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core. Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6. in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45. The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp. The minimum fc of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete mixes. Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4. Longitudinal Reinforcement: By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows: A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows: A 1 f y1 = 5 f c A cp ( 25psi ) p h b w Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1. Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs: Transverse Reinforcement: RAM Concept 385
Chapter 51 Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2. Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2. Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this can make shear capacity negative. The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1. The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6 Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2 Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
51.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems)

With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
Section 13.5.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)
This section is not considered.
51.6.10 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit

0.6 fci is the limiting value. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.11 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

3 f ci is the limiting value. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no section will fail this criterion. Bonded tendons that are at an angle (vertical or horizontal) to the cross section will only have their component perpendicular to the cross section considered. Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
51.6.12 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit

0.45 fc is the limiting value. Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned. 386 RAM Concept
Chapter 51
51.6.13 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit

0.60 fc is the limiting value. Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.14 Section 18.4.2c Service Tensile Stress Limit

6 f c is the limiting value. Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.15 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed)

See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 383. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate. Post-tensioning Tendons are included. Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded Posttensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 344). If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used. Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Posttensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345). If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be possible.
51.6.16 Section 18.8.1 Ductility (Prestressed)

The strain distribution used in section 18.7 calculations is used (see Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed) on page 387 for details). The neutral axis depth is limited to: (0.36/0.85) * d where d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid To be rational (instead of literally following the code), d is taken as the depth of the total tension reinforcement, not just the depth of the PT For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see Unified Design Recommendations for Reinforced.... by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, April-March 1992
RAM Concept
387
Chapter 51
51.6.17 Section 18.8.3 Cracking Moment

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack; This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it. The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment. Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum fc for the cross section is used. Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used. The twice that required criterion is not checked.
51.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied. See Minimum Reinforcement on page 380 for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2000 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any two-way slabs. User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum Reinforcement

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is inside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location closer than L/6 from a support. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is never applied. See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM Concept uses it for all slabs declared as two-way; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.) Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
388
RAM Concept
Chapter 51 For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and reported. If 2 f c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement. User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy-fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi. Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi. The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not considered. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum Reinforcement

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied at the face of support. For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location further than L/6 from a support. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is never applied. See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM Concept uses it for all slabs declared as two-way; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.) Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not always exactly match the code requirement The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked. The number of bars (4 bars or wires) is not checked. User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
51.6.21 Punching Shear Design

Refer to Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes.
RAM Concept
389
Chapter 51
390
RAM Concept
Chapter 52

This appendix details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-02. The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules



This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new ACI 318-02 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-02 / IBC 2003, unless noted otherwise. The load and strength reduction factors changed significantly in the ACI 318-02 code. In general, the load factors were reduced and are now in agreement with the strength design of other materials. The strength reduction factors were generally reduced in order to provide similar design results as the previous code (ACI 318-99). RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on L in ACI 318-02 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) Loading and 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading.
RAM Concept
391
Chapter 52
52.2.1 All Dead LC


This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)

52.2.5 Factored LC: 1.4D

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 0.9 (alt)
52.2.6 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are:
392
RAM Concept
Chapter 52 Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) and 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
52.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) and 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)


This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: RAM Concept 393
Chapter 52 Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
52.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + L + 0.7E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
52.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.6 (std & alt)
52.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.6 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 0.8 (std & alt)
394
RAM Concept
Chapter 52
52.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)



1.5
33 f ci 33 f c
1.5
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used: E ci = 57000 f ci
RAM Concept
395
Chapter 52 E c = 57000 f c Where fci = cylinder strength at stressing fc = 28 day cylinder strength For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 346 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
52.4.2 Nonprestressed Reinforcement Behavior



For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains. For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concepts general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. For ACI 318-02, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p, RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).

52.5.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement

The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, twoway slab). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment or design section: Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan. Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan. 396 RAM Concept
Chapter 52 Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised) Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised) None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised) Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement requirement (see Service on page 398). Section 18.8.2 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically requires it. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.5.1 7.12 7.12
PT
18.8.2, 18.9.2 18.8.2, 18.9.2 18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
52.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement

RAM Concept allows you to specify minimum reinforcement ratios for each span segment.
About User-Specified Minimum Reinforcement Ratios
Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values: Column Strip Top Reinforcement Column Strip Bottom Reinforcement Middle Strip Top Reinforcement Middle Strip Bottom Reinforcement Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example: columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further information.
RAM Concept
397
Chapter 52

RC
PT
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
52.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned members as follows: Protected: Class C Normal: Class T Corrosive: Class U Very Corrosive: Class U Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System RC
Beam One-Way Slab Two-Way Slab 10.6.4 10.6.4 (none)
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b, (not applicable) (not applicable) 18.9.3.2

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces).
398
RAM Concept
RC
PT
18.4.2a 18.4.2a 18.4.2a
52.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for how torsion is implemented. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
PT
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
52.5.7 Ductility
RC
10.3.5 10.3.5 10.3.5
PT
RAM Concept
399
Chapter 52

7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented. The gross area of concrete after taking into account the ignore top depth and the ignore bottom depth is used to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1. For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. In the calculation of 7.12.2.1(c) only reinforcement with fy = 60,000 psi will be used in the calculation. Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1 The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations. In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location. In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized. For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is assumed. Post-tensioning is ignored. Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.

There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-02 Code. Axial/flexural members are classified as compression controlled or tension controlled in accordance with 10.3.3 and 10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions (when the concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as to provide ample ductility, the section is defined as tension controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When the tensile strain is at or below the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as compression controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is used. Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is used. RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force (rather than the depth of the extreme tension steel) to calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the results will be identical to using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For sections with multiple layers of reinforcement (including post-tensioning), this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be conservative. In determining the compression-controlled strain limit, Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and fy / Es. The tension-controlled strain limit is 0.005. Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. Strain compatibility design is used. Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-reinforced section. See Ductility on page 399 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
400
RAM Concept
Chapter 52 Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. User Es values are used For sections with multiple values of f c, the f c of each concrete block is used appropriately. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 400 for details). The ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force is limited such that the section strain at the location of the resultant tensile force is a minimum of 0.004. Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10fcAg, in accordance with section 10.3.5.

Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented. Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc', minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face). bw is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on page 353). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then bw is taken as the width of the section. The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances such as where the specified cover is extremely large. Post-tensioning is ignored. A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the amount of reinforcement. The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.

Equation 10-4 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement. Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used.
RAM Concept
401
Chapter 52 The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths. The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar. Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations). RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two circumstances: The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis. Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. For sections with multiple values of f c, the minimum f c is used. Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50bws/fy), 11-15 are implemented. Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not). Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented. Lightweight concrete is not considered. A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a. Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3. If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 403 for further requirements.

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. For sections with multiple values of f c , the minimum f c is used If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth; otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth. Lightweight concrete is not considered. Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity. Equations 11-13 (including 50bws/fy) and 11-15 are implemented. Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not). Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented. A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a. Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 403 for further requirements. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
402
RAM Concept
Chapter 52

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib: rib width = total core width / num ribs with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs). To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib. The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover. Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core. Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6. in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45. The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp. For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c). The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete mixes. Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4. Longitudinal Reinforcement: By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows: A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows: At - p f yv A 1 f y1 = 5 f c A cp ---- s h Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1. Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs. Transverse Reinforcement: Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2. Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2. Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this can make shear capacity negative. The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1. The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6 Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2 Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
RAM Concept
403
Chapter 52

52.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit

A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design strip segment or design section property Environment. The limiting tensile stress values are outlined in the following table. Class U
Assumed behavior Uncracked Section properties for stress calculation Gross section
Class T
Transition between uncracked and cracked Gross section
Class C
Cracked Cracked section No limit
Tensile stress limit ft 7.5 fc Deflection calcula- Gross section tion Crack control Computation of fs for crack control
Table 52-7
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
Consider effects of crack- Consider ing effects of cracking No requirement Not applicable 10.6.4 / 18.4.4 Cracked section analysis
No requirement Not applicable
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

0.6 f ci is the limiting value. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

3 f ci is the limiting value. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. 404 RAM Concept
Chapter 52 The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no section will fail this criterion. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

0.45 f c is the limiting value. Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

52.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members

The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of 18.4.4. See Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) on page 402. The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing: The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded tendons in the tension zone and all bar positions. For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated: 432 540 - 2.5cci -------------w i = min -------------, maxf maxf s s 2 - numberofducts -3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width. A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step. Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit. If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met. If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width and is ignored. In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
RAM Concept
405
Chapter 52

See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 400. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate. Post-tensioning Tendons are included. Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded Posttensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 344). If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used. Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345). If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be possible.

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack; This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it. The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment. Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross section is used. Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used. The twice that required criterion is not checked.

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied. See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to twoway slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any twoway slabs.
406
RAM Concept
Chapter 52 User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied when the span ratio is in the middle one-third of the span. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied. Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and reported. If 2 f c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement. User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi. Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi. The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not considered. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than L/6. See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not always exactly match the code requirement User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section. The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked. The number of bars (4 bars or wires) is not checked. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

RAM Concept
407
Chapter 52
408
RAM Concept
Chapter 53

This appendix details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-05. The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules



This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new ACI 318-05 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-05 / IBC 2006, unless noted otherwise. Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on L in ACI 31805 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) Loading and 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading.
53.2.1 All Dead LC

RAM Concept
409
Chapter 53

This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)

Note: This combination is used to cover IBC 2006 eq. 16-8 through 16-11. This combination is conservative for eq. 16-11,
and normally controls for structural elements supporting more than one level.

53.2.5 Factored LC: 1.4D

53.2.6 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

410
RAM Concept
Chapter 53 Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
53.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) and 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) and 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)

53.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
53.2.10 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 0.75 (std & alt) RAM Concept 411
Chapter 53 Service Wind Loading: 0.75 (std & alt)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
53.2.12 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.7E

53.2.13 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.525E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 0.75 (std & alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.525 (std & alt)

53.2.15 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) 412 RAM Concept
Chapter 53 Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.6 (std & alt)
53.2.16 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.6 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 0.8 (std & alt)
53.2.17 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)


RAM Concept
413
Chapter 53

1.5
33 f ci 33 f c
1.5
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used: E ci = 57000 f ci E c = 57000 f c Where fci = cylinder strength at stressing fc = 28 day cylinder strength For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 346 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
53.4.2 Nonprestressed Reinforcement Behavior



For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains. For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concepts general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes.
414
RAM Concept
Chapter 53 For ACI 318-05, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p, RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).


The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, twoway slab). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment or design section: Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan. Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan. Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised) Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised) None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised) Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement requirement (see Service on page 417). Section 18.8.2 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically requires it. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.5.1 7.12 7.12
PT
18.8.2, 18.9.2 18.8.2, 18.9.2 18.9.3.3 (at supports only)

Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values: Column Strip Top Reinforcement Column Strip Bottom Reinforcement Middle Strip Top Reinforcement Middle Strip Bottom Reinforcement
RAM Concept
415
Chapter 53 Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
Requirements
Old Files

RC
PT
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
53.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned members as follows: Protected: Class C Normal: Class T Corrosive: Class U Very Corrosive: Class U
416
RAM Concept
Chapter 53 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System RC
Beam One-Way Slab Two-Way Slab 10.6.4 10.6.4 (none)
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b, (not applicable) (not applicable) 18.9.3.2

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
PT
18.4.2a 18.4.2a 18.4.2a
53.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for how torsion is implemented. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
PT
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
53.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility reinforcement is added. RAM Concept 417
Chapter 53 The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be required for both positive and negative moments). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
10.3.5 10.3.5 10.3.5
PT

7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented. The gross area of concrete after taking into account the ignore top depth and the ignore bottom depth is used to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1. For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. In the calculation of 7.12.2.1(c) only reinforcement with fy = 60,000 psi will be used in the calculation. Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1 The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations. In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location. In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized. For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is assumed. Post-tensioning is ignored. Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.

There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-05 Code. Axial/flexural members are classified as compression controlled or tension controlled in accordance with 10.3.3 and 10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions (when the concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as to provide ample ductility, the section is defined as tension controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When the tensile strain is at or below 418 RAM Concept
Chapter 53 the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as compression controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is used. Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is used. RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force (rather than the depth of the extreme tension steel) to calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the results will be identical to using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For sections with multiple layers of reinforcement (including post-tensioning), this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be conservative. In determining the compression-controlled strain limit, RAM Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and fy / Es. The tension-controlled strain limit is 0.005. Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. Strain compatibility design is used. RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility on page 418 for more information on applying ductility requirements. Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. User Es values are used For sections with multiple values of f c , the f c of each concrete block is used appropriately. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 419 for details). The ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force is limited such that the section strain at the location of the resultant tensile force is a minimum of 0.004. Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10fcAg, in accordance with section 10.3.5.

Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented. Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc', minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face). bw is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on page 353). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then bw is taken as the width of the section. The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances such as where the specified cover is extremely large.
RAM Concept
419
Chapter 53 Post-tensioning is ignored. A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the amount of reinforcement. The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.

Equation 10-4 and the 12(40,000/fs) criteria are implemented A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement. Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used. The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths. The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar. Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations). RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two circumstances: The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis. Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. For sections with multiple values of f c , the minimum f c is used. Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50bws/fy), 11-15 are implemented. Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not). Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented. Lightweight concrete is not considered. A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a. Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3. If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 421 for further requirements.

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. For sections with multiple values of f c , the minimum f c is used If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth; otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth. Lightweight concrete is not considered. Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity.
420
RAM Concept
Chapter 53 Equations 11-13 (including 50bws/fy) and 11-15 are implemented. Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not). Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented. A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a. Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 421 for further requirements. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib: rib width = total core width / num ribs with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs). To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib. The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover. Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core. Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6. in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45. The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp. For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c). The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete mixes. Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4. Longitudinal Reinforcement: By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows: A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows: At - p f yv A 1 f y1 = 5 f c A cp ---- s h Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1. Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs. Transverse Reinforcement: Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
RAM Concept
421
Chapter 53 Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2. Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this can make shear capacity negative. The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1. The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6 Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2 Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.

53.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit

A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design strip segment or design section property Environment. The limiting tensile stress values are outlined in the following table. Class U
Assumed behavior Uncracked Section properties for stress calculation Gross section
Class T
Transition between uncracked and cracked Gross section
Class C
Cracked Cracked section No limit
Tensile stress limit ft 7.5 fc Deflection calcula- Gross section tion Crack control Computation of fs for crack control
Table 53-7
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
Consider effects of crack- Consider ing effects of cracking No requirement Not applicable 10.6.4 / 18.4.4 Cracked section analysis
No requirement Not applicable
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft <= 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
422
RAM Concept
Chapter 53

0.6 f ci is the limiting value. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

3 f ci is the limiting value. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported. The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no section will fail this criterion. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.


53.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members

The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of 18.4.4. See Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) on page 420. The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing: The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded tendons in the tension zone and all bar positions. RAM Concept 423
Chapter 53 For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated: 480000 2 600000 - -- numberofducts - 2.5cci, ----------------w i = min ---------------- maxf maxf s 3 s This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width. A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step. Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit. If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met. If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width and is ignored. In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.

See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 419. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate. Post-tensioning Tendons are included. Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded Posttensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 344). If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used. Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345). If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be possible.

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack; This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it. The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment. Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross section is used. Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used. The twice that required criterion is not checked.
424
RAM Concept
Chapter 53

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied. See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to twoway slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any twoway slabs. User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied when the span ratio is in the middle one-third of the span. For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied. Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and reported. If 2 f c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement. User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi. Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi. The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not considered. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than L/6. See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement added. Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not always exactly match the code requirement
RAM Concept
425
Chapter 53 User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section. The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked. The number of bars (4 bars or wires) is not checked. No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

426
RAM Concept
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
427
Chapter 53
428
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54 AS 3600-2001 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of AS 3600-2001. The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules
54.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new AS 3600-2001 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed here.

54.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new AS 3600-2001 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from AS/NZS 1170.0, unless noted otherwise. Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. For the short-term case the factor will be equal to 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage) and 0.7 for all other live loadings. For the long-term and combination cases, the factor will be equal to 0.6 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible), and 0.0 for Live (Roof).
54.2.1 All Dead LC

RAM Concept
429
Chapter 54

of the long term loss lump sum. Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt) Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
54.2.4 Max Service LC: D + L

54.2.5 Ultimate LC: 1.35D

54.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) and 0.9 (alt) Live Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
430
RAM Concept
Chapter 54

This load combination is intended for investigation of long term deflections with no consideration of cracking. The load factors are: Balance Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) [1.0 initial + 2.35 creep] Dead Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.64 (std & alt) [0.4(3.35) + (0.7-0.4)] Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + (1.0-0.6)] Live (Storage) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + (1.0-0.6)] Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std & alt) [0.0(3.35) + (0.7-0.0)]

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.4 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
54.2.9 Service Seismic LC: D + L + E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.4 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
54.2.10 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + L + W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.4 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) RAM Concept 431
Chapter 54 Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Ultimate Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
54.2.11 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + L + E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.4 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
54.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors

It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw: car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer roof loads used for floor type activities on a Live (Reducible) layer or Live (Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of
1.0 in the Service LC, a (conservative) load factor of 0.6 in the wind and seismic load combinations (both service and ultimate), and a (conservative) load factor of 2.41 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
Note: If you draw assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a load factor of 2.41 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
54.4 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using AS 3600-2001.

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 6.1.2, an equation from another code, or a specified value. When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values: Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses Ec = value for all other conditions When the AS 3600-2001 code section 6.1.2 is selected the following values are used: 432 RAM Concept
Chapter 54 E ci = Ec = Where fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing fcm = mean value of 28 day cylinder strength For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 346 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
1.5
0.043 f cmi
1.5
0.043 f cm
54.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behaviour



For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains. For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concepts general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345 of Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. For AS 3600-2001, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
54.5 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which AS 3600-2001 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, twoway slab). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
RAM Concept
433
Chapter 54 The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment or design section: Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan. Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan. Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised) Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised) None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised) Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
PT
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2

Requirements
Old Files
434
RAM Concept
Chapter 54

RC
PT
8.1.4.2 8.1.4.2 8.1.4.2
54.5.4 Service
RC
8.6.1 (portions) 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.1 (portions)
PT
8.6.2 9.4.2 9.4.2
54.5.5 Max Service

This is intended for service load combinations where = 1.0. Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
8.6.1 (portions) 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.1 (portions)
PT
Table 54-4 Maximum service rule mapping
RAM Concept
435
Chapter 54
54.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for an explanation how torsion is implemented. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
PT
8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
54.5.7 Ductility
RC
8.1.3 8.1.3 8.1.3
PT
8.1.3 8.1.3 8.1.3
54.6 AS 3600-2001 code implementation

54.6.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of elasticity for concrete is calculated per 6.1.2(a). The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table values. Values outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if fc < 20 MPa, fcm = 1.2 fc; if fc > 50 MPa, fcm = fc + 6.5 MPa). This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
54.6.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength

The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 6.1.1.2(a). 436 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.6.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves

The bonded post-tensioning stress-strain curves are used, but altered as detailed below. For service level (elastic) analysis, unbonded tendon stresses are assumed to be independent of section strains. The tendon stress is never reduced below p.ef. The tendon stress is never exceeds fpy. The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.6 equation (a) or (b) as appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
54.6.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending
Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. Strain compatibility design is used. See General Design Approach on page 343 for a description of RAM Concepts strain compatibility design. See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 346 and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain curves User Es values are used For sections with multiple values of fc, the fc of each concrete block is used appropriately. RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility on page 437 for applying ductility requirements. If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section. The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate. RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design. Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented. The standard strength reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
54.6.5 8.1.4 Minimum Flexural Strength

Cross sections within 1/6 span from supports or 1/6 span from midspan are considered at critical sections. If the design section is not declared as post-tensioned in the design section or design strip segment, then the P/Ag and Pe terms of 8.1.4.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons). The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section.
RAM Concept
437
Chapter 54 See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking load.
54.6.6 8.1.4.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits

The second clause in 8.1.4.2 is implemented. The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more conservative than the gross section calculation suggested in the code. The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp. If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be added. For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
54.6.7 Section 8.1.3 Ductility of Beams in Bending

See General Design Approach on page 343 for general information on cross section calculations. The neutral axis depth (ku) is limited to 0.4 per section 8.1.3. Reinforcement is added to minimise the neutral axis depth. If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.4 d zone, then a solution may not be possible. In certain circumstances it may not be possible to simultaneously provide positive moment ductility and negative moment ductility. This most commonly happens if there is a large post-tensioning tendon near the center of the cross section.
54.6.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design

See Concrete Core Determination on page 353 for the web width (bw) calculations. Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts that are located in the shear core are deducted from the bw width to determine the bv width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the core, the elevation with the maximum effective duct width is used to determine bv. If the section is declared as post-tensioned, d0 is taken as the maximum of the depth of all tension reinforcement or 0.8D. No check is made to verify that the structure actually is post-tensioned. If the section is not post-tensioned d0 is taken as the maximum depth of all tension reinforcement. Ast is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that is in the tension zone for the cross section forces under consideration. The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, Pv, is ignored (taken as zero). Flexure-shear Vuc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed members the Apt and V0 evaluate to zero). V0 is calculated as M0/(M*/V*) for both determinate and indeterminate structures. 2 is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered). 3 is taken as 1.0. Apt is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in the tension zone. Vector components of the tendon areas are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section. Web-shear Vuc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and non-prestressed members). The calculation is performed at the centroid of the member, but the net web width (bv) is used to determine the shear stress at the centroid. The balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section properties are used to determine the axial stress at the centroid. Vus is calculated per 8.2.10 (a). No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to supports.
438
RAM Concept
Chapter 54 If beam torsion is selected, torsion design is also performed (see Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design on page 440). Maximum shear capacity is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then Section 8.3.4(b) is used to reduce available shear capacity. Stirrup spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c).
54.6.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design

Section 8.3 is followed. Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are met [T* < 0.25 Tuc]. The requirements of 8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored. All torsion is assumed to be taken by the core. See Concrete Core Determination on page 353 for calculation of the core. Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an average rib (and then factored up by the number of ribs). Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity. In calculating At and ut, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal bar is assumed to be the maximum of the top cover and bottom cover to the centroid of their respective longitudinal bars. Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force [8.3.6(a) is used for both tension and compression faces] Torsion capacity is not reported; instead shear capacity is reduced by the fitments, etc. that are used to provide the required torsion capacity. When shear acts simultaneously with torsion, Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse closed ties. Transverse closed ties (Asw) are provided for the lesser of T* and Tu,max. If T* is greater than Tu,max, then the section will be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(a) are also met. Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the Asw value calculated for the lesser of T* and Tu,max. Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if the cross section is in pure torsion (no shear).
54.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control

If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is provided. A critical tensile zone is considered as any cross section that has gross section stresses that equal or exceed 3 MPa for the cross section forces under consideration (slightly different and less conservative - than the code M*s.1 definition). Axial compression (or tension) is considered in this stress calculation. The cross section is considered as a tension member if both faces are in tension based on gross section stresses for the cross section forces being considered. (The code uses the term primarily tension.). Reinforcement is only fully designed on the face of the member with the highest tension stress (based on gross section stresses). In the rare case of a tension member, reinforcement may be added to the compression face in order to satisfy equilibrium, but that compression face reinforcement will not be sized to satisfy sections (i) and (ii). User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. Section (i) In the service design, this section is used if the cross section is a tension member or is a critical tensile zone. For the max service design, this section is only used for critical tensile zones. This section never used in protected environments. The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast,min = 3ks Act / fs A ks value of 0.8 is used for tension members; otherwise a ks value of 0.6 is used. fs is determined from Table 8.6.1(A). The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to the tension face is used in Table 8.6.1(A). RAM Concept 439
Chapter 54 Section (ii) This section is always used in the service design, but never used in the max service design. Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. All bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing requirements, including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A non-integral number of bars and spaces may be used. Section (iii) This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected. For the service design: Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A). The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A). For the max service design: Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy. Section (iv) This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not protected. The second code option (the one beginning with Alternately,) is used. For the service design: Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(B). The bar spacing is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section), including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used. For the max service design: Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
54.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control

If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 f c then there is no need for crack control reinforcement and none of the following applies. Section (a) with the 0.6 f c limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much reinforcement is necessary. Section (b) is always used instead. Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 200 MPa as the moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f c ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will reduce the compression (increase the tension) making it impossible to satisfy the criterion by increasing the reinforcement. The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross section strains, while the service reinforcement stress is calculated using cracked section strains. Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 200 mm or less. For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension zone (based on gross-section stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars required the plan layout of the ducts is ignored. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
54.6.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending

Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as being due to 8.1. See Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending above for details on the 8.1 implementation. 440 RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control

A critical tensile zone is considered as any cross section that has gross section stresses that equal or exceed 3 MPa for the cross section forces under consideration. Axial compression (or tension) is considered in this stress calculation. Reinforcement is only fully designed on the face of the member with the highest tension stress (based on gross section stresses). In the rare case of a tension member, reinforcement may be added to the compression face in order to satisfy equilibrium, but that compression face reinforcement will not be sized to satisfy sections (ii) and (iii). User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. Section (i) This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement design via clause 8.1.4.1. Section (ii) In the service design and max service design, this section is used if the cross section is in a critical tensile zone and is not in a protected environment. The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast,min = 3ks Act / fs ks = 0.6 fs is determined from Table 9.4.1(A). The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to the tension face is used in Table 9.4.1(A). Section (iii) This section is always used in the service design, but never used in the max service design. Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section depth. All bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing requirements, including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used. Section (iv) This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments. The second code option (the one beginning with Alternately,) is used. Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(B). The bar spacing is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section), including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used. Section (v) This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments. Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
54.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control

If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 f c then there is no need for crack control reinforcement and none of the following applies. Section (a) with the 0.5 f c limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much reinforcement is necessary. Section (b) is always used instead. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 150 MPa as the moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f c ) this criterion is skipped. The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining gross section decompression cross-section strains and applying the strains to the reinforcement.
RAM Concept
441
Chapter 54 Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 500 mm or less. For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross section stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
54.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature

This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude of forces upon a cross section. This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS 3600. The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative moments and the tension face reinforcement location is chosen. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either 9.4.3.4(a)(i), 9.4.3.4(b)(i), or 9.4.3.4(c). For protected environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(1.75 2.5 cp)(Ag)/1000 For normal environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(3.5 2.5 cp)(Ag)/1000 For corrosive or very corrosive environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(6.0 2.5 cp)(Ag)/1000 For non-PT design strips and design sections, cp is taken as zero.

442
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
443
Chapter 54
444
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55 BS 8110: 1997 Design

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of BS8110: 1997 (including Amendments 1 and 2) and Technical Report 43 (known as TR 43). The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules
55.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new BS 8110 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed here.
55.1.1 Default Pattern Loading Factors

To fulfill the requirements of considering Adverse and Beneficial loadings required in code section 2.4.3.1, RAM Concept uses pattern loading factors. For dead loadings, RAM Concept uses pattern factors of 1.0 and 1.0/1.4, or 0.71. For live loadings, RAM Concept uses Pattern factors of 1.0 and 0. See About load pattern on page 32 for further information.

55.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new BS 8110 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from BS8110-1: 1997 (including Amendments 1 and 2), unless noted otherwise.
RAM Concept
445
Chapter 55
55.2.1 All Dead LC



55.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 1.0 (alt) Live Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)

This load combination is intended for investigation of long term deflections with no consideration of cracking. The load factors are: Balance Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) [1.0 initial + 2.35 creep] Dead Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.59 (std & alt) [0.25(3.35) + 0.75(1.0)] Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.59 (std & alt) [0.25(3.35) + 0.75(1.0)] Live (Storage) Loading: 2.76 (std & alt) [0.75(3.35) + 0.25(1.0)] Live (Roof) Loading: 1.59 (std & alt) [0.25(3.35) + 0.75(1.0)]
446
RAM Concept
Chapter 55

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
55.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.2 (std & alt)
55.2.9 Ultimate Wind LC: D + 1.4W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std) & 1.4 (alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.4 (std & alt)
55.2.10 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4. The load factors used are: Dead Loading: 1.05 (std) and 1.0 (alt) Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt) This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.
RAM Concept
447
Chapter 55
55.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors

It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw: car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
55.4 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using BS 8110 / TR 43.
55.4.1 Concrete Behaviour

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. The user can choose to use the code equation of BS8110 Figure 2.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value. When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be specified: Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses Ec = value for all other conditions When the BS 8110 code equation is selected the following values are used: E ci = 5500 ( f cui 1.5 ) E c = 5500 ( f cu 1.5 ) Where fcui = cube strength at stressing fcu = 28 day cube strength For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses four different stress strain curves are used. All four stress-strain curves are paraboliclinear curves as detailed in. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 2fc/Ec, where fc is the peak stress and Ec is the elastic modulus at zero strain. For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.67fcui . For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu. For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.5 For accident (localised damage) strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.3. 448 RAM Concept
Chapter 55 The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.0035. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain. For ECR calculations, the maximum tension stress in concrete is assumed to be 0.6 f cu . For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1. A comparison of the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
Figure 3.1 provision
Concept implementation
RAM Concept
449
Chapter 55 Since Concepts crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve) for the 0.8 fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve. Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve only.
55.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour

Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 2.2. The elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the code-specified 200,000 N/mm2. For strength considerations, a m of 1.05 is used. For all other considerations (including accident strength) a m of 1.0 is used.
55.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters: Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window) Fpy = the yield stress of the reinforcement (from materials window) Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window) m = partial safety factor for materials These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. The three parameters are: E ps' = E ps F py' = F py m F pu' = F pu m For strength considerations, a m of 1.05 is used. For all other considerations (including accident strength) a m of 1.0 is used.
55.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains. For accident strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress. For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. For BS 8110-1997, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (fpb, called flimit in Chapter 48, Section Design Notes) is defined by equation 52 and 0.7fpu. When equation 52 is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the calculation: l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth fpu Aps = sum of all the individual tendons' fpu multiplied by the vector component of their Aps.
450
RAM Concept
Chapter 55 fcu bd = minimum concrete cube strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth to the centroid of the vector component tendon area For BS 8110: 1997, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is: k = 5d / L where L = length of the unbonded tendon. d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from furthest concrete face) This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and zone of inelasticity of ten times this length [see BS 8110 code text that accompanies equation 52]. In equation 52, RAM Concept needs to determine d and b. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation. The tendon length l in equation 52 is (conservatively) not modified to assume multiple simultaneous inelastic zones.
55.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which BS 8110 / TR 43 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, twoway slab). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment or design section: Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan. Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan. Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised) Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised) None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
RAM Concept
451
Beam
RC
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.4
PT - bonded tendons
4.12.2
PT - unbonded tendons
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.4, 4.12.2, TR43/6.10.6 3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7, 4.12.2, TR43 / 6.10.6
One-Way Slab
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7
4.12.2
Two-Way Slab
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7
TR43 / 6.10.6
TR43 / 6.10.6

Requirements
Old Files
55.5.3 Initial Service (Transfer)

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
452
RAM Concept
Chapter 55 The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
Beam
RC
(none)
PT
4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2
55.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned members as follows: Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack) Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack) Corrosive: Class 2 Very Corrosive: Class 1 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
Beam
RC
3.12.11.2.1
PT
3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2 4.3.4.3 / TR 43
One-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2 4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2 4.3.4.3 / TR 43
55.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). RAM Concept 453
Chapter 55 The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for how torsion is implemented. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
Beam
RC
3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.5.13*
PT
4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9* 4.3.7 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 4.3.9* 4.3.7 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 4.3.9*
One-Way Slab
3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.5.13*
Two-Way Slab
3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.5.13*
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
55.5.6 Ductility
RC
3.2.2.1 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.1
PT
4.2.3.1 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.1
55.5.7 Accident
Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are performed if appropriate. Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress. The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces).
454
RAM Concept
Chapter 55 Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in flexure, m = 1.3 and for reinforcement, m = 1.0. Note that for shear reinforcement calculations, the 0.95fyv values are changed to 1.0fyv. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
Beam
RC
(none)
PT
4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9* (reduced m )
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9* (reduced m )
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
Table 55-6 Accident rule mapping
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
55.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation

55.6.1 Section 3.2.2.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)
Included code sections - 3.2.2.1 (item b). Excluded code sections - 3.2.2.1 (rest). RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies Condition 2 as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility. The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth.
55.6.2 Section 3.4.4 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.4.1. Excluded code sections - 3.4.4.2 through 3.4.4.5 (these are optional simplifications of section 3.4.4.1). Items a, b, c, d and e of section 3.4.4.1 are followed. The optional 0.1fcu clause at the end of section 3.4.4.1 is not followed Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035. The simplified stress block of Figure 3.3 is not used. See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( m = 1.5 for concrete; m = 1.05 for reinforcement). Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used appropriately.
RAM Concept
455
Chapter 55 Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
55.6.3 Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.5.1 to 3.4.5.4, 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.12 Excluded code sections - 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.6 - 3.4.5.11, 3.4.5.13 (considered separately) See Concrete Core Determination on page 353 for calculation of bv. vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term. Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of As used in the calculation of vc. 100As / bvd is taken as 0.15 minimum, to follow the =0.15 in table 3.8. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used. The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100As / bvd is taken as 0.15). vc is calculated as the minimum of Equation 6a and Equation 6b, but never less than zero. fyv is limited to 460 N/mm2. Links are provided per Table 3.7 Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam. Maximum allowed shear stress is the smaller of 5 N/mm2 and 0.8 f cu . Spacing of links along the span is 0.75 d. The spacing across the span is not considered. Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered. Bottom loaded beams are not considered. The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked. Net axial forces are considered if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
456
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.6.4 Section 3.4.5.13 Torsion

Included code sections - 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.4 (part) to 2.4.8 Excluded code sections - 2.4.3, 2.4.4 (part), 2.4.9, 2.4.10
Note: All code references in this section refer to BS 8110, Part 2

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. Torsional shear stress vt is calculated using section 2.4.4.1 equation 2. Maximum combined shear stress vtu is calculated by Table 2.3, note 2 including the y1 modification factor and compared to vt. Any remaining capacity is used to calculate maximum remaining shear capacity. Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with Table 2.4. Area of torsion links and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 2.4.7. Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, y1 /2 or 200 mm. If torsion design is selected, at least minimum links will be provided at all locations.
Note: Assume in equations in table 2.3, note 2 is a misprint, and should instead be .
55.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs
Included code sections - 3.5.4 Excluded code sections - none See section 3.4.4 for additional details.
55.6.6 Section 3.5.5 Shear resistance of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.5.1 to 3.5.5.3 Excluded code sections - none Section 3.4.5 for is used to determine the shear resistance of solid slabs, except that Table 3.16 (with bv determined using the shear core) is used in place of Table 3.7.
55.6.7 Section 3.12.5 Minimum areas of reinforcement in members
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned members that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 460 for discussion. Included code sections - 3.12.5.1 through 3.12.5.3 Excluded code sections - 3.12.5.4 Reinforcement is provided per Table 3.25, assuming that sections are rectangular and subject to flexure. Reinforcement is provided such that: A s f y ( 0.0013 ) ( 460N mm ) A c A s ( 0.0013 ) A c
2
RAM Concept
457
Chapter 55 For sections that are not declared as post-tensioned, all post-tensioned reinforcement is ignored. For post-tensioned beams and post-tensioned one-way slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered to be equivalent to un-tensioned 460 N/mm2 reinforcement, and will reduce the amount of un-tensioned reinforcement necessary. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas considered toward the requirement. This interpretation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
Note: This section is never used for post-tensioned two-way slabs.

55.6.8 Section 3.12.11.2.1 Bar spacing
For all RC structures, and PT beams and one-way slabs, crack checks are performed per Part 2, 3.8.2 and crack widths are limited to 0.3 mm. This crack width design supersedes the other requirements in this section. RAM Concepts implementation of the crack width calculations are detailed in Part 2, Section 3.8.3. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
55.6.9 Section 3.12.11.2.4 Beam Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 460 for discussion. In beams, the clear distance between bars is limited to 300 mm. This code section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1. In post-tensioned beams, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
55.6.10 Section 3.12.11.2.7 Slab Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 460 for discussion. In RC slabs and PT one-way slabs, the clear distance between bars is limited to the smaller of 750 mm or 3 d. This code section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1. In one-way slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
458
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.6.11 Section 4.2.3.1 Redistribution of Moments (Ductility Check)

RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item c as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility. The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.5 times the effective depth.
55.6.12 Section 4.3.4.2 Compressive stresses in concrete

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.33fcu. The increase to 0.40fcu for certain portions of continuous members is not implemented. For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to 0.25fcu. Two-way slab compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to 0.24fcu in the support zone and 0.33fcu in the span zone [TR 43 Table 2]. For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported may be approximate. No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
Note: Assume the
in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
55.6.13 Section 4.3.4.3 Flexural tension stresses in concrete

The interaction of the BS 8110 requirements, the TR 43 requirements, the different classes and the use of bonded and unbonded tendons makes describing the service tensile stress limits and requirements in text form very confusing. In some circumstances, BS 8110 and TR 43 conflict, while in other circumstances neither one explicitly considers a particular configuration. Our implementation of these requirements is detailed in the table below. For each combination of tendon type, structure type and class, two limit stresses and a reinforcement calculation are listed. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if no supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The reinforcement calculation details how to calculate the required supplemental reinforcement when stresses exceed the first stress limit.
RAM Concept
459
Chapter 55
Tendons Member Type
Class
Tension limit Absolute without sup- tension plementary limit reinforcement

0 0
Reinforcement calculation
Bonded Bonded Bonded Bonded Bonded Bonded Bonded Bonded Bonded
Beam Beam Beam Beam One-way One-way One-way One-way Two-way
1 2
4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c) 4.3.4.3 (c)
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 1 2 0 0
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu All 1 2 TR 43 Table 2 0 0
TR 43 Table 2 TR 43, 6.10.5 0 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5 TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded Beam Unbonded Beam Unbonded Beam Unbonded Beam Unbonded One-way Unbonded One-way Unbonded One-way Unbonded One-way Unbonded Two-way
0.36 f cu
Tables 4.2 / 4.3* Tables 4.2 / 4.3* 0
3 / 0.1 mm 0 3 / 0.2 mm 0 1 2 0 0
0.36 f cu
Tables 4.2 / 4.3* Tables 4.2 / 4.3*
3 / 0.1 mm 0 3 / 0.2 mm 0 All TR 43 Table 2
TR 43 Table 2 TR 43, 6.10.5
Table 55-7 Flexural tension limit rule mapping
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values for grouted post-tensioned tendons and a 0.1mm crack width are used.
55.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections
For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being with bonded tendons if the majority of the tendons in the cross section (based on vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not qualify as with bonded tendons are considered as being with unbonded tendons. A cross section without tendons is therefore considered as being with unbonded tendons.
460
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.6.15 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement

Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the unreinforced stress limits are exceeded, even for the structure types and classes where it is not anticipated by BS 8110. For example, if a class 1 beam has tension stresses exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be marked as having failed the 4.3.4.3 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the class 1 beam even though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
55.6.16 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per 4.3.4.3(c)

The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per 4.3.4.3(c) is as follows: Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)] where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
55.6.17 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5

0.625Asfy = F1 for support regions of two-way slabs 0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for span regions of two-way slabs 0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for all regions of beams and one-way slabs where F1 = tensile force in concrete As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement added fy = yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement Aps = vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone fp = tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete cover is specified.
Note: For span regions of two-way slabs, and all regions of one-way slabs, this implementation is somewhat different from
a literal code interpretation as it considers the possibility of a mix of bonded and unbonded tendons in a cross section. It also may require additional un-tensioned reinforcement for a cross section with bonded tendons, which the code does not require. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stresses and the peak stress reported may be approximate. No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
55.6.18 Section 4.3.5.1 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.5fci.
RAM Concept
461
Chapter 55 For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to 0.4fci. For two-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.24fci in the support region and 0.33fci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2]. For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported may be approximate. No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned
Note: Assume the
in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
55.6.19 Section 4.3.5.2 Design tensile stresses in flexure (Transfer)

For beams and one-way slabs, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to: Class 1: 1 N/mm2 Class 2: 0.36 f ci . Class 3: 0.36 f ci . For Class 2 and 3 beams and one-way slabs, where the stresses above are exceeded, bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]: As = Fi / (0.625fy) For two-way slabs without supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0 in the support region and 0.15 f ci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2]. For two-way slabs with supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.45 f ci . Bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]: As = Fi / (0.625fy) For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported may be approximate. No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned. Two way slabs can never exceed 0.45 f ci , while there is no limit for beam and one-way slabs that are class 2 or 3.
Note: Clause 4.3.5.2 is unclear on this stress limit for Class 2, as it states that additional reinforcement should be provided if necessary. This is interpreted as reinforcement is only necessary if the tensile stress exceeds 0.36 f ci (since this stress is less than the cracking stress). Hence the stress may exceed this limit if the additional reinforcement is provided.
55.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure
Included code sections - 4.3.7.1, 4.2.7.2, 4.3.7.3 (partial) Excluded code sections - 4.3.7.3 (partial), 4.3.7.4 See section 3.4.4 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate. Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 343 for tendon stressstrain curves. Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility. 462 RAM Concept
Chapter 55 If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used. Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory on page 344). If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be possible. Equation 51 and Table 4.4 are not used.
55.6.21 Section 4.3.8 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.8, 4.3.8.10 Excluded code sections - 4.3.8.9 Vco is calculated per equation 54. The flange/web intersection is not checked. Vcr is calculated per equation 55 The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table. Moment
M < Mo
Vc Implementation
Vc = Vco Vc = (stress)bvh
M > Mo
Vc = min (Vco, Vcr)
and tension is on the Vc = (stress)bvh tension face * M > Mo and no tension on the tension face * Vc = min (Vco, Vcr) Vc = (stress)bvh d = dt (assumed) As = 0 (none in tension zone) Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Table 55-8 Vc rule mapping
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case of M > Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the tendons as defined in the code. dt is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons, whichever is greater. The vertical tendon force component is ignored. For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
RAM Concept
463
Chapter 55 Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of As used in the calculation of vc. bv is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from bv. For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged. vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term, with (Aps + As) used in place of As. See section 3.4.5 for detail of the implementation of this table. When unbonded tendons are used, the value of vc is reduced by a factor of 0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1]. Shear reinforcement is calculated per 4.3.8.6 to 4.3.8.8. Link spacing is calculated per 4.3.8.10, with lateral spacing requirements ignored. The web thickness used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one web. Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
55.6.22 Section 4.3.9 Torsion

See section 3.4.5.13 for details.
55.6.23 Section 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 Slabs (shear)

One-way shear (not punching shear) design of prestressed slabs is calculated per section 4.3.8 with one exception. Links are not required unless V is greater than or equal to Vc.
55.6.24 Section 4.12.2 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons

Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment. The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete. See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment (note that the 1.2 factor is not used in BS 8110) The cracking stress is 0.6 f cu . For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fcu for the cross section is used.
55.6.25 Part 2, Section 3.8.3 Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fy. Crack widths are calculated per BS 8110 Part 2, equation 12. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension stiffening is used - see discussion on Concrete Behaviour on page 448. Creep is not considered. Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below 0.3mm (per 3.2.4.2). This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but equation 12 will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
464
RAM Concept
Chapter 55 The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance loading will be considered if included in the load combinations. In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, equation 12 can be manipulated as follows: Crack width = (3acrm) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = msc sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x). RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored. sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht ] where ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin) ] sc [ht +2(acr - cmin) ] = 3acr ht sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc) acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc) However, a cr =
2 2
s b + c min , where sb = half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement
s b + c min = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) s b + c min = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) s b = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) c min sb =

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) c min
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face width. For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar diameter is assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
55.6.26 TR 43 / Section 6.10.6 Minimum un-tensioned reinforcement
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination
of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 460 for discussion. For post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 3.12.5 and 3.12.11.2 are also applied. (Note that Table 3.27 in TR 43 refers to the 1985 BS 8110 - this table has been renumbered 3.25 in the 1997 edition). This interpretation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements. For post-tensioned two-way slabs with bonded or unbonded tendons, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support regions as follows: RAM Concept 465
Chapter 55 As = 0.00075Ac. For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2. For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2. The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked. The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
55.6.27 Punching shear design

EC2 (EN 1992-2004) punching design is used instead of BS8110. Refer to Chapter 59, Punching Shear Design Notes.
466
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
56 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980. The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules
56.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new IS 456 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed here.

56.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new IS 456 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from IS 456 : 2000 unless noted otherwise.
56.2.1 All Dead LC


This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept
467
Chapter 56 Balance Loading: 1.15 (std & alt) (this includes a 15% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)

56.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.5 (std) and 1.0 (alt) Live Loading: 1.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)

Note: 100% of live loads are assumed sustained for storage, and 70% for all other live loads in accordance with recommendations in SP-24-1983 clause 35.4.1.
56.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + 0.8L + 0.8W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 0.8 (std & alt)
468
RAM Concept
Chapter 56 Service Wind Loading: 0.8 (std & alt)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
56.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.2 (std & alt)
56.2.9 Ultimate Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.5 (alt) Service Wind Loading: 1.5 (std & alt)
56.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.8L + 0.8E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. Only the live load percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1): 2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible) loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage) loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are incorporated into the following combinations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)] Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)] Live (Storage) Loading: 0.4 (std & alt) [0.5(0.8)] Service Seismic Loading: 0.8 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
469
Chapter 56
56.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
56.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. Only the live load percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1): 2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible) loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage) loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are incorporated into the following combinations. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.2 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std & alt) [0.25(1.2)] Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std & alt) [0.25(1.2)] Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) [0.5(1.2)] Service Seismic Loading: 1.2 (std & alt)
56.2.13 Ultimate Seismic LC: 0.9D + 1.5E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic loads. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.5 (alt) Service Seismic Loading: 1.5 (std & alt)
56.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors

It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw: car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer storage loads on a Live (Storage) layer if you would like their effects to be reducible for beams (only), and on a Live (Unreducible) layer if you do not want their effects to be reduced for any member.
2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
470
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
56.4 IS 456 material behaviours

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using IS 456/1343.
56.4.1 Concrete Behaviour

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. The user can choose to use the code equation of clause 6.2.3.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value. When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be specified: Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses Ec = value for all other conditions When the IS 456 code equation is selected the following values are used: E ci = 5000 f cui E c = 5000 f cu Where fcui = cube strength at stressing fcu = 28 day cube strength For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are paraboliclinear curves as detailed in IS456 Fig 21. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 0.002. For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.67fcui . For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu. For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.5 The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.0035. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of IS 456 Fig 21. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations. For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve is used:
RAM Concept
471
Chapter 56
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of IS 456 Annex F, Fig. 28. A comparison of the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
Fig. 28 Provision
Concept Implementation Since Concepts crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve) for the 0.8 fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
472
RAM Concept
Chapter 56 represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve. Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve only.
56.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour

Untensioned reinforcement with a yield stress less than or equal to 250 N/mm2 is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material as is shown in code figure 23B. All other untensioned reinforcement uses the Cold Worked Deformed Bar curve as is shown in code figure 23A. The elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the codespecified 200,000 N/mm2. For strength considerations, a m of 1.15 is used. For all other considerations a m of 1.0 is used.
56.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters: Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window) Fpy = the yield stress of the reinforcement (from materials window) Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window) m = partial safety factor for materials These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. The three parameters are: E ps' = E ps F py' = F py m F pu' = F pu m For strength considerations, a m of 1.15 is used. For all other considerations a m of 1.0 is used. This curve is similar but slightly different than the Stress Relieved Curve as shown in IS : 1343 - 1980 Figure 5A for normal prestressing materials, assuming this curve depicts strain percentage and not actual strains.
56.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains. For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Chapter 48, Section Design Notes. For IS 456-2000, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (called flimit in Chapter 48, Section Design Notes) is defined by IS 1343-1980 Appendix B, Table 12. For IS 1343: 1980, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is 0.1. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section
RAM Concept
473
Chapter 56 centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
56.5 IS 456 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which IS456 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
RC
26.5.1.1 (456) 26.5.2.1 (456) 26.5.2.1 (456) 31.7.1 (456)
PT
18.6.3.3 (1343) 18.6.3.3 (1343) 18.6.3.3 (1343) 31.7.1 (456)

Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values: Column Strip Top Reinforcement Column Strip Bottom Reinforcement Middle Strip Top Reinforcement Middle Strip Bottom Reinforcement 474 RAM Concept
Chapter 56 Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
Requirements
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further information.

Beam
RC
(none)
PT
22.8.2.1 (1343) 22.8.2.2 (1343)
One-Way Slab
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343) 22.8.2.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343) 22.8.2.2 (1343)
56.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the Type of post-tensioned members as follows: Protected: Type 3 (0.2 mm crack) Normal: Type 3 (0.1 mm crack)
RAM Concept
475
Chapter 56 Corrosive: Type 2 Very Corrosive: Type 1 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
Beam
RC
PT
26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343) 22.8.1.1 (1343) 22.8.1.2 (1343) 26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type 1)
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: Crack width design is done on all post-tensioned members except Type 1. This is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3. Since the spacing provisions of 26.3.3 are not specifically applied, detailed crack width design is performed for all members in accordance with 26.3.3. Crack width design is not required for Type 1 members as by definition they have no tensile stresses, and thus no cracking. See code implementation for additional information.
56.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for how torsion is implemented.
476
RAM Concept
Beam
RC
38 (456) 40 (456) 41 (456)
PT
22.1 (1343) 22.4 (1343) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343) One-Way Slab 38 (456) 40 (456) 41 (456) 22.1 (1343) 22.4 (1343) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343) Two-Way Slab 38 (456) 40 (456) 41 (456) 22.1 (1343) 22.4 (1343) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)

Note: * - IS 456 Clause 41 and IS 1343 Clause 22.5 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
56.5.6 Ductility
Beam
RC
37.1.1d (456) 38.1f (456)
PT
21.1.1d (1343)
One-Way Slab
37.1.1d (456) 38.1f (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
Two-Way Slab
37.1.1d (456) 38.1f (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
RAM Concept
477
Chapter 56
56.6 IS 456 code implementation

56.6.1 Section 26.5.1.1
Included code sections - item a. Excluded code sections - item b. The 0.85bd/fy criterion is implemented b is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on page 353). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then b is taken as the width of the section. Post-tensioning is ignored. This provision is applied to beams only. The provisions of item b (Maximum reinforcement) are not considered. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
56.6.2 Section 26.5.2.1

Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.12 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength deformed bars have been provided. Post-tensioning is ignored. This provision is applied to slabs only. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
56.6.3 Section 31.7.1

The spacing between bars is limited to a maximum of 2 times the slab thickness. This provision is applied to slabs only. If the member is designated as post-tensioned, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
56.6.4 Section 37 / 38 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

Included code sections - 37.1.1 (item d), 38.1 (item f). Excluded code sections - 37 (rest), 38 (rest). RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 37.1.1 (item d) as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility. The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth. 478 RAM Concept
Chapter 56 0.0035 - in accordance with 38.1 item f; The neutral axis depth is further limited to ---------------------------y 0.0055 + ----m where y = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension.
56.6.5 Section 38 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 38.1. Excluded code sections - none. Items a, b, c, d and e of section 38.1 are followed. Item f is applied under Ductility design. Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035. See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( m = 1.5 for concrete; m = 1.15 for reinforcement). Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used appropriately. Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
56.6.6 Section 40 Design shear resistance

Included code sections - 40.1 (partial), 40.2, 40.3, 40.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6 Excluded code sections - 40.1.1, 40.5 See Concrete Core Determination on page 353 for calculation of b. c is calculated per Table 19, using the equation in SP 24 (1983). Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of As used in the calculation of c . 100As / bd is taken as 0.15 minimum and 3.0 as a maximum in accordance with the <=0.15 and 3.00 and above in table 19. vc is calculated per the equation in SP:24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 19. RAM Concept 479
Chapter 56 For one-way shear in slabs, the design shear strength is increased by the depth factor in accordance with 40.2.1.1 For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used. The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100As / bd is taken as 0.15). fy is limited to 415 N/mm2. Stirrups are provided per 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, and 40.4 In beams, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations. Maximum allowable shear stress is determined in accordance with Table 20. Slabs use 1/2 the values in Table 20 in accordance with 40.2.3.1. Maximum spacing of stirrups along the span is the smaller of 0.75 d and 300 mm. The spacing across the span is not considered. Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered. The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked. Enhanced shear strength close to supports is not considered. Beams of varying depth are not considered. Net axial compression is considered per 40.2.2 if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked. Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
56.6.7 Section 41 Torsion

Included code sections - 41.1, 41.3, 41.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, 26.5.1.7 Excluded code sections - 41.2 Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib: rib width = total core width / num ribs with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs). code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib. Equivalent shear Ve is calculated per clause 41.3.1. Equivalent bending moment Me1 is calculated per clause 41.4.2. Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with clause 26.5.1.6 and 26.5.1.7. Area of torsion reinforcement and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with clause 41.4. Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, (x1 + y1)/4 or 300 mm. If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
480
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
56.6.8 Annex F Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fy. Crack widths are calculated per Annex F. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension stiffening is used - see discussion on Concrete Behaviour on page 471. Creep is not considered. Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the following limits: Environment: Protected - 0.3 mm Normal - 0.3 mm Corrosive - 0.2 mm Very corrosive - 0.1 mm These limits are specified in IS 456 clause 35.3.2. They are applied to post-tensioned members as well (except type 1) even though they do not match the limiting crack width values for Type 3 in Table 8. This results in a crack width limit design to 0.3 mm for Type 3 members and a crack width limit design to 0.2 mm for Type 2 members. This crack width design is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3 since bar spacing limits have not been specifically applied. This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used. The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance loading will be considered if included in the load combinations. In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, the equation can be manipulated as follows: Crack width = (3acrm) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = msc sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x). Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored. sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht] where ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin)] sc [ht +2(acr - cmin)] = 3acr ht sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc) acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc) However, a cr = s b + c min , where sb = half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement.
2 2
Using this final equation, Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling cracking. Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face width. For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar diameter is assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative. RAM Concept 481
Chapter 56
56.7 IS 1343 code implementation

56.7.1 Section 18.6.3.2c Minimum transverse reinforcement
When the depth of the web is more than 4 times the thickness of the web, 0.1 percent reinforcement is provided in accordance with 18.6.3.2c. The spacing limit related to the clear depth of the web is not implemented. This spacing, however, should normally be comparable to the maximum spacing of 0.75 dt applied in other shear provisions.
56.7.2 Section 18.6.3.3 Minimum longitudinal reinforcement

Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.15 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength deformed bars have been provided. Any bonded or unbonded tendon areas are applied to this provision before calculating any required untensioned reinforcement. Only tendons on the tension side (as determined by the minimum reinforcement setting) or within 10% of the cross section depth are used. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
56.7.3 Section 18.6.3.3 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons

Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment. The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete. See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment (note that the 1.2 factor is not used in IS 1343)
56.7.4 Section 21.1.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item d as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility. The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.5 times the effective depth.
56.7.5 Section 22.1 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure

See section 38 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of posttensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate. Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 343 for tendon stress-strain curves. Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility. If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
482
RAM Concept
Chapter 56 Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory on page 344). If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be possible.
56.7.6 Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams

Vco is calculated per section 22.4.1. The flange/web intersection is not checked. Vcr is calculated per section 22.4.2. The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table. Moment
M < Mo
Vc Implementation
Vc = Vco Vc = (stress)bh
M > Mo
Vc = min (Vco, Vcr)
and tension is on the Vc = (stress)bh tension face * M > Mo and no tension on the tension face * Vc = min (Vco, Vcr) Vc = (stress)bh d = dt (assumed) As = 0 (none in tension zone) Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Table 56-6 Vc rule mapping
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case of M > Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the tendons as defined in the code. dt is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons, whichever is greater. The vertical tendon force component is ignored. For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations. Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of Ap used in the calculation of vc. b is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b. For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged. Longitudinal unstressed reinforcement is converted into equivalent area of prestressed reinforcement to determine Ap used in Table 6. RAM Concept 483
Chapter 56 When calculating fpe/fpu, fpe is taken as the effective prestressing force divided by the equivalent area of prestressing steel. vc is calculated per the equation in SP : 24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 6. For slabs, Table 6 values are modified by IS 456 40.2.1.1 as appropriate. Maximum shear stress is in accordance with Table 7. For slabs, this value is adjusted in accordance with IS 456 40.2.3.1. Shear reinforcement is calculated per 22.4.3. Minimum shear reinforcement is provided at all locations in beams. Minimum reinforcement is provided in slabs when Vu > Vc. The web thickness used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one web.
56.7.7 Section 22.5 Torsion

Included code sections - 22.5.1, 22.5.3.1, 22.5.3.2, 22.5.4, 22.5.5 (item a and b) Excluded code sections - 22.5.2, 22.5.3.3, 22.5.5 (item c and d) Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete Core Determination on page 353. If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib: rib width = total core width / num ribs with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs). code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib. Equivalent bending moment Me1 and Me2 are calculated per sections 22.5.3.1 and 22.5.3.2. Transverse bending moment Me3 is calculated and reported in the auditor per 22.5.3.3, but no transverse bending design is performed. Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with sections 22.5.4.1, 22.5.4.2, 22.5.4.3 and 22.5.4.4. In the shear equation for Av in section 22.5.4.3, dt is substituted for dl to align this equation with the shear equation in 22.4.3.2 when no torsion is present. This change may not be conservative, but is consistent with the publication mentioned in the note below. Distribution of torsion reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 22.5.5. Maximum spacing of torsion stirrups is the least of x1, (x1 + y1)/4 or 200 mm. If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations. be ec, not e as shown in the code. Also, equation for Tc in section 22.5.4.1 is typographically incorrect. Refer to publications Design of Prestressed Concrete Beams Subjected to Combined Bending, Shear, and Torsion by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal March 1975 and Strength of Rectangular Prestressed Concrete Beams in Combined Torsion, Bending, and Shear by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal April 1973 for details.
Note: There is a typographical error in the code section 22.5.4.2 for the calculation of Ve1. The term in the numerator should
56.7.8 Section 22.7.1 Flexural tension stresses in concrete

Hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from section 22.7.1.
484
RAM Concept
Chapter 56 For type 2 members, the temporary service loads adjustment is not taken. For bonded and unbonded cross sections, Type 3 hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from Table 8 as Grouted post-tensioned tendons. The values in Table 8 are multiplied by the Depth Factors in Fig. 6 as necessary. For each section, two limit stresses are calculated. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if no supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The supplemental untensioned reinforcement is calculated in accordance with the Note under Table 8. Cross sections with unbonded tendons (see Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 486) are classified as other members when calculating supplemental reinforcement.
Note: When calculating supplemental reinforcement per the Note under Table 8, the additional reinforcement is calculated
as a percentage of the cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone as is done in BS 8110. This is different than a literal reading of the IS 1343 code.

56.7.10 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement

Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the unreinforced stress limits are exceeded, even for the structure types where it is not anticipated by IS 1343. For example, if a type 1 beam has tension stresses exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be marked as having failed the 22.7 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the type 1 beam even though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure. The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per Note, Table 8 is as follows: Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (100 * )] where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone and = 3 N/mm2 for unbonded cross sections and 4 N/mm2 for bonded cross sections User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
56.7.11 Section 22.8.1 Design compressive stresses

Compressive stresses in concrete based on the concrete section are limited to the values in Fig. 7 for Zone I. Zone II values are never applied. Direct compression stresses at the section centroid are limited to 0.8 times the value determined from Fig. 7.
56.7.12 Section 22.8.2 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)

Compressive stresses in concrete based on the cracked concrete section at transfer of prestress are limited to the values in Fig. 8 for post-tensioned work. If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be added. RAM Concept 485
Chapter 56 For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress limit of all of the individual concrete areas. The average of the top and bottom concrete stress in the cracked section is limited to the direct compressive stress limit of 0.8 times the value from Fig. 8.
56.7.13 Punching shear design

486
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
57 BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of Eurocode 2 (EC2):2004. This section incorporates the use of the UK National Annex documents as well as the TR-43 document for PT provisions. The six sections outline the following: Default loadings Default load combinations Live load factors Material behaviors How code rules are selected for cross section design Implementation of code rules
57.1 EC2 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new EC2 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed here.

This loading type describes a temporary loading that is present during construction when the contractor stresses the tendons. As it is a temporary load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load Combination. If a permanent load is present at stressing, it should be defined on the Temporary Construction (At Stressing) loading layer as well as the appropriate permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a permanent loading present at stressing with appropriate use of load factors.
57.2 EC2 Default Load Combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you start a new Eurocode 2 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from the Eurocode unless noted otherwise.
57.2.1 All Dead LC

57.2.2 Dead + Balance LC

This load combination sums all of the dead loadings with the balance loads, with a load factor of 1.0, that act simultaneously in the standard service condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for design purposes.

This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept
489
Chapter 57 Balance Loading: 1.15 (std & alt) (this includes a 15% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)
57.2.4 Characteristic Service LC: D + L

This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state. It conservatively does not consider combination factors, even though the Code technically permits 0 to be applied to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
57.2.5 Frequent Service LC: D + 1L
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state. It conservatively applies 1 to all live loads, even though the Code technically permits 2 to be applied to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 0.9 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
57.2.6 Quasi-Permanent Service LC: D + 2L
This load combination is intended for checking the quasi-permanent serviceability limit state. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 0.8 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
490
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
57.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5 0L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table NA.A1.2 (B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt) Dead Loading: 1.35 (std) & 1.0 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
57.2.8 Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2 (B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. It conservatively applies a factor of 1.5 to all live loads, even though the Code technically permits 0 to be applied to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt) Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
57.2.9 Accident LC
This load combination is intended for checking the accident limit state. The load factors used are: Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)

This load combination is intended for investigation of long term deflections. The load factors are: Balance Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) [1.0 initial + 2.35 creep] Dead Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.71 (std & alt) [0.3(3.35) + 0.7(1.0)] Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + 0.4(1.0)] Live (Storage) Loading: 2.88 (std & alt) [0.8(3.35) + 0.2(1.0)] Live (Roof) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) [0.0(3.35) + 1.0(1.0)]
RAM Concept
491
Chapter 57
57.2.11 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + 0L + W

This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers wind as the leading action and applies 0 to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Wind-Service Loading: 1.0 (std) & -1.0 (alt)
57.2.12 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + L + 0.5W
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers wind as the accompanying action and treats all other variable actions as leading actions. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Wind-Service Loading: 0.5 (std) & -0.5 (alt)
57.2.13 Frequent Service Wind LC: D + 2L + 0.2W
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state with wind. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 0.8 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Wind-Service Loading: 0.2 (std) & -0.2 (alt)
492
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
57.2.14 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5 0L + 0.75W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table NA.A1.2 (B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt) Dead Loading: 1.35 (std) & 1.0 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Wind-Service Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
57.2.15 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2 (B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind load is treated as an accompanying action and all other variable loads are treated as the leading actions. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt) Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Wind-Service Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
57.2.16 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5 0L + 1.5W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2 (B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads are treated as accompanying actions. The load factors used are: Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt) Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Wind-Service Loading: 1.5 (std) & -1.5 (alt)
RAM Concept 493
Chapter 57
57.2.17 Equilibrium Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W

This load combination is intended for checking the equilibrium limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10) in Table NA.A1.2 (A) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads are assumed to be favourable. This combination is only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are: Balance Loading: 1.0 Dead Loading: 0.9 Wind-Service Loading: 1.5
57.3 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction
It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw: Domestic, residential, and office (Category A and B) loads on a Live (Reducible) layer Assembly (Category C and D) loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer Car park loads (Category F) on a Live (Unreducible) layer Storage loads(Category E) on a Live (Storage) layer. Roof loads (Category H) on a Live (Roof) layer.
Note: Live load reduction will conservatively not be considered on Assembly loads in Category C and D. However it is
necessary to assign the loads to the Live (Unreducible) type to get the appropriate factors in the load combinations.
57.4 EC2 Material behaviors

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using Eurocode 2.

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. The user can choose to use the code equation in table 3.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value. When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be specified: Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses Ec = value for all other conditions
When the EC2 code equation is selected the following values are used: Eci = 22,000[(fcki + 8)/10]0.3 MPa (fcki in MPa) Ec = 22,000[(fck + 8)/10]0.3 MPa (fck in MPa) Where fcki = characteristic cylinder strength at stressing fck = 28 day characteristic cylinder strength 494 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits. For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are paraboliclinear curves as detailed in clause 3.1.7. The transition strain is at c2. For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.85fcki . For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85fck. For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85fck / 1.5. The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of cu2. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of Figure 3.3. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations.
57.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behavior

Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 3.8. The elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window. For strength considerations, a of 1.15 is used. For all other considerations (including accident strength) a of 1.0 is used.

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters: Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window) Fpy = the yield stress of the reinforcement (from materials window) Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window) m = partial safety factor for materials These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Posttensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 343. The three parameters are: Eps = Eps Fpy = Fpy / m Fpu = Fpu / m
For strength considerations, a of 1.15 is used. For all other considerations (including accident strength) a of 1.0 is used.

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains.
RAM Concept
495
Chapter 57 For accident strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress. For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Chapter 41, Section Design Notes. For Eurocode 2:2004, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (fpb, called flimit in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 345) is defined by the equation in TR-43 clause 5.8.5. When this equation is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the calculation: l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth fpuAps = sum of all the individual tendons fpu multiplied by the vector component of their Aps fckbd = minimum concrete characteristic cylinder strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth to the centroid of the vector component tendon area For Eurocode 2:2004, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is k = 5d/L Where L = length of the unbonded tendon d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from the furthest concrete face) This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and a zone of inelasticity of 10 times this length. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
57.5 EC2 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides EC2 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

496
RAM Concept
RC
9.2.1.1 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.1
PT
TR-43 5.8.8 TR-43 5.8.8 TR-43 5.8.8

Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least one load combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 33 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further information.

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces).
RAM Concept
497
Beam
RC
(none)
PT
5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
57.5.4 Characteristic Service

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members as follows: Protected: X0, XC1 Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4 Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table: Design System
Beam
RC
7.2(2) 7.2(5)
Bonded PT
7.2(2) 7.2(5)1 7.2(2) 7.2(5)1 7.2(2) 7.2(5)1 TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 4) TR-43 5.8.72
Unbonded PT
7.2(5)1
One-Way Slab
7.2(2) 7.2(5)
7.2(5)1
Two-Way Slab
7.2(2) 7.2(5)
7.2(5)1 TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 4) TR-43 5.8.72
Table 57-3 Characteristic service rule mapping
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.2(5) is only performed where crack width design is requested. Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
498
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
57.5.5 Frequent Service

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members as follows: Protected: X0, XC1 Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4 Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table: Design System
Beam
RC
(none)
Bonded PT
7.31 TR-43 5.8.12
Unbonded PT
TR-43 5.8.12 TR-43 5.8.72 TR-43 5.8.12 TR-43 5.8.72 TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 5) TR-43 5.8.72
One-Way Slab
(none)
7.31 TR-43 5.8.12
Two-Way Slab
(none)
7.31 TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 5) TR-43 5.8.72
Table 57-4 Frequent service rule mapping
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested. Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
57.5.6 Quasi-Permanent Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces). The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members as follows: Protected: X0, XC1 Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4 Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3
RAM Concept
499
Chapter 57 Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table: Design System
RC
7.3 7.3 7.3
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
7.31 7.31 7.31
Table 57-5 Quasi-Permanent service rule mapping
Note: 1- for PT members 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
57.5.7 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load factors). The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). See Torsion Considerations on page 353 for how torsion is implemented. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
Beam
RC
6.1 6.2 6.3
PT
6.1/TR-43 5.8.5 6.2/TR-43 5.9 6.3 6.1/TR-43 5.8.5 6.2/TR-43 5.9 6.3 6.1/TR-43 5.8.5 6.2/TR-43 5.9 6.3
One-Way Slab
6.1 6.2 6.3
Two-Way Slab
6.1 6.2 6.3
57.5.8 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC). The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility reinforcement is added. The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be required for both positive and negative moments).
500
RAM Concept
Table 57-7
RC
5.5 5.5 5.5
PT
5.5 5.5 5.5
Ductility rule mapping
57.5.9 Accident
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces). Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For reinforcement m = 1.0. Reinforcement location is determined by the Min. Reinforcement Location setting. Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table. Design System
Table 57-8
RC
9.10 9.10 9.10
PT
9.10 9.10 9.10
Ductility rule mapping
57.6 EC2 code implementation

57.6.1 Section 5.5 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)
Included code sections (4) Excluded code sections (1), (2), (3), (5), (6) RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 5.5(4) as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility. The neutral axis depth is limited to: (1.0 k1)/k2 * effective depth for fck 50 MPa (1.0 k3)/k4 * effective depth for fck > 50 MPa where k1, k2, k3, and k4 are taken from the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1
57.6.2 Section 5.10.2.2 Limitation of Concrete Stress (Transfer)

Included code sections (5). Excluded code sections (1), (2), (3), (4). The compressive stresses in the concrete, based on the cracked section, are limited to 0.6fcki. RAM Concept 501
Chapter 57
57.6.3 Section 6.1 Design resistance moment

Included code sections (1), (2), (3), (7) Excluded code sections (4), (5), (8) Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is cu2. See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves (m = 1.5 for concrete; m = 1.15 for reinforcement for strength design. Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area. For span segments or design sections not designated as post-tensioned, post-tensioning tendon forces are ignored. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used appropriately. Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force. At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design. RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements. For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section. A tension design is performed for longitudinal torsion tension required by the torsion model. This design assumes the design yield stress of the reinforcement and the calculated reinforcement is in addition to other requirements for flexure. Tension demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected value of the compression chord on that face due to flexure.
57.6.4 Section 6.2 Design shear resistance

Included code sections 6.2.1(1)(partial), 6.2.1(2), 6.2.1(3), 6.2.1(4), 6.2.1(5), 6.2.1(6), 6.2.1(7), 6.2.2(1), 6.2.2(2), 6.2.2(5), 6.2.3(1), 6.2.3(2), 6.2.3(3), 6.2.3(6) Excluded code sections 6.2.1(1)(partial), 6.2.1(8), 6.2.1(9), 6.2.2(3), 6.2.2(4), 6.2.2(6), 6.2.2(7), 6.2.3(4), 6.2.3(5), 6.2.3(7), 6.2.3(8), 6.2.4 (all), 6.2.5 (all) See Concrete Core Determination on page 260 for calculation of b. VRd,c is calculated using equation 6.2. For PT members uncracked in bending only equation 6.4 is used. For PT members that are cracked in bending, the minimum of equation 6.2 and 6.4 is used. Longitudinal untensioned tension reinforcement designed in Pass 1 and, if the member is PT, the area of bonded tendons in the tension zone is included in the determination of Asl used in the calculation of VRd,c. bw,nom is the width of the shear core, less the width of the tendon ducts in accordance with 6.2.3(6). Bonded tendons are considered to be grouted metal ducts. Any bonded ducts with diameter less than or equal to bw/8 are not considered in the deduction. bw,nom is used in all shear calculations, including w For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fck is used.
502
RAM Concept
Chapter 57 The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of the shear being investigated. The effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression most face to the resultant tension force. For cross sections with no reinforcement in tension, a column style effective depth is determined from the compression most face to the maximum depth of any reinforcement. If the member is declared PT, the primary axial force contribution to cp in the calculation of equation 6.2.a, 6.2.b, and 6.4 is multiplied by P,fav. The primary axial force contribution to cp used in equation 6.11 is multiplied by either P,fav or P,unfav, whichever results in the lowest value of cw. The shift rule required by 6.2.2(5) and 9.2.1.3 is performed for all members (with and without shear reinforcement) by attempting to extend the reinforcement beyond the required development length by 1.125 times the effective depth. This is calculated using eq. 9.2 and using z = 0.9d and cot = 2.5. Additional tension reinforcement in accordance with 6.2.3(7) is assumed to be accounted for using this provision. In normal circumstances, this will be the case because the horizontal shift required by 6.2.2(5) is related to the magnitude of the vertical shift performed according to 6.2.3(7). In all beams at least minimum links will be provided. Links are provided in accordance with 6.2.3 and 9.2.2. The angle is calculated as the minimum value that can satisfy the requirement that VEd VRd,max , within the range specified in 6.2.3(2). Minimum density of shear reinforcement is determined in accordance with 9.2.2(5). Maximum shear reinforcement spacing along the span is determined by 9.2.2(6). The shear reinforcement spacing across the span is not considered. Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered. Net axial force is considered if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
57.6.5 Section 6.3 Torsion

Included code sections 6.3.1(part), 6.3.2 Excluded code sections 6.3.1(part), 6.3.3 Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete Core Determination on page 260. If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib: rib width = total core width / num ribs with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs). code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib. Torsion truss properties are calculated in accordance with 6.3.2(1). Link dimensions are determined from the location of specified cover to longitudinal design bars and do not explicitly account for the location of user reinforcement. The truss wall thickness, tef,i is limited by: A/u per 6.3.2(1) bw/2 h/2 horizontal spacing between outermost horizontal bars vertical spacing between outermost horizontal bars The above limitations effectively create a truss wall with a longitudinal bar located at the center of the wall or outside the center of the wall (which is considered to be conservative). In these calculations RAM Concept assumes that the side cover to the longitudinal bars is the maximum of the top and bottom cover. RAM Concept 503
Chapter 57 If the interaction equation 6.31 is satisfied, only minimum reinforcement is provided. If equation 6.31 is not satisfied, equation 6.29 is used to calculate a maximum shear capacity by deducting the torsion portion of the interaction capacity. This equation is used to iteratively solve for the smallest value of theta that can satisfy the interaction equation 6.29. This theta is then used in all subsequent shear and torsion calculations. Maximum spacing of links is calculated in accordance with 9.2.3(3). Minimum torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with 9.2.3(2). Minimum longitudinal tension reinforcement is calculated in accordance with equation 6.28. The tension demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected compression chord force. If torsion design is selected and the torsion is greater than zero, at least minimum links will be provided.
57.6.6 7.2 Stress Limitation

For all RC and PT members where the Environment property is set to Corrosive or Very Corrosive (XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3): For the characteristic combination of loads, the compressive stress in the concrete based upon the cracked section is limited to 0.6fck in accordance with 7.2(2). Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep the concrete stresses within the prescribed limits. For all RC members and for PT members where crack width design is requested: For the characteristic combination of loads, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fyk in accordance with 7.2(5).
57.6.7 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths

Crack widths are calculated per 7.3.4. Cracked equilibrium strains are calculated assuming that concrete has no tensile strength. Creep is not considered. Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the required limits. The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members as follows: Protected: X0, XC1 Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4 Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3 Code crack width limits are in accordance with Table NA.4 of the UK National Annex. This criterion is applied to two-way slabs and other wide cross sections, but will not provide accurate crack width predictions for these wide cross sections when reinforcement is not spaced according to the varying stress patterns across the section. For narrower cross sections with a uniform stress pattern, the bonded reinforcement should be spaced uniformly. For this reason it may not be appropriate to do a crack width only design on full panel strip widths. The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded tendons are considered, and the balance loading will be considered if included in the load combinations. Bonded tendons are only considered effective if the average spacing of the bonded tendons and un-tensioned reinforcement within hc,eff is less than or equal to 300 mm in accordance with 7.3.2(3). Crack width = sr,max(sm- cm) sm- cm = [s - kt (fct,eff/p,eff) (1 + e p,eff)] / Es 0.6 s / Es Concept uses a rearranged form of this equation, which utilizes strains instead of stresses sm- cm = s / Es - kt[ (fct,eff/(p,eff Es) + (fct,eff/Ecm)] 0.6 s / Es 504 RAM Concept
Chapter 57
s
tension stress in un-tensioned reinforcement from a cracked section analysis, or maximum differential bonded tendon stress from tendon stress level at zero strain in the concrete at the same level 0.6 for frequent service design 0.4 for quasi-permanent service design
kt =
fct,eff = fctm p,eff = (As + 12 Ap)/Ac,eff As = Ap = area of un-tensioned reinforcement within depth hc,eff area of bonded tendons within depth hc,eff
Ac,eff = area of concrete within depth hc,eff hc,eff = minimum of 2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, or h/2 d= 1 = = depth to the outermost layer of reinforcement [ (s/p)] 0.5 for fck C50/60 0.25 for fck C70/85 Linearly interpolated between C50/60 and C70/85 largest diameter of reinforcement contained within depth hc,eff 1.6Ap Es/Ecm
s = p = e =
sr,max = k3c + k1k2k4eq /p,eff = crack spacing (eq. 7.11) k3 = c= k1 = 3.4 average cover to reinforcement, weighted by bar/tendon units 0.8 for un-tensioned reinforcement 1.6 for bonded tendons averaged for cross sections containing both tendons and un-tensioned reinforcement, weighted by bar/tendon units 0.5 for bending (compression strain on one face) (1 + 2) / 2 1 for tension (tension strain on both faces) 0.425 n112 + n222 + nii2 / (n11 + n22 + nii)
k2 = k4 = eq =
If the bonded reinforcement within hc,eff is less than or equal to 5(c+ eq /2), RAM Concept uses equation 7.11 for sr,max. If a larger spacing exists, RAM Concept uses a crack spacing of 1.3(h-x) in accordance with equation 7.14. RAM Concept always assumes the maximum crack spacing is 1.3(h-x). For bonded PT systems, decompression is checked for exposure class XC2, XC3, and XC4 for the quasi-permanent load combination and for exposure class XD and XS for the frequent load combination. For the decompression checks, a check is made that the entire bonded tendon lies within 25mm of concrete in compression, using cracked section properties. For the purposes of this check the tendon is assumed to be round with a diameter equal to the width specified in the material properties.
RAM Concept
505
Chapter 57
57.6.8 Section 9.2.1.1 Beam Minimum Reinforcement

Included code sections (1), (4) Excluded code sections (2), (3) This section applies only to beams. bt is taken as the width on the tension face. d is taken as the depth from the compression face (as determined from the Code Min. Reinforcement Location setting) to the centroid of reinforcement located closest to the tension face. In PT beams the tendon locations are included in this calculation. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fck is used. See Code Minimum Reinforcement on page 494 for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will be added to. For RC beams, post-tensioning is ignored. For PT beams, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For AsFy requirements, tendon (fpy fse) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements. For unbonded PT beams, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than 1.15 times the cracking moment. The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based upon the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section. Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete. See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 352 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment (note that a 1.15 factor is used in EC2). The cracking stress is taken as fctm,fl in accordance with EC2 clause 3.1.8. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fck for the cross section is used.
57.6.9 Section 9.3.1.1 RC Slab Minimum Reinforcement

Included code sections (1), (3) Excluded code sections (2), (4) This section applies only to one-way slabs and two-way slabs. d is taken as the depth from the compression face (as determined from the Code Min. Reinforcement Location setting) to the centroid of reinforcement located closest to the tension face. In PT slabs the tendon locations are included in this calculation. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fck is used. See Code Minimum Reinforcement on page 494 for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will be added to. For RC slabs, post-tensioning is ignored. For PT slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For AsFy requirements, tendon
506
RAM Concept
Chapter 57 (fpy fse) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements. The maximum spacing between bars is limited to the minimum of 400mm or 3h. For two-way slabs in column strips in the first cross section in a support region, the spacing between bars is limited to the minimum of 250 mm or 2h. In post-tensioned slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan locations are ignored. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
57.6.10 Section 9.10 Tying Systems for Accidental Design Situations

Each cross section is considered to act as a portion of an internal tie. Reinforcement at each cross section is placed on the tension face in accordance with the force envelopes for the Accident Rule set. Peripheral ties are not explicitly calculated by RAM Concept. Tie force requirements are determined in accordance with the UK National Annex clause 9.10.2.3 (3). The number of stories is conservatively assumed to be 10 or more, resulting in Ft = 60. lr is calculated as this cross sections span length plus the larger adjacent span length. For design sections we calculate this value as twice this cross sections span length. An equivalent uniform span load (force/length) is calculated representing (gk + qk) times the width of the span. This uniform span load is calculated as follows: For span segments, the total span shear is calculated as the difference in shears at each end of the span. This value is calculated twice, once with the minimum V envelope at the span start and the maximum V envelope at the span end and once with the maximum V envelope at the span start and the minimum V envelope at the span end. The maximum of the differences in these values is used as the total span shear. The uniform span load is then calculated as the total span shear divided by the span length. For design sections, the total span shear is calculated as the twice the maximum span shear, extrapolated from the cross section shear using the design section span ratio. The uniform span load is then calculated as the total span shear divided by the span length. For regions of low shear near mid-span where extrapolation may not be appropriate, we calculate the uniform span load from the moment at the cross section as M/al2 where a = (1/24 /2) and is the span ratio from this cross section to mid-span. Tie requirements are considered as minimum requirements, not in addition to other requirements. The design yield stress of bonded tendons located anywhere in the cross section are applied toward the tie requirements. Vector components are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the cross section.

57.6.12 TR-43 5.8.1 PT Service Stresses

This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs. This section of TR43 defines hypothetical stress limits for comparison with gross section stresses.
RAM Concept
507
Chapter 57 The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of members as follows: Protected: X0, XC1 Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4 Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3 For bonded beams and one way slabs, it is assumed that the hypothetical tensile stresses in Table 3 exist at the limiting crack width values given in Eurocode 2. For exposure class XD or XS, a limiting crack width value of 0.1mm is assumed for the determination of hypothetical tensile stresses. The recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43. The supplemental reinforcement for bonded beams and one way slabs in accordance with TR43 5.8.1 is calculated as follows: Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)] where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. For unbonded beam and one way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in accordance with TR43 5.8.7. TR43 does not provide an absolute tensile stress limit for exceeding the Table 3 values. As such, RAM Concept uses the Table 3 values as absolute limits and therefore does not permit enhancing the stresses by adding un-tensioned reinforcement. The recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43. For two way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in accordance with TR43 5.8.7. Table 4 or Table 5 values are used depending upon whether or not full panel width strips are used (average stresses) or column/middle strips are used (design strip stresses). In determination of using with bonded reinforcement limits the average spacing of the bonded reinforcement on the tension face is checked (using bonded tendons in the tension zone). If the bonded reinforcement spacing limit is greater than 500 mm at the time when the limits are being determined, the without bonded reinforcement limits are used. Since the reinforcement in the service design is left in the cross section from force envelope to envelope, it is possible that an envelope will use the without bonded reinforcement limits while the subsequent envelope will use with bonded reinforcement limits due to the reinforcement added in the previous envelope. Where full panel width strips are used, the recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43. In the case where column/middle strips are used the recommended setting is Stress or Stress and Crack Width or Crack Width as TR43 explicitly permits the stress limits in Table 5 to be exceeded where explicit crack width checks are performed.
Member Type Exposure Class Code Design Crack Width (mm) 0.2 0.2 Hypothetical Crack Width (used to determine stress limits) (mm) 0.2 0.2 Tension limit without supplemental reinforcement 1.65fctm 1.65fctm Absolute Tension Limit Supplemental Reinforcement Calculation Load Combination
Bonded Beam, One Way Slab
X0, XC1 XC2, XC3, XC4 XD or XS
0.3fck 0.3fck
5.8.1 5.8.1
Frequent1,2 Frequent1,2, QuasiPermanent3 Frequent1,2,3 Frequent2, QuasiPermanent1
0.2 0.3
0.1 -
1.35fctm 0
0.3fck 1.35fctm
5.8.1 5.8.7
Unbonded Beam, One Way Slab
All
508
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
Bonded Two Way Slab, Full Panel Width X0, XC1 XC2, XC3, XC4 XD or XS Bonded Two Way Slab, Column/Middle Strips X0, XC1 XC2, XC3, XC4 XD or XS Unbonded Two Way Slab, Full Panel Width Unbonded Two Way Slab, Column/Middle Strips All 0.2 0.2 0(support) 0.9fctm(span) 0(support) 0.9fctm(span) 0.9fctm 0.9fctm 5.8.7 5.8.7 Characteristic2, Frequent1 Characteristic2, Frequent1, Quasi0.9fctm 1.2fctm 1.2fctm 5.8.7 5.8.7 5.8.7 Permanent3 Characteristic2, Frequent1,3 Frequent1,2 Frequent1,2, QuasiPermanent3 Frequent1,2,3 Characteristic2, QuasiPermanent1 Frequent2, QuasiPermanent1
0.2 0.2 0.2
0(support) 0.9fctm(span) 0(support) 1.2fctm(span) 0(support) 1.2fctm(span) 0(support) 1.2fctm(span) 0(support) 0.3fctm(span) 0(support) 0.4fctm(span)
0.2 0.3
1.2fctm 0.9fctm
5.8.7 5.8.7
All
0.3
1.2fctm
5.8.7
Note: 1 - Used for crack width design (when requested by user) Note: 2 - Used for hypothetical stress checks (when requested by user) Note: 3 - Used for decompression check (when crack width design is requested by user)
57.6.13 TR-43 5.8.2 PT Initial Service (transfer) Stresses
This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs. For beams and one-way slabs, where the flexural tensile stresses exceed 0.72fctm additional un-tensioned reinforcement is designed in accordance with 5.8.7. Compressive stresses are limited to the values in 5.8.2. For two-way slabs, the flexural compressive and tensile stresses are limited to the values in Table 5 for column/middle strip design, or Table 4 for full panel width design, where fck is replaced with fcki. For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fck is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported may be approximate.
57.6.14 TR-43 5.8.3 PT Crack Control

This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs. Code crack width limits are determined in accordance with Table NA.4 of the UK National Annex. See 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths for additional information.
57.6.15 TR-43 5.8.5 PT Ultimate Limit State

This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs. The equation for fpb is used to limit unbonded tendon stress. See Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior for more information.
RAM Concept
509
Chapter 57
57.6.16 TR-43 5.8.7 PT Un-tensioned Reinforcement

This section applies to unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs, and to all post-tensioned two-way slabs. 0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 where F1 = tensile force in concrete As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement added fy = yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement Aps = vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone fp = tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete cover is specified. User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
57.6.17 TR-43 5.8.8 PT Minimum Reinforcement
Note: There are no minimum un-tensioned reinforcement requirements for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 506 for discussion.
For primarily unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 9.2.1.1 or 9.3.1.1 are applied as appropriate. For post-tensioned two-way slabs in column strips, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support regions as follows: As = 0.00075Act. Act = sum of cross sectional area of column strip and adjacent middle strips(generated from the same span segment) For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2. For design sections, this criterion is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2. The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked. The requirement that this reinforcement be concentrated between lines that are 1.5 times the slab depth is not checked. User defined reinforcement and bonded tendons that are at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross section considered. For post-tensioned two-way slabs, minimum reinforcement consisting of un-tensioned reinforcement and bonded tendons is provided as follows: As = 0.001Ac Ac = area of cross section For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2. For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2. The spacing of this reinforcement is limited to 500 mm. Bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as
510
RAM Concept
Chapter 57 equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan locations are ignored. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations. The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
57.6.18 TR-43 5.9 Shear Strength

The values of cp calculated in accordance with Eurocode 2, Clause 6.2 are modified by the appropriate safety factor p,fav or p,unfav as appropriate. The contribution of the vertical component of the tendon is not considered in one-way shear calculations.
RAM Concept
511
Chapter 57
512
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
58 Estimating deflections
Note: This chapter presents various methods of estimating deflections that vary in accuracy and complexity. Although we suggest you read the whole chapter, you will probably find Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots on page 520, and Using strip based deflection plots for slabs on page 521 the most useful for a quick and reasonably accurate estimation of long term deflections. The various methods are summarized in Summary of RAM Concepts deflection capabilities on page 526.
The calculation of concrete floor deflections is complicated. There are many issues to consider, and even with adequate consideration and calculation, any deflection prediction should only be considered an estimate. Deflections are affected by: member size (section properties) concrete modulus of elasticity reinforcement (unstressed and post-tensioning) applied loads load history cracking shrinkage creep dynamic effects (vibrations) Historically, designers have usually calculated deflections of concrete members using elastic methods with modifications made for some of the factors listed above. Most post-tensioned floors have been designed to minimize cracking and so elastic deflection calculation methods have generally been acceptable. The increasing usage of partial prestress methods has made deflection calculations more important for post-tensioned design. Reinforced floors usually undergo more extensive cracking than post-tensioned floors, which is one reason why they need more concrete section, and more consideration of deflection issues. More aggressive designs (that is, with shallower or thinner concrete sections) require a more rigorous analysis to determine that the deflection limit states are satisfactory. RAM Concept allows the use of simplistic methods in addition to more detailed and accurate methods for determining deflections. The aggressive designer must, however, have a thorough understanding of the methods and issues to ensure satisfactory deflections. In particular, if the designer pushes the floor design to the limit then problems may occur due to issues that are unforeseen or not considered by Concept. These include: cracking from overload during construction poor placement of reinforcement (less effective depth resulting in more cracking) vibrations (dynamic effects are not considered by Concept)
58.1 About RAM Concepts deflection calculations

RAM Concept analyses the concrete floor with a linear elastic analysis. All deflection contour plans are representative of the elastic analysis and the particular load combinations load factors. Concept does not implicitly consider cracking, shrinkage and creep in these contour plots. Concept calculates ECR (effective curvature ratio) values. You can investigate the effects of cracking, shrinkage and creep with these ECR values. Concept calculates ECR values based upon the user defined creep and shrinkage values, and section reinforcement (that calculated by Concept to comply with various design criteria) for each design strip cross section.
RAM Concept
511
Chapter 58 Load history is not considered, but it might affect the choice you make for the creep coefficient for the ECR calculations. Dynamic effects are not considered.
58.1.1 RAM Concepts deflection methodologies

RAM Concept can be used to investigate deflection in a number of ways. These include: Simplified deflection predictions using load factors and deflection contour plans (no consideration of cracking) [Method 1] Detailed deflection predictions using deflection contour plans and ECR, assuming all live load is permanent [Method 2] Detailed deflection predictions using deflection contour plans, ECR and consideration of transient nature of live load [Methods 3 and 4] Detailed deflection predictions using strip-based plots of long term deflection incorporating integration of the elastic deflection and ECR [Method 5].
58.1.2 About creep calculations

Creep can be defined as an increase in strain over time under a permanent stress. Creep is thus related to permanent load. Creep factors can be defined as the ratio of long term strain to instantaneous strain, due to permanent load. This is the definition used in RAM Concept. Permanent live loads have creep factors similar to that of dead loads. Live load is usually not 100% permanent, but either transient or partly transient. Thus, live load creep factors are often less than that for dead load. The live load creep factor can be calculated as: creepLL = creep*permLL% + (1 - permLL%) where creepLL is the live load creep factor creep is the design creep factor (basic creep factor modified with factors for age of loading, thickness, environment etc.) permLL% is the permanent live load as a percentage of the total live load The formula assumes that the total live load deflection is the sum of the permanent live load deflection multiplied by the design creep factor, plus the transient live load deflection. The following tables show calculation of live load creep factors.
Live Load 1 2 3 Permanent LL 25% 50% 100% Design creep factor 3 3 3 Calculate creep factor 3*0.25+(1-0.25) 3*0.5+(1-0.5) 3*1 Live load creep factor 1.5 2 3
Figure 58-1 Calculation of live load creep factor (with design creep factor of 3)
512
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Live Load 1 2 3
Permanent LL 25% 50% 100%
Design creep factor 3.35 3.35 3.35
Calculate creep factor 3.35*0.25+(1-0.25) 3.35*0.5+(1-0.5) 3.35*1
Live load creep factor 1.59 2.18 3.35
Figure 58-2 Calculation of live load creep factor (with design creep factor of 3.35)
58.2 About detailed deflection predictions using ECR

RAM Concept calculates the effective curvature ratio (ECR) as a means for the designer to investigate the effects of cracking, shrinkage and creep on deflection. This is useful for RC floors, and PT floors with service stresses exceeding the concrete rupture stress. Depending upon the method used, you can use ECR values as multipliers of short term deflection, or as load factors for a LT Uncracked Deflection LC. ECR is described as: ECR = Ce / Cg where Ce = the effective cross section curvature (considering the effect of creep, shrinkage and cracking) Cg = the gross section curvature For additional information, refer to Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio on page 349. It is generally quick to find an upper bound on deflection by multiplying the maximum ECR for the floor by the appropriate short term deflection. This is conservative, and you could calculate a more reasonable value by using weighted averages of ECR, or an average based upon integration. You can plot the ECR for different rule sets. About Weighted Averages of ECR Usually a cracked concrete member is uncracked near inflexion points, and other parts of the span. In addition, the cracking at midspan may be more significant than at the supports, or vice versa. Unless the span is uncracked, it is very unlikely that the ECR is the same throughout the span. A weighted ECR value considers the different amount of cracking throughout the span. In the following discussion, this weighted average is calculated considering only the ECR values at the left support, midspan, and the right support. The weighting of the ECR values is somewhat subjective. Since the energy in a beam is proportional to the integral of the moment squared and the deflection of the beam is approximately proportional to the energy in the beam, then a weighted average should consider an integral of the moment squared. Refer to Use of ECR on page 350 for further explanation. The following plots show integrals of the moment square for a fixed end span and a propped cantilever (fixed one end, simply supported the other). The objective of the plots is to calculate the ratios of the integrals of the moment squares for the different zones (left support, midspan, right support.).
RAM Concept
513
Chapter 58
Figure 58-3 A plot of the moment squares for a fixed end beam
0.00694(wl2)2 and 0.001736(wl2)2, which correspond to the plot.
Note: The maximum moments for a fixed end beam are -wl2/12 and wl2/24 respectively. The moment squares of these are
Integral
wL5 prefix
Itotal = I1 + I2 + I3
Ii / Itotal
I1 (left) I2 (mid) I3 (left)
0.000427 0.000535 0.000427
0.001389 0.001389 0.001389
0.308 0.385 0.308
Figure 58-4 Determination of weighted factors for fixed end member
514
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Figure 58-5 A plot of the moment squares for a propped cantilever (fixed one end, simply supported the other)
Note: The maximum moments for a propped cantilever are -wl2/8 and 0.0703wl2/12 respectively. The moment squares of
these are 0.01563(wl2)2 and 0.00494(wl2)2, which correspond to the plot.
Integral
wL5 prefix
Itotal = I1 + I2 + I3
Ii / Itotal
I1 (left) I2 (mid) I3 (left)
0.001147 0.001978 0
0.003125 0.003125 0.003125
0.367 0.633 0
Figure 58-6 Determination of weighted factors for propped cantilever
58.2.1 Summary of weighted averages

The following table summarizes the weighted average values based on the preceding discussion. You can use them to calculate a weighted average of ECR for a particular span. They are only a guide.
RAM Concept
515
Chapter 58
Span type Continuous both ends Simply supported one end Simply supported Cantilever
Left multiplier 0.3 0.37 0 1
Middle multiplier 0.4 0.63 1 0
Right multiplier 0.3 0 0 0
Figure 58-7 Factors for weighted ECR
58.3 Using RAM Concept to predict deflections

You can use RAM Concept to predict deflections using the five methods outlined below. Method 5 is generally considered the best. Their relative merits are discussed in Summary of RAM Concepts deflection capabilities on page 526
58.4 Simplified deflection predictions using contour plans

RAM Concept calculates deflections based upon defined load factors and uncracked sections. The deflections are plotted for various loadings and load combinations (default and user-defined). Using RAM Concepts contour plots is a simple and sometimes adequate way to predict deflections.
58.4.1 Method 1: Gross elastic deflections

Many designers are satisfied assessing deflections for post-tensioned floors using deflection contour plans. The contour plans show load combinations (some with increased load factors to consider creep) without any implicit consideration of cracking. This is generally done when gross-section stresses do not exceed approximately 6 f c (psi units) [ 0.5 f c (MPa units)].
Service LC
The Service LC Deflection Plan uses service loads (as defined in the Service Load Combination) and reports deflection contours based upon gross sections without any considerations of creep and cracking.
LT Uncracked Deflection LC
The LT Uncracked Deflection LC uses long term loads (as defined in the LT Uncracked Deflection Load Combination) and reports deflection contours based upon gross sections. This could be considered the old-fashioned method where the effect of creep and shrinkage is estimated by applying a load factor (of, say, 3) to dead loads and post-tensioning loads, and a different load factor (of, say, 1.5) to live loads. As discussed in About creep calculations on page 512, the choice of live load factor should consider the type of live load.
Note: The LT Uncracked Deflection LC load factors are not automatically linked to the creep factor parameter in the Calc
Options Dialog window.
Note: The Sustained Service LC (used only for ACI 318) is not recommended for deflection investigation as it is actually provided for the service design rule 18.4.2(a) that requires compression stresses for permanent live loads to be less than 0.45*f'c. Its load factors are similar to those used for the Service LC, not the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
516 RAM Concept
Chapter 58
58.5 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for permanent live loads
You can use RAM Concepts ECR calculations for a more accurate method of predicting deflections. This method uses a service (short term) deflection plan with a weighted ECR for critical spans.
58.5.1 Method 2: Modify the maximum deflection with a weighted ECR value
This method uses the following steps: Determine maximum deflection from the appropriate service deflection plan Multiply this deflection by the weighted ECR for the span
Note: Sometimes the maximum deflection does not occur in the span with the maximum ECR. You can be conservative and
use the maximum deflection and the floors maximum weighted ECR, or check different spans with the appropriate weighted ECR
Note: The LT Uncracked Deflection LC deflection plan should not be used to determine the value that is multiplied by the
weighted ECR. Example 58-1 Method 2 A continuous beam has been analyzed with a creep factor of 3.35 (defined in the calculation options dialog box). The service deflection is 3.14 mm. The ECR values vary from 3.35 at the left hand support, to 6.65 at midspan, to 5.72 at the right hand support.
Figure 58-8 Service deflection and ECR plot
The long term deflection can be estimated as: Weighted average of ECR = 0.3*3.35 + 0.4*6.65 + 0.3*5.72 = 5.38 Deflection = 3.14 *5.38 = 17 mm (0.67 inches)
RAM Concept
517
Chapter 58
58.6 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for transient live loads
The live load for most floors is not 100% permanent. That is, some or all of the live load is transient. For such floors, using ECR values for permanent loads is conservative. The creep factor for transient, or partly transient live loads, should be less than the creep factor for dead load. Refer to Figures 58-1 and 58-2 for a discussion of live load creep factors. Consideration of a lower creep value for live load makes the calculations more difficult, because it is not sufficient to look at ECR for the reduced live loads. This is because: the concrete may be uncracked due to reduced loads, but cracked for maximum loads. a uniform creep factor cannot be applied. Two additional deflection prediction methods are discussed here. These methods consider transient live loads. Both have merit but you should decide which is more appropriate.
58.6.1 Method 3: Modify the maximum deflection with a weighted ECR value that considers the transient nature of the live load
This method uses the following: For the LT Uncracked Deflection Load combination Adopt the value of ECR from Method 2 as the load factor for the dead loadings and balanced loading. Adopt a modified ECR value for live loading that reflects the proportion of live load that is transient. Example 58-2 Method 3 For the same continuous beam as in method 2: The load factor for the dead loadings and balanced loading is 5.38 The live load is considered to 50% permanent and the remainder is transient. From Figure 58-2, the live load creep factor is 2.18. The modified ECR for live loading is 5.38*2.18/3.35=3.50 The LT Uncracked Deflection LC has been changed to factors of 5.38 on all dead loading and balanced loading, and 3.50 for live load.
Figure 58-9 Long term deflection with load factors based upon ECR.
518
RAM Concept
Chapter 58 The estimated long term deflection is thus 13 mm (0.52 inches). As expected, this is less than for Example 58-1.
Note: It would be prudent to rename the load combination if you have changed the load factors to recognize cracking. Note: If significant compression steel is present in the cross-section, these methods will not be valid as the application and use of the 3.35 creep factor makes the assumption that this factor represents the ratio of cracked and creeped curvature to cracked curvature. This is approximately true in a singly reinforced section. However, in the case with compression steel the steel and concrete share the forces on the compression side, but only the concrete undergoes creep and thus this creep factor ratio is no longer accurate.
58.6.2 Method 4: Modify the maximum deflection with a cracking factor derived from the weighted ECR that considers the transient live load
This method uses the following procedure: Determine the effect of cracking for maximum live load by dividing the weighted ECR by the Calc option creep value to obtain a cracking factor. Apply this cracking factor to a new deflection LC, called, say, the Creep but no cracking Deflection LC Example 58-3 Method 4 For the same continuous beam as in method 2, the cracking factor is estimated as: Crack factor = ECR / (creep factor) Thus, crack factor = 5.38 / 3.35 = 1.61 The live load is considered to be 50% permanent and the remainder is transient. From Figure 58-2, the live load creep factor would be 2.18. The Creep but no cracking Deflection LC has been changed to factors of 3.35 on all dead loading and balanced load, and 2.18 for live load.
Figure 58-10 The Creep but no cracking deflection
The Creep but no cracking Deflection LC deflection is 8.2 mm. The estimated long term deflection is thus 8.2 * 1.61 = 13 mm (0.52 inches). As expected, this is the same as Example 58-2.
Note: If significant compression steel is present in the cross-section, these methods will not be valid as the application and use of the 3.35 creep factor makes the assumption that this factor represents the ratio of cracked and creeped curvature to cracked curvature. This is approximately true in a singly reinforced section. However, in the case with compression steel the steel and concrete share the forces on the compression side, but only the concrete undergoes creep and thus this creep factor ratio is no longer accurate.
RAM Concept
519
Chapter 58
58.7 Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots

RAM Concept can plot deflection along design strips for all loadings, load combinations and rule sets. These are available using the plot dialog and strip tab as shown in Figure 58-11. No default plans are provided with these plots, but you can create them.
Figure 58-11 Strip deflection setting
More significantly, RAM Concept provides section analysis deflection plots for rule sets. These are available using the plot dialog and section analysis tab as shown in Figure 58-12.
Note: Theses section analysis deflection plots are more powerful, as the ECR values are integrated along the strip and included for long-term deflection. Note: The plots show deflection along the strip spines. There is no averaging across the design strip cross section.
Figure 58-12 Section analysis deflection setting
520
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
58.7.1 Method 5: Strip based long-term deflection plot

This method uses the L.T. Deflection plan in the Service (or Maximum Service) Rule Set.
To view the long-term deflection plot
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
To view the long-term deflection plot for AS3600
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
Example 58-4 Method 5 For the same continuous beam as in method 2, the L.T. Deflection Plan shows the plot in Figure 58-13.
Figure 58-13 The (strip based) long-term deflection plot
The strip based long-term deflection is 17.4 mm (0.69 inches). This compares with Method 2 (17 mm) as neither method considered a reduced creep factor for live load.
58.8 Using strip based deflection plots for slabs

The calculation of deflections for two-way slabs is more complicated than that for a beam directly supported by columns. This is because there could be significantly different degrees of cracking in the two perpendicular directions. The same is true of one-way slabs supported by beams. There are generally two considerations: Deflection at midspan of middle strip relative to the ends Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip Sections Example 58-5 and Example 58-6 discuss the deflection analysis of the two-way slab shown in Figure 58-14.
Figure 58-14 Flat slab example with the analyzed panel shown in gray
RAM Concept
521
Chapter 58 The examples use the L.T. deflection plan in the Service Rule Set (see To view the long-term deflection plot on page 521 for instructions). Some files show this plan in the Maximum Service Rule Set (depending upon the code used).
Note: The elastic deflections were shown on the same plan by changing the plot.
Example 58-5 Flat slab - cracking in one strip Figure 58-15 shows the elastic deflection of the east-west column strips and north-south middle strip. The deflections are identical where the strips intersect.
Note: The plots may not show identical results if the middle strip spine does not intersect the midpoint of the column strips, or maximum deflection is not at midspan.
Figure 58-15 Flat slab Example 58-5: elastic deflections of selected column and middle strips
Figure 58-16 shows the long term deflection plots. The beam strip and middle strip are uncracked and so have identical deflections where they intersect. The column strip (east-west) has undergone cracking whereas the middle strip (north-south) has not. Hence the values where they intersect (point A) are not the same.
522
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Figure 58-16 Flat slab Example 58-5: long-term deflections of selected column and middle strips Relative deflection at midspan of middle strip
The relative middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows: = 22.6 - (11.5 + 2.9)/2 = 22.6 - 7.2 = 15.4 mm
Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
The absolute middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows: = 22.6 - (11.5 + 2.9)/2 +(23.1 + 2.9)/2 = 22.6 - 7.2 + 13.0 = 28.4 mm
Note: Clearly the 2.9 mm could be left out of the equations.

Example 58-6 Flat slab - cracking in all strips This example has an increased live load and a shallower edge beam than Example 58-5.
RAM Concept
523
Chapter 58 Figure 58-18 shows the elastic deflection of the east-west column strips and north-south middle strip. The deflections are identical where the strips intersect.
Note: The plots may not show identical results if the middle strip spine does not intersect the midpoint of the column strips, or maximum deflection is not at midspan.
The maximum elastic deflection is approximately 10% greater than that of Example 58-5.
Figure 58-17 Flat slab Example 58-6: elastic deflections of selected column and middle strips
Figure 58-18 shows the long term deflection plots. All strips have cracked and so have the deflections values are different where the strips intersect.
524
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Figure 58-18 Flat slab Example 58-6: long-term deflections of selected column and middle strips Relative deflection at midspan of middle strip
The relative middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows: =26.8 - (13.2 + 4.9)/2 = 26.8 - 9.1 = 17.7 mm
Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
The absolute middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows: = 26.8 - (13.2 + 4.9)/2 + (24.6 + 6.3)/2 = 26.8 - 9.1 + 15.5 = 33.2 mm
Note: A deflection analysis using north-south column strips and east-west middle strips could produce slightly different
results.
RAM Concept
525
Chapter 58
58.9 Summary of RAM Concepts deflection capabilities

There are a number of ways to use RAM Concept to estimate deflections. This chapter outlined five methods. The designer should decide which is the most appropriate., but method 5 is generally faster and more accurate.
Method 1 LT Uncracked Deflection LC Steps Estimate the long term load factors based on creep Multiply weighted ECR by deflections in Service LC deflection plan Pro (1) Simple Con (1) Does not consider cracking
ECR / Service Deflection
(1) Relatively simple
(1) Requires user to multiply deflections from contour plan by ECR. (2) Overestimates deflection if live load is not permanent (1) If design is changed then ECR may change which could require load factors to be changed. (2) Implies that the worst weighted ECR will be used everywhere. (3) Thus conservative for all but the critical span (1) Requires user to multiply long term deflections by cracking factor.
ECR / Long Term Deflection (load factors based on ECR)
Calculate load factors based on ECR from method 2 for dead load factors, and modify ECR for reduced live load factors
(1) Relatively simple. (2) Provides a contour plan with long term deflections.
ECR / Long Term Deflection (load factors based on creep factor)
Calculate load factors from method 1, and modify with cracking factor rationalized from method 2 None, other than to modify if strip is not directly supported.
(1) Doesn't require user to modify load factors if ECR changes
L.T. Deflection Plan (design strip based)
(1) Very simple (2) Doesnt require manual weighting of ECR
(1) Requires some manual adjustment for flat slabs to account for differential cracking.
ECR can be very useful for more accurately predicting deflections. The weighted ECR is always less than the maximum ECR value in the span. The designer should consider modifying the creep value for live load. It is generally conservative (and quick) to find an upper bound on deflection by multiplying the maximum ECR for the floor by the appropriate short term deflection.
58.9.1 Other Notes

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a cross section strain (top strain and bottom strain) that results in the cross section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment and axial force. 526 RAM Concept
Chapter 58 In the cracked section analyses, Concept considers concrete to have no tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have some tension strength, this assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete has been previously cracked by some other loading condition (this assumption is conservative). This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the cracked cross section stresses and the cracked moment of inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as Branson's formula does not consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the modulus of rupture. Concept considers any compression reinforcement in the calculation of ECR. If there is no cracking, then shrinkage is irrelevant as gross section properties are used. If there is cracking, then the reinforcement restrains the shrinkage, so the side with more reinforcement shrinks less than the side with less reinforcement. Assuming that the side with more reinforcement is the tension side, this accentuates the curvature. The calculations do not consider the effect of restrained shrinkage and the cracking it may cause. The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options window is for ECR calculations only. The creep coefficient as specified in the Calc Options window is used for ECR calculations only. This coefficient is the value of (total strain under constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a typical value is 3.35 (1.0 for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain).
Note: For more information, refer to Creep and Shrinkage Effects on page 347, Cracked Section Analyses on page 348,
Bransons Stress Ratio on page 348 and Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio on page 349.
58.10 Effect of user-defined reinforcement on deflection calculations

Design strips have properties that you can use to define a minimum amount of reinforcement: top and bottom reinforcement ratio. If it exceeds the design reinforcement, the user-defined reinforcement affects deflection calculations for cracked sections. User defined reinforcement has no effect on uncracked sections. See the design strip property description on page 85 of Section 21.5, and one of the following sections for more information.: page 397 of Chapter 52, ACI 318-02 Design, or page 435 of Chapter 54, AS 3600-2001 Design, or page 452 of Chapter 55, BS 8110: 1997 Design, or page 475 of Chapter 56, IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design Example 58-7 Deflection of RC beam with user defined reinforcement This example shows that with increased amount of reinforcement, the long term deflection is decreased.
Zero user-defined reinforcement
Figure 58-19 Design strip property for Figures 58-20 and 58-21.
Figure 58-20 Reinforcement and deflection: US units
RAM Concept
527
Chapter 58
Figure 58-21 Reinforcement and deflection: metric units Bottom user-defined reinforcement
Figure 58-22 Design strip property for Figures 58-23 and 58-26.
Figure 58-23 Increased (user-defined) bottom reinforcement and deflection: US units
Figure 58-24 Increased (user-defined) bottom reinforcement and deflection: metric units Top and bottom user-defined reinforcement
Figure 58-25 Design strip property for Figures 58-26 and 58-27
Figure 58-26 Increased (user-defined) top and bottom reinforcement and deflection: US units
Figure 58-27 Increased (user-defined) top and bottom reinforcement and deflection: metric units
528
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59 Punching Shear Design Notes

Ensuring that a slab will not fail in punching shear is one of the most important tasks in slab design. This chapter gives an overview of punching shear design and advice on using RAM Concepts punching shear design capabilities.
59.1 Punching shear overview

59.1.1 What is a punching shear failure?
Large support reactions (or any load) applied over a small area of a slab can cause the slab to fail near the perimeter of the support in shear-like failure. This punching shear is different from beam shear because the failure location is around a perimeter instead of along a line across the slab. Bending moment reactions applied along with the reaction force tend to lower the amount of load that can be supported without a punching failure. Local thickenings of a slab may increase the punching shear resistance, or may just move the punching shear failure location to a perimeter outside of the thickened area. Punching shear failures are usually brittle and sudden.
59.1.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching zone?

The transfer of forces in a punching zone is extremely complex, and the load path changes with increased cracking in the zone. There are no simple general models to predict the behavior of the punching zone. Three-dimensional truss behavior is probably the simplest model that can be applied to a punching zone, but even this model is too complex for design purposes.
59.1.3 How do the building codes handle punching shear?

All building codes approach punching shear by replacing the actual complicated punching behavior by relatively simple models that do not reflect the actual behavior of the punching zone. The only reason that these simple models lead to safe designs is that they have been calibrated with test results for the standard interior, edge and corner column cases. It should always be remembered that for situations other than the standard interior, edge and corner cases, the building code models might produce results that are illogical and possibly unsafe.
59.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear?

In RAM Concept, any slab-column connection can be designed for punching shear considerations. Concept performs the following steps in the analysis and design of a slab-column connection for punching shear:
59.2.1 Step 1: Determine the force envelopes to be checked

Concept uses envelopes of the reactions on the column to calculate the force envelopes for determining the critical case. The forces are enveloped about the punch check axes and the following cases are considered: Max Fz, Min Fz, Max Mr, Min Mr, Max Ms, Min Ms. The controlling envelope can be displayed by checking controlling criteria in the visible objects menu under Punching Checks on any plan that displays the Rule Set Design Layers or Design Status Layer.
Loads applied inside the critical sections
Any loads that are applied within the critical section shape could be excluded from the punching reaction since they do not contribute to the forces passing through the critical section. Concept calculates the punching reaction by summing the column above and below reactions with any point loads applied within the column shape. The column shape is used for this
RAM Concept
529
Chapter 59 calculation (instead of the critical section shape) as it guarantees a single set of punching reactions for each punching check. Line and area loads are not considered in this summation.
Punching Reactions for Lateral SE Loads
Loads of analysis type Lateral SE are appropriately included in the punching reactions. These loads are typically applied at the column/wall locations and normally consist of at least an applied out of plane concentrated force with a set of orthogonally applied moments. These forces typically represent the total joint forces applied from the supports to the slab for the given lateral loading. The correct punching reaction for this type of loading is simply the loading itself. Since Concept internally removes the column and wall supports in the Lateral SE loading analysis, the resulting punching reaction will be the summation of any loads applied within the column shape.
Contribution from the Vertical Component of Prestress
Some building codes allow the vertical component of prestress to be considered in the punching calculations. This is normally accomplished by adding the contribution of the vertical prestress to the capacity at the critical section, or by subtracting the vertical prestress component from the punching reaction. Concept can approximate this effect using the Calc Option Include Tendon Component in Punch Check Reaction. If this option is selected, after the tendons have been converted into equivalent concentrated balance loads Concept will modify (normally reduce) the punching reaction by any concentrated forces located within the column shape.
Note: Due to the fact that the tendons are idealized as concentrated balance forces as well as the fact that Concept uses the column shape instead of the critical section shape, this calculation is approximate. When using this option, it is extremely important to make sure that the Concept model tendon plan locations and profile shapes match the final design and field placement in order to obtain accurate results. As such, this option should be used with extreme caution.
59.2.2 Step 2: Determine the column critical sections
Concept investigates the slab geometry within the punching zone radius specified to find likely failure locations. Concepts critical section calculations correctly consider slab thicknesses, but make simplifying assumptions about the elevations of the slab regions. In certain situations this can result in improper location of critical sections. In areas of varying thickness, Concept's punching calculations assume that the thickenings protrude toward the load application. For example, in an elevated slab shear caps are assumed to be located below the slab, and in a mat/raft foundation plinths are assumed to be located above the mat/raft. If this is not the case, Concept may not locate the critical sections appropriately. See the example in Figure 59-1.
Analyzed correctly
Figure 59-1 Shortcoming of Concepts consideration of failure planes
Concept considers failure planes A and C, but should consider A and B
The location at some distance (usually a function of effective depth d) from the face of the column is considered to be a likely failure area. The location at some distance from a change in section thickness is also considered to be a likely failure area. If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Sector Voids, then any slab edge or hole found within the punching zone radius creates a sector or zone that offers no resistance to punching.
530
RAM Concept
Chapter 59 If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Failure Planes, then Concept investigates a number of critical sections including sections that connect to edges or openings (which provide no punching resistance) in attempts to find the most critical section. If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Ignore Edges, then the location of the critical sections is not affected by the holes, but any part of a section intersecting a hole will be considered to provide no punching resistance. It is recommended that Ignore Edges is only used if the Sector Voids and Failure Planes treatments do not produce desired critical sections.
Figure 59-2 Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to determine logical potentially critical sections. The method that Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find them. You should always visually inspect the locations of the critical sections that Concept has checked to see if they are appropriate (this is usually accomplished by a simple visual review of the Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan).
59.2.3 Step 3: Determine the code-model stresses on the column sections

Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the code model and calculation of punching demand.
59.2.4 Step 4: Determine the code-allowable stresses on the column sections

Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the calculation of punching capacity in accordance with the code model.
59.2.5 Step 5: Design stud shear reinforcement (SSR) if necessary

If any of the calculated column critical sections have a higher demand than capacity (and thus unreinforced stress ratio (USR) > 1.0), the user may choose to have Concept design SSR to strengthen the column, if possible. This is done by selecting the Design SSR if necessary option on the punch check properties. The SSR design is carried out on any sections with an USR > 1.0:
1 Check the maximum section stress against the allowable maximum stress - some codes use this provision to prevent highly
stressed sections from being reinforced. Please refer to the specific Code section for a detailed description of how each handles this check.
2 Install Initial Rails - some initial rails are installed with an arbitrary length. The initial rails are installed to satisfy the
maximum transverse spacing requirement of the active Code at the face of the column or support.
3 Extend the Rails - the rails are iteratively extended until all cutoff section stresses are within the Code-allowable stresses for unreinforced sections. A cutoff section is one at the Code specified offset distance outside the zone reinforced with SSR.
RAM Concept
531
Chapter 59
4 Check the calculated/designed stud spacing resulting from the current rail layout. If the spacing doesn't work, rails are added and the design is restarted at step 2.
Note: In punch checks containing slab edges, it is possible for Concept to extend the rails to a distance within the punch check radius, but points projected perpendicular to the slab edge would be outside the punch check radius. In this case Concept may not find the most critical cutoff sections. This can normally be rectified by increasing the punch check radius. The Engineer should inspect cutoff sections for appropriateness and adjust punch check properties as necessary.
59.2.6 Step 6: Summarize the Results
Finally, the results are summarized. Direct summarizing of SSR designs is not possible for a number of reasons (for example, two independent designs might have rails of different lengths, and therefore different depths which would dictate a different stud spacing). Therefore, if more than one design rule specifies punching shear design, the force envelopes from each design rule are combined into a single force envelope, then a summary design is carried out for this combined force envelope as outlined above. For each resulting critical section the calculated stress is divided by the code allowable stress to determine an unreinforced stress ratio (USR). If the column contains SSR reinforcement, Concept also reports a reinforced strength ratio (RSR), which is the punching demand over the strengthened capacity. If one or more of the potentially critical sections does not fit the standard conditions, then the column is tagged with a Nonstandard Section label in which case the engineer should review the applicability of the code design equations to the critical section labeled nonstandard.
59.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems
Typical values specified for an SSR System include number and arrangement of rails at the column or support, first stud spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and rail height in addition to the typical stud properties. Most of the properties required to specify an SSR System are available by plotting the SSR under visible objects > Punch Checks. The overall height of the rails is not reported by Concept but can be easily determined from the geometry. Generally, the height of the rails should be dimensioned to be as close as possible to the structural member's outer surfaces (while observing necessary cover and other Code requirements). Concept's strength calculations assume that each individual shear stud rail has a single effective depth, calculated as the thinnest effective depth of any slab area intersected by the shear stud rail. A punching design may have shear stud rails with multiple depths at a column or support.
59.4 Column connection type

RAM Concept calculates the allowable shear stress for each potentially critical section based on the applicable code equations. The allowable stresses are dependent upon the column connection type.
Note: Column connection type is not used in AS3600.

59.4.1 About Connection Type
Concept determines whether a column is interior, edge or corner based on the Connection Type property of the punching check. If the connection type property is set to Auto, then Concept assigns a connection type. Concept attempts to determine the connection type using the total angle of voids within a punching check radius. A void angle is defined as the angle between tangent lines to any void contained within the punching check, or the angle between the intersection points of slab edges and the punching check perimeter. Concept assigns the connections as follows: if the total angle of the voids is greater than 180 degrees: corner
532
RAM Concept
Chapter 59 if the total angle of the voids is less than 180, but greater than 90 degrees: edge otherwise: interior Due to the possible complex geometries, Concept will not always assign the appropriate connection type, so we advise you to use discretion when using the Auto setting. The connection type assigned by Concept can be viewed on a plan by checking the Column Condition box under Punching checks on any plan that displays Rule Set Design Layers, or the Design Status Layer. For connections that don't neatly fit into one of the categories, it is conservative to select an option that has more slab edges (i.e., if a connection appears to be somewhere between an edge and a corner, it is conservative to select corner for connection type).
59.5 ACI 318 Punching Shear Design

The ACI Punching Shear Model
The ACI punching shear analysis and design approach uses the ACI 318 provisions for the basis of the implementation. A critical section is defined at d/2 from the periphery of the area of application of force. These critical sections are arranged to minimize bod. For slab edges located within the punching check, additional critical sections will be generated by projecting perpendicular lines from the original section to the slab edges. Additionally, a set of sections will be generated for each basic slab shape (column, drop cap, etc.). To calculate the section stresses, an elastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and the critical section centroid is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a linearly varying stress distribution on the section. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered simultaneously. v for each section is calculated about the principal axes for that section. For column sections, the length/width ratios used to calculate v are unmodified. For cutoff sections, the length/width ratios are modified in accordance with ACI 421.1R99.
59.5.1 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section

This section discusses the calculation of punching resistance for an unreinforced section.
Critical section properties and equations for the calculation of actual stresses Notation
A = area of one side of the critical section, in2 bo = total length of the critical section, in. b1 = width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments are determined, in. b2 = width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1, in. d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, as outlined in ACI 318, in. Ixx = moment of inertia for bending about the x-axis for the entire critical section, in4 Ixx = moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4 Iyy = moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical section, in4
RAM Concept
533
Chapter 59 Iyy = moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4 Ixy = product of inertia for the entire critical section, in4 Ixy = product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4 L = length of one side of the critical section, in. Mox = joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the x-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in Moy = Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the y-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in Mux = Muy = vu = Vu = column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in shear stress located at some point on the critical section, ksi axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an upward column reaction being positive, kips
x = x-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in. xside = x-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in. xcol = x-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in. xpoint = x-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in. y = y-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in. yside = y-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in. ycol = y-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in. ypoint = y-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in. vx = fraction of unbalanced moment about the x-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318 vy = fraction of unbalanced moment about the y-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
= angle between a side of the critical section and the positive x-axis
Equations for calculation of shear stress
The equations presented are derived from basic mechanics of materials. A similar formulation can be found in the article Design of Stud Shear Reinforcement for Slabs by Ghali & Elgabry, ACI Structural Journal, May-June 1990. The values of vx and vy are always calculated about the principal axes of the critical section.
y po int y vx M ux Iyy + vy M uy I xy Vu + 2 bo d I xx I yy I xy x vy M uy Ixx + vx M ux I xy I xx I yy I xy
2
vu =
)[
a)
(x
po int
)[
534
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
b) M ux = M ox + Vu ( ycol y )
c) M uy = M oy Vu ( xcol x)
d) I xx =
sides =1
I
n
xx
e) I = yy
sides =1
I
n
yy
f) I = xy
sides =1
xy
3 g) I = dL (sin 2 ) + Ld ( y y ) 2 xx side 12
3 h) I = dL (cos 2 ) + Ld ( x x ) 2 yy side 12
3 i) I = dL (sin cos ) + Ld ( x x )( y y ) xy side side 12
j)
v = 1
1 2 b1 1+ 3 b2
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations for bending in an asymmetric section. If the moments are applied about one or more axis of symmetry, then Ixy = 0 and equation a) reduces to the more familiar:
vu = Vu vx M ux ( y po int y ) vy M uy ( x po int x) + bo d Ix Iy
ACI 318 equations for calculation of allowable shear stress
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from ACI-318 (11-33), (11-34), (11-35), or (11-36). Equation 11-33 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress. Equation 11-34 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio bo/d. This equation generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps. Equation 11-35 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones, 4 f c . Equation 11-36 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the following criterion:
RAM Concept
535
Chapter 59
1 The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 125 psi. The effective prestress is calculated by averaging the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-prestressed equations being used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below 125 psi in the cap. Additionally, if large restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations would correctly be used where the average precompression is below 125 psi. 2 fc shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi. If a concrete strength is input greater than 5000 psi, a maximum fc of 5000 psi
will be used in prestressed punching zones, but the allowable shear stress will still be calculated using equation 11-36.
3 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 11-33 through 11-35 are applied.
Note: These equation numbers are from the ACI 318-02 and ACI 318-05 codes.
Maximum Reinforced Section Stress
The reinforced shear stresses vu on the column sections are limited to a maximum of v n , where vn = 6 f c per ACI 318 11.12.3.2. This limit can be raised to vn = 8 f c by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 of a higher limit for vn. Sections with unreinforced stresses larger than these values cannot be successfully reinforced with SSR.
Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
Where SSR is used the punching resistance is calculated as follows: vn = vc + vs where vc = 2 f c or vc = 3 f c vs = Av fyvdaveRail / (bosd) (11-15) (ACI 421.1R-99 suggestion for higher vc) (11.12.3.1) (11-2)
Note: This equation has been extended from ACI equation 11-15 to approximately account for the situation where different
rails at a column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities. Av = area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement daveRail = the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 equation 3.12. This spacing is rounded down to the nearest 1/8 in. for US units or 5 mm for metric units. The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.5 d in accordance with ACI 318, but can be increased to 0.75 d when v u is less than or equal to 6 f c by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 for a higher limit for spacing. The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 appendix A.2 and ACI 318-02 11.12.3.3. Tangential spacing requirements are not checked at locations other than the face of the column/support.
536
RAM Concept
Chapter 59 The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of 2 f c per ACI 318-02 11.12.6.2(b). For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, v is adjusted in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 Appendix B.
59.6 AS 3600-2001 Punching Shear Design

The AS 3600 Punching Shear Model
The critical section for punching shear is assumed to be at dom/2 from the face of the loaded area or support, where dom represents the mean value of do, averaged around the critical perimeter. Based on the derivation of the code equations, dom is not meant to include the thickness of beams. Concept uses a heuristic method for determining the critical section thickness in regions of differing slab/beam thicknesses around the punching check. The critical section thicknesses can be inspected by turning them on using visible objects. The AS 3600 model for punching shear assumes that the shear force V* is distributed evenly around the critical section creating a uniform average shear stress of v = V*/udom. The unbalanced moment, Mv* is resisted by a 3-component mechanism:
1 Difference in yield moments at the front and back faces of the slab strips. 2 Eccentricity of the uniform shear stresses v from the centroid of the support or load. 3 Torsional moment on the side faces (torsion strips).
In the model, the torsional moment in #3 is resolved into a maximum shear stress and added to the uniform average shear stress v. The proportion of Mv* contributing to the torsional moment in #3 is actually variable, but is assumed to be constant to simplify the model. The value of Mv* is taken at the centre of the column/support.
Design Equations
The resulting shear capacity Vuo where Mv* is zero (as well as on slab strip faces) is calculated per AS 3600 clause 9.2.3a: V uo = ud om ( f cv + 0.3 cp ) Rearranged to view in terms of limiting stress, this equation becomes: V ------------ f + 0.3 cp ud om cv Where Mv* is not zero, the model results in the following design equation in AS 3600 clause 9.2.4a when there are no closed ties in the torsion strips and no spandrel beams: V uo V u = ------------------------------------------ uM v 1 + ----------------------- 8V ad om This expression sets an upper limit on the combination of Mv* and V* that can be resisted by the concrete. This equation can be rearranged to view in terms of limiting stresses: M v V - f + 0.3 --------------- + -----------cv cp 2 ud om 8ad om The code allows for increasing the punching capacity by placing a minimum quantity of closed ties in the torsion strips. Concept provides check box items to include calculation based upon the presence of these minimum closed ties in
RAM Concept
537
Chapter 59 accordance with AS 3600 clause 9.2.4b. Concept does not calculate the quantities of minimum ties required by this clause, which must be calculated and included by the Engineer. When the minimum quantity of closed ties is present in the torsion strips, the equation in clause 9.2.4b is used: 1.2V uo V u = --------------------------------------- uM v - 1.0 + -------------- 2V a 2 This expression can also be re-arranged to view in terms of limiting stresses: M v V ---------------------- + -------------------- f cv + 0.3 cp 2 2.4a d om 1.2ud om In scenarios where the shear to moment ratio is small and/or torsion strip width to effective depth is small, it is possible for the AS 3600 equations to calculate a lower strength with ties than without. Concept does not calculate shear capacity using the beam provisions of clause 9.2.4c and 9.2.4d.
Calculation of Maximum and Allowable Shear Stress and Corresponding Stress Ratio
The allowable shear stress calculated is: f cv + 0.3 cp , where

2 f cv = 0.17 1 + ----- f c 0.34 f c h
and cp is the average prestress in the punching check region. If cp results in tension it reduces the allowable stress. The reported allowable shear stresses are multiplied by = 0.7 . For each set of enveloped force reactions, a maximum unreinforced shear stress is calculated as follows:
1 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the slab strip face is calculated. 2 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending about the r-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user. 3 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending about the s-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
The absolute maximum shear stress from above is reported as the maximum unreinforced shear stress for that force envelope. The unreinforced stress ratio for each force envelope is the maximum unreinforced stress/allowable stress.
The SSR is used to resist direct shear stresses, but not torsion stresses. Where SSR is provided the punching resistance is calculated as follows:
1 The following operations are performed individually on each face: 2 A minimum number of rails are installed based upon a maximum transverse rail spacing of 2dom. The rails are installed
at the allowable maximum spacing. The length of each rail is a minimum of 2.5d.
3 The number of strips used for strength is calculated, up to a total of 4 (2 slab and 2 torsion strips). This is accomplished by
determining how many faces contain parts of the critical section. If there is no part of the critical section on a particular face, this face will not be used for strength design but will get rails placed, if possible, using the maximum transverse spacing requirement.
4 The perimeter length of the face is calculated both as a slab strip and a torsion strip. The length of the torsion strip is simply
the appropriate width of the critical section. The length of the slab strip is calculated as the length remaining after any torsion strip lengths have been deducted. If the torsion strip is broken up with holes/openings, it is possible that the slab strip length will be less than or equal to zero. In this event no design will be reported and the status will be reported as Failed.
538
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
5 The average effective depth of the slabs containing the existing rails is calculated. 6 The number of additional rails required is calculated and added, if necessary, and step 4 and 5 are repeated until a satis-
factory solution is found. The strength equations used in the calculation of SSR are as follows: For slab strips: V u = V uo ( 1 + K s ) where 1d u - -K s = -------A f -V uo vs vy s b and Avs = cross sectional area of one peripheral line of studs in the strip b = width of the strip fvy = yield stress of the studs in the strip d = average effective depth of the slab containing the shear stud rails u = perimeter length of the critical section For torsion strips: V uo V u = --------------------------------------------uM v 1 -------------- + ----------------------1 + K t 8V ad om where u 1d - - -K t = -------A f -V uo vt vy s a and a = width of the strip The maximum punching shear force which can be transferred to the column is taken as the smaller of these two values of Vu : where V Vu = 0.7
Maximum Reinforced Strength
The maximum strength of the reinforced slab/column connection is given as: Vumax = 0.2fcudom thus giving the following 2 conditions that must be satisfied: In the slab strip,
RAM Concept
539
Chapter 59 Vuo (1+Kt) < 0.2udom fc In the torsion strip, Vuo (1+Ks) < 0.2udom fc
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.35 d. This spacing is rounded down to the nearest 5 mm for metric units (or 1/8 inch for US units). The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d. In seismic applications, the Engineer can limit the typical spacing to a smaller value by specifying the typical stud spacing directly. A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided as follows: In the slab strip, 0.35bs A vs = --------------f vy In the torsion strip, 0.35as A vs = --------------f vy When SSR reinforcement is required, the minimum quantity of reinforcement is required on all strength strips.
59.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design

The EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Model
The punching shear analysis and design approach uses the EC2 provisions for the basis of the implementation. Some condition specific EC2 provisions were generalized using CEB-FIP 90. The implementation also implements suggestions in TR-43 regarding treatment of precompression in the shear strength equations. A control perimeter (u1) is defined at 2d from the periphery of area of application of force. This control perimeter is constructed so as to minimize its length. The corners of the perimeter are rounded. For slab edges located within the punching check, additional control perimeters will be generated by projecting perpendicular lines from the original control perimeter to the slab edges. Additionally, control perimeters will be generated for each basic slab shape, cap, etc. This could result in a number of basic control perimeters. To calculate the perimeter stresses, a plastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and the control perimeter is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a complete stress distribution on the perimeter. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered simultaneously. The k factor in EC2 equation 6.39 is applied to the unbalanced moment after the column forces are transformed to the plastic neutral axis of the control perimeter. EC2 clause 6.4.3(3) requires the calculation of a factor on the basic control perimeter. The same factor is then applied to all subsequent perimeter calculations. This simplification is made due to the complexity in the plastic section calculations. Concept does not make this assumption, but instead calculates and applies an appropriate factor for each perimeter calculated. This is in accordance with the approach for the cutoff section in CEB-FIP 90.
540
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59.7.1 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section

Control Perimeter Section Properties and Equations for the Calculation of Actual Stresses
Before any calculations are performed, the following manipulations are carried out on the reactions at the column center:
1 The column reactions are transformed to the control perimeter elastic centroid. 2 k factors are calculated using ratios about the column principal axes. 3 The reactions are rotated to the column principal axes and multiplied by appropriate k factors. 4 The reactions are rotated to the control perimeter elastic principal axes.
a + d
a + c
area a
b + d
b + c
area b
Figure 59-3 EN 1992-2004 control perimeter
The remainder of the calculations are carried out about the elastic principal axes of the control perimeter. Since a plastic stress distribution is used, if the punching area of the control perimeter on each side of the elastic neutral axes is not equal, the magnitudes must vary to maintain vertical equilibrium. This is handled by using multiplication factors representing the ratio of stress on one side of the principal axis over the stress on the other side. These factors are represented in the following form: Area a x = -------------Area b Area c y = -------------Area d The stresses in each quadrant (considering bending about each axis separately) can then be represented as: b = x a d = y c Equation 1 Equation 2
Two simultaneous equations can then be set up and solved for the state of stress around the critical section: Mox = unbalanced moment about the principal x-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k) Moy = unbalanced moment about the principal y-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k) d = effective depth at location in critical section
RAM Concept
area d
area c
541
Chapter 59 Substituting equations 1 and 2 and collecting terms,
These terms can be envisioned as plastic section moduli and each term has units of cubic length. Due to the interaction of in the above equations and the equations below, these values are only valid for the axes about which they are calculated. Equation 3 and 4 then become:
We can then use equations 1 and 2 to solve for b and d . The stress in any given quadrant of the critical section is then solved for as:
Calculation of Allowable Stress
The punching resistance for an unreinforced section is calculated as follows: v Rd ,c = C Rd ,c k ( 100 1 f ck ) + k 1 cp v min + k 1 cp where C Rd ,c = 0.18 --------c
1 -3
(6.47)
542
RAM Concept
Chapter 59 200 k = 1 + -------- 2.0d d 1 = ly + lz 0.02
d in mm relates to bonded tension steel in y and z directions (this value is input directly by the user as a
punching check property) fck = characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days k1 = 0.1 cp = ( cy + cz ) 2 average compression in the punching check region.
Where SSR is used the punching resistance is calculated as follows: v Rd ,cs = 0.75v Rd ,c + [ 1.5 ( d sw s r ) A sw f ywd ] u i d i (6.52)
dsw = average effective depth of slab containing shear reinforcement sr = radial spacing of shear reinforcement Asw = area of one peripheral line of shear reinforcement di = the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration fywd = effective design strength of the shear reinforcement = f yk s di = the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
Note: Because the head sizes of SSR are typically selected to ensure 100% development of the stem, the yield strength of the SSR reinforcement is used without adjustment for effective depth, d. If the Engineer needs to make reductions to the effective yield strength of the studs due to depth issues these modifications can be made by specifying a reduced yield stress in the SSR Systems on the Materials page.
Limitation of Punching Stress at the Perimeter of the Column or Loaded Area
At the perimeter of the column face the maximum shear stress is limited to: vEd = vRd,max where v Ed = V Ed ( u 0 d ) vRd,max = 0.5 v fcd = maximum beta from calculated control perimeters, u1 v = 0.6[1 - fck/250] fck in N/mm2 fcd = design value of concrete compressive strength u0 = length of column or loaded area periphery u0 is further limited as follows: (6.53)
RAM Concept
543
Chapter 59 Edge columns: u0 < 6d
Note: This simplification for edge columns was necessary due to difficulty in calculating the code equation for irregular situations. This provision is not in strict compliance with the code and should be reviewed by the Engineer as necessary.
Corner columns: u0 < 3d
The control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required is calculated using eq. 6.47. The outermost perimeter of shear reinforcement is placed not greater than 1.5d within this perimeter. The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.5 d. The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d. A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided in accordance with EC2 equation 9.11: A sw ,m in ( 0.08 f ck s r s t ) 1.5f yk where st is assumed to be < 2d (Final rail layout should be confirmed/adjusted to be in agreement with this assumption)
Note: Arrangement of SSR in accordance with Figure 6.22 is not considered. The Engineer should re-arrange the SSR as appropriate or add infill rails to satisfy the requirements of tangential spacing limits. Adjustment of control perimeters in accordance with Figure 6.22B is not considered. Note: EC2 has special provisions for column bases. These provisions are not implemented in Concept (the provisions above are applied to all punching checks). For slabs without prestress, this will always be conservative. For slabs with prestress, the Engineer will need to evaluate the validity of the results.
59.8 Sign convention

The equations presented require the use of the right-hand rule sign convention. While RAM Concept allows you to set your own sign conventions for reactions, it will internally apply the correct signs to the equations.
Figure 59-4 Positive moment reactions derived from the right-hand rule sign convention.
Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The reactions are the forces and moments that would need to be applied to the column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the columns were removed. This can be envisioned by removing the column from the structure and replacing it with the reported reactions applied at the column centroid. Refer to Figure 59-5 for clarification.
544
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Figure 59-5 Column reaction sign conventions
59.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties

Maximum Search Radius - This radius defines the circular area around a column that RAM Concept will investigate in its search for potential failure locations. A punching zone radius that is set to be a very large distance will always be conservative. However, having a very large radius has two detrimental effects. First, RAM Concept will need to review a larger area of the slab, and hence will take longer to check the column. More importantly, slab holes and slab edges that are far from the column will be considered in determining the potentially critical sections which may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate. Cover to CGS - This is the distance from the top of slab to the centroid elevation of the top reinforcement. In general this is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar (or the top of the bar under the top bar). This distance is subtracted from the slab thickness to determine the d distance. Angle - The plan angle about which punching reactions are enveloped. For some codes this also defines the angle about which the punching calculations are performed. In general, this should either be set to the angle of the column or (if the column is at a slab edge) the angle of the slab edge. The Align Punch Check Axis with Rectangular Columns checkbox can be used to automatically set the angle. Edge/Hole Treatment - See Figure 59-2. Connection Type - Corner, edge, interior or auto. Refer to About Connection Type on page 532.
RAM Concept
545
Chapter 59
59.10 Miscellaneous information

Effect of precompression
For post-tensioned slabs, the allowable calculated by Concept may be smaller than that calculated by 2D frame programs, because Concept uses an effective prestress value that is an average for the punching zone. This punching zone average will reflect a lower effective prestress in column capitals and other thickened areas.
59.11 Some final words of advice

RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical sections; for unusual geometries Concept may not check the appropriate section and/or may check inappropriate sections that give higher than appropriate stress ratios. The engineer must review Concepts selection of potentially critical sections, and must use engineering judgment to decide if Concepts selections are appropriate and if the application of the code model is appropriate.
546
RAM Concept

Ram Concept

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Ram Concept

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

RAM Concept

Release 3.1 October 2008

2 Looking at the Workspace

4 Using Plans and Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5 Drawing and Editing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

8 Choosing Sign Convention

9 Specifying Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

11 Specifying Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

13 Using a CAD Drawing

13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing

14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

15 Data Transfer from STAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

16 Defining the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

17 Generating the Mesh

18 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

20 Creating Pattern Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

21 Defining Design Strips

22 Defining Design Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

23 Defining Punching Shear Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

24 Drawing Reinforcement Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

25 Defining Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

26 Using Live Load Reduction

26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7

27 Calculating Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

28 Viewing the Results

29 Plotting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

30 Using the Auditor

31 Using the Estimate

33 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

34 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

34.2 About the export of geometry

35 Using Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

36 General Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

37 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

38 Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

39 Simple RC Slab Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

40 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

41 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43

43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

44 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

45 Mat Foundation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

46 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

47.1 Review of plate behavior

47.2 47.3 47.4 47.5 47.6 47.7 47.8 47.9

48 Section Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

49 Live Load Reduction Notes

50 Reinforcement Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

51 ACI 318-99 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

52 ACI 318-02 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

53 ACI 318-05 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

54 AS 3600-2001 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

54.2 54.3 54.4 54.5 54.6

55 BS 8110: 1997 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

56 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

57 BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design

58 Estimating deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

59 Punching Shear Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

1.2 RAM Concept options

1.3 Strip Wizard

Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.

1.1 Comparing with traditional methods